Disclaimer

All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.

Internal use only

 Thank you
you for
for buying Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi-
cles further.
Before you rst drive o , read this operator's
manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operat- introduce changes in the following areas:
ing lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions R Design
and warning notices in this operator's manual. R Equipment
Disregarding them may lead to damage to the
R Technical features
vehicle or injury to people.
The standard equipment and product description The following documents are integral parts of the
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol- vehicle:
lowing factors: R Digital operator's manual
R Model R Printed operator's manual
R Order R Service booklet
R National version R Equipment-dependent supplements
R Availability R Supplementary documents

Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times.
cases, from that shown in the descriptions and Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or
illustrations. passed on in the event of sale or rental.
The illustrations in this operator's manual show a
le -hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the layout of car parts and control elements
di ers accordingly. 2975841402Z102

2975841402Z102
2 Contents

Mercedes me App ......................................... 26

Symbols .......................................................... 5 Operating safety ............................................ 26 Opening and closing ...................................... 83
Declarations of conformity and notes on Key ............................................................... 83
driving in di erent countries .......................... 28 Doors ............................................................ 87
At a glance ...................................................... 6 Load compartment ........................................ 97
Cockpit (central display) .................................. 6 Diagnostics connection ................................. 36
Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ 37 Side windows .............................................. 102
Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen) .......................... 8 Sliding sunroof ............................................ 106
Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ......... 10 Vehicle registration ....................................... 37
Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 38 Anti-the protection .................................... 110
Indicator and warning lamps (with driver
camera) ........................................................ 12 Information on the REACH regulation ............. 38
Overhead control panel ................................. 14 Notes for persons with electronic medical Seats and stowing
stowing ....................................... 113
Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 16 aids .............................................................. 38 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 113
Control settings in the rear passenger Implied warranty ........................................... 39 Seats .......................................................... 113
compartment ................................................ 18 QR code for rescue card ............................... 39 Steering wheel ............................................ 126
Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 20 Data storage ................................................. 39 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 127
Copyright ...................................................... 43 Memory function ......................................... 129
Stowage areas ............................................ 130
Digital
Digit al Owner's Manual ................................. 22 Cup holders ................................................ 145
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 22 Occupant safety
safety ............................................ 44
Restraint system ........................................... 44 Sockets ....................................................... 148
Seat belts ..................................................... 46 Wireless charging of the mobile phone
General notes
General notes ............................................... 23 Airbags ......................................................... 51 and connection with the exterior aerial ........ 149
Protection of the environment ....................... 23 Fitting and removing the oor mats ............. 152
PRE-SAFE® system ........................................ 58
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .................... 23 Automatic measures a er an accident ........... 59
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ 23 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... 60 Light and sight ............................................ 154
Owner's Manual ............................................ 25 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 82 Exterior lighting ........................................... 154
Touch-sensitive controls ................................ 25 Interior lighting ............................................ 166
 Contents 3

Windscreen wipers and windscreen Cleaning and care ....................................... 388

washer system ............................................ 168 Driver
Driver display
display .............................................. 313
Mirrors ........................................................ 171 Notes on the driver's display ....................... 313
Area permeable to radio waves on the Notes on the range ..................................... 313 Breakdo
Br eakdown
wn assistance
assistance ................................. 395
windscreen ................................................. 174 Operating the driver's display ...................... 314 Emergency .................................................. 395
Infrared-re ective windscreen function ........ 174 Driver display menus ................................... 315 Flat tyre ...................................................... 397
Head-up display .......................................... 315 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 402
Overview of status displays on the driver's Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 405
Climate control
Climate control ........................................... 175 display ........................................................ 319 Electrical fuses ............................................ 411
Overview of climate control systems ............ 175
Operating the climate control system .......... 178
MBUX multimedia systemsystem ............................ 321 Wheels and tyrestyres ......................................... 413
Overview and operation ............................... 321 Notes on noise or unusual handling char-
Driving and parking
Driving parking ..................................... 190 System settings .......................................... 343 acteristics ................................................... 413
Driving ........................................................ 190 Drive system settings .................................. 348 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
DYNAMIC SELECT button ............................ 203 Navigation and tra c .................................. 348 tyres ........................................................... 413
Transmission ............................................... 205 Telephone ................................................... 359 Notes on snow chains ................................. 413
Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 207 Mercedes me app ....................................... 362 Activating or deactivating snow chain
Charging the high-voltage battery ................ 207 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... 371 mode .......................................................... 414
Parking ....................................................... 225 Radio, media & TV ....................................... 378 Tyre pressure .............................................. 414
Driving and driving safety systems ............... 232 Sound settings ............................................ 384 Wheel change ............................................. 418
Trailer hitch ................................................. 305 Emergency spare wheel ............................... 427
Bicycle rack function ................................... 310
Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 312 Maintenance
Maintenance and care
care ................................. 385
ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 385 Tec
echnical
hnical data
data ............................................. 429
Engine compartment ................................... 386 Notes on technical data .............................. 429
Topping up the windscreen washer system .. 388
4 Contents

On-board electronics ................................... 429

Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... 431
Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and
engine number overview .............................. 432
Operating uids ........................................... 434
Vehicle data ................................................ 436
Trailer hitch ................................................. 438

Displayy messages
Displa messages and war warning/indicat
ning/indicator or
lamps .......................................................... 441
lamps
Display messages ........................................ 441
Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 506

Indexx .......................................................... 522

Inde
 Symbols 5

In this Owner's Manual, you will nd the following # Observe notes on material damage.
symbols:
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or
& DAN
ANGER
GER Danger due to not observing the further information that could be helpful to
warning notices you.
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- # Instruction
ards that may endanger your health or life, or (/ page) Further information on a topic
the health or life of others.
# Observe the warning notices.
Display Display in the central display
4 Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe environ- 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be
mental notes selected in the multimedia system
* Indicates a cause
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behaviour or envi-
ronmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure

to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks
which may lead to your vehicle being dam-
aged.
6 At a glance – Cockpit (central display)

Le -hand-drive vehicles (with central display)

 At a glance – Cockpit (central display) 7

1 ± Increases recuperation → 199 a Switches sound on/o → 321

q Reduces recuperation → 199 ø Adjusts the volume → 321
2 Combination switch → 156 9 £ Hazard warning light system → 157
3 Driver's display → 314 A Start/stop button → 194
4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 205 B Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 330
5 Central display → 321 C Adjusts the steering wheel → 126
6 Glove compartment → 133 D ! Electric parking brake → 229
7 Stowage compartment → 133 E Diagnostics connection → 36
8 Switch panel for: F Light switch → 154
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button → 204 G Control panel:
c Active Parking Assist → 292 Driver's display → 314
û Calls up the EQ menu → 224 I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and → 248
variable limiter
\ Quick vehicle access
ú Fingerprint sensor → 321
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system → 321
on/o
8 At a glance – Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen)

Le -hand-drive vehicles (with MBUX hyperscreen)

 At a glance – Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen) 9

1 ± Increases recuperation → 199 \ Quick vehicle access

q Reduces recuperation → 199 ú Fingerprint sensor → 321
2 Combination switch → 156 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system → 321
3 DIRECT SELECT lever → 205 on/o
a Switches sound on/o → 321
4 MBUX hyperscreen with:
→ ø Adjusts the volume → 321
Driver's display 313
→ A Start/stop button → 194
Central display 321
→ B Adjusts the steering wheel → 126
Front passenger display 321
5 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → C ! Electric parking brake → 229
330
6 Glove compartment → D Diagnostics connection → 36
133
7 Stowage compartment → E Light switch → 154
133
8 £ Hazard warning light system → 157 F Control panel:
9 Switch panel for: Driver's display → 314
→ I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and → 248
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button 204
variable limiter
c Active Parking Assist → 292
û Calls up the EQ menu → 224
10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

Standard driver display

 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11

1 #! Turn signal lights → 156 C å ESP® OFF → 517

2 Ú System error → 509 ÷ ESP® → 517
3 ï Trailer hitch → 510 D _ Reduced power → 509
4 ä Suspension (red) → 515 E õ Operational readiness of drive system → 194
ä Suspension (yellow) → 515 F ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 513
5 # Electrical fault → 509 G ! Electric parking brake (red) → 513
6 Ù Power steering (red) → 510 H J Brakes (red) → 513
Ù Power steering (yellow) → 510 J Brakes (yellow) → 513
Ù Rear axle steering (red) → 510 I R Range
Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) → 510 J Charge level display
7 6 Restraint system → 508 K K High beam → 156
8 ü Seat belt → 508 L Low beam → 154
9 L Distance warning → 515 T Standing lights → 154
A ! ABS → 517 L R Rear fog light → 155
B h Tyre pressure monitoring system → 520 M H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 519
12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)

Driver display with driver camera

 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) 13

1 Ú System error → 509 E R Range

2 #! Turn signal lights → 156 F Charge level display
3 ü Seat belt → 508 G R Rear fog light → 155
4 L Distance warning → 515 H K High beam → 156
5 6 Restraint system → 508 L Low beam → 154
6 _ Reduced power → 509 T Standing lights → 154
7 h Tyre pressure monitoring system → 520 I H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 519
8 å ESP® OFF → 517 J ï Trailer hitch → 510
÷ ESP® → 517 K # Electrical fault → 509
9 ! ABS → 517 L Ù Power steering (red) → 510
A õ Operational readiness of drive system → 194 Ù Power steering (yellow) → 510
B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 513 Ù Rear axle steering (red) → 510
C ! Electric parking brake (red) → 513 Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) → 510
D J Brakes (red) → 513 M ä Suspension (red) → 515
J Brakes (yellow) → 513 ä Suspension (yellow) → 515
14 At a glance – Overhead control panel
 At a glance – Overhead control panel 15

1 Sun visors 8 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun- → 106

2 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o → roof
166
3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun- → 106
3 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o → 166
roof roller sunblind
4 ; me button → 362 →
9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 55
5 | Switches automatic interior lighting con- → 166 →
A Inside rearview mirror 172
trol on/o
B Switches the le -hand reading lamp on/o → 166
6 G SOS button → 362
7 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/o → 166
16 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment
 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 17

1 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 88 9 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 171

2 Opens the door → 87 A W Opens/closes the right side window → 102
3 Adjusts the seats electrically → 113 B W Opens/closes the rear right side window → 102
4 w Switches the seat heating on/o → 124 C S Child safety lock for the rear side win- → 81
5 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o → dows
125
D W Opens/closes the rear le side window → 102
6 w Adjusts the front passenger seat from → 116
the driver's seat E W Opens/closes the le side window → 102
7 V Operates the memory function → 130 F Adjusts the head restraints → 119
8 q Opens/closes the tailgate → 97 G Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 122
18 At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment
 At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 19

1 Climate control rear operating unit → 177 5 w Switches the rear seat heating on/o → 124
2 Electronics compartment in the centre console 6 Adjusts the rear seats electrically → 117
3 V Selects the front passenger seat → 116 7 Stowage compartment in the rear armrest
4 s Switches the rear seat ventilation on/o → 125 8 Charging a mobile phone wirelessly → 151
20 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 21

1 B-pillar with: 8 Fire extinguisher → 396

QR code for accessing the rescue card → 39 9 Socket ap with:
2 Safety vests → 395 information label on tyre pressure → 415
3 ; me button → 362 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 39
G SOS button → 362 A Towing away → 405
4 Towing away → 405 B TIREFIT kit → 399
5 Flat tyre → 397 C Warning triangle → 395
6 To operate the high-voltage disconnect device → 191 D First-aid kit (so sided) → 396
7 £ Hazard warning light system → 157
22 Digital Owner's Manual

Calling up the
the Digital
Digital Owner's Manual You can search for keywords using the search Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual,
eld Search, in order to nd quick answers to such as warning notes, can be expanded and col-
Multimedia system: questions about the operation of the vehicle. lapsed.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Info
Additional methods
methods of calling up thethe Digital
Digital Own-
5 Owner's Manual
er's Manual:
5 Open Digital Owner's Manual
Driv
Dr iver's
er's display:
display: call up brief information as dis-
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func- play messages in the driver's display
tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi-
MBUX Voice
Voice Assistant
Assistant:: call up via the voice con-
media system.
trol system
# Select one of the following menu items in the
Global search:
search: call up search results for contents
Digital Owner's Manual:
R Quick start: nd the rst steps towards
of the Digital Owner's Manual in the home screen
adjusting your seat (driver's side). For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is
R Tips: nd information that prepares you for
deactivated while driving.
certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle
functions.
R Messages: receive additional information
about the messages in the driver's display. 1 Menu
R Language: select the language for the Digital 2 Search
Owner's Manual. 3 Back
4 Contents section
 General notes 23

Protection
Protection of the
the envir
environment
onment accordance with the European Union (EU) End-of-
Per
ersonal
sonal driving
driving sty
style:
le: Life Vehicles Directive.
# Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental A network of vehicle take-back points and dis-
damage due to operating conditions and distance from the vehicle in front. mantlers has been established for you to return
personal driving style # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
braking. points free of charge. This makes an important
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally
# Drive in a style which saves energy. contribution to closing the recycling circle and
responsible manner to help protect the envi-
Observe the ECO display for an economi- conserving resources.
ronment. Please observe the following recom-
mendations on operating conditions and per- cal driving style. For further information about the recycling and
sonal driving style. disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental conditions, please visit the national
Operating
Oper ating conditions:
pollution caused by irresponsible disposal Mercedes-Benz website for your country.
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor-
of the high-voltage battery
rect.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight A high-voltage battery contains materials Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz GenuinePar
GenuineParts
ts
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no lon- which are harmful to the environment.
ger need them). # Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries + ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
at a quali ed specialist workshop. damage caused by not using recycled
# Monitor the energy consumption.
reconditioned components
# Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- Mercedes‑Benz AG o ers recycled recondi-
ute to environmental protection. Tak
ake-bac
e-backk of end-of-life
end-of-life vehicles
vehicles tioned components and parts with the same
quality as new parts. The same entitlement
# Always have maintenance work carried EU countries
countries only: from the implied warranty is valid as for new
out at a quali ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life parts.
vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
24 General notes

# Recycled reconditioned components and # Do not carry out repairs or welding. Certain parts are only o cially approved for
parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. installation or modi cation if they comply with
# Have accessory parts retro tted at a legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine-
quali ed specialist workshop. Parts meet the approval requirements. The use of
* NOTE Impairment of the operating e - non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's
ciency of the restraint systems from You could jeopardise the operating safety of your general operating permit.
installing accessory parts or from repairs vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well
or welding as accessories relevant to safety which have not This is the case in the following situations:
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant R The vehicle type is di erent from that for
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. which the vehicle's general operating permit
control units and sensors for the restraint sys- Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of was granted.
tems, may be installed in the following areas equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and acces-
of your vehicle: R Other road users could be endangered.
sory parts that have been speci cally approved
R Doors R The noise level gets worse.
for your vehicle model.
R Door pillars Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver- Always specify the vehicle identi cation number
R Door sills sion parts and accessory parts that have been (VIN) (/ page 432) when ordering Mercedes-
speci cally approved for your vehicle model for Benz GenuineParts.
R Seats
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
R Cockpit ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
R Instrument cluster unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
R Centre console therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of
such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if
R Lateral roof frame
they have been o cially approved or independ-
# Do not install accessory parts such as ently approved by a testing centre.
audio systems in these areas.
 General notes 25

Owner's Manual Should you have any questions concerning equip- In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive
ment and operation, please consult a Mercedes- haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibra-
This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's Benz Service Centre. tion, or the surface structure changes on the
Manual in the vehicle describe the following mod- touch-sensitive user interface surface, for exam-
els and the standard and special equipment for The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supple-
mentary documents and Service Booklet are ple.
your vehicle:
important documents and should be kept in the You receive haptic feedback in the following situa-
R The models and the standard and special
vehicle. tions, for example:
equipment available at the time of this Own-
R When pressing a button on the user interface
er's Manual going to press.
surface
R The models and the standard and special Touc
ouch-sensitiv
h-sensitivee controls
controls
R When scrolling in a list or table
equipment only available in certain countries. In addition to conventional switches and buttons,
R The models and the standard and special your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive con- R When reaching a new area on the user inter-
equipment, which will only be available at a trols. face surface, e.g. a pop-up window
later date. These are located in the following areas of your When handling touch-sensitive user interface sur-
Note that your vehicle may not be tted with all vehicle: faces, observe the following points to avoid prob-
features described. This is also the case for sys- R Roof and door control panel lems operating:
tems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment R Climate control R Do not a x stickers or similar objects on the
on your vehicle may di er from that in the R Steering wheel
surfaces
descriptions and illustrations. R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture
R MBUX multimedia system
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle and wet conditions
contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at The controls have touch-sensitive user interface R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt
the time of delivery. surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by pressing
or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger func- Some touch-sensitive control elements have a
tions, for example. symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When
26 General notes

operating, make sure to press on the symbol of # Complete the order. repairs carried out at a quali ed special-
the control element. The on-demand feature is activated when ist workshop.
operating the vehicle.
Mercedes me App
Mercedes Speeding up activation
activation & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
Notes about the
the on-demand feature
feature # Switch the vehicle o and lock it. to improper modi cations to electronic
# A er about 2 minutes, unlock the vehicle and
components
You can also activate various functions (on-
switch on the vehicle. Modi cations to electronic components, their
demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me
The on-demand feature has been activated. so ware or wiring can impair their functional-
a er purchasing your vehicle.
For some features, a noti cation also appears ity and/or the functionality of other networked
Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz in the vehicle's multimedia system. components or safety-relevant systems.
Service Centre.
If the activation was not successful, repeat the This can endanger the vehicle's operating
process. safety.
Activ
ctivating
ating on-demand featur
featuree using Mercedes
Mercedes me # You must not tamper with wiring, elec-

Req
equir
uirements:
ements: tronic components, or their so ware.
R The vehicle has GPS reception.
Operating
Oper ating safety
safety # Always have work on electrical and elec-

R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user tronic devices carried out at a quali ed
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
account. specialist workshop.
tions or system failure
Order
Or dering
ing and activating
activating on-demand feature
feature In order to avoid malfunctions or system fail- If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen-
# Add the desired on-demand feature for the ures: eral operating permit is rendered invalid.
vehicle to the shopping basket in the # Always have the speci ed service/main- Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
Mercedes me Store. tenance work as well as any necessary "Technical data".
 General notes 27

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv- or In the event of an accident or impact to the
ing too fast and due to impacts to the # If driving safety is impaired while con- vehicle underbody, components of the high-
vehicle underbody and suspension com- tinuing your journey, pull over and stop voltage electrical system may be damaged
ponents the vehicle immediately, while paying although the damage is not visible.
In the following situations, in particular, there attention to road and tra c conditions, # Never make any modi cations to the

is a risk of damage to the vehicle: and contact a quali ed specialist work- high-voltage on-board electrical system.
shop. # Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its
R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high kerb or an unpaved road high-voltage on-board electrical system
Electric vehicles have an electric motor. The elec- components have been modi ed or dam-
R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obsta- tric motor's energy supply is provided by the high- aged.
cle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole voltage on-board electrical system.
# Never touch damaged components of
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death and re due to the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
suspension components tem.
modi ed and/or damaged components of
In situations such as these, damage to the the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- # A er an accident, do not touch any com-
body, underbody, suspension components, tem ponents of the high-voltage on-board
wheels or tyres and high-voltage battery com- electrical system.
ponents may not be visible. Components dam- The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical
# A er an accident, have the vehicle trans-
aged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in system is under high voltage. If you modify
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage ported away.
the case of an accident, may no longer absorb
the resulting force as intended. on-board electrical system or touch damaged # Have the components of the high-voltage
component parts, you may be electrocuted. In on-board electrical system checked at a
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired
addition, modi ed and/or damaged compo- quali ed specialist workshop and
immediately at a quali ed specialist nents may cause a re. replaced if necessary.
workshop.
28 General notes

The components of the high-voltage on-board Declarations of confor

Declarations conformity
mity and notes
notes on driving
driving the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU.
electrical system are marked with yellow warning in di erent
erent countr
countries
ies The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity
stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board are available at the following web address:
electrical system are orange. Electromagne
Electr omagnetic
tic compatibility
compatibility
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/
components has been checked and certi ed index.html
according to the currently valid version of Regula-
tion UN R10.

vehicle installed
installed radio
radio components
components
Only for
Only for EU and EFTA
EFTA countries
countries and countries
countries that
that
recognise the
the EU manufactur
manufacturer's
er's declaration
declaration of
confor
conformity:
mity:
Vehicles with an electric motor generate signi -
cantly less vehicle noise emissions than vehicles
with combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle
may not be heard by other road users in certain
situations. This can occur, for example, when you The following information applies to all wireless
are parking and your vehicle cannot be seen by components of the vehicle and of the information
other road users. This requires you to adopt a par- systems and communication devices integrated in
ticularly anticipatory driving style, as it is neces- the vehicle:
sary to allow for the possibility that other road You can obtain further information from a
users may behave unpredictably. The manufacturers of the wireless components Mercedes-Benz service centre.
ensure that all wireless components installed in
 General notes 29

For the
the Unit
United
ed Kingdom only: These systems are not protected against harmful
interference and must not cause interference in
properly approved systems.
For Jamaica only:
The following information applies to all wireless All wireless vehicle components have received
components of the vehicle and of the information type approval from the SMA.
systems and communication devices integrated in For Niger
Nigeria
ia only:
the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the wireless components
installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all
wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
ply with the Radio Regulations 2017 directive. The
full texts of the declarations of conformity are
available at the following web address:
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/
baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ For Brazil
Brazil only:
index.html
Connection and use of the radio communications
equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the
Nigerian Communications Commission
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
30 General notes

For Russia
Russia only: The manufacturers of the wireless components The manufacturers of the wireless components
installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the
wireless components installed in the vehicle com- wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
ply with the technical regulations for two-way ply with the technical regulations for two-way
radios. You can obtain further information from a radios. You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre. Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For Ukraine
Ukraine only: Wir
ireless
eless applications in the
the vehicle
vehicle
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com-
munication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of
the following automotive radio applications.

Wir
ireless
eless applications in the
the vehicle
vehicle

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Tr
Transmission
ansmission output/magnetic
output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic eld
strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119
kHz
 General notes 31

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Transmission output/magnetic
Transmission output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
Near- eld communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
Pressure Monitoring
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Opener
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Opener
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz
EIRP peak
76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
32 General notes

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Tr
Transmission
ansmission output/magnetic
output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
Carsharing Module NFC: NFC:
13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
Bluetooth®:
Bluetooth ooth®:
Bluetooth
Bluet
2402–2480 MHz ≤ +4 dBm (class 2)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Bluetooth®:
Bluetooth Bluetooth®:
Bluetooth
2400–2483.5 MHz -0.8 dBm
WLAN
WL AN 2.4 GHZ: WLAN
WL AN 2.4 GHZ:
2400–2483.5 MHz 14.5 dBm
WLAN
WL AN 5 GHz: WLAN
WL AN 5 GHz:
5150–5250 MHz 20.5 dBm
5725–5875 MHz 13.3 dBm
Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) E-GSM (900 MHz) +33 dBm
GSM (1800 MHz) +30 dBm
UMTS (Band I, III, VIII) +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB)
LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28) +23 dBm (±2 dB)
 General notes 33

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Transmission output/magnetic
Transmission output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
3)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
B19, B21, B28, Class 3)
LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only

Information
Infor mation about the
the speci c absorp
absorption
tion rate
rate The values were determined and tested in accord- regarding the indication of the speci c absorption
For France only: ance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.

Infor
Information
mation about the
the speci c absorp
absorption
tion rate
rate

Vehicle component
component (designation in SAR value
value in W/kg Applicable limit value
value
accordance
accor dance with
with EU DoC)
Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg
Hermes 2.1 < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
34 General notes

Vehicle component
component (designation in SAR value
value in W/kg Applicable limit value
value
accordance
accor dance with
with EU DoC)
Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7 MID, NTG7 HIGH, NTG7 PREMIUM, 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS, NTG7 MID LFT2,
NTG7 HIGH LFT2, NTG7 PREMIUM LFT2,
NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS LFT2
RAMSES 1.0 and 1.1 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG6N MID/ENTRY 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg
NTG6N HIGH

Import
Importer
er infor
information
mation for
for wireless
wireless components
components S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova For Turke
Turkeyy only:
mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2 Import
Importer
er
For Moldova
Moldova only:
Importer
Importer Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler
A.Ş. Genel Merkez
 General notes 35

Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1 Jack C) A 639 580 02 18
34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul Copy and translation of the original declaration of D) A 639 580 03 18
For Ukraine
Ukraine only: conformity: E) A 910 580 00 00
Import
Importer
er EC declaration
declaration of confor
conformity
mity F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00
PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL” 1. Year of manufacture: 2020
Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2 The undersigned, representing Complies with all relevant provisions
01004 Kyiv Manufacturer: Directive No. 2006/42/EC
Ukraine BRANO a.s. b)
For the
the Unit
United
ed Kingdom only: 747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, Description and purpose of use:
Import
Importer
er The Czech Republic Car jack is intended solely for li ing of the con-
Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited ID No.: 64-387-5933 crete car, in accordance with the instruction label
on the car jack.
Delaware Drive, Tongwell VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933
3.
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA herewith declares under our sole responsibility
that the product: References of harmonized and other standards or
England speci cations
Import
Importer
er of Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz spare
spare parts
par ts 2. a)
ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL
Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics Name:
8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL
Delaware Drive, Tongwell Jack 8451.15, MBN 10435,
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA Type, Number: Technical documentation of the product is stored
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 at the premise of the manufacturer. The person
England
B) A 240 580 00 18 responsible for assembling the technical docu-
36 General notes

mentation of the product: Head of the Technical MB part no.: A 000 583 5101 & WARNING Risk of accident due to con-
Department Brano a.s. complies with the following relevant regulations: necting devices to the diagnostics con-
4. 2004/108/EC nection
Hradec nad Moravicí Applied harmonised standards, in particular: If you connect devices to the diagnostics con-
Place DIN EN 55014-1: 2012 nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle
5. systems and operating safety may be
DIN EN 55014-2: 2016 impaired.
05.10.2020 Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH # For safety reasons, we recommend that
Date Address: O enbacher Landstr. 8, 63456 Hanau you only use and connect products
Engineer Petr Petr Authorised representative: IMS dept. approved by your Mercedes-Benz service
[Signature] centre.
Date: October 2019
Director of division ZZ Signature: IMS-AE, IMS-AE-L & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
TIREFIT kit
Diagnostics
Diagnos tics connection Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
Copy and translation of the original declaration of The diagnostics connection is a technical inter- pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
conformity: face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the This jeopardises the operating and road safety
EC declaration
declaration of confor
conformity
mity context of repair and maintenance work or for of the vehicle.
In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC reading out vehicle data at a specialist workshop. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
Diagnostic devices should therefore only be con- so that they cannot get into the driver's
We hereby declare that the product nected at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Product designation: Daimler electric air pump footwell.
Model designation: 0867, DT/UW 200056
 General notes 37

# Always t the oor mats securely and as Quali ed specialis

specialistt work
workshop
shop
prescribed in order to ensure that there A quali ed specialist workshop has the necessary
is always su cient room for the pedals. special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not carry out any necessary work on your vehicle.
place oor mats on top of one another. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works.
Always have the following work carried out on
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devi- your vehicle at a quali ed specialist workshop:
ces connected to the diagnostics connec- R Safety-relevant works
tion R Service and maintenance work
Using devices at the diagnostics connection R Repair work
drains the battery.
R Modi cations as well as installations and con-
# Check the charge level of the battery.
versions
# If the charge level is low, charge the bat-
R Work on electronic components
tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis-
tance. Connecting and using another device with the Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
diagnostics connection can have the following service centre.
e ects:
R Malfunctions in the vehicle system
Vehicle regis
registr
tration
ation
R Permanent damage to vehicle components
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions carry out technical inspections on certain vehi-
for this matter. cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is
improved as a result of the inspection.
38 General notes

Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle Observe the following information in particular individual components of this vehicle in quantities
checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration when driving your vehicle: of over 0.1 percent by weight.
data. R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehi- Further information can be obtained at the follow-
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been cle-speci c supplements and further supple- ing addresses:
registered in your name in the following cases: mentary documents R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
R if your vehicle was not purchased at an author- R technical data for the vehicle R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/
ised specialist dealer. R tra c rules and regulations
R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
Mercedes-Benz service centre. Notes for
for persons
persons with
with electronic
electronic medical aids
vehicles
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
developing vehicle systems, completely rule out
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Infor
Information
mation on the
the REACH
REACH regulation
regulation the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.
EU and EFTA
EFTA countries
countries only:
any change in address or vehicle ownership. You
the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. In addition, there are components installed in the
can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre,
1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup- vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of
for example.
ply information about substances of very high the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par
concern (SVHCs). with permanent magnets. These elds can be
Correct
Corr ect use of the
the vehicle
vehicle found, for example, in the area around the multi-
Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowl- media and sound system or also in the area of the
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others edge to prevent these SVHCs from being used seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.
could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave and to enable customers to safely handle these
warning stickers in position. substances. There are SVHCs known to For this reason, the following can occur in isolated
Mercedes‑Benz AG, according to supplier informa- cases, depending on the aids used:
tion and internal product information, found in R Medical aids malfunctioning
 General notes 39

R Adverse health e ects R transmission aerials QR code for

for rescue
rescue card
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac- R multimedia system and sound system QR codes are attached in the socket ap and on
turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of
device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there quali ed specialist workshop. an accident, rescue services can use the QR code
is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil- to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for
ity of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes- your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the
Benz AG recommends using only few electrical Implied
Implied warr
warranty
anty most important information about your vehicle in
vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric
from the components. * NOTE
NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from lines.
When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a violation of these operating instructions. Further information can be obtained at https://
distance of at least an arm's length between the Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code
medical aid and the following components: of these operating instructions.
R the power supply equipment
This damage is not covered either by the Dataa stor
Dat storage
age
This includes charging stations in the form of a Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
Data processing
Data processing in the
the vehicle
vehicle
wallbox or a public charging point, for exam- New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
ple. # Follow the instructions in these operat- Electronic control
Electronic control units
R vehicle components carrying live voltage ing instructions on proper operation of Electronic control units are tted in your vehicle.
This includes the charging cable and the your vehicle as well as on possible vehi- Control units process data which, for example,
charging control box, for example. cle damage. they receive from vehicle sensors, generate them-
selves or exchange between themselves. Some
Only have repairs and maintenance work in the control units are required for the safe operation of
area of the following components carried out at a your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such
quali ed specialist workshop: as driver assistance systems, while others enable
R vehicle components carrying live voltage convenience or infotainment functions.
40 General notes

The following provides you with general informa- for example, your driving behaviour, your location, R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain
tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. your route or your use patterns. sensor or distance sensor
Additional information regarding exactly which
data in your vehicle are collected, saved and Legal
Leg al req
requir
uirements
ements reg
regar
arding
ding the
the disclosure
disclosure of Generally, the use of these data is temporary;
transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, data they will not be stored beyond the period of oper-
can be found in the information directly related to If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in ation and will only be processed within the vehicle
the functional characteristics in question in their individual cases, legally obliged to provide govern- itself. Control units o en contain data memories
respective operating instructions. This information mental entities, upon request and to the extent for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits
is also available online and, depending on the required, data stored by the manufacturer. For the temporary or permanent documentation of
vehicle equipment, digitally. example, this may be the case during the investi- technical information about the vehicle's operat-
gation of a criminal o ence. ing state, component loads, maintenance require-
Per
ersonal
sonal data Governmental entities are themselves, in individ- ments and technical events or faults.
Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle ual cases and within the applicable legal frame- Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
identi cation number. Depending on the country, work, authorised to read out data from the vehi- ing data are stored:
this vehicle identi cation number can be used by, cle. In the case of an accident, information that R operating status of system components, such
for example, governmental authorities to deter- can help with an investigation can, therefore, be
mine the identity of the owner. There are other as ll levels, tyre pressure or battery status
taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle R malfunctions or faults in important system
to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence Operational
Oper ational data
data in the
the vehicle
vehicle components, such as lights or brakes
plate number. This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, R system reactions in special driving situations,
Therefore, data generated or processed by control which have been processed by control units. such as airbag deployment or the intervention
units may be attributable to a person or, under This includes the following data, for example: of stability control systems
certain conditions, become attributable to a per- R vehicle status information such as the speed, R information on events leading to vehicle dam-
son. Depending on which vehicle data are availa- longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, age
ble, it may be possible to make inferences about, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened
seat belts display
 General notes 41

R charge level of the high-voltage battery, esti- identi cation number to the manufacturer. Fur- Depending on the vehicle equipment, this
mated range thermore, the manufacturer is subject to product includes the following data, for example:
liability. For this reason the manufacturer also R multimedia data, such as music, lms or pho-
In certain cases, it may be required to store data uses operational data from the vehicle, for exam-
that would have otherwise been used only tempo- tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
ple, for recalls. These data can also be used to system
rarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has examine the customer's warranty and guarantee
detected a malfunction, for example. claims.
R address book data for use in connection with
If you use services, such as repair services and an integrated hands-free system or an integra-
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a ted navigation system
maintenance work, stored operational data as service outlet or at your request as part of repair
well as the vehicle identi cation number can be or maintenance work.
R entered navigation destinations
read out and used. They can be read out by R data about the use of Internet services
service network employees, such as workshops Convenience and infot
Convenience infotainment
ainment functions
and manufacturers or third parties, such as break- You can store convenience settings and individual These data for convenience and infotainment
down services. The same is true in the case of settings in the vehicle and change or reset them functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or
warranty claims and quality assurance measures. at any time. they may be located on a device which you have
In general, the readout is performed via the legally Depending on the vehicle equipment, this connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone,
prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in includes the following settings, for example: USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered
the vehicle. The operational data that are read out these data yourself, you can delete them at any
R seat and steering wheel positions
document technical states of the vehicle or of time.
R suspension and climate control settings
individual components and assist in the diagnosis This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third
of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obliga- R individual settings, such as interior lighting parties only at your request. This applies, in par-
tions and quality improvement. To that end, these ticular, when you use online services in accord-
Depending on the selected equipment, you can ance with the settings that you have selected.
data, in particular information about component
import data into vehicle infotainment functions
loads, technical events, malfunctions and other
yourself.
faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle
42 General notes

Smar tphone integr

Smartphone integration
ation (e.g. Android
Android Aut
Autoo or Online services
ser vices used, other than for the provision of services, is
Apple CarPlay®) done so exclusively on the basis of legal permis-
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can Wirireless
eless netw
networ
orkk connection sion. This is the case, for example, for a legally
connect your smartphone or another mobile end If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, prescribed emergency call system, a contractual
device to the vehicle. You can then control them it enables data to be exchanged between your agreement or when consent has been given.
by means of the control elements integrated in vehicle and additional systems. The wireless net-
work connection is made possible by the vehicle's You can have services and functions, some of
the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart- which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva-
phone can be output via the multimedia system. own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end
device that you have brought into the vehicle, for ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and
Certain information is simultaneously transferred services, such as an emergency call system.
to your smartphone. Depending on the type and example, a smartphone. Online functions can be
integration, this includes position data, day/night used via the wireless network connection. This Third party
Third par ty services
ser vices
mode and other general vehicle statuses. For includes online services and applications/apps If you use online services from other providers
more information please consult the Owner's provided to you by the manufacturer or by other (third parties), these services are the responsibil-
Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. providers. ity of the provider in question and subject to that
Manufacturer's
Manufactur er's services
ser vices provider's data protection conditions and terms of
This integration allows the use of selected smart-
Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no
phone apps, such as navigation or music player
individual functions are described by the manu- in uence on the content exchanged.
apps. There is no further interaction between the
smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle facturer in a suitable place, for example, in the For this reason, when services are provided by
data is not directly accessible. The type of addi- Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's web- third parties, please ask the service provider in
tional data processing is determined by the pro- site, where the relevant data protection informa- question for information about the type, extent
vider of the app being used. Which settings you tion is also given. Personal data may be used for and purpose of the collection and use of personal
can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and the provision of online services. Data are data.
the operating system of your smartphone. exchanged via a secure connection, such as the
manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any per-
sonal data which are collected, processed and
 General notes 43

Dataa protection
Dat protection rights
rights
Depending on your country or the equipment and
range of functions of your vehicle as well as the
services you use and the services on o er, you
are entitled to di erent data protection rights.
Further information on data protection and your
data protection rights can either be found on the
manufacturer's website or you will receive this
information as part of the various services and
service o ers. There you will also nd the contact
information for the manufacturer and its data pro-
tection o cers.
At a workshop, for example, with the support of a
specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have
data read out which is stored only locally in the
vehicle.

Copyr
Cop yright
ight
Information on licences for free and open-source
so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the
data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and
with updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
44 Occupant safety

Res
estr
traint
aint system
system In order for the restraint system to provide the Limitations of the
Limitations the prot
protection
ection provided
provided by
by the
the
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- res
estr
traint
aint system
system
Protection
Protection provided
provided by
by the
the res
restr
traint
aint system
system pant must observe the following information:
The restraint system includes the following com- R Fasten seat belts correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
ponents: R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their
modi cations to the restraint system
R Seat belt system back against the seat backrest. Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected
R Airbags R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi- as intended if alterations are made to the
R Child restraint system ble. restraint system.
# Never alter the parts of the restraint sys-
R Child seat securing systems R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an
additional restraint system suitable for tem.
The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle Mercedes-Benz vehicles. # Never tamper with the wiring or any elec-
occupants from coming into contact with parts of tronic component parts or their so -
the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In However, no system available today can com- ware.
the event of an accident, the restraint system can pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu- accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom-
pants are subjected. airbag generally do not protect against objects modate a person with disabilities, contact a quali-
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro- penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also ed specialist workshop.
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the not possible to completely rule out the risk of
injury caused by the airbag deploying. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving
detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners aids which have been approved for your vehicle by
and/or airbags supplement the protection o ered Mercedes-Benz.
by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners
and/or airbags are not deployed in every acci-
dent.
 Occupant safety 45

Res
estr
traint
aint system
system functionality You may su er an electric shock if you touch components of the restraint system must take
the damaged components of the high-voltage place in good time at the start of the collision.
When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per-
formed, during which the 6 restraint system on-board electrical system. Factors which can only be seen and measured
warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a # Have the restraint system checked and a er a collision has occurred cannot play a deci-
few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The com- repaired immediately at a quali ed spe- sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro-
ponents of the restraint system are then func- cialist workshop. vide an indication of airbag deployment.
tional. # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without
immediately. an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only
Malfunctioning res
restr
traint
aint system
system parts which are relatively easily deformed are
a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys- Function of the
the res
restr
traint
aint system
system in an accident not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed
tem if: even though the vehicle su ers only minor defor-
How the restraint system works depends on the mation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitu-
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does
severity of the impact detected and the apparent dinal members are hit, this may result in su -
not light up when the vehicle is switched on type of accident: ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration.
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
R Frontal impact
up continuously or repeatedly during a journey Depending on the detected deployment situation,
R Rear impact the components of the restraint system can be
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to R Side impact activated or deployed independently of each
restraint system malfunctions other:
R Rollover
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear
Components in the restraint system may be The activation thresholds for the components of
activated unintentionally or not deploy as plan- impact, side impact, rollover
the restraint system are determined based on the R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal
ned in an accident. In the event of an acci- evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari-
dent, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- impact
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tem may not be deactivated as intended. tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the R Knee airbag: frontal impact
46 Occupant safety

R Side airbag: side impact Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
R Centre airbag: side impact, rollover vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop incorrectly fastened seat belt
a er an accident. Take this into account, particu-
R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal larly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an air- If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
impact bag deployed. perform its intended protective function.
R Belt airbag: frontal impact If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air- In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small can also cause injuries, for example, in the
amount of powder may also be released: event of an accident or when braking or
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed changing direction suddenly.
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing.
# Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is R In general, the powder released is not hazard-
occupied, make sure, both before and during the ous to health but may cause short-term have their seat belts fastened correctly
journey, that the status of the front passenger air- breathing di culties to persons su ering from and are sitting properly.
bag is correct (/ page 55). asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Always observe the instructions about the correct
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle driver's seat position and adjusting the seat
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag immediately or open the window in order to (/ page 113).
components prevent breathing di culties.
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide
The airbag parts are hot a er an airbag has the intended level of protection, each vehicle
been deployed. occupant must observe the following information:
Seat belts
# Do not touch the airbag parts.
Protection provided
Protection provided by
by the
the seat belt R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t
# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a tightly and snugly across the body.
quali ed specialist workshop as soon as Always fasten your seat belt correctly before R The seat belt must be routed across the
possible. starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
centre of the shoulder and as low down across
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
the hips as possible.
 Occupant safety 47

R The shoulder section of the seat belt should If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to routed across the centre of your shoul-
not touch your neck nor be routed under your observe the instructions and safety notes on der.
arm or behind your back. "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 61).
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter Always observe the instructions for loading the & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
coat. vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads additional restraint systems are not used
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible (/ page 130). for persons with a smaller stature
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul-
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
der section of the belt. Never route the lap Limitations of the
Limitations the prot
protection
ection provided
provided by
by the
the seat seat belt correctly without a suitable addi-
belt across your abdomen. belt tional restraint system.
Pregnant women must also take particular # Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall
care with this. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
in a suitable restraint system.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- incorrect seat position
ted, abrasive or fragile objects. The seat belt will not o er the intended level & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
R Only one person should use each seat belt at of protection if you have not moved the seat damaged or modi ed seat belts
any one time. backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt Seat belts cannot provide protection in the fol-
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the lowing situations:
seat belt is also being used by one of the vehi- and injure yourself.
R the seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
cle's occupants. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
R the seat belt buckle is damaged or
are ever placed between a person and the # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
seat. in an almost vertical position and that extremely dirty
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
48 Occupant safety

R modi cations have been made to the seat & WARNING Risk of injury or death from Infor
Information
mation on the
the belt airbag in the
the rear
rear seat belt
belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners The BELTBAG identi cation indicates that a rear
belt retractor seat belt is equipped with a belt airbag.
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in been deployed are no longer operational and When activated, the belt airbag increases the pro-
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. are unable to perform their intended protec- tected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage.
Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or tive function.
# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
seat belt tensioners immediately use of a non-approved child restraint sys-
Modi ed seat belt tensioners could acciden- tem
tally trigger or fail to function as intended. replaced at a quali ed specialist work-
shop. In an accident, the belt airbag may damage a
# Never modify the seat belt system, for
non-approved child restraint system or a child
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the restraint system which has not been approved
seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop for use in conjunction with the belt airbag.
and seat belt retractor. a er an accident.
# Make sure that the seat belts are undam-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use a child restraint sys-
aged, not worn and clean. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
tem which has been tested and approved by
# Always have the seat belts checked seat belt Mercedes-Benz in combination with a belt air-
immediately a er an accident at a quali- If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it bag.
ed specialist workshop. may become trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. Information on child restraint systems
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat # Always ensure that an unused seat belt (/ page 63).
belts which have been approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz. is fully retracted.
 Occupant safety 49

Fast
astening
ening and adjusting
adjusting seat belts % A seat belt can only provide the best level of
protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 46).
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can-
not be pulled out any further. * NOTE Deployment of components of the
Vehicles with
with illuminated
illuminated design seat belt buckles:
buckles: restraint system when the front passenger
the illuminated seat belt buckle makes fastening seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is
your seat belt easier in certain situations, for buckled
example, when light conditions are poor.
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied
% The illumination on the seat belt buckle does and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is
not indicate that the seat belt buckle is func- engaged in the seat belt buckle, components
tioning correctly. of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa-
rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat
belt tensioner.
# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat
belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corre- % Observe the notes on stowage areas
sponding seat. (/ page 130).
Information on tting a child restraint system
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat belt height:
height: press and hold and on children travelling in the vehicle can
the belt guide release and slide seat belt out- be found in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-
let 3 into the desired position. tion (/ page 65).
# To engag
engagee the
the seat belt outlet:
outlet: let go of the
belt guide release and ensure that seat belt
outlet 3 locks into position.
50 Occupant safety

Seat belt adjustment

adjustment function Seat belt war
warning
ning function for
for the
the driv
driver
er and front
front When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat
passenger
passenger belt status display informs you for a certain
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: a er a front seat belt
with PRE-SAFE amount of time which rear seat belt is not fas-
has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjust- The ü seat belt warning lamp in the driver's tened.
ment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants
hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. must wear their seat belts correctly. The status of the rear seat belt can be recognised
by the colour of the symbol in the driver's display:
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt In addition, a warning tone may sound.
R Grey: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is
adjustment function using the multimedia system As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten
(/ page 50). not engaged in the seat belt buckle of the cor-
their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. responding seat.
R Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating seat belt adjustment
adjustment via Function of the
the rear
rear seat belt status
status display is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the corre-
the multimedia system
system sponding seat.
The rear seat belt status display is only available
Multimedia system: for certain countries. Every vehicle occupant must always fasten
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle their seat belt correctly before starting a jour-
5 Occupant protection ney.
# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment. R Red: a vehicle occupant in the rear passenger
compartment has released the seat belt
buckle using the release button and may not
Releasing seat belts be properly secured.
# Press the release button in the seat belt If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the rear, the rear seat belt status display appears
seat belt tongue. again.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
 Occupant safety 51

Airbags R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat

occupants
Over
Overvie
view
w of airbags
R Centre airbag: head and ribcage
R Window airbag: head
Information
Infor mation on child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems on the
the front
front
passenger
passeng er seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-
driver airbag is enabled
Rear seats: If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
4 Window airbag the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
7 Side airbag driver airbag during an accident.
Driver's/front passenger seat: NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
The installation location of an airbag is identi ed
1 Knee airbag system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow sym-
2 Driver's airbag AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
bol M indicates the installation location for cer-
3 Front passenger airbag CHILD can occur.
tain airbags.
4 Window airbag When enabled, an airbag can provide additional When tting a child restraint system to the front
5 Side airbag protection for the respective vehicle occupant. passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor-
6 Centre airbag1 Potential protection provided by each airbag: mation (/ page 79). Also, always observe the
1) R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child
Only for certain countries. restraint systems on the front passenger seat
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head (/ page 78).
and ribcage
52 Occupant safety

Information
Infor mation on automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag Depending on the detected accident situation, the Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the
shutoo
shut window airbag on the front passenger side may following:
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of
R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is women must take particular care to ensure
occupied, make sure, both before and during the Information
Infor mation on the
the centre
centre airbag that the lap belt never lies across the
journey, that the status of the front passenger air- When triggered, the centre airbag deploys abdomen.
bag is correct (/ page 55). between the front seats. Do not stow any objects R Adopt the correct seat position and keep
in the deployment area of the centre airbag. as far away as possible from the airbags.
* NOTE
NOTE Deployment of components of the R Observe the following information.
restraint system when the front passenger Protection
Protection provided
provided by
by the
the airbags
seat is unoccupied # Always make sure that there are no
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag objects between the airbag and vehicle
In an accident, the components of the may supplement the protection o ered by a cor- occupant.
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on rectly fastened seat belt.
the front passenger side if: To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment
R There are heavy objects on the front & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe
passenger seat. an incorrect seat position the following information in particular:
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat If you deviate from the correct seat position, R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the airbag cannot perform its intended protec- correctly; the driver's seat and front
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. tive function. passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
When doing so, always observe the informa-
# Only one person should use each seat tion on the correct driver's seat position
belt at any one time. (/ page 113).
 Occupant safety 53

R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, Limitations
Limit ations of the
the prot
protection
ection provided
provided by
by airbags
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
deployed. R There are no accessories, such as mobile navi- & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca-
R Always lean against the seat backrest when gation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, tions to the cover of an airbag
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x
or against the door or side window. You may on the cockpit, on the door, on the side win- objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the dow or on the side trim. no longer function correctly.
airbags. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
R The occupants must always keep their feet on straps or retaining straps must be routed or do not a x objects to it.
the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, attached to the vehicle within the deployment
for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the area of an airbag. Always comply with the The installation location of an airbag is identi ed
deployment area of the airbag. accessory manufacturer's installation instruc- by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 51).
R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may
the additional notes (/ page 61). places for installation.
prevent the airbag from functioning correctly.
R Always stow and secure objects correctly. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store & WARNING Risk of injury from objects in
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air- such objects in a suitable place. the deployment area of an airbag
bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occu-
pant must always make sure of the following in Objects in the deployment area of an airbag
particular: can hinder or prevent the correct deployment
of the airbag.
R There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled
manner and may even cause additional inju-
R There are no objects between the seat, door
ries to the vehicle occupants by deploying.
and door pillar (B-pillar).
54 Occupant safety

This may be the case in particular if the airbag & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- Status of the
the front
front passenger
passenger front
front airbag
is integrated into the seat. tioning sensors in the door Function of the
the automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag
# Always stow and secure objects cor-
The function of the airbags can be impaired shutoo
shut
rectly. due to modi cations or incorrect work per- The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is
# Before commencing your journey, make formed on the doors or door trim, or if the able to detect whether the front passenger seat is
sure that no objects are stowed in the doors are damaged. occupied by a person or a child restraint system.
deployment area of an airbag. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled
accordingly.
doors.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle # Always have work on the doors or door
(/ page 130). When triggered, the centre airbag & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
deploys between the front seats (/ page 51). trim carried out at a quali ed specialist objects under the co-driver seat
workshop.
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to interfere with the function of the automatic
the use of unsuitable seat covers & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
airbag # Do not store any objects under the co-
Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protec- driver seat.
In addition, the operation of the automatic tion. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,
front passenger airbag shuto could be # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed make sure that no objects are trapped
restricted. specialist workshop in order to have the under the co-driver seat.
# You should only use seat covers that deployed airbag replaced.
have been approved for the correspond- When tting a child restraint system to the front
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor-
mation (/ page 79). Also, always observe the
notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child
 Occupant safety 55

restraint systems on the front passenger seat A person in the front passenger seat could Always observe the notes on the function of the
(/ page 78). then, for example, come into contact with the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
A person on the front passenger seat must vehicle interior, especially if the person is sit- (/ page 55).
observe the following information: ting too close to the cockpit. Function of the
the PASSEN
PASSENGER
GER AIR BAG
BAG indicator
indicator
R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 46). If the front passenger seat is occupied, always lamps
lamps
R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their ensure that:
back against the seat backrest. R the classi cation of the person in the front
R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi- passenger seat is correct and the front
ble. passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
accordance with the person in the front
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be dis- passenger seat.
abled by mistake, for example, in the following sit- R the front passenger seat has been moved
uations: as far back as possible.
R The front passenger transfers their weight by R the person is seated correctly.
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
R The front passenger sits in such a way that
# Both before and during the journey,
their weight is raised from the seat surface. ensure that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a
disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classi-
cation of the person or child restraint system on
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the front passenger seat takes place a er the Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of
is lit. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
status of the front passenger airbag.
56 Occupant safety

the cockpit on the front passenger side bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
(/ page 77). may be lit continuously or be o . using a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
Self-tes
Self-testt of automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag shut- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp tem while the front passenger airbag is
o and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light enabled
When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per- up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
formed during which the two PASSENGER AIR not be used. Also in this case, do not t a child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simulta- restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
neously. the automatic front passenger airbag shuto
lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can
checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed
The status of the front passenger airbag is dis- deploy in the event of an accident.
specialist workshop.
played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator The child could be struck by the airbag.
lamps a er the self-test: Status display # Always ensure that the front passenger
R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
deploy during an accident. both before and during the journey, that the sta-
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the
The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds. current situation. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child
R ON and OFF are are not
not lit: the front passenger restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
A er tting a rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys-
airbag may deploy during an accident. BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in
tem to
to the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat:
seat: PASSENGER AIR
R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa- the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the
BAG OFF must be lit continuously.
bled. It will then not be deployed in the event CHILD.
of an accident.
When tting a child restraint system to the front
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor-
o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator mation (/ page 78).
lamp shows the status of the front passenger air- Depending on the child restraint system and the
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
 Occupant safety 57

indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not t # Always move the front passenger seat as A person on the front passenger seat must always
the rearward-facing child restraint system to the far back as possible and fully retract the observe the following information:
front passenger seat. seat cushion length adjustment. While R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
Instead, t the rearward-facing child restraint sys- doing so, always make sure that the adult or a person with a stature corresponding
tem to a suitable rear seat. shoulder belt strap is correctly routed to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
A er tting a forw
forwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys- from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates
tem toto the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat:
seat: depending on the the shoulder belt guide on the child that the front passenger airbag is enabled.
child restraint system and the stature of the child, restraint system. The shoulder belt strap If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously must be routed forwards and downwards lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
or be o . Always observe the following informa- from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, with a build corresponding to that of an adult
tion. adjust the seat belt outlet and the front must not use the front passenger seat.
passenger seat accordingly.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Always comply with the child restraint
R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
incorrect positioning of the forward-facing system manufacturer's installation
child restraint system instructions. person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child indicator lamp is either lit continuously or
restraint system on the front passenger seat When tting a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor- remains o , depending on the classi cation.
that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
the event of an accident, the child could: mation (/ page 78). -
If a person
person is sitting on the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat:
seat: lamp is o : move the front passenger seat
R come into contact with the vehicle interior as far back as possible, or the person of
if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously
or be o , depending on the person's stature. smaller stature should use a rear seat.
lamp is lit, for example - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER lamp is lit continuously: the person of
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o .
58 Occupant safety

smaller stature should not use the front Be sure to also observe the following further rela- R Vehicles with
with memory
memor y function: moving the
passenger seat. ted subjects: front passenger seat to a more favourable seat
R Child restraint system on the front passenger position.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when seat (/ page 78) R Vehicles with
with multicontour
multicontour seat:
seat: increasing the
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the
R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys-
lamp is lit seat backrest.
tem (/ page 65)
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multime-
lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front dia system is switched on, generating a brief
passenger airbag is disabled. PRE-SAFE® syst
PRE-SAFE system
em noise signal to stimulate the innate protective
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always PRE-SAFE® (anticipat
Function of PRE-SAFE (anticipator
oryy occupant mechanism of a person's hearing.
ensure that: protection)
protection)
R The classi cation of the person in the front * NOTE
NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv- footwell or behind the seat
passenger seat is correct and the front
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas-
passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in The automatic adjustment of the seat position
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
accordance with the person in the front may result in damage to the seat and/or the
passenger seat. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas- object.
R The person is seated properly with a cor- ures independently of each other: # Stow objects in a suitable place.
rectly fastened seat belt. R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
R The front passenger seat has been moved and front passenger seat.
as far back as possible. R Closing the side windows. Rever
ersing
sing the PRE-SAFE® syst
the PRE-SAFE system
em measures
measures
R Vehicles with
with sliding sunroof:
sunroof: closing the slid- If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
ing sunroof. measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings yourself.
 Occupant safety 59

# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, System limits

System impact is anticipated. This increases the distance
move the seat backrest back slightly. The system will not initiate any action in the fol- between the door and the vehicle occupant.
The locking mechanism releases. lowing situations: If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or
R when reversing is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative
PRE-SAFE® PL
Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS
US (anticipator
(anticipatoryy occu- See Owner's Manual(/ page 442) display mes-
or
pant prot
protection
ection plus) sage appears.
R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, par- is a risk of a rear impact
ticularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre- Aut
utomatic
omatic measures
measures a er an accident
emptive measures to protect the vehicle occu- The system will not initiate any braking application
in the following situations: Depending on the type and severity of the acci-
pants. These measures cannot necessarily pre- dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment,
vent an imminent impact. R whilst driving
the following measures can be implemented, for
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following or example:
measures independently of each other: R when entering or exiting a parking space while R automatic braking (post-collision brake)
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat using Active Parking Assist R activating the hazard warning lights
and front passenger seat. R triggering an automatic emergency call
R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a PRE-SAFE® Im
Function of PRE-SAFE Impulse
pulse Side (/ page 373)
higher ashing frequency.
If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE- R switching o the drive system and high-volt-
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is age on-board electrical system
SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the
stationary. This brake application is cancelled front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards R unlocking the vehicle doors
automatically when the vehicle pulls away. the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly R lowering the side windows
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive in ating an air cushion in the outer seat side bol-
ster of the seat backrest on the side on which the R displaying the emergency guide in the central
measures that were taken are reversed.
display
60 Occupant safety

R switching on the interior lighting dren are travelling in the vehicle Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you t a
(/ page 61). child restraint system to a rear seat.
Function of the
the post-collision
post-collision brake
brake
Depending on the accident situation, the post-col- Be diligent
diligent The gener
generic
ic ter
termm child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
lision brake can minimise the severity of a further Bear in mind that negligence when securing a The generic term child restraint system is used in
collision or even avoid it. child in the child restraint system may have seri- this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is,
If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake ous consequences. Always be diligent in securing for example:
can implement automatic braking. When the vehi- a child carefully before every journey.
R a baby car seat
cle has come to a standstill, the electric parking Never allow babies and children to travel sitting
R a rearward-facing child seat
brake is automatically applied. on the lap of another vehicle occupant.
R a forward-facing child seat
The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking To improve protection for children younger than
the following actions: 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
R braking more strongly than automatic braking Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the fol- belt guide
lowing information: Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child
R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force R Always secure the child in a child restraint sys- booster seat with a backrest.
tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to
R The child restraint system must be appropriate the age, weight and size of the child.
Safel
Safelyy transpor
transporting
ting childr
children
en in the
the vehicle
vehicle to the age, weight and size of the child.
Always observe
Always observe when childr
children
en are
are trav
travelling
elling in the
the R The vehicle seat must be suitable for tting a
Observe laws
Observe laws and legal
legal req
requir
uirements
ements
vehicle Always observe the legal requirements when
child restraint system (/ page 65). using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the Accident statistics show that children secured on Make sure that the child restraint system is
speci c situation. In this way you can recog- the rear seats are generally safer than children approved in accordance with the valid test speci -
nise potential risks and avoid dangers if chil- secured on the front seats. For this reason, cations and guidelines. Further information can
be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Occupant safety 61

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint sys- Alwayss secure
Alway secure a child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system correctly
correctly
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. tem is preferred.
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehi- & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
Only use approved
Only approved cchild
hild res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems incorrect installation of the child restraint
cle can reduce the risk of tting the child restraint
Only child restraint systems that meet the follow- system incorrectly. system
ing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the
vehicle: When securing a child with the integrated seat The child can then not be protected or
belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, restrained as intended.
R UN-R44
always comply with the permissible gross weight # Be sure to comply with the manufactur-
R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) for the child and child restraint system er's installation instructions for the child
(/ page 69). restraint system and its correct use.
Information on child restraint system approval
categories and details on the approval label on # Make sure that the entire base of the
Adv
dvant
antag
agee of a rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys-
the child restraint system (/ page 65). tem child restraint system always rests on
It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child the sitting surface of the seat.
Detecting
Detecting risk
risks,
s, avoiding
avoiding danger
danger in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint sys- # Never place objects (e.g. cushions)
tem. In this case, the child sits in the opposite under or behind the child restraint sys-
Securing systems
Securing systems for
for child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems in direction to the direction of travel and faces back- tem.
the vehicle
vehicle wards. # Use child restraint systems only with the
Only use the following securing systems for child Babies and small children have comparatively original cover designed for them.
restraint systems: weak neck muscles in relation to the size and # Always replace damaged covers with
R the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer- genuine covers.
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a
R the vehicle's seat belt system
rearward-facing child restraint system.
R the Top Tether anchorages
62 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to - Securing the child restraint system with # Only a x accessories which have been
unsecured child restraint systems in the the seat belt on the front passenger seat specially approved for this child restraint
vehicle (/ page 79). Observe the speci c system by the child restraint system's
instructions for the rearward-facing and manufacturer.
If the child restraint system is incorrectly tted forward-facing child restraint systems
or not secured, it can come loose. (/ page 78). Mercedes‑Benz recommends Mercedes-Benz
The child restraint system could be ung If the front passenger seat is occupied, care products for cleaning child restraint systems
around and hit vehicle occupants. ensure, both before and during the jour- recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
# Always install child restraint systems cor- ney, that the status of the front passenger
Only use child
Only child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems which
which are
are in
rectly, even when not in use. airbag is correct for the current situation
proper
pr oper wor
working
king condition
# Always comply with the child restraint (/ page 55).
system manufacturer's installation R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
instructions. rior and on the child restraint system. by the use of damaged child restraint sys-
R Also secure Top Tether if present. tems
R Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating Do not
not modify the
the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system Child restraint systems or their retaining sys-
instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c tems that have been subjected to stress in an
information: & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca- accident may not be able to perform their
tions to the child restraint system intended protective function.
- Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint
system to the rear seat (/ page 69). The child restraint system can no longer func- It may be the case that the child cannot be
tion properly. This poses an increased risk of properly restrained.
- Securing the child restraint system with # Always immediately replace child
the seat belt on the rear seat injury.
(/ page 76). # Never modify a child restraint system. restraint systems that have been dam-
aged or involved in an accident.
 Occupant safety 63

# Have the securing systems for the child Observee when stopping
Observ stopping or parking
parking # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
restraint systems checked at a quali ed children.
specialist workshop before installing a & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
child restraint system again. to leaving children unattended in the vehi-
cle & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
Avoid direct
direct sunlight If children are le unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular: If people, particularly children, are exposed to
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child extreme temperatures over an extended
R open doors, thereby endangering other
seat is exposed to direct sunlight period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
persons or road users. or danger to life.
If the child restraint system is exposed to R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. # Never leave persons, children in particu-
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
R operate vehicle equipment and become lar, unattended in the vehicle.
Children could su er burns from these parts, trapped, for example.
particularly on metallic parts of the child
restraint system. In addition, the children could also set the Over
Overvie
view
w of recommended
recommended child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
# Always make sure that the child restraint vehicle in motion by, for example:
R releasing the parking brake.
% Further information on the correct child
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
restraint system can be obtained at a quali-
# Protect the child restraint system with a R changing the transmission position. ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec-
blanket, for example. R starting the vehicle. ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
# If the child restraint system has been Service Centre for this purpose.
# Never leave children unattended in the
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to Vehicles with
with belt airbags:
vehicle.
cool before securing a child into it.
# Never leave children unattended in the
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
vehicle.
64 Occupant safety

When securing a child in a child restraint system Securing

Secur ing with
with ISOFIX Securing
Secur ing with
with the
the vehicle
vehicle seat belt
on an outer rear seat, it is essential to observe the
following instructions: Weight categor
categoryy 0+ (up to
to 13 kg
kg and up to Weight categor
categoryy 0 (up to
to 10 kg
kg and appro
approximat
ximately
ely
approx. 15 months)
approx. months) 6 months)
months) and weight
weight categor
categoryy 0+ (up to
to 13 kg
R Weight category 0, 0+ or I: the child restraint
BAB
ABYY SAFE
SAFE plus and approximat
approximatel
elyy 15 months)
months)
system must be installed on the ISOFIX or i- Type1
Size child seat anchor. Type1 BAB
ABYY SAFE
SAFE plus II
Size category E
R Weight category II/III: only use the approved Approval E1 04 301 146
KIDFIX XP and AMG KIDFIX XP child seats. Approval E1 04 301 146
R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint sys- Order number2 A 000 970 38 02
Order number2 B6 6 86 8224
tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
anchor. 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

R Secure a forward-facing child restraint system Weight categor

categoryy I (9 to
to 18 kg
kg and fr
from
om approx-
approx-
with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat anchor Weight categor
categoryy I (9 to
to 18 kg
kg and fr
from
om approx-
approx- imatelyy 9 months
imatel months toto 4 year
years)
s)
and, if present, the Top Tether anchorage. imatel
imatelyy 9 months
months toto 4 year
years)
s)
Type1 DUO plus
R Observe the notes in "Belt airbag in rear seat Type1 DUO plus
belt" (/ page 48). Approval E1 04 301 133
Size category B1
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02
Approval E1 04 301 133
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
 Occupant safety 65

Weight categor
categoryy II/III (15 to
to 36 kg
kg and from
from ° i-Size child seat securing system Approval
Approval categor
categories
ies for
for child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
approximat
approximatel
elyy 3 to
to 12 year
years)
s) (/ page 68)
Only use approved
Only approved cchild
hild res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
Type1 KIDFIX XP ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 71). Only child restraint systems that meet the follow-
Approval E1 04 301 304 ing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the
Alternative securing system: vehicle:
Order number2 A 000 970 49 02 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 73) R UN-R44

Type1 AMG KIDFIX XP R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 71).
Approval E1 04 301 304 Front passenger
passenger seat Identi cation on the
the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
Information about the approval category, weight
Order number2 A 000 970 33 02 Securing system: category and approval number, for example, is on
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 73) the approval label on the child restraint system.
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Be sure to observe: There may be further information such as the ISO-
R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
FIX size categories, depending on the approval
Overvie
Over view
w of suitable
suitable seats in the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for tting category of the child restraint system.
ensure, both before and during the journey,
a child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system that the status of the front passenger airbag is
Le /right
/right rear seat correct for the current situation (/ page 55).
R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag
Preferred securing system:
shuto (/ page 54).
® ISOFIX child seat securing system
(/ page 67) Centre rear
Centre rear seat
or Securing system:
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 73)
66 Occupant safety

Approval
Approval categor
categories
ies in accordance
accordance with
with UN-R44 The identi cation IUF refers to ISOFIX child Approval
Approval categor
categories
ies in accordance
accordance with
with UN-R129
restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
These child restraint systems must also be
secured using Top Tether or support points.
R Semi-Univ
Semi-U niver
ersal:
sal: child restraint systems in the
"Semi-Universal" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
R Vehicle-speci c: child restraint systems in the
"vehicle-speci c" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.

Example of an approval label Example of an approval label

R Univ
niver
ersal:
sal: child restraint systems in the "Uni- R i‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size"
versal" category are approved for installation category are approved for installation in vehi-
in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance cles with i‑Size mounting brackets. They can
with overviews of the suitability of seats for be used, in accordance with overviews of the
securing child restraint systems, on seats suitability of seats for securing child restraint
labelled U, UF or IUF. systems, on seats labelled i‑U.
 Occupant safety 67

The identi cation i‑U refers to i‑Size child Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system Weight group
group 0 (up to
to 10 kg
kg and up ttoo approx.
approx. 6
restraint systems in the "Universal" category. on the
the le and right
right rear
rear seats months)
months)
These child restraint systems must also be Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat
secured using Top Tether or support points. Over
Ov ervie
vieww of suitability
suitability of the
the seats for
for attac
attaching
hing
ISOFIX child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems Equipment
Eq uipment
Observe the
Observe the suitability
suitability of vehicle
vehicle seats ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for spe-
Depending on the approval category, there are cially designed child restraint systems. E – ISO/R1 IL
forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint ® The symbol indicates seats suitable for IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table
systems. Their use can be restricted for certain attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the
vehicle seats: in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 65). vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manu-
R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child Attach only child restraint systems that are facturer's vehicle model list.
restraint systems (/ page 67) approved in accordance with UN R44 as
R Suitability of seats for securing i‑Size child per the following ISOFIX tables. Weight group
group 0+ (up to
to 13 kg
kg and up ttoo approx.
approx.
restraint systems (/ page 68). 15 months)
months)
R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
Carryy cot
Carr Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat
child restraint systems (/ page 73) Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat Equipment
Eq uipment
Equipment
Eq uipment
E – ISO/R1 IL
F – ISO/L1 X
D – ISO/R2, IL
G – ISO/L2 X ISO/R2X
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight
group and/or size class.
68 Occupant safety

Size class – Le /right

/right rear seat Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat Over
Ov ervie
vieww of suitability
suitability of the
the seats for
for attac
attaching
hing
i‑Size child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
Equipment
Eq uipment Equipment
Eq uipment
i‑Size is a standardised securing system for spe-
C – ISO/R3 IL (1) B1 – ISO/F2X IUF cially designed child restraint systems.
° The symbol indicates seats suitable for
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table A – ISO/F3 IUF
in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the
attaching an i‑Size child restraint system in
vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manu-
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table accordance with UN R129 (/ page 65).
facturer's vehicle model list.
in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the Child restraint systems that are permitted
vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manu- in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISO-
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), facturer's vehicle model list. FIX tables (/ page 67) or UN R129 as per
move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the the following i‑Size tables may be attached.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the
seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child
"Universal" category in this weight group.
restraint system. i‑Size child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems (ISO/R2, ISO/F2X,
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
Weight group
group 1 (9–18 kg
kg and approx.
approx. 9 months
months to move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the
Front passenger
passenger seat Le /right
/right rear seat
4 year
years)
s) seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child

Size class – Le /right

/right rear seat restraint system. X i‑U
Equipment
Eq uipment X Not suitable for an i-Size child i-U Suitable for forward-facing
restraint system in the "Univer- and rearward-facing i-Size child
D – ISO/R2, IL sal" category. restraint systems in the "Univer-
ISO/R2X sal" category.

C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
B – ISO/F2 IUF
 Occupant safety 69

Fitting the
the ISOFIX or i‑Size child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the Regularly check that the permissible gross mass
on the
the le and right
right rear
rear seats permissible gross mass of the child and of the child and child restraint system is still com-
child restraint system together is excee- plied with.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear When tting a child restraint system, observe the
ded.
bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest following:
are not engaged Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX
or i‑Size child restraint systems and the child O Always observe the correct use of the seats
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- may not be restrained correctly in the event of and consider their suitability for attaching a
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle an accident, for example. child restraint system.
is in motion.
# If the child and the child restraint system ISOFIX child seat securing system
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be (/ page 67)
together weigh more than 33 kg, only
pressed into the seat belt with increased use an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint or
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro- system with which the child is secured
tect as intended and could cause addi- i‑Size child seat securing system
with the vehicle seat belt. (/ page 68)
tional injury.
# Also secure the child restraint system
R Objects or loads in the boot or load com- O Always comply with the manufacturer's
with the Top Tether belt, if available. installation and operating instructions for the
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest. child restraint system used.
Always comply with the information about the
mass of the child restraint system: O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
rear seat and the seat backrest are R in the manufacturer's installation and operat-
seat slightly forwards.
engaged before every trip. ing instructions for the child restraint system
used ® When tting an ISOFIX child restraint sys-
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and R on a label on the child restraint system, if tem, also observe the following:
locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator present O When using a baby
baby car seat in weight
weight group
group
will be visible.
0/0+ and a rearw
rearwarard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint
70 Occupant safety

system in weight
system weight group
group 1 on a rear
rear seat:
seat: direction. Where possible, adjust the seat * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the
adjust the front seat so that the seat does cushion inclination accordingly. centre seat during installation of the child
not touch the child restraint system. O The child restraint system must not be put restraint system
O When using a forw
forwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
system
syst em in weight
weight group
group 1: remove the head head restraints as appropriate.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
restraint from the respective seat, if possible. ped.
In addition, the backrest of the child restraint ° When tting an i‑Size child restraint system,
system must lie as at as possible against also observe the following: Vehicles with
with premium
premium rear
rear seats
the backrest of the vehicle seat. O When using a rearw
rearwarard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint
A er the child restraint system has been system:
syst em: adjust the front seat so that it does
removed, replace the head restraint immedi- not touch the child restraint system.
ately and adjust all head restraints correctly. O When using a forwforwarard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot system:
syst em: remove the head restraint from the
be fully extended when it is installed in the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the backrest of the child restraint system must
maximum size setting for child restraint sys- lie as at as possible against the backrest of
tems in weight group 2 or 3. the vehicle seat.
Contact with the roof when the head A er the child restraint system has been
restraint is fully extended and locked in place removed, replace the head restraint immedi-
will not result in any restrictions on use. ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
O The child restraint system must not be put # Before every journey, make sure that the ISO-
under strain between the roof and the seat FIX child restraint system or the i‑Size child
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong restraint system is engaged correctly in both
mounting brackets in the vehicle. # Fold upholstered lining 1 upwards.
 Occupant safety 71

# Pull the tab on upholstered lining 1 upwards Vehicles with

with standar
standardd seats # A er removing the child seat, reattach covers
and position it on the support surface. 1 or 2.
Upholstered lining 1 will remain folded
upwards. Fast
astening
ening a Top
Top Tether
Tether
# Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys-
tem to both mounting brackets 2 in the vehi- & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
cle. rear seat backrests are not locked a er
# To close, fold upholstered lining 1 upwards. Top Tether belts are tted
# Li the tab from the support surface and slide The rear seat backrests may fold forwards
it back into the upholstery slot between the when you are driving.
seat backrest and seat cushion. Close the As a result, child restraint systems will no lon-
upholstery ap. ger be able to perform their intended protec-
tive function. This may also cause additional
injuries.
# Always lock rear seat backrests a er t-
ting Top Tether belts.
1 ISOFIX mounting bracket # Observe the lock veri cation indicator.
2 i‑Size mounting bracket
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
# Remove and stow away covers 1 or 2. locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator
# Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys- will be visible.
tem to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
72 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from

adjusting the seat a er tting a child
restraint system
Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear
bench seats:
The following may occur:
R The Top Tether belt may sit either too loose
or too tight
R The child restraint system may be loose,
incorrectly positioned or damaged and
# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint
then not perform its intended protective 1 between the two head restraint bars.
function. # Hook Top Tether hook 3 into Top Tether
anchorage 2 without twisting.
# Never adjust the seat a er the child
restraint system has been installed. # Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com-
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards ply with the child restraint system manufactur-
¯ If the child restraint system is equipped (/ page 119). er's installation instructions.
with a Top Tether belt: # Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down-
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the wards (/ page 119). Make sure that you do
Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an child restraint system manufacturer's installa- not interfere with the correct routing of Top
additional connection between the child tion instructions. Tether belt 4.
restraint system attached with ISOFIX or
i‑Size and the vehicle.
 Occupant safety 73

Securing the
Securing the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat U, L
belt Centre rear seat1 L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems
according to the table in "Recommended child
Notes on the
the suitability
suitability of seats for
for attac
attaching
hing belt- Weight categor
categoryy III: 22 to
to 36 kg restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are
secured child
secured child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems Le /right rear seat U, L listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle model list.
Rear seats without
without a belt airbag U, L
Centre rear seat1
Weight categor
categoryy 0: up to
to 10 kg B2, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint
UN-R129 child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems systems complying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child
Le /right rear seat U, L restraint test equipment.
Le /right rear seat U, L, B2,
Centre rear seat1 U, L B3
Rear seats with
with a belt airbag
Weight categor
categoryy 0+: up to
to 13 kg Centre rear seat1 U, L, B2, Weight categor
categoryy 0: up to
to 10 kg
B3
Le /right rear seat U, L Le /right rear seat X
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket
Centre rear seat1 U, L are not suitable for this seat. Weight categor
categoryy 0+: up to
to 13 kg
Weight categor
categoryy I: 9 to
to 18 kg U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Univer- Le /right rear seat X
sal" category in this weight category.
Le /right rear seat U, L Weight categor
categoryy I: 9 to
to 18 kg
Centre rear seat1 U, L Le /right rear seat X
Weight categor
categoryy II: 15 to
to 25 kg Weight categor
categoryy II: 15 to
to 25 kg
Le /right rear seat U, L Le /right rear seat L1
74 Occupant safety

Weight categor
categoryy III: 22 to
to 36 kg
R Only use a child restraint system approved for bag is correct for the current situation
Mercedes-Benz. (/ page 55).
Le /right rear seat L1 R Observe the notes in "Overview of recommen- Front passenger
passenger seat
ded child restraint systems" (/ page 63).
UN-R129 child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system Weight categor
categoryy 0: up to
to 10 kg
R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
Le /right rear seat L1 tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
anchor.
1 Only use the approved child seats KIDFIX XP and
R Secure a forward-facing child restraint system Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
AMG KIDFIX XP.
with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child restraint Weight categor
categoryy 0+: up to
to 13 kg
kg
X Not suitable for children in this weight category. system and, if present, the Top Tether anchor-
age. Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems
according to the table in "Recommended child restraint
Notes on child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems on the
the front
front Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the
passenger
passeng er seat
R If it is absolutely necessary for you to t a Weight categor
categoryy I: 9 to
to 18 kg
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
child restraint system to the front passenger
seat, be sure to observe the information on Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
B2, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint sys-
child restraint systems on the front passenger U, L
tems complying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child
seat (/ page 79). Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2
restraint test equipment.
R Observe the speci c instructions for the rear- Weight categor
categoryy II: 15 to
to 25 kg
kg
Vehicles with
with belt airbags: when securing a child ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems. If the front passenger seat is occu- Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat, it
is essential to observe the following instructions: pied, ensure, both before and during the jour- Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
ney, that the status of the front passenger air-
 Occupant safety 75

Weight categor
categoryy III: 22 to
to 36 kg L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
according to the table in "Recommended child
Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are Weight categor
categoryy II: 15 to
to 25 kg
listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
vehicle model list.
1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest posi- UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint sys-
tion and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the tems of the "Universal" category in this weight cate- Weight categor
categoryy III: 22 to
to 36 kg
lowest position. gory.
Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front Front passenger
passenger seat Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
passenger airbag shuto . The PASSENGER AIR BAG
Weight categor
categoryy 0: up to
to 10 kg
OFF indicator lamp must be lit. UN-R129 child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
X Not suitable for children in this weight category. Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L,
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L B2, B3
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Univer-
sal" category in this weight category. Weight categor
categoryy 0+: up to
to 13 kg Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L, B2,
B3
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X 1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the

Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest posi-
tion and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the
Weight categor
categoryy I: 9 to
to 18 kg lowest position.

Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L

76 Occupant safety

2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front Securing the

Securing the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat When tting a belt-secured
belt-secured child
child res
restr
traint
aint system,
system,
passenger airbag shuto . The PASSENGER AIR BAG belt on the
the rear
rear seat observee the
observ the follo
following:
wing:
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
O Always comply with the manufacturer's
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear installation and operating instructions for the
X Not suitable for children in this weight category. bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest child restraint system used.
are not engaged O For a child restraint system in the "Universal"
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Univer-
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back- or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that
sal" category in this weight category. the system has been approved for the vehicle
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
is in motion. seat.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems
according to the table in "Recommended child R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats
restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are pressed into the seat belt with increased for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys-
listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro- tems" (/ page 73).
vehicle model list.
tect as intended and could cause addi- O When using a weightweight categor
categoryy 0/0+ baby
baby
tional injury. car seat and a weight
weight categor
categoryy I rearw
rearwar
ard-
d-
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint sys- R Objects or loads in the boot or load com- facing child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system on a rear
rear seat:
tems of the "Universal" category in this weight cate- partment cannot be restrained by the seat adjust the front seat so that the seat does
gory. backrest. not touch the child restraint system.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the O When using a weightweight categor
categoryy I forw
forwar
ard-
d-
B2, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint
rear seat and the seat backrest are facing child
child res
restr
traint
aint syst
system:
em: remove the
systems complying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child
engaged before every trip. head restraint from the respective seat, if
restraint test equipment. possible.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and A er the child restraint system has been
locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator removed, replace the head restraint immedi-
will be visible. ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
 Occupant safety 77

O The backrest of the forward-facing child # Install the child restraint system. Notes on vehicles
vehicles without
without automatic
automatic front
front
restraint system must, as far as possible, be The entire base of the child restraint system passenger
passenger airbag shut
shutoo
resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. must always rest on the seat surface of the
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot rear seat.
be fully extended when it is installed in the # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
maximum size setting for child restraint sys- the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the
tems in weight category II or III. child restraint system.
Contact with the roof when the head The shoulder belt strap must be routed
restraint is fully extended and locked in place forward from the seat belt outlet.
will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
head restraints as appropriate. Sticker visible when the front passenger door is
open
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag
seat slightly forwards. shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of
the cockpit on the front passenger side.
78 Occupant safety

Make sure you observe the following information: lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can
R Never t a rearward-facing child restraint sys- deploy in the event of an accident.
tem to the front passenger seat The child could be struck by the airbag.
R Always t a rearward-facing child restraint sys- # Always ensure that the front passenger
tem to a suitable rear seat airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
- Seats suitable for attaching belted child BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
restraint systems (/ page 73). # NEVER use a rearward-facing child
- Secure the child restraint system with the restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 76). BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in
R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor
child restraint systems on the front passenger CHILD.
Always observe the status of the front passenger
seat (/ page 78) airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Observe the speci c instructions for the rear-
Notes on rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing and forw
forwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys- lamp:
res
estr
traint
aint systems
systems on the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat tems (/ page 79). R If it is absolutely necessary to t a child
restraint system to the front passenger seat,
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when always observe the information on automatic
using a rearward-facing child restraint sys- front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 54).
tem while the front passenger airbag is R When using a rearward-facing child restraint
enabled system on the front passenger seat, the front
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child passenger airbag must always be disabled.
restraint system on the front passenger seat This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 55).
 Occupant safety 79

R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator O When using a forward-facing child restraint O The child restraint system must not be put
lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is ena- system in weight category I: remove the head under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy restraint from the respective seat, if possible. head restraints as appropriate.
during an accident. A er the child restraint system has been O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
Securing the
Securing the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat removed, replace the head restraint immedi- behind the child restraint system.
belt on the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
When tting a belt-secured child restraint system O The backrest of the forward-facing child & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
on the front passenger seat, always observe the restraint system must, as far as possible, be objects between the seat surface and the
following: resting on the seat backrest of the front child restraint system
passenger seat. Objects between the seat surface and the
O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot child restraint system could a ect the function
front passenger seat (/ page 78). be fully extended when it is installed in the of the automatic front passenger airbag shut-
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the o .
O Observe the child restraint system manufac- maximum size setting for child restraint sys- # Do not place any objects between the
turer's installation and operating instructions. tems in weight category II or III.
O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" seat surface and the child restraint sys-
Contact with the roof when the head tem.
or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that restraint is fully extended and locked in place # Always make sure that the child restraint
the system has been approved for the vehicle will not result in any restrictions on use.
seat. system is correctly tted.
O The child restraint system must not be put
Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats under strain between the roof and the seat # Set the front passenger seat as far back as
for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys- cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong possible and move the seat into the highest
tems" (/ page 73). direction. position if possible.
80 Occupant safety

# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- Child safety

safety locks # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ment. key with you and lock the vehicle.
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the child
child safety
safety lock
lock for
for
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the the rear
rear doors # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest children.
position and the rear edge of the seat cushion & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
is in the lowest position. to leaving children unattended in the vehi- & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical cle to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
position possible. If children are le unattended in the vehicle, If people, particularly children, are exposed to
# Install the child restraint system. they could, in particular: extreme temperatures over an extended
The entire base of the child restraint system R open doors, thereby endangering other period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
must always rest on the sitting surface of the persons or road users. or danger to life.
front passenger seat.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. # Never leave persons, children in particu-
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
R operate vehicle equipment and become lar, unattended in the vehicle.
is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the trapped, for example.
child restraint system. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
In addition, the children could also set the
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- vehicle in motion by, for example: to children le unattended in the vehicle
wards and downwards from the seat belt out- R releasing the parking brake. If children are travelling in the vehicle, they
let. could, in particular:
R changing the transmission position.
# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and R open doors, thereby endangering other
the front passenger seat accordingly. R starting the vehicle.
persons or road users
# Never leave children unattended in the R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c
vehicle.
 Occupant safety 81

R operate vehicle equipment and become Activ

ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the child
child safety
safety lock
lock for
for
trapped, for example the rear
rear side windows
# Always activate the child safety locks
installed if children are travelling in the
vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and
the rear side windows.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the
important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi-
tional door lock" section. # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures (deactivate).
each door separately. The doors can no longer be
opened from the inside.
# Make sure that the child safety locks are work- # To activat
activate/deactiv
e/deactivat
ate:
e: press button 2.
ing properly.
The rear side window can be opened or closed
as follows:
R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on
the driver's door
82 Occupant safety

R indicator lamp 1 is o : via the switch on R switch systems on or o and endanger

the corresponding rear door or driver's other road users
door
When the child safety lock is activated, the con- Unsecured animals may be thrown about the
trols in the rear compartment are disabled for: vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden
steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure
R the rear side windows vehicle occupants.
R the adjustment of the front passenger seat # Never leave animals unattended in the
from the rear compartment vehicle.
R the roller sunblinds in the roof # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car-
rier.
Notes on pets
pets in the
the vehicle
vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to animals le unsecured or unattended in
the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended
or unsecured, they could press buttons or
switches, for instance.
An animal may:
R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
 Opening and closing 83

Key # When leaving the vehicle, always take the 3 Unlocks (with embossed surface)
Overvie
Over view
w of key
key functions key with you and lock the vehicle. 4 Opens/closes the tailgate
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of % If indicator lamp 1 does not light up a er
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due children. pressing the Ü or s button, the battery
to leaving children unattended in the vehi- is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the
cle * NOTE Damage to the key caused by mag- battery as soon as possible.
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, netic elds Replace the key battery (/ page 85).
they could, in particular: Keep the key away from strong magnetic
# % Vehicles with
with convenience
convenience doors:
doors: if you have
R open doors, thereby endangering other elds. activated the convenience doors function in
persons or road users. the multimedia system (/ page 95), you
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. can open or close the driver's or front
R operate vehicle equipment and become passenger door by pressing the Ü or s
trapped, for example. button. Additional information on the conveni-
ence doors (/ page 90).
In addition, the children could also set the The key locks and unlocks the following compo-
vehicle in motion by, for example: nents:
R releasing the parking brake.
R Doors
R changing the transmission position.
R Socket ap
R starting the vehicle.
R Tailgate
# Never leave children unattended in the Vehicle key
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
vehicle. 1 Indicator lamp
40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
2 Locks the protection is primed again.
84 Opening and closing

Do not keep the key together with electronic devi- Changing the
the unlocking
unlocking settings
settings particular key. Activate the function of the key so
ces or metal objects. This can a ect the key's that all its functions will again be available.
functionality. Possible unlocking functions of the key:
R Central unlocking
You can also deactivate the function of the key to
reduce the energy consumption of the key if you
R Unlocking the driver's door and socket ap do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the acoustic
acoustic locking
locking ver
erii -
cation signal # To switch
switch betw
between
een settings:
settings: press the Ü period of time.
and s buttons simultaneously for approx- # To deactivat
deactivate: e: press the s button on the
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle imately six seconds until the indicator lamp key twice in quick succession.
ashes twice. The key indicator lamp ashes twice brie y
5 Open/close
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's and lights up once.
# Activate or deactivate the Acoustic lock. # To activat
door and socket ap has been selected: activate:e: press any button on the key.
% Please observe:
observe: R To unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle centrally:
centrally: press the % When the vehicle is started with the key in the
The selected setting for the acoustic locking Ü button twice. stowage compartment of the centre console,
veri cation signal must comply with the rele- the function of the key is automatically activa-
R Vehicles with
with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the
vant national road and tra c regulations. In ted (/ page 194).
some countries, including Germany, using the inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
acoustic locking veri cation signal is forbid- er's door, only the driver's door and the socket
den by tra c laws (in accordance with §16 ap are unlocked.
Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German
national road tra c regulations). The driver of Deactivating
Deactivating the
the function of the
the key
the vehicle must comply with these regula-
tions. In countries where the use of this func- Vehicles with
with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the
tion is forbidden, this function is not activated function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are
in the vehicle and must not be activated. also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by
KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that
 Opening and closing 85

Remo
emoving/inser
ving/inserting
ting the
the emergency
emergency key Inserting
Inser ting the
the emergency
emergency key There is a risk of fatal injury.
Remo
emoving
ving the
the emergency
emergency key # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren.
# If the cover and/or lid of the battery
compartment does not close securely,
do not use the key and keep it away from
children.
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.

# Insert emergency key 2 at marking 3 until + ENVIRONMENT

ENVIR ONMENTAL
AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
it engages. damage due to improper disposal of bat-
# Press release button 1. teries
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. % You can use emergency key 2 to attach the
key to a key ring.
# Fully remove emergency key 2.
Replacing the
the key
key battery
battery Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries if batteries rubbish.
are swallowed #

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-

ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe
internal burns within two hours. Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
86 Opening and closing

Take discharged batteries to a quali ed cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not hold # Make sure that covering 3 is completely
specialist workshop or to a collection cover 1 closed. closed.
point for used batteries. # Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the
housing and then press until it is completely
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: closed.
R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
# Insert the emergency key again (/ page 85).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a quali ed specialist work- Problems
Pr oblems with
with the
the key,
key, troubleshoo
troubleshooting
ting
shop.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 85). You can no longer
longer lock
lock or unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle
Possible causes:
R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Insert emergency key 2 into the opening and
li up covering 3 and remove it. # Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 83).
# Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until
battery 4 falls out of the key.
# Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 85).
# Insert the new battery with the positive pole
facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
# Use the replacement key.
# Make sure that the surface of the battery is
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
free of lint, grease and other impurities. (/ page 96).
# Press emergency key 2 into the opening in # Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the
# Have the key checked at a quali ed specialist
the key in the direction of the arrow until housing and then press on both sides to close workshop.
it.
 Opening and closing 87

There is interf
There interfer
erence
ence from
from a power
powerful
ful radio
radio signal Doors If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me
source
sour ce connect, the additional door lock is not activated
Notes on the
the additional door lock (/ page 366).
Possible causes if the function of the key is
impaired: The additional door lock is only available for vehi- If the additional door lock is activated, the doors
R high voltage power lines
cles for the United Kingdom. cannot be opened from the inside.
R mobile phones & WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside % A er locking you can issue a signal with the
horn.
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) the vehicle when the additional door lock
is activated You can prevent the additional door lock from
R shielding due to metal objects or induction
being activated by deactivating interior protection
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic If the additional door lock is activated, the before locking the vehicle (/ page 112).
barriers doors can no longer be opened from the
inside.
# Make sure that there is su cient distance Unloc
nlocking/opening
king/opening the
the doors
doors from
from the
the inside
# Never leave persons, in particular chil-
between the key and the potential source of
interference. dren, unattended in the vehicle. # Unit
nited
ed Kingdom only:
only: observe the notes on
# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not the additional door lock (/ page 87).
You have
have lost
lost a key activate the additional door lock.
# Have the key deactivated at a quali ed spe-
cialist workshop. The additional door lock is automatically activated
# If necessary, have the mechanical lock in the following situations:
replaced as well. R The vehicle is locked using the key.
R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
88 Opening and closing

Centrallyy locking
Centrall locking and unlocking
unlocking the
the vehicle
vehicle from
from The socket ap is also locked and unlocked. The
the inside socket ap can be opened even if a key is detec-
ted in the car.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
R if you have locked the vehicle using the key
R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO

Locking/unloc
Locking/unlocking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with KEYLESS-GO
# Pull door handle 1.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The key is outside the vehicle.
R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
R The driver's door and the door on which the
door handle is used are closed.

# To unlock:
unlock: press button 1. The door handles are extended when:
R the vehicle is unlocked
# To lock:
lock: press button 2.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up R the vehicle key is detected
once the vehicle is locked. R a door is opened

The door handles retract:

R when the vehicle is locked
 Opening and closing 89

R when pulling away

R a er waiting for a time

* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten-

tional opening of the tailgate or a door
R when using an automatic car wash
R when using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the function of the key in
these situations.
or
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m (high-pressure cleaner)
or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from
the vehicle.
# To unlock
unlock the
the vehicle:
vehicle: touch the inner surface % If the door handle is not extended, touch sen-
Observe the notes: of door handle 1. sor surface 2 to unlock.
R on washing the vehicle in a car wash # To lock
lock the
the vehicle:
vehicle: touch recessed sensor
(/ page 388) surface 3.
R on using a high pressure cleaner # Conv
Convenience
enience closing: touch recessed sensor
(/ page 389) surface 3 for an extended period.
% Further information on convenience closing
(/ page 105).
90 Opening and closing

Problems
Pr oblems with
with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshoo
troubleshooting
ting R mobile phones R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) mometer.
You can no longer
longer lock
lock or unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO R shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic Opening and closing the
the convenience
convenience doors
Possible causes:
barriers
R The function of the key has been deactivated. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Make sure that there is su cient distance ing automatic closing of the convenience
between the key and the potential source of doors
# Activate the function of the key (/ page 84). interference.
Parts of the body could become trapped.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp
There may be people or animals in the closing
(/ page 83). Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating the
the automatic
automatic locking
locking area.
# Replace the key battery, if necessary feature
# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
(/ page 85). Multimedia system: of the closing area.
# Use the replacement key. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Use one of the following options to stop
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock 5 Locking function the closing process:
(/ page 96). % The vehicle is locked automatically when the R Driver's or front passenger door:
# Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali- vehicle is switched on and the wheels are press the Ü or s button on
ed specialist workshop. turning faster than walking pace. the key.
# Activate or deactivate Automatic locking. R Driver's door: depress the brake
There is interf
There interfer
erence
ence from
from a power
powerful
ful radio
radio signal
source
sour ce pedal.
In the following situations, there is a danger of
R All doors: pull on the inner or outer
Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is being locked out when the function is activated:
impaired: door handles.
R The vehicle is being towed or pushed.
R high voltage power lines
 Opening and closing 91

R All doors: push against or pull the R Power closing function (/ page 96) R the outer door handles (to open and close the
door. R Parking Package with 360° Camera doors)
R All doors: touch the touch screen in (/ page 281) R the multimedia system (/ page 95)
the convenience menu in the multi- or % You cannot open a rear door with the door
media system. Remote Parking Assist with Mirror Package handle from inside the vehicle if it is secured
(/ page 295) by the child safety lock. Further information
* NOTE When automatically opening and R Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 270) on the child safety lock for the rear doors
closing the convenience doors, please (/ page 80).
note The convenience doors can then be opened and You can still open the rear doors from the
closed automatically. inside via the multimedia system
Your view of your surroundings may be restric- (/ page 95).
ted. % If Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated or
# Make sure that there are no persons,
unavailable, the convenience doors cannot be Special features of the convenience doors:
opened from inside. R If, when closing, the door has reached the rst
animals or objects in the area of the con-
venience doors when opening and clos- The following options are available for opening or detent position, the power closing function
ing. closing the convenience doors: (/ page 96) will automatically draw the door
# When opening, pay particular attention R the key (to open and close the driver's and into the lock.
to low objects and obstacles in the side front passenger door) R If the rear doors are closed using the conveni-
window area. R approaching the vehicle (to open the driver's ence function, they are not automatically
door) locked.
Opening or closing the
the convenience
convenience doors R depressing the brake pedal (to close the driv- # To open the
the driv
driver's
er's or front
front passenger
passenger door
The following functions are required to automati- er's door) withh the
wit the key:
key: press and hold the Ü button
cally open and close the convenience doors: R the inner door handles (to open and close the on the key until the door starts to open.
R KEYLESS-GO (/ page 88) doors)
92 Opening and closing

% In the multimedia system, you can set * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the
# Depress the brake pedal until the door starts
whether the driver's door, the front passenger unintentional opening of a door to close.
door or no door opens when you press the
Ü button on the key (/ page 95). R when walking past the vehicle To open or close the
the convenience
convenience doors
doors from
from
If no door opens, the convenience opening R when using an automatic car wash inside:
function is carried out when the Ü button R when using a high pressure cleaner # Brie y pull the door handle (/ page 87).
is pressed. The convenience opening function Automatic operation is then started.
opens, for example, the side windows and the # Deactivate the function of the key in
panoramic sliding sunroof. Further informa- these situations. % If you pull the door handle during automatic
tion on convenience opening (/ page 104). operation, the opening or closing process is
or stopped. If you pull the door handle again, the
# To close the
the driv
driver's
er's or front
front passenger
passenger door # Make sure that the key is at a minimum process continues in reverse order.
withh the
wit the key:
key: press and hold the s button distance of 6 m away from the vehicle. # To open the
the convenience
convenience doors
doors from
from outside:
on the key until the door starts to close.
All open doors close. pull on the outside door handle.
When you approach your vehicle and the key is
# Conv
Convenience
enience closing with
with the
the key:
key: press and detected, the vehicle is unlocked and the driver's
hold the s button on the key. door opens automatically.
All open doors, side windows, and the panor- # Set the function in the multimedia system
amic sliding sunroof close. (/ page 95).
% Press the s button on the key again to % A driver's door that is automatically opened
lock the vehicle. by approaching the vehicle does not close
To open the
the vehicle
vehicle by
by approac
approaching
hing it:
it: again automatically.
To close the
the driv
driver's
er's door with
with the
the brak
brakee pedal:
 Opening and closing 93

stopped and a warning is displayed in the multi-

media system.
# Manually open a door stopped in an intermedi-
ate position.
Even if the convenience doors are equipped with
sensors, it cannot be guaranteed that all objects
are detected. Object detection is only an aid and
is not a substitute for the attention of the vehicle
occupants to their immediate surroundings when
opening and closing the convenience doors. The
vehicle occupants are always responsible for 1 approximately 1 m
opening and closing the doors safely.
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at
Detection
Det ection rang
rangee of the
the sensors close range
Object recognition may not detect certain
# To close the
the convenience
convenience doors
doors from
from outside: objects at close range.
touch recessed sensor surface 1 on the door # When opening the convenience doors,
handle. pay particular attention to low objects
Object detection
detection and obstacles in the side window area.
Object detection uses several sensors to monitor Object detection does not always detect
the opening range of the convenience doors in such objects at close range, especially
order to detect objects. If one of the sensors during movement. The vehicle or other
detects an object, the convenience doors are objects could otherwise be damaged.
94 Opening and closing

* NOTE Risk of accident due to faulty sen- Exit war

warning
ning when opening the
the doors
doors from
from inside and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi-
sors The exit warning of Active Blind Spot Assist is cle occupants.
used as an additional safeguard. If an obstacle is % Further information on Active Blind Spot
The sensors may malfunction because of snow detected, the convenience function is deactivated Assist with exit warning (/ page 270).
or due to objects that absorb ultrasonic and the moving door will be stopped.
waves. # Manually open a door stopped in an intermedi- Blockag
Block agee detection
detection when opening the
the doors
# Make sure that the convenience doors ate position. If an obstacle obstructs a door during the auto-
are free from dirt, ice or slush. matic opening process, blockage detection will
# Be especially careful when opening the & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit stop the door. The automatic blockage detection
warning function is only an aid and is not a substitute for
convenience doors if other ultrasonic your attentiveness.
sources are nearby. The exit warning neither reacts to stationary # Manually open a door stopped in an intermedi-
objects nor to persons or road users
ate position.
* NOTE Risk of accidents if the detection approaching you at a greatly di ering speed.
performance of the sensors in the conve- The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these * NOTE Damage to the convenience doors
nience doors is restricted situations. despite blockage detection
If the sensors are covered, the convenience # Always pay particular attention to the
Blockage detection may not be able to stop
doors cannot function reliably. tra c situation when opening the doors the automatic opening process of the doors in
# Do not apply stickers, foils or other coat- and make sure there is su cient clear- all cases. This can be the case in particular
ings to the outside of the convenience ance. with light, so objects.
doors. # Therefore, make sure that there is su -
The sensors may otherwise be blocked The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi-
tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The cient clearance next to the vehicle.
and obstacles may not be detected or
only detected to a limited extent. responsibility for opening and closing the doors
 Opening and closing 95

Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function when closing the
the R Driver's or front passenger door: # Select Open door control.
doors press the Ü or s button on The window for operating the doors opens.
The doors are equipped with automatic blockage the key. The doors can be opened or closed by using
detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle the slider.
stops a door during the automatic closing proc- R Driver's door: depress the brake
# Select Cancel process.
ess, it will automatically open again. The auto- pedal.
The procedure is interrupted and the door
matic reversing function is only an aid and is not a R All doors: pull on the inner or outer remains in the position it has reached.
substitute for your attentiveness. door handles.
# Select Close all.
# During the closing process, make sure that no R All doors: push against or pull the All doors are closed simultaneously.
body parts are in the closing area. door.
% The convenience doors can also be closed
R All doors: touch the touch screen in using MBUX Interior Assist.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped the convenience menu in the multi-
despite reversing function Further information on operating the conveni-
media system. ence doors .
The reversing function will not react:
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. Setting
Setting the
the key
key function for
for the
the convenience
convenience
Setting
Setting convenience
convenience doors doors
R towards the end of the closing process.
Multimedia system: # Select ´.
In these situations in particular, the reversing 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort # Select Key assignment.
function cannot prevent someone being trap- Convenience opening, windows, opening
# Activate or deactivate Convenience doors.
ped. Front door, right and opening Front door, left
# Make sure that no body parts are in the Operating convenience
Operating convenience doors can be set separately for operation with the
closing area. # Select ´. key.
# If someone is trapped, use one of the fol-
lowing options:
96 Opening and closing

Door opening on approach

approach If you push the door into the lock to the rst
# Activate or deactivate the function. detent position, the power closing function will
When the function is activated, the driver's automatically pull the door into the lock.
door opens automatically when the vehicle is % If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or
approached. while pulling away, an automatic closing of the
doors can be triggered.
War
arning
ning of obstacles
obstacles in the
the door area
area
# The vehicle warns you of obstacles in the door
area with acoustic feedback and a graphic dis- Locking/unloc
Locking/unlocking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with the
the emer-
play. gency key
Unloc
nlocking
king a le -hand vehicle door with
with the
the emer-
Power closing function gency key
key element
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 85).
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
the doors close automatically
Body parts or objects can become trapped, If the door handle is retracted:
causing injuries. # Insert a at, non-metallic object behind door
# Ensure that no body parts or objects are handle 1 from above and pry it slightly out-
in the closing area. ward.
# Automatic closing of the doors can be # Reach behind door handle 1 from below, pull
cancelled by pulling the outer or inner it outward to the pressure point and hold it
door handle. there.
 Opening and closing 97

# Forcefully pull door handle 1 outward past # To lock

lock the
the le -hand side of the
the vehicle:
vehicle: turn
the pressure point. the emergency key clockwise as far as it will
# Remove the emergency key and release the go.
door handle. # To lock
lock the
the right-hand
right-hand side of the
the vehicle:
vehicle: turn
the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it
Locking
Locking the
the doors will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer
be opened from the outside.

Load compar
compartment
tment
Opening the
the tailg
tailgate
ate

* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by

obstacles above the vehicle
If the door handle is extended:
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
# Pull door handle 1 outward to the pressure
when it is opened.
point and hold it there. # Make sure that there is su cient space
# Insert the emergency key into the lock cylin- behind and above the tailgate.
der.
# Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to # If the tailgate is unlocked, press the top of the
position 1.
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency Mercedes star.
key, into opening 1 on the door lock.
98 Opening and closing

# Vehicles with
with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
ACCESS: make a # If the tailgate is stopped in an intermediate # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
kicking movement with your foot below the position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as gage or loads against slipping or tipping
bumper (/ page 100). it begins to open. over.
If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the
automatic opening process, blockage detection Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage Notes on closing the
the tailg
tailgat
ate:
e: your vehicle is
detection function is only an aid. It is not a substi- equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key
tute for your attentiveness. belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle,
the tailgate will not be locked.
Note that the tailgate will not be locked in the fol-
Closing the
the tailg
tailgate
ate
lowing situation:
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured R You have locked the vehicle and close the tail-
items in the vehicle gate while a key belonging to the vehicle is
inside the vehicle.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip and
over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi- R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not
cle occupants. detected outside the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not
# Pull remote operating switch 1 until the tail- event of sudden braking or a sudden change a substitute for your attentiveness.
gate opens. in direction. # Before locking, ensure that at least one key
or # Always stow objects in such a way that belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
# Press and hold the H button on the key. they cannot be thrown around.
 Opening and closing 99

# To close the
the tailg
tailgat
ate:
e: pull the tailgate down-
wards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins
to close.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate
Parts of the body could become trapped.
There may be people in the closing area.
# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R Press the H button on the key.
R Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver's door. # Switch on the power supply or the vehicle. # Press closing button 1 on the tailgate.
R Press the closing or locking button on the # Push remote operating switch 1 until the tail- Vehicles with
with KEYLESS-GO
tailgate. gate is fully closed. # Press locking button 2 on the tailgate.
R Press the top of the Mercedes star on the
tailgate. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the
tailgate will close and the vehicle will be
locked.
Vehicles with
with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
ACCESS: it is also
# Press and hold the H button on the key.
possible to stop the closing process by making a
kicking movement below the rear bumper. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.
100 Opening and closing

Vehicles with
with HANDS-FREE ACCESS
ACCESS # Make sure that no body parts are in the
# Make a kicking movement with your foot closing area.
below the bumper (/ page 100). If someone is trapped, either:
Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function for
for the
the tailg
tailgate
ate R Press the H button on the key.
The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage R Press or pull the remote operating switch
detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle on the driver's door.
obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing
R Press the closing or locking button on the
process, it will automatically open again slightly.
Automatic blockage detection with the reversing tailgate.
function is only an aid and is not a substitute for R Press the top of the Mercedes star on the
your attentiveness. tailgate.
# During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
ACCESS function
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close
or stop the closing process of the tailgate by per-
The reversing function will not react: forming a kicking movement under the rear
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers. bumper.
R towards the end of the closing procedure. The kicking movement triggers the opening or
closing process alternately.
In these situations in particular, the reversing
function cannot prevent someone being trap- Observe the notes when opening (/ page 97)
ped. and closing (/ page 98) the tailgate.
 Opening and closing 101

% Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is R Do not come into contact with the bumper System limits
System
opening or closing. while making the kicking movement. The system may be impaired or may not function
R Do not carry out the kicking movement too in the following cases:
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten- slowly. R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
tional opening of the tailgate or a door
R The kicking movement must be towards the snow.
R when using an automatic car wash vehicle and back again. R The kicking movement is made using a pros-
R when using a high pressure cleaner thetic leg.
# Deactivate the function of the key in The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in
these situations. the following situations:
or R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sen-
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum sor detection range, e.g. when polishing the
distance of 3 m (high-pressure cleaner) vehicle or picking up objects.
or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi-
the vehicle. cle, e.g. a charging cable or luggage.
R Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings
When making the kicking movement, make sure are pulled over the bumper.
that you are standing rmly on the ground. You 1 Detection range of the sensors
could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. R A protective mat with a length reaching over
If several consecutive kicking movements are not the boot sill down into the detection range of
Observe the following notes: successful, wait ten seconds. the sensors is used.
R The key is behind the vehicle.
R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle
R Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers
while performing the kicking movement. or rear bicycle racks.
102 Opening and closing

Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 84) or Unloc

nlocking
king the
the tailg
tailgat
atee with
with the
the emergency
emergency key # Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in
do not carry the key about your person in such the trim and push it in the direction of the
situations. Req
equir
uirements:
ements: arrow.
R The rear seat backrest has been folded
The tailgate will be unlocked.
forward.
Limiting the
the opening angle of the
the tailg
tailgate
ate R The load compartment cover has been
Activ
ctivating
ating the
the opening angle limiter
limiter removed. Side windows
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in Opening and closing the
the side windows
the top half of its opening range up to a point
shortly before the end position. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
# Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at opening a side window
the desired position. When you open a side window, parts of the
# Press and hold the closing button on the tail- body could be drawn in or become trapped
gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. between the side window and window frame.
The opening angle limiter will be activated. The # When opening, make sure that nobody is
tailgate will then stop in the stored position touching the side window.
when opened. # If someone is trapped, release the but-

To open the tailgate fully, pull the top part of the ton immediately or pull it in order to
Mercedes star on the tailgate again a er it has close the side window again.
stopped automatically.
Deactivating the
Deactivating the opening angle limiter
limiter
# Press and hold the closing button on the tail- # Remove the emergency key (/ page 85).
gate until two short acoustic signals sound.
 Opening and closing 103

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when Req

equir
uirements:
ements: # To star
startt automatic
automatic operation:
operation: press the W
R The power supply or the vehicle has been button beyond the point of resistance or pull
closing a side window
switched on. and release it.
When closing a side window, body parts could # To interr
interrup
uptt automatic
automatic operation:
operation: press or pull
be trapped in the closing area in the process.
the W button again.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area. When the vehicle is switched o , you can con-
# If someone is trapped, release the but-
tinue to operate the side windows.
ton immediately or press the button in Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function of the
the side windows
order to reopen the side window. If an obstacle impedes a side window during the
closing process, the side window will open again
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when automatically. The automatic reversing function is
children operate the side windows only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten-
tiveness.
Children could become trapped if they operate
# During the closing process, make sure that no
the side windows, particularly when unatten-
ded. body parts are in the closing area.
# Activate the child safety lock for the rear
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
side windows. despite there being reversing protection
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the 1 Closing on the side window
key with you and lock the vehicle. 2 To open The reversing function does not react:
# Never leave children unattended in the
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
vehicle.
R during resetting.
104 Opening and closing

The reversing function cannot prevent some- The side windows will be closed as far as the ven- # Release the button immediately if some-
one from becoming trapped in these situa- tilation position. body becomes trapped.
tions. Vehicles with
with a panorama
panorama sliding sunroof:
sunroof: the side
# During the closing process, make sure windows will be closed completely if the sliding Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
sunroof is open. R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
that no body parts are in the closing
area. If the side windows are obstructed during auto- cle.
# If someone becomes trapped, press the matic closing, the side window concerned will # Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
W button to open the side window open again slightly. A er another automatic clos-
ing process, the automatic function for the sun- The following functions are performed:
again.
roof and side windows may be deactivated. The R The vehicle is unlocked.
automatic function will be active again the next R The side windows are opened.
Aut
utomatic
omatic function of the
the side windows time the vehicle is started. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened.
In the following cases, the side windows will be R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
closed automatically when the vehicle is switched Convenience
Conv enience opening (ventilating
(ventilating the
the vehicle
vehicle switched on.
o : beforee star
befor starting
ting a journe
journey)
y)
% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding
R if it starts to rain
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind- ing a side window opened rst.
screen. # To interr
interrup
uptt convenience
convenience opening: release the
When opening a side window, parts of the
R in extreme temperatures Ü button.
body could be drawn in or become trapped
R a er a certain time (depending on the on- between the side window and window frame. # To continue convenience
convenience opening: press and
board electrical system voltage) # When opening, make sure that nobody is hold the Ü button again.
R if there is a malfunction in the power supply touching the side window.
 Opening and closing 105

Convenience closing (closing the

Convenience the vehicle
vehicle from
from out- # To interr
interrup
uptt convenience
convenience closing: release the A side window
window cannot
cannot be closed and you
you cannot
side) s button. see the
the cause.
# To continue convenience
convenience closing: press and # Check to see whether any objects are in the
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not hold the s button again. window guide.
paying attention during convenience clos- # Adjust the side windows.
ing % Convenience closing also functions with KEY-
LESS-GO (/ page 88).
When the convenience closing feature is oper- Adjus
djusting
ting the
the side windows
windows
ating, parts of the body could become trapped If a side window is obstructed during closing and
in the closing area of the side window and the Resol
esolving
ving problems
problems with
with the
the side windows
reopens again immediately:
sliding sunroof. # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre-
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
# When the convenience closing feature is
fatally injured if reversing protection is not sponding button again until the side window
operating, monitor the entire closing activated has closed and hold the button for at least one
process and make sure that no body more second (re-adjustment).
parts are in the closing area. If you close a side window again immediately The side window will be closed without the
a er it has been blocked, the side window will automatic reversing function.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: close with increased or maximum force. The
R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi- reversing function is then not active and body If the side window is obstructed again and
cle. parts may become trapped. reopens again immediately:
# Make sure that no parts of the body are # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre-
# Press and hold the s button on the key.
in the closing area. sponding button again until the side window
The following functions are performed: # To stop the closing process, release the has closed and hold the button for at least one
R The vehicle is locked. more second (follow-up adjustment).
button or press the button again to
R The side windows are closed. reopen the side window. The side window will be closed without the
R The panoramic sliding roof is closed. automatic reversing function.
106 Opening and closing

The side windows

windows cannot
cannot be opened or closed # During the opening and closing process, & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
using the
the convenience
convenience opening featur
feature.
e. make sure that no body parts are in the the roller sunblind is being opened and
Possible causes: sweep of the sliding sunroof. closed
R The key battery is weak or discharged. # If someone is trapped, release the con-
trol panel immediately. Body parts may become trapped between the
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.
or # During the opening or closing process,
(/ page 83).
# Touch the control panel during automatic make sure that no body parts are in the
# Replace the key battery, if necessary operation.
(/ page 85). roller sunblind's range of movement.
The opening/closing process will be # If someone is trapped, release the con-
stopped. trol panel immediately.
Sliding sunroof
sunroof or
Opening and closing the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid- # Touch the control panel during automatic
ing sunroof is operated by children operation.
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pano-
rama sliding sunroof. Children operating the sliding sunroof could The opening/closing process will be
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if stopped.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when unattended.
the sliding sunroof is being opened and # Never leave children unattended in the * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
closed vehicle.
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Body parts may become trapped in the range malfunction.
of movement. key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
 Opening and closing 107

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding

# To raise
raise or lower
lower:: press control panel 1
objects brie y.
# To star
startt automatic
automatic operation:
operation: swipe forwards
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof or backwards across control panel 1.
may damage the seals.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from
# To cancel automatic
automatic operation:
operation: press control
panel 1 again.
the sliding sunroof.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.
* NOTE Damage to panorama sliding sun- Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function of the
the sliding sun-
roof caused by roof luggage rack roof
If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during
If the panorama sliding sunroof is opened the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open
when a roof luggage rack is tted, the pano- again automatically. The automatic reversing func-
rama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
roof luggage rack. attentiveness.
# Do not open the panorama sliding sun- # During the closing process, make sure that no
roof if a roof luggage rack is tted. The sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind are
operated using control panel 1. body parts are in the closing area.
The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
only when the roller sunblind is open. despite reversing function
# To open: swipe backwards across control
The reversing function will not react:
panel 1 and hold.
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
# To close: swipe forwards across control panel
R towards the end of the closing procedure.
1 and hold.
108 Opening and closing

R during resetting. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-
despite reversing function screen.
# During the closing process, make sure R in extreme temperatures
that no body parts are in the closing In particular, the reversing function does not
area. react to so , light and thin objects, e.g. n- R a er a certain time (depending on the on-
# If someone is trapped, release the con- gers. board electrical system voltage)
trol panel immediately. # When closing the roller sunblind, make R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
or sure that no body parts are in the range The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to
# Touch the control panel during automatic of movement. continue ventilating the vehicle interior.
# If someone is trapped, release the con-
closing. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an auto-
The closing process will be stopped. trol panel immediately.
matic closing procedure, the roof will be opened
or again slightly. The automatic function for the slid-
Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function of the
the roller
roller sunblind # Touch the control panel during automatic ing sunroof and the side windows will then be
If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during closing. deactivated.
the closing process, the roller sunblind will open The closing process will be stopped.
again automatically. The automatic reversing func- Rain closing function when driving
driving
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your Vehicles with
with a panorama
panorama sliding sunroof:
sunroof: if it
attentiveness. Aut
utomatic
omatic functions of the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will auto-
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure matically be lowered while the vehicle is in
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pano- motion.
that no body parts are in the range of move- rama sliding sunroof.
ment. Aut
utomatic
omatic lower
lowering
ing function
The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically
when the vehicle has been switched o in the fol- Vehicles with
with a panorama
panorama sliding sunroof:
sunroof: if the
lowing situations: sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will auto-
matically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At
R if it starts to rain low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
 Opening and closing 109

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by # Make sure that no parts of the body are # Repeat the previous step.
automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof in the closing area. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with
# If someone is trapped, release the con- increased force.
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof trol panel immediately.
will automatically be lowered slightly at the The sliding sunroof
sunroof or the
the roller
roller sunblind is not
rear. or operating
oper ating smoothly.
smoothly.
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the # Touch the control panel during automatic # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-

sliding sunroof's range of movement closing. blind.

while the vehicle is in motion. The closing process will be stopped.
Rese
esetting
tting the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof and the
the roller
roller sun-
# If someone becomes trapped, touch the
The sliding sunroof
sunroof cannot
cannot be closed and you
you can- blind
control panel. nott see the
no the cause. # Swipe forwards across the control panel
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pano- (/ page 106) and hold repeatedly until the
Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof rama sliding sunroof. sliding sunroof is completely closed.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing # Press and hold the control panel for another
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or and reopens again slightly: second.
fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is # Immediately a er automatic reversing, swipe # Press and hold the control panel until the front
closed again forwards across the control panel roller sunblind is completely closed.
If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi- (/ page 106) and hold until the sliding sun- # Press and hold the control panel for another
ately a er it has been blocked or reset, the roof is closed. second.
sliding sunroof will close with increased or The sliding sunroof will be closed with # Use automatic operation to fully open and
maximum force. increased force.
then close the sliding sunroof.
There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of
fatal injuries! If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and
opens again slightly:
110 Opening and closing

Anti-the prot
Anti-the protection
ection The ATA system is primed automatically a er The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the
approximately ten seconds in the following situa- following situations:
Function of the
the immobiliser tions: R a er unlocking the vehicle with the key
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being R a er locking the vehicle with the key R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
started without the correct key. R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R a er pressing the start/stop button with the
The immobiliser is automatically activated when key in the stowage compartment
the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when (/ page 194)
the vehicle is switched on.
% When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call sys-
ATA (Anti-
(Anti-The
The Alar
Alarmm system)
system) tem is active and the alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, a message is automatically
Function of the
the ATA
ATA syst
system
em sent to the Customer Assistance Centre
If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible (/ page 373).
alarm is triggered in the following situations: Deactivating the
Deactivating the ATA
R when a door is opened # Press the Ü, s or H button on the
R when the tailgate is opened key.
R when interior protection is triggered or
(/ page 111) # Press the start/stop button with the key in the
R when tow-away protection is triggered stowage compartment (/ page 194)
(/ page 111) Deactivating the
Deactivating the alarm
alarm using KEYLESS-GO
Example: with MBUX hyperscreen # With the key outside the vehicle, touch the
Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is inner surface of the door handle.
primed.
 Opening and closing 111

Function of tow-awa
tow -awayy protection
protection Information on collision detection on a parked R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
vehicle (/ page 230).
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alter- Interior protection is only primed when the follow-
ation to your vehicle's angle of inclination is ing components are closed:
detected while tow-away protection is primed. Priming/deactiv
Pr iming/deactivating
ating tow-awa
tow -awayy protection
protection R doors
Tow-away protection is automatically primed a er Multimedia system: R tailgate
approximately 60 seconds: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
R a er locking the vehicle with the key 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle protection
Interior protection is automatically deactivated:
R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R a er pressing the Ü or H button on the
# Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.
key
Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol- Tow-away protection is primed again in the follow- R a er pressing the start/stop button with the
lowing components are closed: ing cases: key in the stowage compartment
R doors R The vehicle is unlocked again. (/ page 194)
R tailgate R A door is opened. R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated: R The vehicle is locked again. R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R a er pressing the Ü or H button on the The following situations can lead to a false alarm:
key Function of inter
interior
ior prot
protection
ection R when there are moving objects such as mas-
R a er pressing the start/stop button with the When interior protection is primed, a visual and cots in the vehicle interior
key in the stowage compartment audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected R when a side window is open
(/ page 194) in the vehicle interior. R when a panoramic sliding sunroof is open
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Interior protection is primed automatically a er
R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS approximately ten seconds:
R a er locking the vehicle with the key
112 Opening and closing

Priming/deactiv
Pr iming/deactivating
ating inter
interior
ior protection
protection
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle protection

# Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor.

Interior protection is primed again in the following

cases:
R The vehicle is unlocked again.
R A door is opened.
R The vehicle is locked again.
 Seats and stowing 113

Notes on the
the correct
correct driv
driver's
er's seat position R You can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- R You can move your legs freely
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is R You can see all the displays on the instrument
in motion cluster clearly
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- R You have a good overview of the tra c condi-
lowing situations in particular: tions
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and passes across the centre of your shoulder
while the vehicle is in motion Ensure the following when adjusting the steering and across your hips in the pelvic area
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
cle is in motion R You are sitting as far away from the driver's Seats
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, airbag as possible, taking the following points
into consideration: Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front seat electrically
electrically
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten R You are sitting in an upright position & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
your seat belt. R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat seats are adjusted by children
cushion Children could become trapped if they adjust
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can the seats, particularly when unattended.
depress the pedals properly # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
R The back of your head is supported at eye key with you and lock the vehicle.
level by the centre of the head restraint # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
114 Seats and stowing

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- & WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly
switched o . cle is in motion adjusted head restraints
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, If head restraints have not been adjusted cor-
ing seat adjustment adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, rectly, there is an increased risk of injury in
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle your seat belt. accident or sudden braking.
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
# Before driving o , make sure for every
seat guide rail.
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the vehicle occupant that the centre of the
seat height is adjusted carelessly head restraint supports the back of the
one has any body parts in the sweep of head at about eye level.
the seat. If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- thereby injured. that it is as close as possible to the back of your
dren in the vehicle". Children in particular could accidentally press head.
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- become trapped. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is incorrect seat position
# While moving the seats, make sure that
in motion
hands or other body parts do not get The seat belt will not o er the intended level
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- under the lever assembly of the seat of protection if you have not moved the seat
lowing situations in particular: adjustment system. backrest to an almost vertical position.
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and injure yourself.
while the vehicle is in motion
 Seats and stowing 115

# Adjust the seat properly before begin- # When moving the seats back, make sure
ning your journey. that there are no objects in the footwell,
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is under or behind the seats.
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is The switches for adjusting the seats do not move.
routed across the centre of your shoul- You will therefore receive no direct feedback on
der. the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is
provided only by the movement of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can
interfere with the function of the automatic
co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
# Do not store any objects under the co-
driver seat. 1 Head restraint height
# When the co-driver seat is occupied,
2 Seat height
make sure that no objects are trapped 3
under the co-driver seat. Seat cushion inclination
4 Seat cushion length
5 Seat fore-and-a position
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
the seats back 6 Seat backrest inclination
The seats may be damaged by objects when # Save the settings with the memory function
moving the seats back. (/ page 130).
116 Seats and stowing

% The head restraint height will be adjusted You can call up the following functions for the Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat electrically
electrically
automatically when you adjust the seat height front passenger seat: from
fr om the
the rear
rear
or the seat fore-and-a position. R Seat adjustment
R Seat heating
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the fr
front
ont passenger
passenger seat electrically
electrically R Seat ventilation
from
fr om the
the driv
driver's
er's seat
R Memory function

# To select the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat: press but-
ton 1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front
passenger seat is selected.
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the but-
tons on the driver's side door operating unit.

1 Select front passenger seat

2 Head restraint height
3 Seat backrest inclination
4 Seat height
5 Seat fore-and-a position
 Seats and stowing 117

# To select the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat: press but- Adjus
djusting
ting the
the 4-way
4-way lumbar support Adjus
djusting
ting the
the rear
rear seats electrically
electrically
ton 1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
passenger seat is selected. incorrect seat position
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the but- The seat belt will not o er the intended level
tons on the door operating unit in the rear of protection if you have not moved the seat
passenger compartment. backrest to an almost vertical position.
% You can use the rear-compartment child In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
safety lock to disable this function and injure yourself.
(/ page 81). # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
1 Higher
The switches for adjusting the seats do not move.
2 So er You will therefore receive no direct feedback on
3 Lower the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is
4 Firmer provided only by the movement of the seat.
# Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of
the backrest.
118 Seats and stowing

Head res
restr
traints
aints the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the head res
restr
traints
aints on the
the front
front seats accident or sudden braking.
# Before driving o , make sure for every
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- vehicle occupant that the centre of the
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is head restraint supports the back of the
in motion head at about eye level.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular: Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
head.
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion Moving
Moving forw
forwar
ardd or back
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
1 Head restraint height adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
2 Seat backrest inclination steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
# Make the appropriate adjustments.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly
adjusted head restraints
If head restraints have not been adjusted cor- # Take hold of the head restraint on both sides
rectly, there is an increased risk of injury in and press release knob 1.
 Seats and stowing 119

# Pull the headrest forwards or push it back- # Pull the headrest forwards or push it back- # To set
set in the
the rst position: pull the head
wards. wards. restraint up.
# Let go of release knob 1. # Let go of release knob 1. # To raise:
raise: push release knob 1 in the direc-
# To raise
raise or lower
lower:: adjust the head restraint # To raise
raise or lower
lower:: adjust the head restraint tion of the arrow and pull the head restraint
using the buttons on the door operating unit using the buttons on the door operating unit up.
(/ page 113). (/ page 113). # To lower:
lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the luxury
luxur y head res
restr
traints
aints on the
the front
front Adjus
djusting
ting the
the head res
restr
traints
aints of the
the rear
rear seats tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
seats mechanicall
mec hanicallyy (standar
(standardd seats) down.
Moving
Moving forw
forwar
ardd or back

# Take hold of the head restraint on both sides

and press release knob 1.
120 Seats and stowing

Att
ttac
aching
hing and remo
removing
ving the
the additional cushion of # Bring both straps 3 and 4 together on the Att
ttac
aching
hing and remo
removing
ving the
the additional cushion of
the head res
restr
traint
aint in the
the rear
rear compar
compartment
tment underside of the head restraint and close Vel- the head res
restr
traint
aint in the
the rear
rear compar
compartment
tment (pre-
(pre-
(standar
(st andardd seats) cro fastening 5. mium seats)
# To remov
removee the
the additional cushion: open Velcro
fastening 5.
# Remove additional cushion 1.

# To attac
attachh the
the additional cushion: guide long # To attac
attachh the
the additional cushion: open Velcro
strap 3 of additional cushion 1 over the strip 4 on the rear of additional cushion 1.
back of head restraint 2. # Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint
# Guide short strap 4 of additional cushion 1 2 and strip 3.
under head restraint 2. # Close Velcro strip 4.
 Seats and stowing 121

# Change the
Change the position of the
the additional cushion: Switching
Switc hing neck
neck heating from
from the
the additional cush- # To fold
fold into
into position: pull the head restraint
move additional cushion 1 up or down. ion on/o upwards until it engages.
# To remov
removee additional cushion: open Velcro # Make sure that press-studs 2 on the addi-
Folding down
down
strip 4 of additional cushion 1. tional strap are correctly pushed into counter-
# Remove additional cushion 1. pieces 1 on the head restraint.
# Ensure that the "Couple neck heating to seat
Att
ttac
aching
hing a heated
heated additional cushion heating" function is active (/ page 122) in
# Attach the additional cushion to the head the multimedia system.
restraint as described. # Activate or deactivate the seat heating
# Move the head restraint to the very top. (/ page 124).
Folding the
the centre
centre head res
restr
traint
aint into
into position and
folding it back
back manually
manually (premium
(premium seats)

# Press button 1.
# Fold down the head restraint completely.
# Push press-studs 2 on the additional strap
into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint. The centre head restraint has a usage position
# Move the head restraint to the desired height. and a non-usage position. The usage position is
122 Seats and stowing

the upright position in which the head restraint is Coupling neck

neck heat to
to seat heating
locked; the non-usage position is the position in If there is a risk of someone becoming trap-
# Select Additional neck warmer. ped, stop the adjustment process immedi-
which the head restraint is folded downwards.
When the centre seat is used, the head restraint
# Switch the function for the desired seat on or ately:
must be in the upright, locked usage position. o . # a) Tap the warning message on the cen-
If the function is active, the neck heat of the tral display.
additional cushion has been coupled to the
Con guring
guring the seat settings
settings seat heating. or
# b) Press a memory function position but-
Multimedia system: ton or a seat adjustment switch on the
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Setting
Setting automatic
automatic seat adjustment
adjustment driver's door.
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the air cushions The adjustment process will be stopped.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
# On the corresponding menu, adjust the air ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er Multimedia system:
cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side bol- calling up a driver pro le 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
sters. Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust- 5 Position seat automatically
Setting
Setting the
the seat heating balance ment of the driver's seat to the position saved
under the user pro le. You or other vehicle Manually adjusting
Manually adjusting driv
driver's
er's seat and steer
steering
ing
# Select Heating settings.
occupants could be injured in the process. wheel position toto body size
# Select Seat heating balance.
# Make sure that when the position of the The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and
# Adjust the heat distribution for the desired driver's seat is being adjusted via the steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's
seat. multimedia system, no people or body body size and sets this directly.
parts are in the seat's range of move- # To set
set the
the unit of measurement
measurement:: select cm or
% The seat heating balance can be set in the
Seat climate control menu in the rear. ment. ft/in.
# Set the size using the scale.
 Seats and stowing 123

# Select Start positioning. % If the driver's seat and steering wheel position R Activating Massage Activating massage pro-
The driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or gramme with upward-moving relaxing waves.
is adjusted to the body size that has been set. comfortable, it can be manually adapted at R Classic Massage Calming back massage pro-
% You can also con gure these settings via the any time via the control buttons. gramme.
Mercedes me user account for your user pro- The outside mirrors are not set via this func-
tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via R Wave Massage Regenerating massage pro-
le. By synchronising the pro les in the vehi- gramme via relaxing waves across the back
cle and the Mercedes me connect pro les, the operating switches.
and in the seat cushion.
you can carry over these settings for your
vehicle. Further information about synchronis- R Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage pro-
Over
Overvie
view
w of massage
massage progr
programmes
ammes
ing user pro les . gramme with upward-moving relaxing waves.
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, di erent Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This
Aut
utomaticall
omaticallyy adjusting
adjusting driv
driver's
er's seat and steer
steering
ing massage programmes are available: can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and
wheel position to to body size R Relaxing Massage Relaxing back massage the brain.
If the vehicle has the Interior Assistant, the driv- with increasing wave motions and then sooth- R Workout, backrest and Workout, cushion
er's body size can be determined automatically ing movements. These programs require your cooperation.
using the 3D laser cameras in the overhead con- Alternating between tensing and releasing
trol panel. R Hot Relaxing back Based on hot stone mas-
sage, the programme combines heat and mas- helps to improve blood ow to your muscles.
# Wait until the Interior Assistant has deter- Press against a pressure point as soon as you
sage. It starts by massaging the back. In addi-
mined the body size. tion, warm pressure points become noticea- feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg
# Select Start positioning. ble, starting in the pelvic area. muscles.
The driver's seat and steering wheel position R Hot Relaxing shoulders Combination of heat R Depth waves Wave-like movements in the
is adjusted to the body size that has been and massage. It starts by massaging the cushion can promote blood ow and meta-
determined. shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points bolic processes in the lower back and legs.
% Further information on the Interior Assistant: become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. R Deep workout Connect the Workout, back-
(/ page 333) rest to the Workout, cushion. The vibrating
124 Seats and stowing

massage in the cushion intensi es the e ec- Switching

Switching the
the seat heating on/o ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions
tiveness of tensing and releasing muscles or child seats. This could cause damage to the
when you tense against the pressure point. & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly seat surface.
This supports metabolic processes and blood switching on the seat heating # Make sure that no objects or documents
ow in the buttocks and legs.
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can are on the seats when the seat heater is
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- switched on.
Selecting the
the massage
massage progr
programme
amme for
for the
the front
front ding to become very hot.
seats In particular, the health of persons with limited Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to R The power supply is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage react to high temperatures may be a ected or
they may even su er burn-like injuries.
# Select a massage programme (/ page 123).
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
# Start the program for the desired seat ;. heating.
# To set
set the
the massage
massage intensity
intensity:: switch
switch High
intensity on or o . To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been
switched on repeatedly.
Rese
esetting
tting seat settings
settings
Multimedia system: * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
objects or documents when the seat
heater is switched on
# Select Reset.
When the seat heater is switched on, over-
# Select ß for the desired seat.
heating may occur due to objects or docu-
 Seats and stowing 125

% If you switch the power supply o and on

again within 20 minutes, the previous setting
of the seat heating for the driver's seat will
remain active.
% You can set the heat distribution of the heated
sections among the seat cushions and seat
backrests on the front and rear seats using
the multimedia system (/ page 122).

Switching
Switching the
the seat ventilation
ventilation on/o
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The power supply is switched on.

# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired

heating level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator
lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o .
% The seat heating will automatically switch
down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10
and 20 minutes until the seat heating
switches o .
126 Seats and stowing

ventilation setting for the driver's seat will & WARNING Risk of entrapment for children
remain active. when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust
Steer
eering
ing wheel the steering wheel.
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the steer
steering
ing wheel electrically
electrically # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is key with you and lock the vehicle.
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
lowing situations in particular: power supply is disconnected.
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
blower setting has been reached. cle is in motion
Depending on the blower setting, up to three
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
o . steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
% If you switch the power supply o and on
again within 20 minutes, the previous seat
 Seats and stowing 127

Coupling the
the steer
steering
ing wheel heater
heater with
with the
the seat Easy entry
entr y and exit
exit feature
feature
heating
Using the
the easy entry
entr y and exit
exit feature
feature
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The power supply or the vehicle has been & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling
switched on. away during the adjustment process of
the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat You could lose control of the vehicle.
5 Heating settings # Always wait until the adjustment process

# Tap on Additional steering wheel heater.

is complete before driving o .
The steering wheel heater will be coupled to
the seat heating. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing adjustment of the easy entry and exit
When the function has been activated, the steer- feature
ing wheel heater is automatically activated and
deactivated when you switch the switch the seat You and other vehicle occupants – particularly
1 To move up children – could become trapped.
heating on and o .
2 To move back # Ensure that no one has a body part in
3 To move down the sweep of the steering wheel or driv-
4 To move forward er's seat.
# Save the settings with the memory function If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
(/ page 130). steering wheel:
128 Seats and stowing

# Move the adjustment lever of the steer- # Never leave children unattended in the The driver's seat will then move backwards
ing wheel. vehicle. only if it is not already at the rear of the seat
The adjustment process will be stopped. adjustment range.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the back to the last drive position in the following
driver's seat: In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the cases:
# Press the seat adjustment switch. automatic seat adjustment function must have R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on
The adjustment process will be stopped. been switched on (/ page 122). when the driver's door is closed
# Never leave children unattended in the When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is
vehicle. steering wheel and driver's seat will move as fol- switched on.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the lows:
The last drive position will be saved when:
key with you and lock the vehicle. R The steering wheel will move upwards.
R You switch o the vehicle.
R The driver's seat will move forward or back-
You can stop the adjustment process by pressing ward to a seat position suitable for getting out
R You call up the seat settings via the memory
one of the memory function position switches. of the vehicle. function.
R You save the seat settings via the memory
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if This will occur in the following situations: function.
children activate the easy entry and exit R You switch o the vehicle when the driver's
feature‑ door is open. If you press one of the memory function position
switches, the adjustment process will be stopped.
Children could become trapped if they acti- R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is
vate the easy entry‑ and exit feature, particu- switched o .
larly when unattended.
% The steering wheel will then move upwards
only if it is not already as high as it will go.
 Seats and stowing 129

Setting
Setting the
the easy entry
entr y and exit
exit feature
feature Memoryy function
Memor parts are in the area of movement of the
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Function of the
the memory
memor y function seat or the steering wheel.
R The automatic seat adjustment has been acti- # If someone becomes trapped, press a
vated (/ page 122). & WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem- preset position button or seat adjust-
ory function is used while driving ment switch immediately.
Multimedia system: The adjustment process is stopped.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort If you use the memory function on the driver's
5 Easy entry and exit feature
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the mem-
# Activate/deactivate seat positioning or steer- being made. ory function is activated by children
ing wheel positioning. # Only use the memory function on the Children could become trapped if they acti-
% If you are using an individual user pro le, this driver's side when the vehicle is station- vate the memory function, particularly when
information is used for the easy entry and exit ary. unattended.
feature. This will cause the driver's seat and # Never leave children unattended in the
steering wheel to move into the correct posi- & WARNING Risk of entrapment when vehicle.
tion automatically . adjusting the seat with the memory func- # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Lowering
Lower ing the
the window tion key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Activate or deactivate the function. When the memory function adjusts the seat,
The front windows lower to an intermediate you and other vehicle occupants – particularly You can use the memory function when the vehi-
position when the doors are opened. children – could become trapped. cle is switched o .
# During the adjusting process of the
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
memory function, ensure that no body
130 Seats and stowing

You can save the following settings for the front Operating
Oper ating the
the memory
memor y function # Press one of the preset position buttons 4,
seat: T or U within three seconds.
Stor
oring
ing An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and
contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar stored.
region # To call up: press the preset position button
R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec-
4, T or U.
tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest The seat is moved to the stored position. A er
releasing the button, the front seat, outside
R Driver's side: steering wheel position and posi- mirror, head-up display and steering column
tion of the outside mirrors on the driver's and continue to move into the stored position
front passenger sides automatically.
R Head-up display

Stowag
agee areas
areas
Notes on loading the
the vehicle
vehicle

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured

items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
# Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip
display and the outside mirror to the desired over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi-
position. cle occupants.
# Press the V button and then release it.
 Seats and stowing 131

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the # Always make sure that objects do not is always su cient clearance for the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change protrude from stowage spaces, luggage pedals.
in direction. nets or stowage nets. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not
# Always stow objects in such a way that # Close the lockable stowage spaces lay multiple oor mats on top of one
they cannot be thrown around. before starting a journey. another.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug- # Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
gage or loads against slipping or tipping hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag
over. large in the load compartment. shuto : objects trapped under the front
shuto
passenger seat may interfere with the function of
the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects & WARNING Risk of accident from objects in damage the system. Please observe the notes on
being stowed incorrectly the driver's footwell and front-passenger the function of the automatic front passenger air-
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed footwell bag shuto (/ page 54).
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around Objects in the driver's footwell and front-
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile block a depressed pedal. when using the cup holder while the vehi-
phone brackets cannot always retain all This jeopardises the operating and road safety cle is in motion
objects they contain. of the vehicle. The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely while the vehicle is in motion.
event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt so that they cannot get into the driver's If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in
changes in direction. footwell or front-passenger footwell. motion, the container may be ung around
# Always stow objects so that they cannot # Always t the oor mats securely and as and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occu-
be thrown around in such situations. prescribed in order to ensure that there pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
132 Seats and stowing

could be distracted from tra c conditions and & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open The driving characteristics of your vehicle are
you may lose control of the vehicle. load compartment oor dependent on the distribution of the load within
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle
the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind
If you drive with the load compartment oor when loading the vehicle:
is stationary. open, objects could be ung around and hit R never exceed the permissible gross mass or
# Only use the cup holder for containers of vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk the permissible axle loads for the vehicle
the right size. of injury, particularly in the event of sudden (including occupants).
# Always close the container, particularly if braking or a sudden change in direction.
# Always close the load compartment oor
Information can be found on the vehicle identi-
the liquid is hot. cation plate (/ page 432).
before a journey.
R the load must not protrude above the upper
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder edge of the seat backrests.
* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart-
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup ment under the ashtray due to intense R when transporting objects in the load com-
holder could become damaged. heat partment, always install the load compartment
# Only fold the rear armrest back when the cover and partitioning net.
cup holder is closed. The stowage compartment under the ashtray R always place the load behind unoccupied
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if
seats if possible.
you rest a lit cigarette on it.
* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to # Make sure that the ashtray is fully
R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and
body weight distribute the load evenly.
engaged.
When folded out, the rear armrest can be Notes on driving with a roof load
damaged by body weight. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place
# Do not sit or support yourself on the rear heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with
seat armrest. the notes on loading the vehicle.
 Seats and stowing 133

R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling % The rubber mat in the stowage compartment
away, braking and steering as well as rapid in front centre console 3 can be removed
cornering. for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water.
R When transporting roof loads and when the Please comply with the notes on caring for
vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select the interior (/ page 393).
drive programs ; and A. These are % Use the rubber strap to securely store objects
designed to focus on stability (/ page 203). in the stowage tray under the central display.
% For more information on stowage compart- Opening and closing the
the stow
stowag
agee compar
compartment
tment in
ments and stowage areas, please refer to the the front
front centre
centre console
Digital Owner's Manual.
1 Stowage spaces in the doors & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
2 Stowage and telephone compartment being stowed incorrectly
Stowag
agee spaces in the
the vehicle
vehicle inter
interior
ior beneath the armrest with charging module for
wireless charging of mobile phones, multime- If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the front
front stowag
stowagee compar
compartments
tments incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
dia and USB ports as well as stowage space,
e.g. for an MP3 player and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
console with cup holders, USB ports and phone brackets cannot always retain all
charging module for wireless charging of objects they contain.
mobile phones There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
4 Stowage tray below the central display of the event of sudden braking or a sudden change
multimedia system with USB ports in direction.
5 Glove compartment
134 Seats and stowing

# Always stow objects in such a way that # To open: slide the cover of the stowage com- Opening and closing the
the glove
glove compar
compartment
tment
they cannot be thrown around in such partment in the front centre console all the
situations. way forwards in the direction of the arrow
using handle 1.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage # To close: brie y push handle 1 of the open
nets or stowage nets. cover of the stowage compartment in the front
centre console forwards.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces
The cover automatically closes the stowage
before starting a journey.
compartment in the front centre console.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

# To open: press button 1.

The glove compartment is open.
# To close: fold the glove compartment
upwards.
The glove compartment is closed.
 Seats and stowing 135

Through-loading ffeatur
Through-loading eaturee in the
the rear
rear bench
bench seat R A child restraint system is no longer prop- R Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear
(EASY-PAC
(EASY-PACKK Quickf
Quickfold)
old) erly supported or properly positioned and armrest has been folded up.
Folding the
the rear
rear seat backr
backres
ests
ts forw
forward
ard may no longer ful l its function as inten- Folding the
the rear
rear seat backr
backres
ests
ts forw
forwar
ardd mechani-
mechani-
ded. cally
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects You can fold the centre and right seat backrests
adjusting the seats or goods in the boot or load compartment. forwards separately.
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself Always ensure that the seat backrest is The le seat backrest can be folded forwards only
or a vehicle occupant. engaged, especially: together with the centre seat backrest.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that R A er the seat has been adjusted. Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com-
no one has any body parts in the sweep partment" do not have a centre seat backrest.
R A er the load compartment enlargement
of the seat. If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat
has been folded forwards
backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back
& WARNING Risk of an accident because into place.
Make sure that the red marking of the lock veri -
the seat backrest is not engaged cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, # Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an

The seat backrest may fold forwards. the seat backrest will not be locked. upright position and engaged with the le seat
backrest (/ page 139).
There is a risk of the following, in particular: Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil-
protect as intended and could cause addi- dren.
tional injury. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully
inserted.
136 Seats and stowing

The le seat backrest can be folded forwards only

together with the centre seat backrest.
Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com-
partment" do not have a centre seat backrest.
If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat
backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back
into place.
# Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an
upright position and engaged with the le seat
backrest (/ page 139).

# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into # Pull release lever 1.
marked position 2. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest for-
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for- wards.
wards, if necessary.
Folding the
the rear
rear seat backr
backres
ests
ts forw
forwar
ardd electri-
electri-
cally
You can fold the centre and right seat backrests
forwards separately.
 Seats and stowing 137

# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into # In the rear: pull release lever 1. # In the load compartment: brie y pull one of
marked position 2. buttons 1.
# If at least one section of the rear seat back- The corresponding seat backrest will be
rest is folded forwards, the corresponding unlocked.
front seat will move forwards slightly, if neces- If the le seat backrest is not locked with the
sary, to avoid a collision. The rear head centre seat backrest, this will be shown on the
restraints are lowered as required. driver's display.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for-
wards.
138 Seats and stowing

Folding the
the centre
centre rear
rear seat backr
backres
estt forw
forwar
ards
ds # Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.
separat
separ ately
ely
If you no longer require the folded-down seat Folding back
back the
the rear
rear seat backr
backrest
est
backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back
into place. * NOTE
NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt when folding back the seat back-
Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com- rest
partment" do not have a centre seat backrest.
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
be damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat backrest.

Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com-

partment" do not have a centre seat backrest.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for-
wards, if necessary.
# Swing seat backrest 1 back until it engages.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked
in place, red lock veri cation indicator 2 will
be visible.

# Press release catch 3.

 Seats and stowing 139

Locking and releasing

Locking releasing the
the release
release catch
catch of the
the # To lock
lock or unlock:
unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or * NOTE Damage to the load compartment
centree rear
centr rear seat backr
backrest
est downwards. cover when loading the vehicle
You can lock the centre seat backrest release
catch if you want to secure the boot against unau- The load compartment cover may be damaged
thorised access. The centre seat backrest can EASY-PACK
EASY-PAC K load compar
compartment
tment cover
cover and parti-
par ti- when the vehicle is being loaded.
then be folded forwards only together with the le tioning net
net cassette
cassette
# Do not place any objects above the
seat backrest. Notes on the
the load compar
compartment
tment cover
cover lower edge of the side windows or on the
Vehicles with a "Premium rear passenger com- load compartment cover.
partment" do not have a centre seat backrest. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
poorly secured objects
The load compartment cover alone cannot
secure or restrain heavy objects, items of lug-
gage or heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load, partic-
ularly in the event of abrupt changes in direc-
tion, sudden braking or an accident.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads against
slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using
lashing material, even if you are using
the load compartment cover.
140 Seats and stowing

Extending/re
Extending/retr
tracting
acting the
the load compar
compartment
tment cover
cover Retr
tracting
acting Remo
emoving
ving the
the load compar
compartment
tment cover
cover
# Release the load compartment cover from
Extending
Extending
brackets 2 on the le and right.
# Guide the load compartment cover forwards
using both grab handles 1 until it is fully
retracted.
Fitting/r
itting/remo
emoving
ving the
the load compar
compartment
tment cover
cover
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The load compartment cover is rolled up.

# Press end cap 1 on the le or right inwards.

# Pull the load compartment cover back by both # Pull out the load compartment cover back-
grab handles 1 and hook it into brackets 2 wards.
on the le and right.
 Seats and stowing 141

Fitting the
the load compar
compartment
tment cover
cover Att
ttac
aching/r
hing/remo
emoving
ving the
the partitioning
par titioning net Att
ttac
aching
hing

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to

poorly secured objects
The partitioning net alone cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or
heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load, partic-
ularly in the event of abrupt changes in direc-
tion, sudden braking or an accident.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
# Secure objects, luggage or loads against
slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using
lashing material, even if you are using
the partitioning net.
# Insert the load compartment cover in brackets Partitioning net without load compartment enlarge-
1 on the le and right. For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net ment
The end caps of the load compartment cover when transporting a load.
will engage audibly. Damaged partitioning nets can no longer ful l
their functions and must be replaced. Visit a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Please note that the availability of the partitioning
net depends on the equipment.
142 Seats and stowing

# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps at # Slide the loose end of lashing strap 6 into
the same time until partitioning net 1 is the buckle in the direction of arrow until the
tight. lashing straps are loose.
Remo
emoving
ving # Remove hooks 3 from tie-down eyes 4 on
the le and right.
# Remove partitioning net 1 from brackets 2
on the roof lining on the le and right.
Stowing

Partitioning net with load compartment enlargement

# Unfold the partitioning net until it audibly
clicks into place.
# Hook partitioning net 1 into holders 2 on
the le and right on the roof lining. # Raise the buckle of lashing strap 6 in the
# Engage hooks 3 in tie-down eyes 4 on the direction of arrow.
le and right.
 Seats and stowing 143

# Press both buttons 1 and fold together the Objects or items of luggage may be ung
partitioning net. around and hit vehicle occupants.
# The partitioning net can be stowed in the # Only hang light objects on the bag
stowage space under the load compartment hooks.
oor. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the tie-down
tie-down eyes
eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 130).
(/ page 130).
Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg
and do not attach any goods to them.

1 Tie-down eyes

Over
Overvie
view
w of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag

hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage.
144 Seats and stowing

Using the
the clothes
clothes hooks
hooks in the
the rear
rear If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv-
ing characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.

You will nd information on the maximum roof

load in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not

observing the maximum permitted head-
room clearance
# Press clothes hook 1 at the bottom.
Clothes hook 1 will extend. If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi-
% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof
(/ page 130). and other parts of the vehicle may be dam-
1 Bag hook aged.
# Observe the signposted headroom clear-
Att
ttac
aching
hing a roof
roof luggag
luggagee rack
rack ance.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the
& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceed-
ing the maximum roof load permitted headroom clearance, do not
enter.
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual # Observe the changed vehicle height with
driving characteristics as well as the steering
add-on roof equipment.
and braking characteristics alter.
 Seats and stowing 145

* NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved # Do not open the panorama sliding sun- # Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direc-
roof luggage racks roof if a roof luggage rack is tted. tion of the arrow.
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage points beneath covers 1.
racks that have not been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. # Comply with the installation instructions of the
# Only use roof luggage racks tested and
roof luggage rack manufacturer.
approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof luggage rack Cup holders
is tted, the tailgate can be fully opened.
Fitting the
the cup holder in or remo
removing
ving it from
from the
the
# Position the load on the roof luggage
centree console
centr
rack in such a way that the vehicle will
not sustain damage even when it is in & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
motion. when using the cup holder while the vehi-
cle is in motion
* NOTE Damage to panorama sliding sun- The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
roof caused by roof luggage rack while the vehicle is in motion.
If the panorama sliding sunroof is opened * NOTE Damage to the covers If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in
when a roof luggage rack is tted, the pano- motion, the container may be ung around
rama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the The covers may be damaged and scratched
when being opened. and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occu-
roof luggage rack. pants may come into contact with the liquid
# Do not use metallic or hard objects.
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
146 Seats and stowing

could be distracted from tra c conditions and # Always stow objects in such a way that Installation
Inst allation
you may lose control of the vehicle. they cannot be thrown around in such
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle situations.
is stationary. # Always make sure that objects do not
# Only use the cup holder for containers of protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
the right size. nets or stowage nets.
# Always close the container, particularly if # Close the lockable stowage spaces
the liquid is hot. before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
being stowed incorrectly objects in the boot.
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around R For installation: the locking catch is pushed in
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup the direction of the cup holder.
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
# Insert cup holder housing 1 into the stowage
compartment on a slight angle.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change # Place the housing of the cup holder 1 with
in direction. the recesses on the two hubs 2 in the stow-
age compartment so that they t.
# Push cup holder down.
 Seats and stowing 147

Locks Remov
emoval
al Using the
the cup holder

# Slide locking catch 1 toward the side wall of # Slide locking catch 1 toward the cup holder. # Placing a beverage container in the cup
the centre console. The cup holder is unlocked. holder.
The cup holder is locked. # First pull the cup holder up in the direction of The bottom 2 of the cup holder lowers auto-
arrow 2 and then twist it slightly to remove it matically and the side walls 1 of the cup
from the stowage compartment. holder move forward automatically.
% The cup holder automatically adjusts to the
size of the container placed in it.
148 Seats and stowing

The side walls of the cup holder can also be acti- Sockets
Socke ts
vated manually in di erent ways:
Using the
the 12 V socket
socket in the
the front
front passenger
passenger foo
foot-
t-
R Slightly press down the bottom with the bever-
well
age container.
R Press the grooved surface on the side wall of Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
the cup holder.
180 W (15 A).
% Check whether the beverage container is
rmly held by the cup holder. Some beverage Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle
containers are not adequately secured in the has a 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell.
cup holder due to their shape or size.
Original position
Original
When the cup holder is not in use, the side walls
of the cup holder can be retracted manually. The
bracket arms of the cup holder are automatically
retracted as well, and the cup holder's holding # Manually push back the side walls of cup
function will then no longer be available. holder 2 in the direction of the arrow.
 Seats and stowing 149

# Li up socket cap 1. devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) # Always make sure that objects do not
# Insert the plug of the device. when the vehicle is switched on. protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
# Make sure that no cables are running through nets or stowage nets.
or secured in the airbag deployment area Wir
ireless
eless char
charging
ging of the
the mobile phone and con- # Close the lockable stowage spaces
when using the socket. Also observe the notes nection with
with the
the ext
exter
erior
ior aerial
aerial before starting a journey.
on airbag protection (/ page 52). Notes on wirelessl
wirelesslyy char
charging
ging the
the mobile phone # Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
USB ports
por ts & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects objects in the boot/load compartment.
being stowed incorrectly
Depending on its equipment, the vehicle has the Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
following USB ports: If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
R In the stowage compartment in the front incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around & WARNING Risk of re from placing objects
centre console and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup in the mobile phone stowage compart-
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile ment
R In the stowage compartment under the front
phone receptacles cannot always retain all
armrest objects within. Placing other objects in the mobile phone
R In front of the stowage tray under the central stowage compartment could constitute a re
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the hazard.
display of the multimedia system event of sudden braking or a sudden change
# Apart from a mobile phone, do not place
R In the electronics compartment in the centre in direction.
console of the rear passenger compartment # Always stow objects so that they cannot
any other objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, especially those
You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile be thrown around in such situations. made of metal.
phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging
cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
150 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Wir
irelessl
elesslyy char
charging
ging a mobile phone in the
the front
front
ing them in the mobile phone stowage mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior aerial via the charging module. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
compartment R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
R The charging function and wireless connection charging.
If objects are placed in the mobile phone of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior
stowage compartment, these may be dam- aerial are only available if the vehicle is A list of compatible mobile phones can be
aged by electromagnetic elds. switched on. found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-
# Do not place credit cards, storage mobile.com/
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be
media, ski passes or other objects sensi- charged in every position of the mobile phone Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehi-
tive to electromagnetic elds in the stowage compartment. cle has the following options for wirelessly charg-
mobile phone stowage compartment. ing a mobile phone in the cockpit:
R Large mobile phones which do not rest at in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may R in the front stowage compartment of the
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow- not be able to be charged or connected with centre console
age compartment caused by liquids the vehicle's exterior aerial. R in the stowage compartment in the armrest
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage R The mobile phone may heat up during the
compartment, the compartment may be dam- charging process. This may also depend on
aged. the applications (apps) currently open in the
# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile background.
phone stowage compartment. R To ensure more e cient charging and connec-
tion with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove
Always observe the notes for persons with elec- the protective cover from the mobile phone.
tronic medical aids (/ page 38). Protective covers which are necessary for
wireless charging are an exception.
 Seats and stowing 151

Radio equipment
equipment approval
approval numbers
numbers for
for Brazil
Brazil A list of compatible mobile phones can be
This device operates on a secondary basis, that is found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-
to say it has no protection against harmful inter- mobile.com/
ference, not even from the same type of stations,
and must not cause interference with systems
operating on a primary basis.
This product is permitted in accordance with the
procedure de ned in Directive 242/2000 by the
Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and
meets the applicable technical requirements.
Example: wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the Further information is available on the ANATEL
front stowage compartment (with MBUX hyper- website. www.anatel.gov.br
screen)
# Further information on the declaration of con-
# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre formity for vehicle components which receive Wireless charging in the rear passenger compart-
of mat 1 as possible with the display facing and/or transmit radio waves. ment in vehicles without MBUX rear tablet
upwards. # Fold down the rear armrest.
When a message is shown in the multimedia sys- Wir
irelessl
elesslyy char
charging
ging a mobile phone in the
the rear
rear # Place the mobile phone as close to the centre
tem, the mobile phone is being charged. In addi- passenger
passeng er compar
compartment
tment of mat 1 as possible with the display facing
tion, malfunctions during the mobile phone's upwards.
charging process are shown in the multimedia Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless When the indicator lamp at the front of the
system display. mobile phone system lights up, the mobile
charging.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc-
using clean, lukewarm water. tions during the mobile phone's charging proc-
152 Seats and stowing

ess are shown by the indicator lamp ashing tions during the mobile phone's charging proc- Fitting oor mats
three times. ess are shown by the indicator lamp ashing
three times.
% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 130).

Fitting and remo

removing
ving the
the oor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
Wireless charging in the rear passenger compart-
ment in vehicles with MBUX rear tablet This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
# Fold down the rear armrest. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
# Open the stowage compartment in rear arm- so that they cannot get into the driver's
rest 1 .
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and
footwell.
lay the oor mat in the footwell such that it
# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre # Always t the oor mats securely and as
ts.
of mat 2 as possible with the display facing prescribed in order to ensure that there # Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
upwards. is always su cient room for the pedals.
When the indicator lamp at the front of the # Do not use loose oor mats and do not
# Adjust the corresponding seat.
mobile phone system lights up, the mobile place oor mats on top of one another.
phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc-
 Seats and stowing 153

# Insert the remaining oor mats so that they t

and, if available, attach them to the vehicle-
speci c securing system.
Remo
emoving
ving oor mats
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and
pull the oor mat o holders 2.
# Adjust the corresponding seat.

# Loosen and remove the remaining oor mats

from the vehicle-speci c securing system, if
present.
154 Light and sight

Exterior
Exter ior lighting Infor
Information
mation about lighting systems
systems and your
your Light switch
responsibility
Notes on adjusting
adjusting the
the lights when driving
driving abroad
abroad Operating
Oper ating the
the light switch
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
The headlamps will automatically be adjusted only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
when the vehicle crosses the border into coun- for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with
tries in which tra c drives on the other side of the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal
the road and will retain their full range of func- requirements and tra c situation.
tions. If necessary, the headlamps can also be
adjusted manually in the Low beam menu
(/ page 165).
In the following cases, check the setting of the
headlamps and change it manually if necessary:
R If the Dipped-beam setting (left/right-side
traffic) Manual adjustment only display mes-
sage is displayed.
R If the Check dipped-beam setting (left/right-
side traffic) display message is displayed.
Following manual adjustment:
1 W Le -hand parking lights
R Oncoming tra c will not be dazzled.
2 X Right-hand parking lights
R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as 3 T Standing lights and licence plate light-
far or as high. ing
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
light" functions will not be available. switch position)
 Light and sight 155

5 L Low beam/high beam If the battery is insu ciently charged, the stand- The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o ing lights or parking lights will be switched o are responsible for vehicle lighting.
automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
When low beam is activated, the T indicator Switching
Switching the
the rear
rear fog
fog lights on or o
The exterior lighting (except standing and parking
lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated lights) will switch o automatically when the driv- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
and replaced by the L low-beam indicator er's door is opened. R The light switch is in the L or à posi-
lamp. tion.
R Observe the notes on surround lighting
# Always park your vehicle safely using su cient
(/ page 165). # Press the R button.
lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Aut
utomatic
omatic driving
driving lights function Please observe the country-speci c laws on the
When the vehicle is switched on, the standing use of rear fog lamps.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the lights, low beam and daytime running lights are
standing lights switched on automatically depending on the light
conditions.
Operating the standing lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery. & WARNING Risk of accident when the
# Where possible, switch on the right X dipped beam is switched o in poor visi-
or le W parking light. bility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer
dipped beam may not be switched on auto-
than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not per-
matically if there is fog, snow or other causes
mitted in some countries. In this case, the stand-
of poor visibility such as spray.
ing lights are also switched on in the parking
lights position. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
156 Light and sight

Operating
Oper ating the
the combination switch
switch for
for the
the lights Switching on high beam
Switching # To indicate
indicate permanently:
permanently: push the combina-
# Turn the light switch to the L or à tion switch beyond the point of resistance in
position. the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
# Push the combination switch in the direction Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:
of arrow 1. R A turn signal indicator activated by the
When the high beam is activated, the indicator driver may continue to operate for the
lamp for low beam L will be deactivated duration of the lane change.
and replaced by the indicator lamp for high R If the driver indicated directly beforehand
beam K. but a lane change was not immediately
Switching o high beam
Switching possible, the turn signal indicator may acti-
vate automatically.
# Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow
3.
Headlamp ashing
Headlamp
# Pull the combination switch in the direction of

1 High beam arrow 3.

2 Turn signal light, right Tur
urnn signal light
3 Headlamp ashing # To indicate
indicate br
brie
ie y: push the combination
4 Turn signal light, le switch brie y to the point of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
# Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function. The corresponding turn signal light will ash
three times.
 Light and sight 157

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the hazard
hazard war
warning
ning lights When you pull away again, the hazard warning
light system will switch o automatically at
approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o
the hazard warning light system using the warning
lamp button.

Adap
daptiv
tivee functions of the
the DIGITAL
DIGITAL LIGHT
Intelligent
Intelligent Light System
System function
In this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving
and weather situation. It also provides extended
functions for improved illumination of the road.
The system comprises the following functions:
R Active headlamps (/ page 158)
R Cornering light (/ page 158)
Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen R Motorway mode (/ page 158)

Vehicles without MBUX hyper-screen # Press button 1. R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 159)
The hazard warning lights will switch on automati- R Bad weather light (/ page 159)
cally if: R City lighting (/ page 159)
R the airbag has been deployed. R Topographical compensation (vehicles with
R the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of DIGITAL LIGHT) (/ page 159)
more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
The system is active only when it is dark.
158 Light and sight

Activ
ctivee headlamps
headlamps function Corner
Cor nering
ing light function Roundabout and junction function: the cornering
light will be activated on both sides based on an
evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation posi-
tion. It will remain active until a er the vehicle has
le the roundabout or the junction.
Motorwayy mode function
Motorwa
Motorway mode increases the range and bright-
ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

R The headlamps follow the steering move- The cornering light improves the illumination of
ments. the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning
R Relevant areas are better illuminated during a direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends,
journey. for example. It can be activated only when the low
beam is switched on.
The functions are active when the low beam is The function is active in the following cases:
switched on.
R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig-
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course nal light is switched on or the steering wheel The function will be active if a motorway journey
of the lane in which you are driving will also be is turned is detected by means of:
evaluated and the active headlamps function will
R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h R the vehicle's speed
adjust the light in advance.
and when the steering wheel is turned R the multifunction camera
R the navigation system
 Light and sight 159

The function is not active in the following cases: The function is automatically deactivated under % Only vehicles with a multimedia system with
R at speeds below 80 km/h the following conditions: navigation have this function.
R When speeds greater than 100 km/h are
Enhanced fog
fog light function Assistance functions of the
Assistance the DIGITAL
DIGITAL LIGHT
reached. DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver
The enhanced fog light function reduces self-daz-
R When the rear fog light is switched o . assistance systems by projecting the assistant
zling and improves the illumination of the edge of
the carriageway. displays in front of the vehicle while it is in
Function of the
the bad weat
weather
her light motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the
The bad weather light reduces re ections in rainy driver in critical situations.
conditions by dimming individual areas of the
headlamps. The driver and other road users are % The availability of the functions is dependent
dazzled less as a result. on the country.
The system is active in the following cases:
The city lighting function
R The light switch is in the à position.
City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides
in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. R The high beam is switched on.
The function is active in the following cases: % Depending on the country in which you are
R At low speeds currently driving, certain functions may be
The function is automatically activated under the R In illuminated parts of urban areas disabled due to di erent legal requirements,
following conditions: even if they are enabled in the multimedia
Function of the
the topogr
topographical
aphical compensation
compensation system. When a border is crossed, the vehicle
R At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear Based on map data, the lighting system responds will automatically adapt to the valid require-
fog light is switched on. pre-emptively to di erent road heights. This ments.
means that the headlamp range remains virtually
constant when you are driving on uphill or down-
hill gradients.
160 Light and sight

Spotlight
Spotlight War
arnings
nings Observe the system limits of Tra c Sign Assist
(/ page 266).
Notes

The spotlight function runs in the background and If Tra c Sign Assist detects a corresponding sit-
ashes the headlamps at detected persons within uation, a triangle will be projected onto the road
the lane markings in four short bursts. The driver in the following situations at speeds of at least
is also made aware of the position of the person 30 km/h: If Tra c Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone,
by a symbol projection. the system will provide support as follows:
R You are driving in the opposite direction to the
R A corresponding symbol will be projected onto
The function is active under the following condi- permissible direction of travel, e.g. on a
tions: motorway slip road. the road when you enter a roadworks zone.
R When you drive through a roadworks zone,
R You are driving outside illuminated areas. R You are driving towards a stop sign without
reducing your speed. guide lines will be projected onto the road that
R The system detects a lane marking.
roughly match the width of the vehicle. The
R You are driving towards a red tra c light with-
guide lines will be suppressed for a while on
out reducing your speed. tight bends.
 Light and sight 161

If you fall below the safe distance at speeds of at Lane keeping

keeping and blind spot
spot war
warning
ning
least 30 km/h, a collision warning symbol will be
projected onto the road.
Observe the system limitations of Active Brake
Assist (/ page 260).
Lane chang
changee war
warning
ning

Observe the system limits of Tra c Sign Assist

(/ page 266).
At speeds of at least 30 km/h, a triangle that indi-
Collision war
warning
ning cates a lane correction and its direction will be
projected onto the road in the following cases:
R The lane is le unintentionally.
Observe the system limitations of Active Lane
During assisted lane changes at speeds of at least Keeping Assist (/ page 274).
30 km/h, the course of the lane change will be R You switch on the turn signal light while an
brightened. This enables you to identify possible object or obstacle is in your blind spot.
dangers in the new lane at an early stage. Observe the system limitations of Active Blind
Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Spot Assist (/ page 270).
Change Assist (/ page 257).
162 Light and sight

Switching
Switching the
the Intellig
Intelligent
ent Light System
System on/o opened or locked. You can choose between In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
the Digital Rain and Flowing Lines sequences. high beam will not be deactivated or will be
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle is switched on. % More information on locator lighting activated despite the presence of other road
(/ page 165) users.
Multimedia system: More information on the exterior switch-o # Always observe the road and tra c con-
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights delay time (/ page 165) ditions carefully and switch o the high
5 DIGITAL LIGHT beam in good time.
# Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam. Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating enhanced assistance
assistance Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist function account road, weather or tra c conditions.
functions Detection may be restricted in the following
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
% The availability of the functions is dependent cases:
on the country. tive Highbeam Assist
R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
% This function is an on-demand feature Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:
R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
(/ page 26). R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
are obscured
# Select Supporting projections. R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
# Activate or deactivate the desired projection. R road users whose lighting is obstructed,
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
# Activate or deactivate Projection when open- e.g. by a barrier the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions.
ing/closing. On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-o Assist may fail to recognise other road users
delay time is activated, a high-resolution greet- with their own lighting, or may recognise them
ing or farewell scene will be played back for a too late.
short period of time when the vehicle is
 Light and sight 163

The high beam will switch o automatically in the Adap

daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus
following cases:
Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus function
R At speeds below 25 km/h
R If other road users are detected & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
R If street lighting is su cient tive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react
% The system's optical sensor is located behind
to:
the windscreen near the overhead control
panel. R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Switching
Switching Adap
Adaptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist on/o
R road users whose lighting is obstructed,
Switching on
Switching e.g. by a barrier
# Turn the light switch to the à position.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
# Switch on the high beam using the combina- Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road
tion switch. users with their own lighting, or may recognise
Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, them too late.
between the following types of light: the _ indicator lamp will light up on the In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
R Low beam driver display. high beam will not be deactivated or will be
R High beam Switching o
Switching activated despite the presence of other road
# Switch o the high beam using the combina-
users.
At speeds greater than 30 km/h:
# Always observe the road and tra c con-
R If no other road users are detected, the high tion switch.
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam will switch on automatically.
beam in good time.
164 Light and sight

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright-
account road, weather or tra c conditions. ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted
Detection may be restricted in the following maximum.
cases: Partial high beam does not include other road
R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle
them but enables full high beam illumination for
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
the driver apart from the excluded vehicles.
are obscured
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is su -
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You cient street lighting:
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting R The partial high beam and the high beam will
to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c condi- be switched o automatically.
tions.
At speeds greater than 30 km/h:
R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically R If other road users are detected, the partial
switches between the following types of light: high beam will switch on automatically.
R Low beam
At speeds above 40 km/h:
R Partial high beam R If no other road users are detected on a
R High beam straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be
R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam switched on automatically.
R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will switch on automatically.
 Light and sight 165

R If highly re ective signs are detected, ULTRA Setting

Setting low
low beam Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the locator
locator lighting
RANGE Highbeam will be switched o auto-
matically. Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
% The system's optical sensor is located behind 5 DIGITAL LIGHT 5 Low beam 5 Interior/exterior lighting
the windscreen near the overhead control
# Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or # Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.
panel.
Automatic.
Switching
Switching Adap
Adaptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus on/o When the function is activated, the exterior light-
ing will light up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle is
Switching on
Switching Setting
Setting the
the ext
exter
erior
ior lighting switc
switch-o
h-o dela
delayy time unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the locator
# Turn the light switch to the à position.
Multimedia system: lighting is switched o and automatic driving
# Switch on the high beam using the combina-
lights are activated.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
tion switch. 5 Interior/exterior lighting
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, 5 Exterior lighting delayed switch off
the _ indicator lamp will light up on the
# Set the switch-o delay time.
driver display. When partial high beam or high
beam is active, the corresponding blue indica- When the vehicle's engine is switched o , the
tor lamp will also light up. exterior lighting will be activated for the set
time.
Switching o
Switching
# Switch o the high beam using the combina-
tion switch.
166 Light and sight

Interior
Inter ior lighting Control
Contr ol panel in the
the rear
rear passenger
passenger compar
compartment
tment A er pressing it twice, the reading lamp on
the respective side of the vehicle will go out.
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the inter
interior
ior lighting
# To switch
switch the
the rear
rear inter
interior
ior lighting on/o :
press button 2.
The reading lamps, the interior lighting above
the rear door and the dome lamps on both
sides of the vehicle will light up or go out.

Adjus
djusting
ting the
the ambient lighting
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Comfort
1 p Reading lamp on the respective side of
5 Ambient lighting
the vehicle
1 c Switches the front interior lighting 2 u Rear interior lighting Setting
Setting the
the colour
on/o
2 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o # To switch
switch reading
reading lamps
lamps on: press button 1. # Select Colour.
3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con- The reading lamp, the interior lighting above # Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.

trol on/o the rear door and the dome lamp on the # Set the desired colour or colour scheme.
respective side of the vehicle will light up.
# To switch
switch reading
reading lamps
lamps on/o : hold your Energy Shine
# To switch
switch reading
reading lamps
lamps o : press button 1
hand under the respective reading lamp 4 or once or twice. R The interactive Energy Shine colour world
5. A er pressing it once, the interior lighting shows the di erent phases during the journey.
above the rear door and the dome lamp on the Depending on the type of driving condition
respective side of the vehicle will go out. (speed, boost e ect or recuperation), this is
shown in colour by the active ambient lighting.
 Light and sight 167

Adjus
djusting
ting the
the brightness
brightness # Make sure that the functions and assists Further information on the exit warning
# Select Brightness. are switched on. (/ page 270).
# Adjust the brightness. R Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warn-
% Observe the notes on driving systems and ing from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the
% Depending on the ambient light conditions, your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to active ambient lighting will ash red.
the ambient lighting will automatically switch recognise dangers (/ page 232).
between day and night modes. Further information on Active Lane Keeping
# Select Effects. Assist (/ page 274).
Activ
ctivating
ating the
the brightness
brightness for
for zones # Activate the desired e ect. R Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active Brake
# Select Brightness. Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, di erent
# Switch o Link zones . e ects are available. the centre of the cockpit will ash bright red.
The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be Operating feedback e ects Further information on the Active Brake Assist
set separately. (/ page 260).
R Climate: If changes are made to the tempera-
% The Light strip zone can also be set in vehi- ture setting in the vehicle, the colour of the R Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with
cles with active ambient lighting. ambient lighting will change brie y. active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting
Activ
ctivating
ating e ects R Voice assistant: For vehicles with active ambi-
on the a ected side will ash red if there is a
warning from Active Blind Spot Assist.
ent lighting, the voice assistant is visually ani-
& WARNING Risk of an accident despite mated. Further information on the Active Blind Spot
activated e ects of ambient lighting and Assist (/ page 270).
active ambient lighting Warning assistance e ects R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: The information
To use the Warning Assistance e ects, the
R Warning when exiting: If an object is detected from the parking sensors during parking
respective functions must be activated in the in the blind spot while you are getting out of manoeuvres is displayed in colour.
driver assist menu. the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the a ec-
Further information on Parking Assist
ted door will ash red.
PARKTRONIC: (/ page 286)
168 Light and sight

Greeting Switching the

Switching the inter
interior
ior lighting switc
switch-o
h-o delay Windscr
indscreen
een wipers
wipers and windscreen
windscreen washer
washer sys-
sys-
R When you get into the vehicle, a special colour time on/o tem
animation will play. Multimedia system: Switching
Switc hing the
the windscreen
windscreen wipers
wipers on/o
Multi-colour animat. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
5 Interior/exterior lighting
R The chosen colour combination will change at
5 Interior lighting delayed switch off
prede ned intervals.
# Switch Interior lighting delayed switch off on
% In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an
animation will be played. or o .
When this function is active, the interior light-
% The desired operating feedback and warning ing will light up for a short time a er the vehi-
assistance can be activated or deactivated via cle is locked.
the ´ symbol. Depending on the equip-
ment, di erent operating feedback and warn-
ing assistance e ects are available.
% If the brightness is set to a low level, warning
animations will be displayed at a higher basic
brightness.

1 g Windscreen wipers o
2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal
3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent
 Light and sight 169

4 ° Continuous wiping, slow # Always switch o the windscreen wipers

5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast and vehicle before changing the wiper
blades.
# Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position 1 - 5. Moving
Mo ving the
the wiper arms
arms into
into the
the replacement
replacement posi-
# Single wipe/washing:
wipe/washing: push the button on the tion
combination switch in the direction of arrow # Switch the vehicle on and then o again
1. immediately.
R í Single wipe
# Within around 15 seconds, press the î
R î Wiping with washer uid button on the combination switch for approx-
% Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a imately three seconds (/ page 168).
car wash (/ page 388). The wiper arms will move into the replacement
position.
Replacing the
the windscreen
windscreen wiper blades Remo
emoving
ving the
the wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
screen. other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
windscreen wipers are switched on while
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
wiper blades are being replaced
far as it will go.
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while # Press release knob 2.
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper arm. # Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
the direction of arrow 3.
170 Light and sight

Fitting the
the wiper blades # Switch on the vehicle.
# Press the î button on the combination
switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
# Switch o the vehicle.

% Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-

larly and replace them in the event of visible
damage or ongoing smearing.
Maintenance
Maintenance display
There is a maintenance display at the tip of the
newly mounted wiper blade.

# Remove protective lm 1 from the mainte-

nance display.
# Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob When the colour of the maintenance display
2 engages. changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- should be replaced.
rectly.
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
 Light and sight 171

Mirrors
Mirrors & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- Adjus
djusting
ting the
the outside mirrors
mirrors
Operating
Oper ating the
the outside mirrors
mirrors judgement of distance when using the
outside mirror
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- The outside mirrors re ect objects on a
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
in motion closer than they appear.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- # Therefore, always look over your shoul-
lowing situations in particular: der in order to ensure that you are aware
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head of the actual distance between you and
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror the road users driving behind you.
while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten # Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired mir-
your seat belt. ror.
% In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and
driver camera, the required outside mirror can
also be preselected automatically via a natural
head movement to the le or right
(/ page 336).
172 Light and sight

# Use button 1 to adjust the position of the Aut

utomatic
omatic anti-dazzle mirror
mirrorss function R Immediately change out of clothing
selected mirror. which has been contaminated with
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poison- electrolyte.
Folding the
the outside mirror
mirrorss in/out ing due to the anti-dazzle mirror electro-
# Brie y press button 3. lyte
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
% If the battery has been disconnected or has Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
discharged, the outside mirrors must be matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror
moved brie y using button 3. Only then will on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and cau-
the automatic mirror folding function work ses irritation. It must not come into contact dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sen-
properly. with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or sor on the inside rearview mirror.
Engaging
Eng aging the
the outside mirrors
mirrors clothing or be swallowed. System limits
System
If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, # If you come into contact with electrolyte,
The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:
proceed as follows. observe the following:
R Immediately rinse the electrolyte R the vehicle is switched o .
# Press and hold button 3.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly from your skin with water and seek R Reverse gear is engaged.
engage. The outside mirror will now be set to medical attention. R The interior lighting is switched on.
the correct position. R If electrolyte comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them Front-passeng
ont-passenger
er outside mirror
mirror parking
parking position
thoroughly with clean water and seek function
medical attention.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, imme- The parking position makes parking easier.
diately rinse your mouth out thor-
oughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek
medical attention immediately.
 Light and sight 173

The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel Stor

oring
ing the
the parking
parking position of the
the front-
front- Calling up
downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on passenger
passeng er outside mirror
mirror using rever
reverse
se gear
gear # Select the front-passenger outside mirror
the front passenger's side when: using button 2.
Stor
oring
ing
R the parking position is stored (/ page 173). # Engage reverse gear.
R the front-passenger mirror is selected. The front-passenger outside mirror will move
R reverse gear is engaged. into the stored parking position.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back
to its original position when: Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the automatic
automatic mirror
mirror fold-
fold-
ing function
R you shi the transmission to another transmis-
sion position. Multimedia system:
R you are travelling at a speed greater than 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle

15 km/h. 5 Opening/closing

R you press the button for the outside mirror on # Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-
the driver's side. in.

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror

using button 2.
# Engage reverse gear.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
174 Light and sight

Area permeable
Area permeable to
to radio
radio waves
waves on the
the wind- Infrar
Infr ared-r
ed-ree ective windscr
windscreen
een function
screen
scr een The infrared-re ective windscreen is coated and
reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior.
The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio
waves.

Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll systems,

can be mounted only on areas 1 of the wind-
screen that are permeable to radio waves.
Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi-
ble from outside the vehicle when the windscreen
is illuminated with an external light source.
Note this position for vehicles with:
R Windscreen heating
R Infrared re ective windscreen
 Climate control 175

Over
Overvie
view
w of climate
climate control
control systems
systems 4 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o
Notes on climate
climate control
control (/ page 181) or
G Fine particle pre lter status display
An interior air lter in combination with the pre l- (/ page 178)
ter in the engine compartment must always be 5 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
used so that the air conditioning system, pollution
level monitoring and the air ltration work cor- 6 r Reduces the temperature
rectly. Use lters recommended and approved by 7 Depending on vehicle equipment and set-
Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work tings: temperature display, demist function
carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. display, air ow, pre-entry climate control or
Eco mode
8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/o
Over
Overvie
view
w of THERMATIC
THERMATIC climate
climate bar
(/ page 179)
The indicator lamps indicate that the correspond- 9 ± Calls up the air conditioning menu
ing function is activated. (/ page 178)
A Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode
Front climate bar on the central display in (/ page 179)
vehicles without a HEPA lter (example)
B J Increases the air ow or switches on cli-
1 s Increases the temperature
mate control (/ page 178)
2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the C I Reduces the air ow or switches o cli-
examples of j switching climate control mate control(/ page 178)
on/o (/ page 178) and 0 synchronisa-
tion function (/ page 181) % The climate bar is visible even when the vehi-
3 ¬ Demists the windscreen (/ page 179) cle is parked or the air conditioning is
switched o (/ page 178).
176 Climate control

% The availability of individual functions is coun- 4 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o

try and equipment-dependent. (/ page 181) or
G Fine particle pre lter status display
Over
Overvie
view
w of THERMOTR
THERMOTRONIC
ONIC climate
climate bar (/ page 178)
5 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
The indicator lamps indicate that the correspond-
ing function is activated. 6 Depending on vehicle equipment and set-
tings: temperature display, pre-entry climate
control display or Eco mode
7 J Increases the air ow or switches on cli-
mate control (/ page 178)
8 r Reduces the temperature
9 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode,
right (/ page 179)
A ± Calls up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 178)
Front climate bar on the central display in
B Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode,
vehicles without a HEPA lter (example)
le (/ page 179)
1 s Increases the temperature
C I Reduces the air ow or switches o cli-
2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the
mate control(/ page 178)
examples of j switching o climate con-
trol (/ page 178), ¿ switching the A/C % The climate bar is visible even when the vehi-
function on/o (/ page 179) and 0 syn- cle is parked or the air conditioning is
chronisation function (/ page 181) switched o (/ page 178).
3 ¬ Demists the windscreen
 Climate control 177

% The availability of individual functions is coun- 5 Sets the air ow in the rear passenger com-
try and equipment-dependent. partment, right, or switches climate control
on/o (/ page 178)
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the rear
rear operating
operating unit 6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger
compartment, right
The rear operating unit is available only for vehi- 7 Sets air distribution to the centre and side air
cles with the THERMOTRONIC air conditioning
vents in the rear passenger compartment,
control panel.
right
8 Sets rear climate control to automatic mode,
right
9 Sets the air distribution to the right rear foot-
well vents
A Synchronisation is activated (/ page 181)
B Sets the air distribution to the rear le foot-
well vents
1 Sets air distribution to the centre and side air C Sets rear climate control to automatic mode,
vents in the rear passenger compartment, le le
2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger
compartment, le The settings for the second row of seats can be
con gured via the rear operating unit or the multi-
3 Sets the air ow in the rear passenger com-
media system (/ page 180) depending on the
partment, le , or switches climate control vehicle's equipment.
on/o (/ page 178)
4 Switches climate control on/o
(/ page 178)
178 Climate control

Operating the
Operating the climate
climate control
control system
system weather conditions. To quickly reactivate the Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the A/C function via the
the
climate control functions, press the ¬ but- climatee bar
climat
Switching
Switching climate
climate control
control on/o ton on the climate bar on the central display.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Switching on climate
Switching climate control
control R THERMATIC automatic climate control is t-
# Set the air ow to level 1 or higher via J on
Switching
Switc hing climate
climate control
control on/o via the
the rear
rear oper- ted.
the climate bar on the central display ating unit
or The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es
Switching on
Switching the vehicle's interior air.
# Press Ã, s, r or ±. # Press button 4.
# Press ¿ on the climate bar on the central
Switching o climat
Switching climatee control
control or display.
# Set the air ow to level 0 via I on the cli- # Set the air ow to level 1 or higher using but- % Switch o the A/C function only brie y; oth-
mate bar on the central display tons 3 and 5. erwise, the windows may mist up more
or or quickly.
# Press j.
# Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or C.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
If climate control is switched o , the windows the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This
may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control Switching o
Switching is not indicative of a fault.
o only brie y. # Press button 4.

% If the climate control is switched o via or Calling up the

the air conditioning menu using the
the cli-
j, OFF will be shown on the climate bar. # Set the air ow to level 0 using buttons 3 and mate bar
mate
% When the range maximisation function is acti- 5. The air conditioning menu can be called up via the
vated, certain climate control functions are % If rear climate control is switched o via but- air conditioning line. The air conditioning line is
restricted and the window and mirror heaters ton 4, OFF will be shown on the rear display. always shown on the lower edge of the central
are switched o . This can lead to windows display.
misting up and reduced visibility due to
 Climate control 179

# Select the Climate menu entry in the air con- Switching o

Switching Setting
Se tting climate
climate control
control to
to automatic
automatic mode via the
the
ditioning line. # Press ¬, Ã or j on the climate bar climate bar
climate
The First row of seats menu is opened. on the central display
In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem-
Jumping directl
Jumping directlyy to
to the
the Air quality menu or perature is controlled automatically and main-
# Select the G particulate pre- lter status
# set the air ow to 0. tained at a constant level by the air supply.
% When the defrost function is activated, some # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central
display in the climate bar.
The Air quality menu is opened. An animation functions (e.g. the temperature setting) are display.
of the automatic air cleaning taking place is automatically deactivated. % You can increase or reduce the air ow by
shown. pressing K on the climate bar on the cen-
% The particulate pre- lter status display is on Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the A/C function via the
the tral display.
the home screen next to the temperature dis- air conditioning menu # To switch
switch to
to manual operation:
operation: switch o
play on the right and it informs you of the cur- automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air dis-
rent particulate levels inside and outside of Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats tribution, e.g. P.
the vehicle.
The measurement values are shown with the Depending on the external conditions, improved
µg/m3 units (microgrammes per cubic cooling and dehumidi cation of the interior air are Selecting climate
climate modes via the
the air conditioning
metre). supported when the A/C function is activated. If menu
it is not possible to operate the A/C function on Multimedia system:
Defros
Defr osting
ting the
the windscreen
windscreen via the
the climate
climate bar the climate bar on the central display, this func- 4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats
tion can be switched on and o on the climate
Switching on
Switching menu on the central display. It is possible to switch between di erent climate
# Press ¬ on the climate bar on the central # Select A/C (A/C).
modes on the Climate menu.
display.
180 Climate control

If ECO or ECO+ mode is activated, certain climate deactivated, the system automatically % When the air conditioning system is switched
control functions will be restricted to conserve switches to the last selected climate mode. on, at least one zone is always active. How-
energy and extend the vehicle's range. % The vehicle's climate control automatically ever, several air distribution options can be
The following modes are available on the Climate detects seat occupancy. When the system selected at the same time, for example to set
menu: switches to ECO or ECO+ mode, the climate the climate control for the interior and the
control functions of the unoccupied seats are footwells simultaneously. The windscreen air
R Comf
Comfort:
ort: maximum climate comfort
further restricted. Activating ¬ will auto- conditioning ¯ can only be selected for
R ECECO:
O: while heating and cooling output are the rst row of seats. When automatic mode
matically switch the system to Comfort mode.
limited, it remains possible to operate climate is active, the buttons for setting the air distri-
# Tap on ECO.
control without restriction. Activating ¬ bution are automatically deactivated. When
will automatically switch the system to Com- # Select Comfort, ECO or ECO+. the air conditioning system is switched o ,
fort mode. The selected mode will be shown on the cli- the buttons remain operable and the last set-
R ECECO+:
O+: mode using only the blower and waste mate bar on the central display. ting is saved.
heat, if applicable. It does not allow the tem-
perature to be set. Activating ¬ will auto- Setting air distr
Setting distribution
ibution using the
the air conditioning Setting
Se tting rear
rear climate
climate control
control using the
the air condi-
matically switch the system to Comfort mode. menu tioning menu
% The windows may mist up when ECO mode is Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
activated. 4 Climate menu 4 Climate menu
% The lack of dehumidi cation may result in the # Select First row of seats or Second row of
windows misting up more severely when ECO Setting
Setting the
the tem
temper
perature
ature
seats.
+ mode is activated. # Select Second row of seats.
# To set the air distribution: select ¯, P
% ECO+ climate mode can also be switched on # Set the temperature.
or O.
and o via the range maximisation function.
# Set the air ow.
When the range maximisation function is
 Climate control 181

Setting
Setting the
the air ow # Select SYNC (SYNC). Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to
# Select Second row of seats. fresh air mode a er a while.
# Set the air ow with s or r. Demisting
Demis ting the
the windows % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on
Controlling the
Controlling the rear
rear climate
climate control
control automatically
automatically Window
indowss misted
misted up on the
the inside air-recirculation mode only brie y.
# Select AUTO. # Press à on the climate bar on the central

% When the defrost function is activated, some display. Switching

Switc hing the
the air-r
air-recir
ecirculation
culation mode on/o via
functions (e.g. the temperature setting) are # If the windows remain misted up: press ¬ the air conditioning menu
automatically deactivated. To deactivate the on the climate bar on the central display.
defrost function, either press ¬, Ã Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
or j or set the air volume to level 0 Window
indowss misted
misted up on the
the outside R A ne particle pre lter is installed in the vehi-
# Switch on the windscreen wipers. cle.
(/ page 179).
# Press à on the climate bar on the central Multimedia system:
Switching the
Switching the synchr
synchronisation
onisation function on/o via display. 4 Climate menu 5 Air quality

the air conditioning menu # Press g on the upper display area of the

Multimedia system: Switching

Switching air-r
air-recir
ecirculation
culation mode on/o via the
the climate bar.
4 Climate menu
climate bar
climate
The interior air will be recirculated.
Climate control can be set centrally using the syn- Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to
R No ne particle pre lter is installed in the vehi-
chronisation function. The driver's settings for fresh air mode a er a while.
temperature, air ow and air distribution will be cle.
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Press g on the climate bar on the central windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on
# Select First row of seats. display. air-recirculation mode only brie y.
The interior air will be recirculated.
182 Climate control

% By selecting the particulate status display Fragr

agrance
ance system
system R Climate control is activated.
G on the climate bar, you can jump
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the fragr
fragrance
ance system
system Multimedia system:
directly to the air quality menu.
using the
the multimedia system
system 4 Climate menu 5 Air quality

Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating ionisation via the
the air Req
equir
uirements:
ements: The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra-
R Automatic climate control is activated. grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a-
conditioning menu
R The glove compartment is closed. con located in the glove compartment.
Multimedia system: # Select Air freshener.
4 Climate menu 5 Air quality Multimedia system:
# Keep pressing until the desired intensity is
4 Climate menu 5 Air quality
Ionisation improves the quality of the vehicle's reached.
interior air. Ionisation of the interior air is odour- The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra-
less. grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a- Inserting
Inser ting or remo
removing
ving the
the acon of the
the fragr
fragrance
ance
# Select Ionisation. con located in the glove box. system
system
# Navigate down until the climate control bar is
% The function can only be performed if the & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per-
AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution active. fume
is set to the side air vent. The function is # Select Air freshener.
restricted if the side air vent on the driver's If children open the acon, they could drink
# Activate or deactivate fragrancing.
side is closed. the liquid perfume or it could come into con-
Setting the
Setting the fragr
fragrance
ance system
system using the
the multimedia tact with their eyes.
system
system # Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
# Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
R A acon is inserted.
perfume has been drunk.
R The glove compartment is closed.
 Climate control 183

# If liquid perfume comes into contact with If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety noti-
clean water. ces on the perfume packaging.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfume acon when it is empty and do not re ll
it.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full Re llable acon
acons # Unscrew the cap of the empty acon.

# Fill the acon with a maximum of 15 ml.

# Screw the cap back on to the acon.

Full acons must not be disposed of Always re ll the empty re llable acon with the
with household waste. same perfume. Observe the separate information
# sheet with the acon.
1 Cap
2 Flacon Infor
Information
mation on the
the windscreen
windscreen heater
heater
Full acons must be taken to a
harmful substance collection point. & WARNING Risk of burns from touching the
# To insert:
insert: slide the acon into the holder as far
as it will go. windscreen when the windscreen heater
# To remov
remove: e: a er opening the glove box, wait is switched on
for approximately seven seconds and pull out The windscreen can become very hot when
the acon. the windscreen heater is switched on.
184 Climate control

The health of persons with limited temperature Pre-entryy climate

Pre-entr climate control
control when the
the vehicle
vehicle is R Windscreen heater
sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high unlocked
unlocked
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
temperatures may be a ected or they may Function of pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control when the
the ing functions will also be adjusted during pre-
even su er burn-like injuries. vehicle is unlocked
unlocked entry climate control if they have already been
# Do not touch the windscreen while the The seats can be brie y pre-warmed or pre- switched on during regular vehicle operation:
windscreen heater is switched on. cooled before you get into the vehicle. R Fragrancing
# Allow the windscreen to cool down Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- R Ionisation
before touching it. ing functions will be activated as needed during
pre-cooling: Setting the
Setting the pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control on the
the multi-
The windscreen heater will be enabled automati- R Automatic climate control media syst
system
em when thethe vehicle
vehicle is unlocked
unlocked
cally if ¬ is activated on the climate bar on the Multimedia system:
R Blower
central display. 4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
R Seat ventilation
A er the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater # Switch the function on or o .
will be switched on automatically as required. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
% If the on-board electrical system voltage is ing functions will be activated as needed during You can specify for which seat the function should
pre-warming: be switched on or o via the seat selection.
low, the function of the windshield heater may
be impaired. R Automatic climate control Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control
R Blower when the
the vehicle
vehicle is unlocked
unlocked
R Seat heating Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Steering wheel heater R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
ciently.
R Mirror heater
R The function has been activated via the multi-
R Rear window heater
media system.
 Climate control 185

# To switch
switch on: unlock the vehicle. Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control for
for departur
depar turee time # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
The climate control functions are activated for heating.
up to ve minutes for pre-heating and pre- Pre-entryy climate
Pre-entr climate control
control for
for departur
depar turee time func-
cooling. tion
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been
Pre-entry climate control via unlocking cannot be switched on repeatedly.
activated more than three times in succession to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventila-
when the vehicle is switched o . If people, particularly children, are exposed to ted or cooled to the set temperature when the
# To switch
switch o : press & on the climate bar extreme temperatures over an extended vehicle is parked.
on the central display. period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
or danger to life. When the vehicle is connected to power supply
The following functions will remain active once the equipment, priority is given to charging the high-
# Never leave persons, children in particu-
vehicle has been started: voltage battery to a speci ed minimum charge.
lar, unattended in the vehicle.
R Seat heating The running time of pre-entry climate control may
R Seat ventilation be reduced under the following conditions:
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
R The vehicle is not connected to power supply
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- switching on the seat heating
equipment.
ing functions will also be adjusted during pre- Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
entry climate control if they have already been R The high-voltage battery is not fully charged.
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad-
switched on during regular vehicle operation: ding to become very hot. With active pre-entry climate control, the charge
R Fragrancing level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced,
In particular, the health of persons with limited
R Ionisation temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to even if the charging cable connector is connec-
react to high temperatures may be a ected or ted.
they may even su er burn-like injuries. If present, seat ventilation is activated in cooling
and ventilation mode.
186 Climate control

If present, the following functions are activated in Setting

Se tting pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control for
for departure
depar ture Selecting seats
heating mode: time via the
the climate
climate bar # Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear
R Seat heating Multimedia system: right.
4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl Pre-entry climate control will take place for
R Steering wheel heater
the selected seats.
R Mirror heater Setting
Setting the
the departur
depar turee time
R Rear window heater % The set departure times are used for the vehi- Operation using the
Operation the app: the pre-entry climate
R Windscreen heater cle's pre-entry climate control and for predic- control for departure time can also be set via the
tions regarding the approximate state of Mercedes me connect app. You can nd further
When the set temperature is changed, the climate charge and range at the time selected. Addi- information in the separate Owner's Manual at
control mode will automatically be updated. It will tional information on the charging settings: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/
be switched from heating mode to ventilation or (/ page 224). baix/cars/connectmeen_GB/#emotions/
cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or # Select Edit departure time ´.
Startseite.html.
heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control
# Select a departure time or set a new depar-
or cooling mode. for departur
depar turee time
ture time.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
ing functions will also be adjusted during pre- Setting
Setting the
the repeat
repeat days Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
entry climate control if they have already been R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
# Select Edit departure time ´.
switched on during regular vehicle operation: ciently.
# Set the desired departure time and select the
R Fragrancing R The function has been activated via the multi-
corresponding weekdays on which this depar- media system.
R Ionisation ture time is to apply.
# Press OK to con rm.
# To activat
activate:
e: set the departure time
(/ page 186).
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before
 Climate control 187

the selected departure time. It will remain Operating immediate

Operating immediate pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control via To protect against overheating, the seat heating
active for another ve minutes if the departure the climate
climate bar may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been
is delayed. switched on repeatedly.
# To deactivat
deactivatee the
the pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control for
for & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con-
departur
depar turee time early:
early: press & on the cli- to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle tinue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is
mate bar on the central display or switch o interrupted.
If people, particularly children, are exposed to
the preselection of the time in the climate # Press the & button on the climate bar on
extreme temperatures over an extended
menu. period of time, there is a risk of serious injury the central display.
If present, the following functions will remain or danger to life. # Set the temperature using the arrows w
active once the vehicle has been started: # Never leave persons, children in particu- on the climate bar on the central display.
R Seat heating lar, unattended in the vehicle.
R Seat ventilation Air vents
vents
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow- Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front air vents
vents
switching on the seat heating
ing functions will also be adjusted during pre-
entry climate control if they have already been Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can & WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to
switched on during regular vehicle operation: cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- being too close to the air vents
ding to become very hot.
R Fragrancing Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air
R Ionisation
In particular, the health of persons with limited vents.
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
react to high temperatures may be a ected or
always maintain a su cient distance
they may even su er burn-like injuries.
from the air vents.
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
# If necessary, direct the air ow to another
heating.
area of the vehicle interior.
188 Climate control

To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air # To adjust

adjust the
the air ow dir
direction
ection of the
the side air
vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the fol- vents: hold the centre of side air vent 1 and
lowing: move it up or down or to the le or right.
R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in # To adjust
adjust the
the air ow dir
direction
ection of the
the centre
centre
the vehicle interior clear. air vents:
vents: hold the controller of centre air
R Keep the air inlet grilles free of residue build- vent 2 and move it up or down or to the le
up (/ page 388). or right.
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the rear
rear air vents
vents
& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to # To open or close the
the rear
rear air vents:
vents: hold the
being too close to the air vents controller of rear air vent 1 and move it
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air inwards or outwards as far as it will go.
vents. # To set
set the
the air ow dir
direction
ection of the
the rear
rear air
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants vents: move controller 1 up or down or to
always maintain a su cient distance the le or right.
from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the air ow to another
# To open or close the
the side air vents:
vents: hold the area of the vehicle interior.
outer ring of side air vent 1 and turn it to the
le or right as far as it will go.
# To open or close the
the centre
centre air vents:
vents: move
controller 2 inwards or outwards as far as it
will go.
 Climate control 189

# To open or close the

the side air vents
vents in the
the rear
rear
passenger
passeng er compar
compartment
tment:: hold the controller
of side air vent 1 and move it up or down as
far as it will go.
# To set
set the
the air ow dir
direction
ection of the
the side air
vents: move controller 1 up or down or to
the le or right.
190 Driving and parking

Driving
Driving # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or Observe the following notes on vehicle noise
clothing. emissions and the acoustic vehicle warning sys-
Notes on Mercedes-
Mercedes-AMG
AMG vehicles
vehicles tem:
# Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes
Observe the notes on the following topics in the o with water and seek medical atten- R The vehicle is equipped with a purely electric
Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognise tion straight away. drive system and develops considerably lower
dangers. vehicle noise emissions than vehicles with a
% The availability of certain functions depends combustion engine.
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of explosion from excessive
on the equipment and model of the vehicle. It is for this reason that the vehicle is equip-
internal pressure of the high-voltage bat-
R AMG Active Sound tery ped with a sound generator, which serves as
R AMG ceramic high-performance composite an acoustic vehicle warning system (AVAS).
Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the R The sound generator generates speed-depend-
brake system event of a vehicle re.
R RACE START ent vehicle noise emissions when driving
# Stop the charging process immediately
forward or backing up at a speed of up to
R AMG RIDE CONTROL + in case of unusual odours, smoke or around 30 km/h.
R AMG steering-wheel buttons burn marks.
This helps other road users, particularly
# Leave the danger zone immediately.
pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle
Notes on electric
electric mode Secure the danger zone at a su cient better.
distance. R When driving at speeds above 20 km/h The
& WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poi- # Call the re brigade.
vehicle acoustic warning system gradually
soning from damaged high-voltage battery switches o .
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has R Despite the sound generator, the vehicle still
been damaged, electrolyte and gases may may not be heard by other road users. Adapt
leak out. your driving style accordingly.
 Driving and parking 191

R The sound generator is o when the vehicle is # Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. a er an
stationary. high-voltage on-board electrical system accident, and the restraint system compo-
components have been modi ed or dam- nents have not been triggered.
Manual disconnection of the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee on- aged. Operating the
Operating the high-volt
high-voltag
agee disconnect device
device
boardd electrical
boar electrical system
system # Never touch damaged components of Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electri-
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- cal system manually in the above-mentioned sit-
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death and re due to tem. uations.
modi ed and/or damaged components of # A er an accident, do not touch any com- # Switch o the vehicle.
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- ponents of the high-voltage on-board # Shi the transmission to position j.
tem electrical system.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical # A er an accident, have the vehicle trans-
system is under high voltage. If you modify # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
ported away.
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage # Have the components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system or touch damaged
on-board electrical system checked at a
component parts, you may be electrocuted. In
quali ed specialist workshop and
addition, modi ed and/or damaged compo-
replaced if necessary.
nents may cause a re.
In the event of an accident or impact to the Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
vehicle underbody, components of the high- Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electri-
voltage electrical system may be damaged cal system manually in the following situations:
although the damage is not visible.
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
# Never make any modi cations to the
up in the driver's display, e.g. a er an acci-
high-voltage on-board electrical system.
dent.
192 Driving and parking

system manually) may only be carried out by a

quali ed specialist workshop.

Switching
Switching on the
the power
power supply
supply or the
the vehicle
vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due

to leaving children unattended in the vehi-
cle
If children are le unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular:
R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R operate vehicle equipment and become
# Remove ap 1 of the fuse box in the front # Press release tab 3 on high-voltage discon- trapped, for example.
passenger footwell. nect device 2 in the direction of the arrow In addition, the children could also set the
and pull it out. vehicle in motion by, for example:
# Pull connector 4 in the direction of the arrow R releasing the parking brake.
until it engages.
R changing the transmission position.
The high-voltage on-board electrical system is
switched o . R starting the vehicle.

All work on the drive system (including a er dis-

connecting the high-voltage on-board electrical
 Driving and parking 193

# Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
children.

Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
R the brake pedal is not depressed.

Vehicles with central display Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen

# To switch
switch on the
the power
power supply:
supply: press button
1 once.
You can, for example, activate the windscreen
wiper.
The power supply is switched o again if the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
R you open the driver's door.
194 Driving and parking

R you press button 1 twice more. R The display õ appears in the driver's Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with the
the key
key in the
the stow
stowage
age
display: the vehicle can be driven. compar
com partment
tment (emergency
(emergency operation
operation mode)
# To switch
switch on the
the vehicle:
vehicle: press button 1 If the vehicle does not start and the Place the
# If the vehicle does not start: switch o non-
twice. key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
Indicator and warning lamps go on in the driv- essential consumers and press button 1
once. display message appears in the driver's display,
er's display. you can start the vehicle in emergency operation
# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis-
The vehicle is switched o again if one of the fol- mode.
lowing conditions is met: play message Place the key in the marked
space See Owner's Manual also appears in
R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes
the driver's display: start the vehicle with the
and the transmission is in position j or the key in the marked space (emergency opera-
electric parking brake is applied. tion mode) (/ page 194).
R you press button 1 once.
% You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To
do this, press button 1 for about three sec-
Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle onds or by pressing button 1 three times
within three seconds. The transmission shi s
Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with the
the star
start/st
t/stop
op button
button
to neutral i automatically. When you press
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: button 1 again, the vehicle starts again and
R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised. you can engage drive position h again. Be # Make sure that the marked space 2 is
sure to observe the safety notes under "Driv- empty.
# Shi the transmission to position j or i. ing tips" (/ page 195). # Remove the key 1 from the key ring.
# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 Observe any information regarding display mes- # Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 on
once. sages that can be displayed on the driver's dis-
R The vehicle is started.
the symbol .
play. The vehicle will start a er a short time.
 Driving and parking 195

When you remove the key 1 from the marked has been delivered or a er repairs. Full sys- # Always t the oor mats securely and as
space 2, the vehicle can be driven. For fur- tem e ectiveness is not reached until the end prescribed in order to ensure that there
ther engine starts however, the key 1 must of this teach-in process. is always su cient room for the pedals.
be located in the marked space 2 on the R Brakepads, brake disks and tyres that are # Do not use loose oor mats and do not
symbol during the entire journey. either new or have been replaced only achieve place oor mats on top of one another.
# Have the key 1 checked at a quali ed spe- optimum braking e ect and grip a er several
cialist workshop. hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for
the reduced braking e ect by applying greater & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
If the
the vehicle
vehicle does not
not start:
start: force to the brake pedal. rect footwear
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 and Incorrect footwear includes, for example:
leave it there. Notes on driving
driving R shoes with platform soles
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle R shoes with high heels
using the start/stop button. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects R slippers
% You can switch on the power supply or the in the driver's footwell
vehicle with the start/stop button. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede There is a risk of an accident.
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. # Always wear suitable footwear so that
Observe any information regarding display mes-
sages that can be displayed on the driver's dis- This jeopardises the operating and road safety you can operate the pedals safely.
play. of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely & WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is
Running-in notes
notes so that they cannot get into the driver's switched o while driving
footwell. If you switch o the vehicle while driving,
R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer- safety functions are restricted or no longer
tain distance is being driven a er the vehicle available.
196 Driving and parking

This may a ect the power steering system and * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not You should bear the following in mind:
the brake force boosting, for example. observing the maximum permitted head- R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and
You will need to use considerably more force room clearance towing capacity. Also observe the technical
to steer and brake, for example. data in the printed Owner's Manual.
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi-
# Do not switch o the vehicle while driv- R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof
ing. and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with
aged. the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 130).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the # Observe the signposted headroom clear-
ance. R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling
brake system overheating
# If the vehicle height is greater than the
away, braking and steering as well as rapid
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when cornering.
driving, the brake system may overheat. permitted headroom clearance, do not
enter. Notes on driving
driving on salt-treat
salt-treated
ed roads
roads
This increases the braking distance and the
# Observe the changed vehicle height with The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads.
brake system can even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
add-on roof equipment. Therefore, observe the following notes:
R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and
# Do not depress the brake pedal and the Notes on driving
driving with
with a roof
roof load, trailer
trailer or fully brakepads, the braking distance can increase
accelerator pedal at the same time while laden vehicle
vehicle considerably or result in braking only on one
driving. When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or side
trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu-
R maintain a much greater safe distance to the
pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering
characteristics change. vehicle in front
 Driving and parking 197

To remove salt build-up: Notes on driving

driving thr
through
ough wat
water
er on the
the road
road sur- The rear axle steering is an electromechanical
R brake occasionally while paying attention to face auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts
the tra c conditions Water which has entered the vehicle can damage the steering of the rear wheels according to the
the drive system, electrics and transmission. position of the front wheels, depending on the
R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of
Observe the following if you must drive through speed. This results in greater manoeuvrability and
the journey and when starting the next jour- improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering.
ney water:
R The water, when calm, may only reach the Rear axle steering has the following characteris-
Notes on aquaplaning
aquaplaning lower edge of the vehicle body. tics:
Aquaplaning can take place once a certain R reduced steering e ort and turning circle
R Drive at walking pace at most; water can oth-
amount of water has accumulated on the road resulting in reduced parking e ort
surface. erwise enter the vehicle interior.
R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehi- R improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering
Observe the following notes during heavy precipi-
tation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may cles, can create waves which may exceed the R more direct steering resulting in improved
occur: maximum permissible depth of the water. handling of the vehicle
R reduce speed The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er Observe the notes on snow chains and snow
R avoid tyre ruts fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to chain mode (/ page 414).
the tra c conditions until braking power has been
R avoid sudden steering movements
fully restored.
R brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking Function of rear

rear axle steer
steering
ing
wheels and tyres (/ page 413).
% This function is available on demand
(/ page 26).
198 Driving and parking

ECO
ECO display
display function The ECO display assesses the following criteria for The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the
an economical driving style: vehicle is braked when coasting and the more
R coasting at the right time electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage bat-
tery.
R consistent speed
The regenerative brake system has the following
R moderate acceleration
characteristics:
The overall assessment of your driving style "from R supports braking with electronically controlled
start" is indicated using stars 1. It starts with brake force boosting
ve empty stars, which you can ll one a er the R converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into
other if you drive e ciently. When all ve stars are electric energy
lled, a glow appears in the background.
% You can call up the ECO display function via % If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driv- also used. This means that the maximum
ing style on the driver display depending on the the Classic menu (/ page 315).
recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The
situation. This enables you to check the e ciency more you drive and brake in an anticipatory
of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The Recuper
ecuperativ
ativee brak
brakee system
system manner, the more e ciently energy can be
ECO display menu shows a ball 2 that will roll recuperated.
forwards or backwards on a stylised road in the Function of the
the recuper
recuperativ
ativee brak
brakee system
system
direction of travel according to the driving charac- Depending on the selected recuperation level, the System limits
System
teristics. electric motors are operated as an alternator
The braking e ect of the electric motor during
when in overrun mode and during braking in order
Above and below the road, lines mark the area for recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or
to charge the high-voltage battery while driving.
an e cient driving style 3. Ball 2 will light up in may not be available at all in the following situa-
As soon as you release the accelerator pedal
green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the tions:
when the vehicle is in motion, recuperation in
lines, the ball will light up in orange. overrun mode is initiated. R when the high-voltage battery charge level
increases
 Driving and parking 199

R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a nor- The following recuperation levels are available:
mal operating temperature R hà Intelligent and anticipatory recupera-
R when driving at speeds close to zero tion with ECO Assist (/ page 200)
R in transmission position i R hq No recuperation: the vehicle coasts,
R during and a er ESP® intervenes rolls freely
R h Normal recuperation
In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by
R h± Increased recuperation: increased
the brake control system. Also brake with the
service brake if necessary. deceleration in overrun mode
Manually setting
Manually setting recuper
recuperativ
ativee deceleration
deceleration # To increase
increase recuper
recuperation:
ation: brie y pull gearshi
You can use the steering wheel gearshi paddles paddle 1.
to manually adjust the intensity of recuperation in # To reduce
reduce recuper
recuperation:
ation: brie y pull gearshi
overrun mode. paddle 2.
# To select hÃ: pull and hold gearshi pad-
% When the vehicle is started again, the follow- dle 1 or 2.
ing recuperation level is set: The driver's display shows the currently selected
R hÃ: if hà was selected previ- recuperation level next to the transmission posi-
ously. tion display.
R h: if a recuperation level other than
hà was selected previously.
200 Driving and parking

ECO
ECO Assist # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not
evasive action. su cient, you must also brake with the service
ECO Assist
ECO Assist function brake.
ECO Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for
you paying attention to your surroundings and ECO Assist is active only in hà At a very low driving speed, e.g. in a parking
does not relieve you of your responsibility pertain- (/ page 199). garage or in play streets, there is no display and
ing to road tra c law. The driver is responsible for ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec- thus no adjustment.
keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, ted route. This allows the system to optimally
for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. adjust the driving style for the route ahead, use
minimal energy and recuperate as much as possi-
& WARNING Risk of accident if ECO Assist ble. If the system has detected an event ahead
does not provide su cient deceleration and the vehicle is approaching the event, ECO
ECO Assist only brakes your vehicle when you Assist calculates the optimised speed pro le
take your foot o the gas pedal. If vehicles are based on the distance, speed and available route
detected late, e.g. a er tight curves, or if you information.
do not react immediately to the ECO Assist If ECO Assist detects a route event ahead and you
display, the deceleration may not be su cient. release the accelerator pedal, intelligent recuper-
# React promptly to the ECO Assist recom- ation starts in overrun mode. If ECO Assist has 1 "Foot o the accelerator" recommendation
mendation and take your foot o the gas detected a vehicle ahead or a stationary vehicle, it
can brake your vehicle to a standstill. This may be 2 Route event ahead
pedal.
the case, for example, at the end of a tra c jam % ECO Assist can also be shown in the head-up
# Adjust your speed to the driving condi-
or if the detected vehicle ahead stops in front of display.
tions and maintain a suitable distance you.
from the vehicle in front. If a route event that requires an adjustment of
your driving style is detected ahead, correspond-
 Driving and parking 201

ing symbol 2 and the ý symbol (grey) are The following route events can be detected by greater accuracy. The basic function is also availa-
displayed. ECO Assist, depending on the vehicle equipment: ble without active route guidance. Not all informa-
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý 3 Roundabout tion and tra c situations can be foreseen. The
symbol turns green and recuperation in overrun quality depends on the map data.
4 S-bend
mode is initiated. % ECO Assist is available a er driving o , as
5 Sharp bend soon as the sensor check is completed.
The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the fol- 6 T-junction
lowing cases: The system may be impaired or may not function
R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommen-
7 Downhill gradient in the following situations:
dation for a long time. 8 Vehicle in front R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient
R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recom- 9 Speed limit illumination of the road, highly variable shade
mendations from the route ahead. conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
ECO Assist also reacts to other intersections or R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,
junctions if you activate the turn signal indicator
direct sunlight or re ections.
in good time.
R If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the
% On roads with a right-hand lane, vehicles driv-
multifunction camera.
ing in the lane to your le are also recognised
as vehicles ahead of you. R If the multifunction camera is misted up, dam-
aged or obscured.
To enable ECO Assist to react to a speed limit or
to future route events, the speed adaptation func- R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to
tions of Active Distance Assist must be active dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because
(/ page 253). they are obscured.
R If the digital road map of the navigation sys-
System limits
System
tem has incorrect or outdated information.
If the calculated route is adhered to when route
guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with
202 Driving and parking

R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road- Rang

angee maximisation - Changing to the ; drive program, acti-
works or in adjacent lanes. vation of the ECO Assist and the recupera-
Rang
angee maximisation function
R If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured. tion level hÃ
The range maximisation function enables a maxi-
R When you drive on roads with steep uphill or mum range gain. To achieve this, the function par- If necessary, you can deactivate the restrictions
downhill gradients. tially or completely switches o convenience sys- of individual function groups again. This reduces
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as tems that are not relevant to driving and activates the maximum range gain by the value speci ed for
bicycles or motorcycles. e ciency-enhancing driving functions. the function group.
The range maximisation function controls the If you switch on a deactivated function while
Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating ECO
ECO Assist restrictions of the following function groups: range maximization is activated, all restrictions of
Multimedia system:
R Climat
Climatee control
control the corresponding function group are removed
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
- Restriction of air-conditioning functions and the maximum range gain is reduced accord-
5 Driving ingly. For example, if you switch on the seat heat-
and deactivation of front windscreen, rear
# Activate or deactivate the function.
windscreen and mirror heaters ing again, all restrictions of the "Seating comfort "
function group are deactivated. If you change the
R IntInter
erior
ior drive program or the recuperation level, the maxi-
Function of the
the haptic
haptic accelerat
accelerator
or pedal - Switching o ambient lighting, displays mum range gain is reduced by the range gain of
The haptic accelerator pedal features an addi- and certain charging functions the ECO drive functions.
tional point of resistance to help you drive as e - R Seating comfor
comfortt The speci ed range gain for the ECO driving func-
ciently as possible in drive program ;. - Deactivation of the steering wheel heater, tions can only be achieved if you observe the driv-
seat heating and ventilation and deactiva- ing recommendations and instructions displayed
tion of the massage function and drive without kickdown.
R EC ECOO driv
drivee functions
 Driving and parking 203

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating rang
rangee maximisation Depending on the drive program selected, the fol- Available driv
drivee progr
programs
ams
Multimedia system: lowing vehicle characteristics will change: = (Individual)
4 © 5 Settings 5 EQ 5 Range R Drive R The following vehicle characteristics are indi-
# Activate or deactivate Maximum range. R Suspension (/ page 277) vidually adjustable:
All function groups concerned are activated or - Suspension and damping - Drive
deactivated.
- Vehicle level (speed-dependent) - Suspension
or
R Steering - Steering
# Individually activate or deactivate the individ-
R ESP® - ESP®
ual subsystems of the four function groups Cli-
mate control, Interior, Seat comfort or ECO R Sound of the drive system in the vehicle inte- - Sound of the drive system in the vehicle
drive functions. rior interior
R Pressure point in the haptic accelerator pedal
C (Sport)
DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC SELECT butt
button
on % In drive program ;, an additional pressure R Sporty and dynamic driving characteristics
Function of the
the DYN
DYNAMIC
AMIC SELECT butt
button
on point is activated in the haptic accelerator R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
pedal. road surface and a clear stretch of road
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles R 1st pressure point: at approx. 60% pedal
travel (only in ;) A (Comfort)
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. R 2nd pressure point: transition to kickdown R Comfortable driving style
You could otherwise fail to recognise
(always available) R Recommended for all road conditions
dangers.
R Best balance between e ciency and perform-
You can switch between the drive programs with ance for all driving situations
the DYNAMIC SELECT button (/ page 204).
204 Driving and parking

; (Eco) Selects the

the driv
drivee progr
program
am Con guring
guring DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC SELECT (multimedia sy
sys-
s-
R Economical setting of vehicle functions tem)
R Recommended for all road conditions Multimedia system:
R Additional 1st pressure point in the haptic 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
accelerator pedal indicates an e cient, eco- 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
nomical driving style
Setting
Setting driv
drivee progr
program
am I
The ESP® settings in the drive programs ; # Select = Individual.
and A are designed for stability. Therefore, # Select and set a category.
choose one of these driving programs, especially
when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation Switching the
Switching the rese
resett display
display on/o
and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occu- # Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
pied.
% This function must be activated for each user
pro le separately. The drive program for the
respective user pro le of the last driver is only
stored if this function is activated.
# Press the DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a
le or right. prompt appears asking whether the last active
The drive program selected appears in the drive program should be restored.
driver's display . % The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard set-
tings.
 Driving and parking 205

Function o : the next time the vehicle is started Transmission # Never leave children unattended in the
the A drive program is set automatically. vehicle.
DIRECT SELECT lever
lever
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Displaying
Displaying vehicle
vehicle data Function of the
the DIRECT SELECT lever
lever key with you and lock the vehicle.
Multimedia system: & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
4 © 5 Info to leaving children unattended in the vehi- children.
# Select Vehicle.
cle
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the trans-
The vehicle data is displayed. If children are le unattended in the vehicle, mission position. The current transmission posi-
they could, in particular: tion is displayed in the driver's display.
R open doors, thereby endangering other
Calling up the
the fuel consumption
consumption indicator
indicator
persons or road users.
Multimedia system: R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
4 © 5 Info
R operate vehicle equipment and become
# Select Consumption. trapped, for example.
The current and average fuel consumption is
displayed. In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion by, for example:
R releasing the parking brake.
R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle.
206 Driving and parking

Engaging neutral
Engaging neutral N # When the vehicle is stationary, press button
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT j.
SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of Park position is only engaged when the trans-
resistance. mission position display j is shown in the
driver's display. If no transmission position dis-
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow play j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or
it from rolling away.
tow it away.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one
If you
you want
want the
the transmission
transmission to
to remain
remain in neutral
neutral of the following conditions is met:
N even
even if the
the vehicle
vehicle is switched
switched o : R You switch the vehicle o in transmission posi-
# Start the vehicle.
tion h or k.
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is
i. at a standstill or when driving at a very low
# Release the brake pedal. speed and the transmission is in position h
# Switch o the vehicle. or k.
j Park position % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in % To manoeuvre with an open driver's door,
k Reverse gear the vehicle, the transmission remains in neu- open the driver's door while stationary and
i Neutral tral i. engage transmission position h or k again.
h Drive position % If you have engaged park position j or
Engaging park
Engaging park position P
Engaging rever
Engaging reverse
se gear
gear R # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle switched o the vehicle and no transmission
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT (/ page 225). position display is displayed, secure the vehi-
SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of cle from rolling away (/ page 230).
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle
resistance. comes to a standstill.
 Driving and parking 207

Engaging driv
Engaging drivee position D for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for * NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-volt-
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT staying in lane. age battery
SELECT lever down past the rst point of % In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect
resistance. of the exible all-wheel distribution can be As a result of its basic characteristics, the
achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S storage capacity of, and the amount of energy
tyres), with snow chains if necessary. available from, the high-voltage battery
Function of the
the 4MATIC
4MATIC decreases over the course of its life. Due to
The exible all-wheel distribution of the 4MATIC this, both the maximum electrical range that
means the drive is always ideally distributed Charging
Char ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee battery
battery can be achieved by the vehicle and its maxi-
between both axles. Depending on the situation, mum electrical output can be impaired.
Notes on char
charging
ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee battery
battery
only the front axle or only the rear axle can be The following factors could accelerate the age-
driven, or the drive can be distributed continu- * NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to ing of the high-voltage battery:
ously between both axles. leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods R frequently fully charging (charge level
This means that recuperation can be used even of time 100%) the high-voltage battery, especially
more e ectively and the range of the vehicle can when this process is not directly followed
be increased (/ page 198). Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-
discharge. by a journey
Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if
R frequent rapid charging with direct current
the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven the vehicle is idle for several months. This can (mode 4)
wheel spins due to insu cient traction. damage the high-voltage battery. R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can # To avoid damage, please observe the fol-
at high ambient temperatures
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override lowing recommendations when handling
the laws of physics. It cannot take into account
# To avoid accelerated ageing, please
the high-voltage battery. observe the following recommendations
road, weather or tra c conditions. 4MATIC is only
an aid. You are responsible especially for main- when handling the high-voltage battery.
taining a safe distance from the vehicle in front,
208 Driving and parking

Recommendations when handling the high-voltage R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the
battery: vehicle is le idle for a lengthy period. Other-
R Every six months, when the outside tempera- wise, the condition of the vehicle's high-volt-
ture is above 10 °C, park the vehicle overnight age battery cannot be monitored.
with a charge level below 20%. You can contribute to reducing the vehicle's
R Only charge the high-voltage battery with energy consumption in the following ways:
direct current (mode 4) if necessary. R An anticipatory driving style (/ page 198)
R Charge the high-voltage battery on average to R Reduced use of electrical consumers
a charge level of 80%. Beyond a charge level of
R Having the vehicle regularly maintained
80%, the charging time is considerably pro-
longed. The charging time of the high-voltage battery may
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, change over the course of its life.
park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery % Depending on the national version, your vehi-
charge level between 30% and 50%. Do not cle is equipped with one of the following vehi-
keep the high-voltage battery continuously cle sockets.
connected to power supply equipment. You can charge the high-voltage battery with Combo 1 vehicle socket
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of both alternating current (mode 2/3) and
time avoid, if possible, high ambient tempera- direct current (mode 4).
tures.
R Check the high-voltage battery's charge level
every six weeks (/ page 223).
R Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge
level is below 20%.
 Driving and parking 209

socket connections 1 and 2 are used for the improved charging performance and better
charging. charging e ciency o ered.
Charging options for the high-voltage battery Stowing the
the char
charging
ging cable
(mode 2, 3 or 4): Always stow the vehicle charging cable in the
R Charging through recuperation while the vehi- charging cable bag provided and attach its spring
cle is in motion hook to the tie-down eye in the boot or the load
R Charging with alternating current when sta- compartment.
tionary: Otherwise, the charging cable is not su ciently
- at a mains socket (mode 2) secured.
- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3) System limits
System
R Charging with direct current when stationary: The power output of the high-voltage battery may
- at a fast charging station (mode 4) be impaired by the following:
R High or low outside temperatures
Depending on the country-speci c vehicle equip-
R Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle
Combo 2 vehicle socket ment and your vehicle's charging cable, single
phase AC charging is also possible. being switched on, e.g. operating the air con-
1 Type 1 or type 2 connection for charging with ditioning system
Observe the di erent grid requirements of your
alternating current current location when charging. Only use charging R Extended periods without charging
2 Socket extension for charging with direct cur- cables which conform to the grid requirements. The charging time of the high-voltage battery may
rent Consult a quali ed electrician or your local grid be increased by the following:
% When using a CCS (Combined Charging Sys- operator if you have any questions. R High or low outside temperatures
tem) charging cable to charge with direct cur- It is recommended that you charge the high-volt- R Extended periods without charging
rent at a combo vehicle socket, both vehicle age battery at a wallbox or charging station due to
210 Driving and parking

R The maximum available charge current of the # For safety reasons, only use the charging Only the following charging cables may be used:
charging facility cable supplied with the vehicle or an R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
R The settings of the charging process in the original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. R A charging cable that has been approved for
multimedia system (/ page 224) Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these the vehicle.
original charging cables for their suitabil-
ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi- The charging process can vary depending on the
Notes on char
charging
ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee batter
batteryy at the
the power supply equipment.
cle. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-
mains socket
socket (mode 2)
Benz Service Centre and obtain advice Shorter charging times can be achieved in the fol-
there. lowing ways:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury from incor-
rectly installed component parts # Never use a damaged charging cable. R Charging at a wallbox.

Connecting the charging cable to a mains

# Do not use: R Charging at a charging station.
socket using incorrectly installed component R Extension cables
When doing so, always observe the local informa-
parts could cause a re or an electric shock, R Extension reels tion.
for example. R Multiple sockets Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging
# Only connect the charging cable to a
# Never use socket adapters to connect loose from a mains socket.
mains socket that:
the charging cable to the mains socket. Do not li the controls by the following compo-
R Has been properly installed and
The only exception being if the adapter nent parts:
R Has been inspected by a quali ed electri- has been tested and approved by the R The charging cable connector.
cian manufacturer for charging the high-volt- R The mains plug.
age battery of an electric vehicle.
# Observe the safety notes in the operat- When charging, protect the charging cable control
ing instructions for the socket adapter. element from excessive heat such as direct sun-
 Driving and parking 211

light. Otherwise, the charging process may be # Never use damaged charging cables. R Perform a visual check of the charg-
cancelled. ing station for obvious faults, such as
# Do not extend the charging cable.
massive damage to the housing or
# Do not use adapters. charging cable.
Notes on char
charging
ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee batter
batteryy at a
wallbo
allboxx or char
charging
ging station
station (mode 3) # Observe the safety notes in the operat- # For charging stations without a preinstal-
ing instructions for the wallbox. led charging cable:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury from incor- R For safety reasons, only use charging
rectly installed component parts If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cables that have been tested and
cable, use the optionally available charging cable approved by the manufacturer for
Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The
using incorrectly installed component parts charging the high-voltage battery in
charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/ an electric vehicle.
could cause a re or an electric shock, for luggage compartment.
example. R Never use damaged charging cables.
Only use charging cables that have been tested
# Only connect the charging cable to a and approved by the manufacturer for charging R Do not extend the charging cable.
wallbox that: the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. R Do not use adapters.
R Has been properly installed and # Make sure to observe the safety informa-
R Has been inspected by a quali ed electri-
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam- tion on the charging station.
cian aged components
Connecting the charging cable to a charging Most charging stations must be activated before
# For safety reasons, only use charging station using a damaged component part the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or
cables that have been tested and could cause a re or an electric shock, for via Plug & Charge. Observe the on-site operator's
approved by the manufacturer for charg- example. instructions for the charging station and the notes
ing the high-voltage battery in an electric on Mercedes me Charge (see the vehicle's Digital
# For charging stations with a preinstalled
vehicle. Owner's Manual).
charging cable:
212 Driving and parking

The amount of energy dispensed for the charging R Perform a visual check of the charg- The charging cable for the vehicle must not be
process, shown by the charging station, may be ing station for obvious faults, such as longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in
higher than the amount of energy actually absor- massive damage to the housing or some countries. This is to prevent the interfer-
bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result charging cable. ence of signals being received by radio communi-
of di erent levels of charging losses and is descri- cation devices in the vehicle or in close proximity
bed as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur,
# For charging stations without a preinstal- to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the
for example, due to heat that builds up when led charging cable: charging cable may be routed underground. If in
R For safety reasons, only use charging
charging or from auxiliary consumers that are doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is
switched on. Further information on recharge e - cables that have been tested and the case before charging the high-voltage battery.
ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist approved by the manufacturer for
charging the high-voltage battery in The amount of energy dispensed for the charging
workshop. process, shown by the charging station, may be
an electric vehicle.
higher than the amount of energy actually absor-
R Never use damaged charging cables.
Notes on char
charging
ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee batter
batteryy at a bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result
R Do not extend the charging cable. of di erent levels of charging losses and is descri-
fas
astt char
charging
ging station
station (mode 4)
R Do not use adapters. bed as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur,
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam- for example, due to heat that builds up when
# Make sure to observe the safety informa-
aged components charging or from auxiliary consumers that are
tion on the charging station.
switched on. Further information on recharge e -
Connecting the charging cable to a charging ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist
station using a damaged component part Most charging stations must be activated before
the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or workshop.
could cause a re or an electric shock, for
example. via Plug & Charge. Observe the on-site operator's
# For charging stations with a preinstalled
instructions for the charging station and the notes
on Mercedes me Charge (see the vehicle's Digital
charging cable: Owner's Manual).
 Driving and parking 213

Setting the
Setting the maximum permissible
permissible char
charging
ging cur- The charging cable supplied is set to a country-
rent for
for char
charging
ging at a mains socket speci c maximum charging current value. When
charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed
* NOTE Overloading the mains socket due the permitted value for that country.
to excessive charging current # Before charging at a mains socket, have the

If the charging current is too high, the fuse maximum permissible charging current for the
could be tripped or the external mains supply relevant mains socket or the building inspec-
could overheat. ted by a quali ed electrician.
# Ensure that the external mains supply # When abroad, observe the country-speci c

has been designed to handle the charg- laws when charging.

ing current provided. 1 Supply voltage indicator
If you have questions concerning the charging 2
# For safety reasons, only use the charging
Charging process indicator
current or if there is a malfunction, please contact
cable supplied with the vehicle or an a quali ed specialist workshop. 3 Temperature monitor indicator
original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. 4 Safety system indicator
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these Supplyy volt
Suppl voltag
agee indicator
indicator 1
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the char
charging
ging cable control
control panel
original charging cables for their suitabil-
ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi- The charging cable control panel shows the cur- Display Meaning
cle. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes- rent status of the charging process.
Benz Service Centre and obtain advice Lights up white The supply voltage is
there. connected.
# Check the maximum charging current
using the charging capacity shown in the
driver's display.
214 Driving and parking

Charging
Char ging process
process indicator
indicator 2 Safety
Safety system
system indicator
indicator 4 If temperature monitor 3 indicates a malfunc-
Display Meaning Display Meaning tion, it may help to protect the charging cable
from direct sunlight.
Flashes green The high-voltage bat- Flashes red Charging cable mal- To rese
resett the
the char
charging
ging cable operating
operating unit: if
tery is charging. function – cannot safety system 4 indicates a charging cable mal-
carry out the charging function or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the
Tem
emper
peratur
aturee control
control indicator
indicator 3 process, reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, discon-
Display Meaning charging cable operat- nect the charging cable from the vehicle and from
ing unit. the mains socket and wait for approximately ve
Lights up red The green LED ashes seconds. If the malfunction persists a er the
simultaneously: over- Lights up red White LED is o :
power supply malfunc- charging cable is reconnected, charging at the
temperature – the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable
charging performance tion – cannot carry
out the charging proc- must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be
is reduced. checked at a quali ed specialist workshop,
ess, replace the mains
The green LED does socket. depending on the indicator.
not ash: overtemper-
ature – the charging White LED is on: vehi-
cle malfunction – can- Functions of the
the indicator
indicator lamp
lamp on the
the vehicle
vehicle
process is stopped. socket
not carry out the
Flashes red Overtemperature at charging process, The socket ap is centrally locked and unlocked
the mains plug – the reset the charging together with the vehicle.
charging process is cable operating unit.
stopped.
When all four displays light up, the charging cable
operating unit performs a self-test.
 Driving and parking 215

Charge status # Only use an undamaged charging cable.

R Lights up blue: charging process completed # Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
R Flashes blue: charging; active energy ow ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
R Lights up orange: charging paused # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
R Flashes orange: connection is being estab- at a quali ed specialist workshop as
lished soon as possible.
R Flashes red (for approx. 90s): malfunction in # Never connect the charging cable to a
vehicle; charging not possible damaged vehicle socket.
% Vehicles with
with active
active ambient lighting: when * NOTE Damage due to overheating of
the charging sequence is activated, the charging cable and charging cable con-
charge level is also accompanied by ambient nector
lighting (/ page 166).
During the charging process, the charging
cable and charging cable connector can heat
Example: Combo 2 vehicle socket Star
arting
ting the
the alter
alternating
nating current
current char
charging
ging process
process up within their permissible limit values.
(mode 2/3)
The colour and signalling of status display 1 The permissible limit values are in uenced by
have the following meanings: & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death when charging at a the following factors:
Locking status damaged socket R the power supply system and the charging

The charging process uses high voltage. cable are not damaged
R Lights up white: vehicle socket unlocked;
insert or remove charging cable R the instructions for handling the charging
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
mains socket are damaged, you could receive cable and the control element on the
R Flashes white: disconnection or malfunction
an electric shock. charging cable have been observed
during locking or unlocking
216 Driving and parking

# If the charging cable or charging cable damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable
connector becomes too hot, have the connector or their contacts.
power supply system checked. # If you feel there is increased resistance,
pull the charging cable connector out of
* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket the socket and reinsert it.
when the socket ap is open
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
# Always keep the socket cover and the R The transmission is in position j.
socket ap closed when there is no
charging cable connected. This protects R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. between the key and the vehicle does not
exceed 1 m.
# Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket R The vehicle has not been started. The õ
ap. This can otherwise result in damage display in the driver's display is o .
which may prevent the socket ap from R The charging cable is not taut.
being opened again.
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle Combo 1 vehicle socket
is equipped with one of the following vehicle
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the sockets.
charging cable connector due to incorrect
handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N)
to insert the charging cable connector into the
vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise
 Driving and parking 217

% When the vehicle is started (the õ display connector being inserted and removed or the
is lit in the driver's display), socket ap 1 beginning of the charging process, is accom-
cannot be opened. panied by selected sounds. For information
% Only upper connection 3 is required for the on Sound Experience, please refer to the Digi-
charging cable connector. tal Owner's Manual.
# To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains
When the charging cable is connected to the vehi-
plug into the mains socket of the external cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
power source as far as it will go. At the start of the charging process, the charge
# Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-
level display is shown in the driver's display with a
cle socket connection 3 to the stop. If the charging prediction. The charging prediction
refers to the time at which the high-voltage bat-
wallbox/charging station is not equipped with
tery will be fully charged.
a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehi-
cle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging % When the vehicle is switched on, a lightning
station socket to the stop. symbol appears next to the charge level dis-
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut play in the driver's display during the charging
Combo 2 vehicle socket when inserted. process.
# Open socket ap 1 via the EQ module of the Status display 2 ashes orange and, as soon % Depending on the temperature, the fan and
multimedia system (/ page 325). as the high-voltage battery is charged, blue. battery cooling system may audibly switch on
during the charging process.
or % When the charging sequence for the ambient
lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights % If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and
# Press the centre rear section of socket ap connected to the mains supply, the high-volt-
up for approximately 30 seconds as with sta-
1. age battery will be recharged automatically as
tus display 2 (/ page 166).
Socket ap 1 swings open and status display needed or when electrical consumers are
When Sound Experience is activated, di erent
2 lights up white. situations, for example the charging cable activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
218 Driving and parking

Ending the
the alter
alternating
nating current
current char
charging
ging process
process # Press charging interruption button 2. Combo 2 vehicle
vehicle socket
(mode 2/3) The charging process is ended. Status display
1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: unlocked.
R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m. # Press and hold button 3 on the charging
cable connector and remove the charging
Combo 1 vehicle
vehicle socket cable connector from the vehicle socket.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the
charging cable connector is still locked, con-
tact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.

# Remove the charging cable connector from

the mains socket, or from the socket on the
wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehi-
cle's charging cable safely in the vehicle
(/ page 207). # Press charging interruption button 2.
The charging process is ended. Status display
1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is
unlocked.
 Driving and parking 219

# Remove charging cable connector 3 from Star

arting
ting the
the direct
direct current
current char
charging
ging process
process * NOTE Damage due to overheating of
the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. (mode 4) charging cable and charging cable con-
A er the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle nector
socket will be locked again and the charging & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death when charging at a
process will resume. damaged socket During the charging process, the charging
cable and charging cable connector can heat
% If you cannot remove the charging cable con- The charging process uses high voltage. up within their permissible limit values.
nector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
charging cable connector is still locked, con- The permissible limit values are in uenced by
mains socket are damaged, you could receive the following factors:
tact a quali ed specialist workshop. an electric shock.
R the power supply system and the charging
% Status display 1 indicator lamp remains lit # Only use an undamaged charging cable.
cable are not damaged
for some time a er charging cable connector # Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
has been removed and then goes out. R the instructions for handling the charging
ing, abrading or driving over the cable. cable and the control element on the
# Close the socket ap.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced charging cable have been observed
# Remove the charging cable connector from at a quali ed specialist workshop as
the mains socket, or from the socket on the soon as possible. # If the charging cable or charging cable
wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehi- # Never connect the charging cable to a
connector becomes too hot, have the
cle's charging cable safely in the vehicle power supply system checked.
damaged vehicle socket.
(/ page 207).
* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket
when the socket ap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no
220 Driving and parking

charging cable connected. This protects R The vehicle is unlocked or the distance
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. between the key and the vehicle does not
exceed 1 m.
# Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket R The vehicle has not been started. The õ
ap. This can otherwise result in damage display in the driver's display is o .
which may prevent the socket ap from R The charging cable is not taut.
being opened again.
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle
is equipped with one of the following vehicle
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the sockets.
charging cable connector due to incorrect
handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N)
to insert the charging cable connector into the
vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise
damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable
Combo 1 vehicle socket
connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance,
pull the charging cable connector out of
the socket and reinsert it.

Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The transmission is in position j.
 Driving and parking 221

% When the vehicle is started (the õ display mation on Sound Experience, please refer to
is lit in the driver's display), socket ap 1 the Digital Owner's Manual.
cannot be opened. When the charging cable is connected to the vehi-
# Remove socket cover 4 from the lower con- cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
nection of vehicle socket 3. At the start of the charging process, the charge
% The CCS charging cable connector requires level display is shown in the driver's display with a
charging prediction. The charging prediction
both vehicle socket connections 3.
refers to the time at which the high-voltage bat-
# Insert the charging cable connector into vehi- tery will be fully charged.
cle socket 3 to the stop. % When the vehicle is switched on, a lightning
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut symbol appears next to the charge level dis-
when inserted. play in the driver's display during the charging
Status display 2 ashes orange and, as soon process.
as the high-voltage battery is charged, blue. % Depending on the temperature, the fan and
% When the charging sequence for the ambient battery cooling system may audibly switch on
Combo 2 vehicle socket lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights during the charging process.
# Open socket ap 1 via the EQ module of the up for approximately 30 seconds as with sta- % If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and
tus display 2 (/ page 166). connected to the mains supply, the high-volt-
multimedia system (/ page 325).
When Sound Experience is activated, di erent age battery will be recharged automatically as
or situations, for example the charging cable needed or when electrical consumers are
# Press the centre rear section of socket ap connector being inserted and removed or the activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
1. beginning of the charging process, are
Socket ap 1 swings open and status display accompanied by selected sounds. For infor-
2 lights up white.
222 Driving and parking

Ending the
the direct
direct current
current char
charging
ging process
process (mode # Press charging interruption button 2. Combo 2 vehicle
vehicle socket
4) The charging process is ended. Status display
1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: unlocked.
R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m. # Press and hold button 3 on the charging
cable connector and remove the charging
Combo 1 vehicle
vehicle socket cable connector from the vehicle socket.
% If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the pro-
cedure. If the charging cable connector is still
locked, contact a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
% Status display 1 indicator lamp remains lit
for some time a er charging cable connector
has been removed and then goes out.
# Insert socket cover 4 into the lower vehicle
socket connection. # Press charging interruption button 2.
# Close the socket ap. The charging process is ended. Status display
1 lights up white. The vehicle socket is
unlocked.
# Remove charging cable connector 3 from
the vehicle socket.
 Driving and parking 223

% If you cannot remove the charging cable con- % Speci ed remaining range 1 may vary due to
nector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the pro- di erent factors, e.g. driving style or topogra-
cedure. If the charging cable connector is still phy.
locked, contact a quali ed specialist work- When the vehicle is connected to the mains sup-
shop. ply and is switched o , the driver's display shows
% Status display 1 indicator lamp remains lit the charge level display for approximately two
for some time a er charging cable connector minutes.
has been removed and then goes out. % The value of current charging capacity 7 can
# Insert socket cover 4 into the lower vehicle di er from the display on the charging station.
socket connection. At a charging capacity of 10 kW or higher, the
# Close the socket ap.
1 Range at current charge level value in the charge level display is rounded o
2 Current charge level of the high-voltage bat- and shown without a decimal place.
tery The value in 4 varies depending on the setting of
Function of the
the charg
chargee level
level display
display in the
the driv
driver's
er's 3 Maximum charge level (depending on the set-
display the charging process. It displays the charging pre-
ting) diction, e.g. the time at which the selected charge
% The data shown in the illustration is example 4 Time remaining until completely charged (until level will be reached or the charge level at the
data. the selected maximum charge level is pre-selected departure time.
reached)
5 Charge level recommended by Range Assis-
tant to reach the next destination
6 Dynamic charge level display
7 Current charging capacity
224 Driving and parking

Con guring
guring the char
charging
ging settings
settings Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating ECO
ECO char
charging
ging Setting
Se tting the
the repeat
repeat days
# Select Add new time and set a new departure
Multimedia system: # Activate or deactivate the function.
time.
4 © 5 EQ 5 Charging options The ECO charging function limits the charging # Mark the relevant weekdays for which the
voltage at charging stations to conserve the vehi- departure time will apply and con rm with
Setting
Setting the
the char
charging
ging progr
program
am
cle's battery. a.
# Select Home, Work or Standard.
Setting the
Setting the departur
depar turee time or
Unloc
nlocking
king the
the char
charging
ging cable (mode 3 or 4) The set departure times are used for the vehicle's # Select ´ and edit existing repeat days.
When the function is active, the charging cable is pre-entry climate control and for predictions
unlocked when the maximum charge level is regarding the approximate state of charge and Setting a break
Setting break in the
the char
charging
ging process
process
reached. range at the time selected. The charging process Up to four breaks in the charging process can be
# Select Home or Work. always starts immediately, irrespective of the next set during which the vehicle is not charged, even
# Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
departure time. if it is connected to a charging station.
# Select Departure time. # Select Charging interruptions.
Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating location-based char
charging
ging
The following charging times can be selected: # Select Add new time and then set and save
# Select Charge at home or Charge at work.
R individual charging times the times for the beginning and end of the
# Activate or deactivate Select based on loca- break.
R one Week profile
tion. # Activate or deactivate the charging breaks that
Setting
Se tting an individual departur
depar turee time have been set.
When the function is activated, the vehicle's cur- # Select Add new time and set a new departure
rent position is saved as one of the selected Set charging breaks can be edited with the ´
time.
options. When the address is reached again, the button or deleted with the E button.
charging program is automatically switched over or
as soon as parking position P is engaged. # Select ´ and adapt an existing departure
time.
 Driving and parking 225

Par
arking
king & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it roll-
Par
arking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle to leaving children unattended in the vehi- ing away
cle # Always secure the vehicle against rolling
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury If children are le unattended in the vehicle, away.
caused by an insu ciently secured vehi- they could, in particular:
cle rolling away R open doors, thereby endangering other * NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering
If the vehicle is not securely parked su - persons or road users.
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way The vehicle can lower because of temperature
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
even at a slight downhill gradient. di erences or longer non-operational times.
R operate vehicle equipment and become This can cause damage to parts of the body.
# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
trapped, for example. # When stopping the vehicle and when
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls
towards the kerb if it starts moving. In addition, the children could also set the driving o , make sure that there are no
vehicle in motion by, for example: obstacles such as curbs under or in the
# apply the parking brake.
R releasing the parking brake.
immediate vicinity of the body.
# Switch the transmission to position j.
R changing the transmission position. % If you park the vehicle for a long period,
R starting the vehicle. observe the following notes:
R make sure the high-voltage battery has a
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. su cient state of charge, especially at
very low outside temperatures. In this way
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the you can avoid any problems when the
key with you and lock the vehicle. vehicle is subsequently started.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of R if possible, avoid parking spaces in direct
children. sunlight.
226 Driving and parking

Observe the notes on charging the high-volt- # Engage transmission position j in a station-
age battery (/ page 207). ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied
(/ page 206).
# Switch o the vehicle by pressing the 1 but-
ton.
# Release the service brake slowly.

# Get out of the vehicle and lock it.

% When you park the vehicle, you can still oper-

ate the side windows and the panoramic slid-
ing sunroof for approximately four minutes if
the driver's door is closed.

Garag
Gar agee door opener
Progr
Pr ogramming
amming buttons
buttons for
for the
the gar
garag
agee door opener
Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
Vehicles with central display brake pedal. trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the
vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts When you operate or program a garage door
moving. with an integrated garage door opener, per-
# Apply the electric parking brake. sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
movement.
 Driving and parking 227

# Always make sure that nobody is within # Point remote control 5 from a distance of
the range of the garage door's move- 1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.
ment. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control
5 until one of the following signals appears:
Before programming the garage door opener, park R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continu-
the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the ously. Programming is complete.
vehicle is switched on but not started.
R Indicator lamp 4 ashes green. Program-
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: ming was successful. Additionally, syn-
R The vehicle has been parked outside the chronisation of the rolling code with the
garage or outside the range of movement of door system must be carried out.
the door. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash
R The vehicle is switched on. green: repeat the procedure.
R The vehicle has not been started. # Release all of the buttons.

% The garage door opener function is always % The remote control for the door drive is not
available when the vehicle is switched on. # Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you included in the scope of delivery of the garage
wish to program. door opener.
Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow. Synchr
Synchronising
onising the
the rolling
rolling code
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
cator lamp ashes yellow. R The door system uses a rolling code.
# Release the previously pressed button.
R The vehicle must be within range of the garage
Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow. door or door drive.
228 Driving and parking

R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are # Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at Opening or closing the
the gar
garag
agee door
located outside the range of movement of the various distances in front of the inside rear
door. view mirror. You should test every position for Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The corresponding button is programmed to
at least 25 seconds before trying another
# Press the programming button on the door position. operate the door.
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately # On remote controls that transmit only for a # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the
30 seconds. limited period, press button 6 on remote door opens or closes.
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2
control 5 again before transmission ends. # If indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow a er
or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. # Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the
When the door closes, programming is com- unit towards the remote control. previously pressed button again until the door
pleted. % It is possible that older garage doors cannot opens or closes.
% Please also read the operating instructions for be operated using the remote control in the Clearing the
Clearing the gar
garag
agee door opener memory
the door drive. inside rearview mirror even a er you have # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
successfully performed the measures descri- Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
Troubleshoo
oubleshooting
ting when progr
programming
amming the
the remote
remote bed above. If this is the case, contact the # If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release
control
contr ol HomeLink® Hotline.
# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote buttons 1 and 3.
% Support and additional information on pro- The entire memory has been deleted.
control 5 is supported.
gramming:
# Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000
# Hold remote control 5 at various angles from
466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277
a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside R On the Internet at https://
rearview mirror. You should test every position
www.homelink.com
for at least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
 Driving and parking 229

Electric
Electr ic parking
parking brake
brake # When leaving the vehicle, always take the R In addition, one of the
the follo
following
wing conditions
key with you and lock the vehicle. must be ful lled:
must
Function of the
the electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee (applying
(applying
automaticall
automatically)
y) # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of - The vehicle is switched o .
children. - The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and
to leaving children unattended in the vehi- The electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee is applied if the
the trans-
trans- the driver's door is opened.
cle mission is in position j and one of the the follo
following
wing - There is a system malfunction.
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, conditions is ful lled:
R The vehicle is switched o .
- The power supply is insu cient.
they could, in particular:
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat
- The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
R open doors, thereby endangering other period.
persons or road users. belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's
door is opened. When the electric parking brake is applied, the
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driver's
R operate vehicle equipment and become display.
trapped, for example. electric parking brake (/ page 230).
In the
the follo
following
wing situations, the
the electric
electric parking
parking Function of the
the electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee (releasing
(releasing
In addition, the children could also set the automatically)
automaticall y)
vehicle in motion by, for example: brakee is also applied:
brak
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta- The electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee is released
released when the
the
R releasing the parking brake.
tionary. follo
ollowing
wing conditions are
are ful lled:
R changing the transmission position. R The driver's door is closed.
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
R starting the vehicle. stationary. R The vehicle has been started.
# Never leave children unattended in the R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing R The transmission is in position h or k and
vehicle. the vehicle to a standstill. you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi
230 Driving and parking

from transmission position j to h or k Applying/releasing

Applying/r eleasing the
the electric
electric parking
parking brake
brake % The electric parking brake is only securely
when on level ground. manually applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit
R If the transmission is in position k, the tail- continuously.
Applying
Appl ying
gate must be closed. Releasing
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat # Switch on the vehicle.
belt buckle of the driver's seat. # Pull handle 1.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the The red ! indicator lamp in the driver's
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the display goes out.
following conditions must be ful lled:
- You shi from transmission position j. Emergency braking
Emergency braking
# Press and hold handle 1.
or As long as the vehicle is driving, the Release
- You have previously driven at speeds parking brake message is displayed and the
greater than 3 km/h. red ! indicator lamp ashes.
When the electric parking brake is released, the When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
red ! indicator lamp in the driver's display still, the electric parking brake is applied. The
goes out. red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driv-
er's display.
# Push handle 1.
The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the Information
Infor mation on collision detection
detection on a parked
parked
vehicle
driver's display.
If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro-
tection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will
 Driving and parking 231

receive a noti cation in the multimedia system System limits

System Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating the
the collision photos
photos
when you switch the vehicle on. Detection may be restricted in the following situa- function
You will receive information about the following tions: Note possible legal restrictions in some countries
points: regarding automatic recording of the vehicle sur-
R the vehicle is damaged without impact, for
roundings.
R The area of the vehicle that may have been example, if an outside mirror is torn o or the
# Activate or deactivate Take photos.
damaged. paint is damaged by a key
R The force of the impact. R an impact occurs at low speed Transf
ansferr
erring
ing the
the collision photos
photos with
with the
the
R the electric parking brake is not applied Mercedes
Mer cedes me App
The following situation can lead to inadvertent
# Select Upload to Mercedes me.
activation:
R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a Setting
Setting collision detection
detection on a parked
parked vehicle
vehicle # Select Upload automatically.

two-storey garage. Multimedia system:

# Scan the generated QR code on the central

% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle

display with the Mercedes me App.
The encrypted collision photos will then be
prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti- 5 Open/close 5 Vehicle protection
uploaded to Mercedes me.
vate tow-away protection, collision detection # Activate or deactivate the function via Colli-
will also be deactivated. % Any device that can scan QR codes can be
You can permanently deactivate collision sion notification. used to view the collision photos in the
detection via the multimedia system % A maximum of three incidents can be regis- Mercedes me App.
(/ page 231). tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every Copying the
Copying the collision photos
photos to
to a USB ash dr
drive
ive
incident. In the event of another incident, the
photos of the rst incident will be overwritten # Connect a USB ash drive .
if they have not been deleted already. # Select Manage collision photos.
232 Driving and parking

# Select Copy (USB). Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times
All collision photos are copied to the USB and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the
ash drive. limitations regarding the safe use of these sys-
% To ensure secure operation, only use with tems.
FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devi- Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of
ces. accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
override the laws of physics. They cannot always
Deleting collision photos
Deleting photos take into account road, weather or tra c condi-
# Select Manage collision photos. tions.
# Select Delete.
All collision photos will be deleted. Infor
Information
mation on vehicle
vehicle sensors
sensors and cameras
cameras
Some driving and driving safety systems use cam-
Driving and driving
Driving driving safety
safety syst
systems
ems eras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to
Driving
Dr iving systems
systems and your
your responsibility
responsibility monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the
vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu-
vring the vehicle. The driving systems are only
aids. They are not a substitute for your attention
to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your
1 Multifunction camera
responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The
driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, 3 Front radar
for braking in good time and for staying in lane. 4 Front camera
 Driving and parking 233

5 Corner radars licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 236)
6 Ultrasonic sensors foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in R EBD (/ page 237)
the detection range of the sensors and cameras.
7 Reversing camera Make sure that there are no overhanging loads R STEER CONTROL
protruding into the detection range. R HOLD function (/ page 237)
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restric-
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator R Hill Start Assist (/ page 238)
ted detection performance of vehicle sen- grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the
sors and cameras R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 239)
sensors checked at a quali ed specialist work-
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area R Valet service mode (/ page 239)
is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving of the cameras on the front and rear windows R Beginner driver mode (/ page 240)
and safety systems cannot function correctly. repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop. R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 240)
There is a risk of an accident. % The reversing camera can extend and retract R Limiter (/ page 243)
# Keep the area around vehicle sensors or automatically for the purpose of calibration,
cameras clear of any obstructions and even though there is no camera image in the R Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent)
clean. display. (/ page 264)
# Have damage to the bumper, radiator R Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 266)
grille or stone chipping in the area of the Over
Overvie
view
w of driving
driving systems
systems and driving
driving safety
safety R Tra c light view (/ page 270)
front and rear windows repaired at a systems
systems R AIRMATIC (/ page 277)
quali ed specialist workshop.
R ABS (/ page 234)
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors R BAS (/ page 234)
and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush R ESP® (/ page 235)
(/ page 392). The sensors and cameras must
not be covered and the detection ranges around R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 236)
them must be kept free. Do not attach additional
234 Driving and parking

Driving
Dr iving Assistance
Assistance package
package R Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
% The availability of some functions or sub-func- (/ page 270)
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
tions of the Driving Assistance Package is R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 274) pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
equipment- or country-speci c. The functions R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 59) pedal can be an indication of hazardous road con-
of your Driving Assistance Package may di er ditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra
from the functions listed here. Par
arking
king Pack
Package
age care while driving.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, Active % The availability of individual functions is coun-
Blind Spot Assist, Active Brake Assist, Active try and equipment-dependent. System limits
System
Lane Keeping Assist and Active Emergency R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h.
R Reversing camera (/ page 279)
Stop Assist are also available without the Driv- R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
ing Assistance Package, albeit with restricted R 360° Camera (/ page 281) malfunction has occurred and the yellow !
functionality. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 286) ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Active Parking Assist (/ page 290) the instrument cluster a er the vehicle is star-
(/ page 246) ted.
R Remote Parking Assist (/ page 295)
R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 250)
R Memory Parking Assist (country-dependent)
R Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 251) Function of BAS
BAS
(/ page 302)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 260)
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a
R Active Steering Assist (/ page 253) Functions of ABS malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 256)
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 257) brake pressure in critical driving situations: in an emergency braking situation is
R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 253) R During braking, for instance, at maximum full- increased.
stop braking or if there is insu cient tyre trac-
tion, the wheels are prevented from locking.
 Driving and parking 235

# Depress the brake pedal with full force in # ESP® should only be deactivated in the If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired
emergency braking situations. ABS pre- following situations. by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by
vents the wheels from locking. intervening in the following ways:
R One or more wheels are braked.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your R The drive system output is adapted according
emergency braking situation with additional brake # Observe the notes in the Supplement. to the situation.
force. You could otherwise fail to recognise
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is dangers. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn-
activated: ing lamp lights up continuously in the driver's dis-
R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can moni- play:
tor and improve driving stability and traction in R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R BAS can shorten the braking distance. the following situations within physical limits:
R Vehicles with
with trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: stabilisation of the
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. R When pulling away on wet or slippery carriage-
vehicle/trailer combination is no longer
The brakes will function as usual once you release ways. active.
the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. R When braking. R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
R Vehicles with
with trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: in trailer operation R The drive wheels could spin.
Function of ESP® from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/trailer
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
combination begins to sway from side to side.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is R In strong side winds when you are driving % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis-
deactivated faster than 80 km/h. ted by ESP® when braking.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out
vehicle stabilisation.
236 Driving and parking

If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes in the driv- ETS/4ETS

ETS/4ET S (Electronic
(Electronic Traction
Traction System)
System) Function of ESP® Cr
Crosswind
osswind Assist
er's display, one or several wheels has reached its ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and
grip limit: makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
slippery carriageway. side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle
R Adapt your driving style to suit the current
in the lane:
road and weather conditions. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
R Do not deactivate ESP®. intervening in the following ways:
speeds above approx. 80 km/h when driving
R The drive wheels are braked individually if they
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is straight ahead or cornering slightly.
necessary when pulling away. spin.
R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to brake application on one side.
or wheels with traction.
improve traction:
R When using snow chains. In uence of driv
drivee progr ams on ESP®
programs Function of ESP® tr
trailer
ailer stabilisation
stabilisation
The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif-
R In deep snow.
ferent weather and road conditions as well as the & WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
R On sand or gravel. driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the and weather conditions
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting selected drive program, the appropriate ESP®
mode will be activated. You can select the drive In poor road and weather conditions, the
action, which enhances traction. trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of
programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT button
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu- (/ page 204). the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a
ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. high centre of gravity may tip over before
ESP® detects this.
Observe the following information:
# Always adapt your driving style to suit
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 506)
the current road and weather conditions.
R Display messages (/ page 441)
 Driving and parking 237

When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise Activ

ctivating/deactivating ESP® (Electr
ating/deactivating (Electronic
onic Stability
Stability Function of EBD
your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from Program)
Progr am) Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char-
side to side: acterised by the following:
Multimedia system:
R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above
4 © 5 ß 5 y R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
speeds of 65 km/h. on the rear wheels.
R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar- * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles R Improved driving stability when braking, espe-
geted, individual brake application on one cially on bends.
side. # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
R In the event of severe swerving, the drive sys-
dangers. HOLD function
tem output is also reduced and all wheels are
braked. # Select ESP. HOLD function
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand-
ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may # Select On or å Off. still without requiring you to depress the brake
not function if: pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn-
R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not
ing lamp lights up continuously in the driver's dis- The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil-
detected properly by the vehicle. play. ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with
Observe any information on warning lamps and the driver.
display messages which may be shown in the driv- System limits
System
er's display. The HOLD function is only intended to provide
assistance when driving and is not a su cient
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
away when stationary.
R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
238 Driving and parking

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the HOLD function R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva- In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
ted. transmission position j and/or by the electric
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the R The transmission is in position h, k or i. parking brake:
HOLD function being active when you R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
leave the vehicle Activ
ctivating
ating the
the HOLD function door is opened.
# Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD R The vehicle is switched o .
function it could, in the following situations, time quickly depress further until the ë
R There is a system malfunction.
roll away: display appears in the driver's display.
# Release the brake pedal. R The power supply is insu cient.
R If there is a malfunction in the system or in
the power supply. Deactivating the
Deactivating the HOLD function In addition, the Brake immediately message may
R If the HOLD function is deactivated by # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake sound at regular intervals.
or
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly
# Depress the brake pedal until the ë display
until the warning message disappears.
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling disappears from the driver's display. The HOLD function is deactivated.
away before you leave it. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following # Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling
situations: away.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle is stationary. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-

R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on

ted.
Function of Hill Star
Startt Assist
the driver's side is fastened. R The transmission is shi ed to position j.
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time
R The vehicle has been started. when pulling away on a hill under the following
R The electric parking brake is released.
ing brake. conditions:
R The transmission is in position h or k.
 Driving and parking 239

R The electric parking brake is released. vides tra c travelling behind you with an even R ESP® cannot be deactivated.
more noticeable warning. R Pro les that are still logged in are logged out
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than and unprotected pro les are secured.
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica-
tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once the Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating vale
valett service
ser vice mode
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
to the vehicle rolling away the hazard warning lights will switch o automati- R For activation: the vehicle is stationary.
cally at approximately 10 km/h. You can also
A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer R For deactivation: park position j is engaged.
switch o the hazard warning lights using the haz-
holds the vehicle. ard warning button. Multimedia system:
# Swi ly move your foot from the brake
4 © 5 Apps 5 Valet service mode
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not Vale
alett service
ser vice mode # Activate or deactivate the function.
leave the vehicle when it is being held by
Hill Start Assist. Function of the
the vale
valett service
ser vice mode If valet service mode is activated, an indicator
In valet service mode, the vehicle acceleration is lamp in the driver's display lights up.
limited to reduce the risk of damage to and % Alternatively, valet service mode can be acti-
Function of Adap
Adaptiv
tivee Brak
Brakee Lights improper use of the vehicle when it is handed over vated or deactivated via the Mercedes me
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following tra c in an to third parties. connect App.
emergency braking situation with the following Valet service mode is characterised by the follow- Further information on Mercedes me connect
actions: ing: (/ page 366)
R By ashing the brake lamps R The maximum speed that can be driven is limi-
R By activating the hazard warning lights ted to 80 km/h.
R Drive programs B and = are not availa-
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above ble.
50 km/h, the brake lamps ash rapidly. This pro-
240 Driving and parking

% Valet service mode is protected from deacti- Activ

ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating beginner driv
driver
er mode is switched on or o , and must be deliberately
vation by third parties only in combination deactivated by the authorised user.
with Mercedes me connect. If the vehicle is Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
connected to Mercedes me connect, only the
R For activation: the vehicle is stationary.
R For deactivation: park position j is engaged. ATTENTION ASSIST
pro le that activated the mode or the estab-
lished main user can deactivate it again. Function of ATTENTION
ATTENTION ASSIST
ASSIST with
with microsleep
microsleep
Multimedia system:
% Valet service mode remains active even fol- detection
det ection
4 © 5 Apps 5 Beginner driver mode
lowing a change of pro le or a er the vehicle % The microsleep detection subfunction is only
is switched on or o , and must be deliberately # Activate or deactivate the function.
available in combination with the driver cam-
deactivated by the authorised user. If beginner driver mode is activated, an indica- era.
tor lamp in the driver's display lights up.
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto-
Beginner driv
driver
er mode % Alternatively, beginner driver mode can be nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk
activated or deactivated via the Mercedes me roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses
Function of the
the beginner driv
driver
er mode connect App. in concentration on the part of the driver are
In beginner driver mode, the vehicle acceleration Further information on Mercedes me connect detected, the system suggests taking a break.
is limited to increase safety for inexperienced (/ page 366)
drivers. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
% Beginner driver mode is protected from deac- always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in
Beginner driver mode is characterised by the fol- tivation by third parties only in combination time. The system is not a substitute for a well-res-
lowing: with Mercedes me connect. If the vehicle is ted and attentive driver. On long journeys, take
R The maximum speed that can be driven is limi- connected to Mercedes me connect, only the regular breaks in good time that allow for ade-
ted to 120 km/h. pro le that activated the mode or the estab- quate recuperation.
R Drive programs B and = are not availa-
lished main user can deactivate it again. You can choose between two settings:
ble. % Beginner driver mode remains active even fol- R StStandar
andard:
d: normal system sensitivity.
R ESP® cannot be deactivated.
lowing a change of pro le or a er the vehicle
 Driving and parking 241

R Sensitive:
Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver The following information is displayed in the driv- sage appears in the driver's display and a warning
is warned earlier and the attention level detec- er's display: tone sounds simultaneously. This warning mes-
ted by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accord- R The length of the journey since the last break sage must be con rmed by Touch Control. It is
ingly. recommended that you take a break immediately.
R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra- ASSIST: If a warning is given in the driver's display, the
tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take multimedia system o ers to search for a rest
- The more segments 2 of the circle dis- area. You can select a rest area and start naviga-
a break! warning appears in the driver's display. played, the higher the detected attention
You can acknowledge the message and take a tion to this rest area.
level.
break where necessary. If you do not take a break If you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST with
and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect - Fewer segments 2 are displayed in the microsleep detection is automatically activated.
increasing lapses in concentration, you will be circle as the attention level decreases. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes. R Microsleep detection 1 status:
System limits
System
- Deactivated: display 1 is hidden. ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to
- Activated but not operational: display 1 200 km/h speed range.
is grey. The microsleep detection function is available at a
- Activated and operational: display 1 is speed of 20 km/h and above.
green. Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION
ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
warnings may be delayed or not occur:
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
System suspended message appears. R If you have been driving for less than approx-
imately 30 minutes.
If the system, which uses the driver camera,
detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTENTION R If the road condition is poor (uneven road sur-
ASSIST Microsleep Take a break! warning mes- face or potholes).
242 Driving and parking

R If there is a strong side wind. The tiredness and alertness assessment of Cruise
Cr uise control
control and limiter
limiter
R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high corner- ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is
Function of cruise
cruise control
control
ing speeds or high rates of acceleration). reset and restarted when continuing the journey
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value
in the following situations:
R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis- selected by the driver.
R You switch o the vehicle.
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
R If the clock is set to the incorrect time.
driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking,
R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre- break).
quently in active driving situations. cruise control will resume speed regulation back
Setting ATTENTION
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST to the stored speed.
Microsleep detection also does not function when Multimedia system: You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the
the driver camera cannot detect the driver's eyes, 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance maximum design speed, up to the speed recom-
for example as a result of the following factors: mended by range monitoring or up to the set win-
5 Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST
R The driver's eyes are covered due to the steer- ter tyre limit. The speed recommended by range
ing column position, for example. Setting
Setting the
the sensitivity monitoring can be overridden by the driver.
R Poor lighting conditions. # Tap the current setting. Observe the notes on driving systems and your
R Some types of spectacles or sunglasses. # Select Standard or Sensitive. responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 232).
R The driver's line of vision is outside the driver
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the microsleep
microsleep war
warning
ning Mercedes‑
Mer cedes‑AMG
AMG vehicles:
vehicles: cruise control is availa-
camera's eld of vision.
# Activate/deactivate Microsleep warning. ble up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Also observe any information regarding display
messages that can be displayed in the driver's Displays in the
Displays the driv
driver's
er's display
display. R h (grey): cruise control is selected but not
yet active, or temporarily passive.
R h (green): cruise control is active.
 Driving and parking 243

A stored speed appears under the h display Function of the

the limiter
limiter R È ( ashes grey): variable limiter is tempo-
and is indicated in the speedometer. The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To rarily passive.
reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter R È (green): variable limiter is activated.
System limits
System applies the brakes automatically.
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the A stored speed appears under the È display
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored You can limit the speed as follows:
and is indicated in the speedometer.
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. R Varariable:
iable: for a short-term speed restriction,
e.g. in built-up areas If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Increase recuperation in good time on long and pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter
steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of R Perermanent
manent:: for a longer-term speed restric- switches to passive mode. The È passive
this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you tion, e.g. in winter tyre mode message appears in the driver's display and the
will make use of the electric motor's braking È display ashes.
e ect to charge the high-voltage battery. This You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the
relieves the load on the brake system and pre- maximum design speed or up to the set winter The variable limiter is reactivated in the following
vents the brakes from overheating and wearing tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the situations:
too quickly. vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been star- R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored
ted. speed.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa-
tions: Observe the notes on driving systems and your R If the stored speed is called up.
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
R in tra c situations which require frequent dangers (/ page 232). R If you store a new speed.
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on
winding roads Mercedes‑
Mer cedes‑AMG
AMG vehicles:
vehicles: the limiter is available
up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle Displays in the
Displays the driv
driver's
er's display
could then skid. R È (grey): variable limiter is selected but not
R when visibility is poor yet activated.
244 Driving and parking

Operating
Oper ating cruise
cruise control
control or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter Operating cruise
Operating cruise control
control and the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter
# Press the corresponding button with only one
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored nger or swipe on the control panel.
speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is Switching betw
Switching between
een cruise
cruise control
control and the
the var
varia-
ia-
lower than your current speed, the vehicle ble limiter
limiter
decelerates. # To select cruise
cruise control:
control: press h.
# Take into account the tra c situation # To select thethe var
variable
iable limiter
limiter:: press È.
before calling up the stored speed.
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by
a di erent button (/ page 248).
Cruise control
R Cruise control is selected.
Activ
ctivating
ating cruise
cruise control
control or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter
# Press M or N on control panel 1.
R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
The current vehicle speed is stored and the
R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h. Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or
R The transmission is in position h. variable limiter does not exceed it (variable limiter).
J Adopts the stored/detected speed or
Variable limiter ± Deactivates cruise control/the variable lim- # Press J.
R The variable limiter is selected. iter
The last stored speed is called up and the
h Selects cruise control vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or
È Selects the variable limiter does not exceed it (variable limiter).
1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
 Driving and parking 245

% When you switch o the vehicle, the last # Press and hold M or N on control panel % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter-
speed stored is deleted. 1. venes, cruise control is deactivated. The varia-
When you activate cruise control or Active The stored speed is increased or decreased to ble limiter is not deactivated.
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed the next increment of ten and a erwards by
stored for the variable limiter is deleted. increments of 10 km/h. Infor
Inf ormation
mation on the
the permanent
permanent limiter
limiter
If the vehicle should never exceed a speci c
Increasing/decr
Incr easing/decreasing
easing the
the stor
stored
ed speed or speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you
# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. can set this speed with the permanent limiter.
from the bottom of control panel 1. # Press M on control panel 1. You do this by limiting the speed between
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
% When the variable limiter is switched to pas- 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia sys-
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe down- tem (/ page 245).
sive mode, you cannot increase or decrease
wards from the top of control panel 1. its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h. Shortly before the set speed is reached, it
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
Adop
dopting
ting a detect
detected
ed speed appears in the driver's display. When you con rm
or the message, display messages no longer appear
If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and until you switch o the vehicle. The speed will
# Brie y press M or N on control panel
Tra c Sign Assist has detected a speed restric- only be displayed again once the vehicle has been
1. tion sign with a maximum permissible speed and
The stored speed is increased or decreased to restarted or if the set speed is changed.
this is displayed in the driver's display:
the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or The permanent limiter does not switch to passive
# Press J.
60 km/h). mode even during kickdown and the driven speed
The maximum permissible speed shown by the remains below the set speed.
or tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains
or does not exceed this speed. Setting the
Setting the limit speed for
for winter
winter tyres
tyres
Multimedia system:
Deactivating cruise
Deactivating cruise control
control or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving
# Press ±.
# Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
246 Driving and parking

Setting
Setting a speed The adjustable set speed can vary due to the fol- % In the DYNAMIC SELECT menu, the driving
# Select Z next to Winter tyre limit. lowing factors: style of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R the stored speed limit (e.g. winter tyre limit) can be set. Depending on which drive pro-
# Select a speed.
(/ page 245) gram is selected, the driving characteristics
can be geared towards energy economy, com-
R the maximum speed recommended by range
Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC fort or dynamic performance. In the Active
monitoring Distance Assist menu, the driving style can be
Function of Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC permanently set to Comfort or Dynamic
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the Other features of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: (/ page 253).
set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in
front are detected, the set distance is maintained, R Adjusts the driving style depending on the Vehicles with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist and Driving
Driving
if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The selected drive program (energy-saving, com- Assistance
Assist ance Pack
Packag
age:
e: if Active Distance Assist
vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the fortable or dynamic) (/ page 203) DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill,
distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the
it can automatically follow the vehicle in front
The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are when driving o again within 30 seconds. If a criti-
turn signal indicator is switched on to change
set and saved using the steering wheel. cal situation is detected in the surrounding area
to the overtaking lane
when driving o , such as a person in the vehicle
Available speed range: R Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indi-
R Vehicles without
without Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in cating that the driver must now take control of the
20 km/h - 160 km/h urban speed ranges (except bicycles and vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.
R Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: motorcycles) Observe the notes on driving systems and your
20 km/h - 210 km/h - Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
into account on motorways or on multi- dangers (/ page 232).
lane roads with separate carriageways
(country-dependent)
 Driving and parking 247

Display in the
Display the driv
driver's
er's display
display in the
the Assistance R ç (green speedometer, white vehicle): mode. The ç suspended message
menu Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, appears in the driver's display.
speed set
System limits
System
R ç (green): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations, for example:
The stored speed is shown under the permanent R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,
status display and highlighted on the speedome- in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light
ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is conditions.
passive, the status display is greyed out. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is
If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
adjustment is less than the stored speed due to R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
the route event ahead, the segments in the
1 Vehicle in front speedometer light up. R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with
2 Distance indicator When the set speci ed distance is increased or steep uphill or downhill gradients.
3 Set speci ed distance decreased, the Ò display brie y appears under R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
the vehicle in the permanent status display. bicycles or motorcycles.
Vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in
green. It may also be in the lane to the le of your % On motorways or high-speed major roads, the In addition, on slippery roads, braking or acceler-
vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli- ating can cause one or several wheels to lose
overtake on the right, for example on motorways. cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away. traction and the vehicle could then skid.
% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
Per
ermanent
manent status
status display
R ç (grey): Active Distance Assist
the setting of the Active Distance Assist these situations.
DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive
DISTRONIC selected but not yet active
248 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident from accelera- & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tion or braking by Active Distance Assist cient deceleration by Active Distance tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
DISTRONIC Assist DISTRONIC R to complex tra c conditions
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c
erate or brake in the following cases, for vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler-
example: ation. If this deceleration is not su cient, As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you may neither give warnings nor intervene in
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-
with a visual and acoustic warning. such situations.
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
# Always observe the tra c conditions
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-
R If the stored speed is called up and is con-
ble distance from the vehicle in front. carefully and react accordingly.
siderably faster or slower than the cur-
rently driven speed. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
Operating Activ
Operating Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC and
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no evasive action. the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
function of Active Distance Assist Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
# Always carefully observe the tra c con- DISTRONIC is impaired R The electric parking brake is released.
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
# Take into account the tra c situation react or has a limited reaction: R The transmission is in position h.
before calling up the stored speed. R when driving on a di erent lane or when
R All the doors are closed.
changing lanes
R Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed.
R Snow chain mode is not active (/ page 414).
 Driving and parking 249

Variable limiter: K Increases/decreases the speci ed distance # To activat

activatee with
with a stor
stored
ed speed: press J.
R The variable limiter is selected. I Switches between the variable limiter and Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC:
ONIC: remove
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The last stored speed is called up and the
# To operat
operatee Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance
or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter:: press the respective Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (vari-
button with only one nger or swipe on the able limiter).
control panel. If the stored speed has been deleted, the cur-
Switching betw
Switching between
een the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter and Active
Active rent vehicle speed is stored.
Distance
Dist ance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC % When you switch o the vehicle, the stored
# Press I. speed is deleted. When you activate Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed
Activ
ctivating
ating the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter or Activ
Activee Distance
Distance stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
Assistt DISTR
Assis DISTRONIC
ONIC
# To activat
activatee without
without a stor
stored
ed speed: press Increasing or reducing
Increasing reducing the
the speed
M, N or J. Activ ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards
DISTR
DIS TRONIC:
ONIC: remove your foot from the accel- from the bottom of control panel 1.
erator pedal. R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
The current vehicle speed is stored and main- # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
J Adopts the stored/detected speed
tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or wards from the top of control panel 1.
± Deactivates the variable limiter/Active Dis- limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
tance Assist DISTRONIC
or or
1 Increases/decreases the speed
250 Driving and parking

# Brie y press M on the upper section or cle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in Deactivating Activ
Deactivating Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC or
N on the lower section of control panel front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter
1. its speed accordingly.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
Pulling away
away with
with Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being
10 km/h. DISTR
DIS TRONIC
ONIC active when you leave the driver's seat
or # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# Press and hold M on the upper section or and remove your foot from the brake pedal. If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
N on the lower section of control panel # Press J.
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
1. DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
or # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
# Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to
increments of 10 km/h.
rmly. prevent it from rolling away before you
or The functions of Active Distance Assist leave the driver's seat.
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
# Press M on the upper section of control Reducing or increasing
increasing the
the speci ed dist
distance
ance
# Press ±.
panel 1. from
fr om the
the vehicle
vehicle in front
front % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter-
Adop
dopting
ting the
the limit speed shown
shown in the
the driv
driver's
er's dis- # Press K. venes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
play The h display appears. The speci ed dis- deactivated. The variable limiter is not deacti-
tance is reduced by one level. vated.
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or
the variable limiter. If the lowest level is already selected, the Function of Activ
Activee Speed Limit Assist
# Press J. selection jumps to the highest level. If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more
The limit speed displayed in the driver's dis- is detected and automatic adoption of speed lim-
play is adopted as the stored speed. The vehi- its is activated, the new speed limit is automati-
cally adopted as the stored speed (/ page 253).
 Driving and parking 251

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is System limits

System # Ensure that the driven speed complies
level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to with tra c regulations.
of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the the detection of tra c signs (/ page 266).
speed is adapted according to the speed permit-
# Adjust the driving speed to suit current
Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically tra c and weather conditions.
ted within the urban area. The speed limit display adopted by the system as the stored speed. Tem-
in the driver's display is always updated when the porary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time
vehicle is level with the tra c sign. Function of rout
route-based
e-based speed adaptation
adaptation
or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
If you are driving on German motorways and there detected by the system. The maximum permissi- ted, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly
is no speed limit, the system uses the speed ble speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive
stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as detected by the system. program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route
the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed Adjust the speed in these situations. event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or
on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the rec- dynamic manner. When the route event has been
ommended speed of 130 km/h is adopted. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in
into passive mode by pressing the accelerator speed front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restric-
pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit tions ahead are taken into account.
set speed are adopted. Assist may be too high or incorrect in some Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in
The maximum permissible speed does not take individual cases, such as: the multimedia system (/ page 253).
the road condition and current weather and tra c R at speed limits below 20 km/h The following route events are taken into account:
conditions into account. Adjust your speed
R in wet conditions or in fog R Bends
accordingly, when necessary.
R when towing a trailer R Roundabouts
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise R T-junctions
dangers (/ page 232). R Turns and exits
252 Driving and parking

R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c ) assumed that the route event is not relevant In these situations the driver must intervene
to the driver. accordingly.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi-
cator is switched on and one of the following sit- R If the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
uations is detected: route-based speed adaptation
R Turning o at junctions System limits
System
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc-
R Driving on slowing-down lanes Route-based speed adaptation does not take right
tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol-
of way regulations into account. The driver is
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lowing situations:
responsible for complying with road tra c regula-
lanes tions and driving at a suitable speed. R If the driver does not follow the calculated
The driver is responsible for choosing the right route
In di cult conditions, the speed selection made
speed and observing other road users. This by the system may not always be suitable. This R If map data is not up-to-date or available
applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and applies to the following situations, for example: R In the event of roadworks
tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation R unclear roads R In bad weather or road conditions
does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.
R road narrowing R If the accelerator pedal is depressed
If a corresponding route event is detected while
R varying maximum permissible speeds in indi- R In the event of electronically displayed
route guidance is active, the rst speed adjust-
ment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal vidual lanes, for example at toll stations speed limitations
indicator is switched on, the selected route is R wet road surfaces, snow or ice
# Adapt the speed to the tra c situation.
con rmed and further speed adjustment is activa- R if transport equipment, for example a trailer or
ted. bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following and the electrical connection has been cor-
cases: rectly established
R If the turn signal indicator is switched o
before the route event and it is therefore
 Driving and parking 253

Setting Activ
Setting Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC driving
driving R Variable limiter Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automatically
sty
tyles
les when all of the following conditions are met:
Further information about Active Distance
R You are in a tra c jam on a motorway or high-
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 248).
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- speed major road.
% Further information on speed adaptation
ted. (/ page 251). R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated
and active (/ page 248).
Multimedia system: Function of Activ
Activee Stop-and-Go
Stop-and-Go Assist R Active Steering Assist is activated and active
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traf- (/ page 255).
5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist fic jams on multi-lane roads with separate carria-
R You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.
geways by automatically pulling away within up to
Selecting a driving
driving sty
style
le 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeu- When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the
# Select DYNAMIC SELECT based , Dynamic or vres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and ¬ status display appears in the driver's dis-
Comfort. lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist auto- play.
matically maintains a safe distance from the vehi-
Setting
Setting speed adaptation
adaptation cle in front and vehicles cutting in. System limits
System
# Select For curves etc.. The system limitations of Active Distance Assist
Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the
When these functions are active, the vehicle driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to
speed is adjusted depending on the route at all times so that you are able to intervene at Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 253).
events ahead. any time to correct the course of the vehicle and
% When one of the following systems is active, keep it in lane. Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist
the detected speed can be manually adopted Observe the notes on driving systems and your
as the speed limit: Function of Activ
Activee Steer
Steering
ing Assist
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC dangers (/ page 232). speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay
R Cruise control in the centre of the lane by means of moderate
254 Driving and parking

steering interventions. Depending on the speed Ø symbol is shown as grey in the driver's does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con rma-
driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles display. tion to the system, a warning tone sounds in addi-
ahead and lane markings as a reference. tion to the visual warning message.
Contact
Cont act detection
detection
% Depending on the country, in the lower speed The driver is required to keep their hands on the If the driver does not react to this warning for a
range Active Steering Assist can use the sur- steering wheel at all times and be able to inter- considerable period, an emergency stop is initi-
rounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, vene at any time to correct the course of the vehi- ated (/ page 256).
Active Steering Assist can then also provide cle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as
assistance when driving outside the centre of change from active to passive mode or vice versa the system detects that the driver has touched
the lane. at any time. the steering wheel.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches the following situations:
to passive mode. The system provides no support
R The driver is wearing gloves.
in this case.
R There is a steering wheel cover on the steering
Per
ermanent
manent status
status display
display in the
the driv
driver's
er's display wheel.
Ø GreyGrey:: activated and passive
Ø Gr Green:
een: activated and active If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued
Ø Red, ashing: prompt to the driver to and a warning tone sounds.
actively con rm or transition from active to
passive status, system limit detected Observe the notes on driving systems and your
If the system detects that the driver has not responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
% During the transition from active to passive steered the vehicle for a considerable period of dangers (/ page 232).
status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged time or has removed their hands from the steering
and ashing. Once the system is passive, the System limits
System
wheel, an optical warning is given rst. Display 1 Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor-
appears in the driver's display. If the driver still que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steer-
 Driving and parking 255

ing intervention is not su cient to keep the vehi- R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting # Always keep your hands on the steering
cle in the lane. out into the lane, such as object markers. wheel and observe the tra c carefully.
The system may be impaired or may not function R If transport equipment, for example a trailer or # Always steer the vehicle paying attention
in the following instances: bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch to tra c conditions.
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, and the electrical connection has been cor-
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi- rectly established.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer-
tions or strong shadows on the carriageway. The system does not provide assistance in the fol- ing Assist unexpectedly intervenes
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, lowing conditions:
The detection of lane markings and objects
direct sunlight or re ections. R On very tight bends and when turning. may malfunction and cause unexpected steer-
R Insu cient road illumination. R When crossing junctions. ing interventions.
R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged R At roundabouts or toll stations. # Steer according to tra c conditions.
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
R When actively changing lane without switching
by a sticker. Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Activ
Activee Steer
Steering
ing Assist
on the turn signal indicator.
R No, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
R When the tyre pressure is too low. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
ent for one lane, or the markings change R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
quickly, for example, in a construction area or
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer- R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
junctions.
ing Assist unexpectedly stops functioning ted.
R The lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. If the system limits of Active Steering Assist Multimedia system:
are reached there is no guarantee that the
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
system will remain active or will keep the vehi-
short and thus the lane markings cannot be cle in lane. 5 Driving
detected. # Select Ø Act. Steering Asst.
R The road is narrow and winding.
256 Driving and parking

Function of Activ
Activee Emergency
Emergency Stop
Stop Assist R In addition to display 1 a warning tone
sounds.
Depending on vehicle equipment, Active Emer-
gency Stop Assist uses touch sensors or detects R The Beginning emergency stop message
steering movements when monitoring the steering appears in the driver's display, a continuous
wheel. If the system detects that the driver is no warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer
longer holding the steering wheel, it can initiate accelerates, and there is a slight, repeated
an emergency stop, if necessary. tensioning of the seat belt.
Vehicles without
without Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packagage:
e: the R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments
accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impulses
as the steering wheel. are also produced.
If the system detects that the driver has not
Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
agee and steered the vehicle for a considerable period of Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
agee and
Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist:
Assist: if Active Steering Assist is time or has removed their hands from the steering Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist:
Assist: depending on the country,
deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are wheel, visual warning 1 is issued. If the driver a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is
monitored as well as the steering wheel. still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no con r- carried out, if possible.
A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not mation to the system, a warning tone sounds in % It is only possible to change across one lane
being held or when a pedal is not depressed, and addition to the visual warning message. and only into the right-hand lane, and not
the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane. Also observe the instructions on the contact onto the hard shoulder.
detection of Active Steering Assist (/ page 253). When automatic braking is initiated, Active Dis-
Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the following tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depend-
warnings in order: ing on the country, the hazard warning light sys-
R Display message 1 appears in the driver's
tem is switched on.
display.
 Driving and parking 257

When the vehicle is stationary, the following System limits

System Activ
ctivee Lane Change
Change Assist
actions are carried out: Vehicles without
without Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e:
Function of Activ
Activee Lane Change
Change Assist
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park- Active Emergency Stop Assist is inactive in the fol- Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver
ing brake. lowing cases: when changing lanes and is activated by indicat-
R The vehicle is unlocked. R Active Lane Keeping Assist has reached a sys- ing brie y.
R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the tem limit. For this, the following conditions must be ful lled:
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. R Active Lane Keeping Assist is not operational R You are on a motorway or high-speed major
(grey status display) or deactivated (white sta- road.
Before automatic braking is initiated, you can can- tus display) (/ page 274).
cel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steering. R The vehicle speed is between approximately
You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer- Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assist
Assistance
ance Pack
Packag
agee and 80 km/h and 180 km/h.
gency Stop Assist a er automatic braking is initi- Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist:
Assist: if Active Lane Keeping R The neighbouring lane is separated by a bro-
ated by one of the following actions: Assist does not detect lane markings, Active ken lane marking.
Emergency Stop Assist is not active. R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja-
R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is
cancelled, but the warning message, warning For the detection of vehicles and other obstacles, cent lane.
tone and power steering remain active observe the system limits of the following func- R Since the last time the vehicle was started,
tions:
R Steering: power-assisted steering is cancelled, the sensors have detected a vehicle at a suita-
the warning message and warning tone remain R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ble distance behind your vehicle.
active and the vehicle continues to be braked (/ page 246) R Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the
R Active Steering Assist (/ page 253) multimedia system.
% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an
emergency stop a maximum of three times R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 257) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active
within one driving cycle. Subsequently, Active Steering Assist are activated on motorways.
Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop
Assist are deactivated for that driving cycle.
258 Driving and parking

The system is not available and must be reactiva- Display in the

Display the driv
driver's
er's display
display in the
the Assistance appears along with grey arrows in the driver's dis-
ted in the following situations: menu play.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja-
Steering Assist were already activated before cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane
entering the motorway. change begins a er the driver has indicated
R The system brie y does not detect the road brie y. The lane change is shown to the driver
you are on as a motorway or a motorway-like with a ashing green arrow next to the ±
road, e.g. on a motorway junction. steering wheel symbol. Green arrow 1 is dis-
played in the appropriate adjacent lane in the
As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a Assistance menu in the driver's display. The Lane
suitable road, you can reactivate it with J, change to the left message, for example, also
M or N. appears.
Active Lane Change Assist can be cancelled in
various situations, including the following:
R Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g.
detected obstacle).
R The driver removes their hands from the steer-

1 Green arrow: lane change initiated

ing wheel.
R The driver steers with too much force or in the
2 Red arrow: lane change cancelled
opposite direction.
When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the R The driver moves the turn signal indicator in
± display appears along with green arrows in the opposite direction.
the driver's display. If the system has been activa-
ted but is not currently available, the ± display
 Driving and parking 259

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active # Monitor the lane change. R The system does not detect a suitable road,
Steering Assist is deactivated. for example, in tight bends or shortly a er a
R The vehicle cannot make the lane change as slip road.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change
planned. Assist unexpectedly stops functioning R The vehicle is on a construction site.
Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is dis- If the system limitations for Lane Change % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust
played as follows: Assist have been reached, there is no guaran- automatically while a certain distance is being
R The arrow in the selected direction of travel tee that the system will remain active. driven a er the vehicle has been delivered.
turns red. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or
Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by
only partially available during this teach-in
R A corresponding message will also appear in applying steering torque.
process, and no arrows are displayed next to
the driver's display. # Always monitor the lane change and
the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol.
R In certain circumstances a warning tone keep your hands on the steering wheel.
Observe the tra c conditions and steer Observe the notes on driving systems and your
sounds. responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
and/or brake if necessary.
& WARNING Risk of accident when changing dangers (/ page 232).
lane to an occupied adjacent lane System limits
System Selecting Activ
Activee Lane Change
Change Assist
The system limitations of Active Steering Assist Multimedia system:
Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly apply to Active Lane Change Assist
detect if the adjacent lane is free. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
(/ page 253). 5 Driving
The lane change might be initiated although
The system may also be impaired or may not func-
the adjacent lane is not free. # Select the function.
tion in the following situations:
# Before changing lanes, make sure that
R The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty
the neighbouring lane is free and there is
(/ page 232).
no danger to other road users.
R The exterior lighting shows a defect.
260 Driving and parking

Activ
ctivee Brak
Brakee Assist If you do not react to the warning, autonomous
braking can be initiated in critical situations.
Function of Activ
Activee Brak
Brakee Assist
In particularly critical situations, Active Brake
Active Brake Assist consists of the following func- Assist can also initiate autonomous braking
tions: directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warn-
R Distance warning function ing tone occur simultaneously with the braking
R Collision warning application.
R Autonomous braking function If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa-
R Situation-dependent braking assistance tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak-
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
R Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
agee and In the Assistance menu, an insu cient distance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi-
Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist:
Assist: Evasive Steering Assist 1 to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you mum full-stop braking if necessary.
further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the
also highlighted in red. When the system detects a
risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedes-
risk of collision, red radar waves 2 appear in
trians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision.
front of the vehicle.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-
% Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the
with PRE-SAFE
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis-
tance warning lamp lights up. country, an additional haptic warning occurs
in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of
the seat belt.
% Vehicles withwith active
active ambient lighting: if Warn-
ing assistance is activated, the Active Brake
Assist warning is also accompanied by ambi- If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
ent lighting (/ page 166). braking assistance has occurred, pop up 1
 Driving and parking 261

appears in the driver's display and then automati- # Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces- R At speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
cally goes out a er a short time. sary. approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians
If the autonomous braking function or the situa- walking in the direction of travel and cyclists
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, The individual subfunctions are available in the fol- ahead.
additional preventive measures for occupant pro- lowing speed ranges: R At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
tection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated. approaching crossing pedestrians and
Distance
Dist ance war
warning
ning function cyclists.
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by You are warned by the distance warning function
from approximately 30 km/h if, over several sec- R At speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
limited detection performance of Active approaching stationary pedestrians and
onds, the distance maintained to the vehicle trav-
Brake Assist cyclists.
elling in front is insu cient for the driven speed.
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden- In this case, the L warning lamp in the driver's Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
tify objects and complex tra c situations. display lights up. If the distance to the vehicle in
R At speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: front continues to decrease at higher speeds, the
L warning lamp begins to ash. when approaching vehicles ahead.
R Give a warning or brake without reason
R At speeds up to approximately 120 km/h
R Not give a warning or not brake Collision war
warning
ning when approaching crossing vehicles, pedes-
Collision warning can assist you in the following trians and cyclists.
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is situations from approximately 7 km/h with an
responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe R At speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
intermittent warning tone and the L warning
distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed when approaching stationary vehicles.
lamp.
and for braking in good time. R At speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: approaching cyclists ahead.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c
R At speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
situation; do not rely on Active Brake R At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
Assist alone. when approaching vehicles ahead. approaching stationary pedestrians and
cyclists.
262 Driving and parking

Aut
utonomous
onomous braking
braking function R At speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approx- approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
imately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function R At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when when approaching vehicles ahead.
may intervene in the following situations: approaching stationary pedestrians and R At speeds up to approximately 120 km/h
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: cyclists. when approaching crossing vehicles, pedes-
R At speeds up to approximately 250 km/h trians and cyclists.
Situation-dependent braking
braking assistance
assistance
when approaching vehicles ahead. If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approx- R At speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
R At speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when imately 7 km/h, situation-dependent braking when approaching stationary vehicles.
approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walk- assistance may intervene in the following situa- R At speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
ing in the direction of travel and stationary tions. approaching cyclists ahead.
vehicles. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
R At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when R At speeds up to approximately 250 km/h approaching stationary pedestrians and
approaching crossing pedestrians and when approaching vehicles ahead. cyclists.
cyclists.
R At speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
Cancelling a brak
brakee application of Activ
Activee Brake
Brake
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walk- Assist
R At speeds up to approximately 250 km/h ing in the direction of travel and stationary
vehicles. You can cancel a brake application of Active
when approaching vehicles ahead. Brake Assist at any time by:
R At speeds up to approximately 120 km/h R At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with
when approaching crossing vehicles, pedes- approaching crossing pedestrians and
cyclists. kickdown.
trians and cyclists.
R Releasing the brake pedal.
R At speeds up to approximately 100 km/h R At speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
when approaching stationary vehicles. approaching stationary pedestrians and
cyclists.
 Driving and parking 263

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica- Evasiv

Evasivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac-
tion when one of the following conditions is ful l- teristics:
led: & WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva- R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi-
R you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle sive Steering Assist cles.
R there is no longer a risk of collision Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog- R Assistance through power-assisted steering if
R an obstacle is no longer detected in front of
nise objects or complex tra c situations it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
your vehicle clearly. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement
Moreover, the steering support provided by during a swerving manoeuvre.
Reaction to
to oncoming road
road users
users (only
(only vehicles
vehicles Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to R Assistance during swerving and straightening
with Driving
with Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age)
e) avoid a collision. of the vehicle.
Active Brake Assist can also react to detected # Always pay careful attention to the tra c
R Reaction from a speed of approximately
oncoming road users: situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately
R Reaction up to speeds of approximately Assist alone. 110 km/h.
100 km/h # Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces-
R Warning for oncoming road users through sary. The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist
acoustic warning and warning lamp # End the support by actively steering in
can be cancelled at any time by counter steering.
R Autonomous braking application in order to non-critical situations. System limits
System
reduce the severity of an accident # Drive at an appropriate speed if there Full system performance is not yet available for a
are pedestrians close to the path of your short time a er switching on the vehicle or a er
vehicle. driving o . As long as the functions are restricted,
the Æ warning lamp can also be shown in the
driver's display. Depending on the environmental
conditions, it may take a few minutes before full
system performance is available.
264 Driving and parking

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the func- R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move # Select Off.
tions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of quickly into the sensor detection range. The distance warning function, the autono-
another driving system, the ê display message R If road users are hidden by other objects or mous braking function and Evasive Steering
appears in the driver's display. are located close to other objects. Assist are deactivated.
If the system is unavailable due to dirty or dam- R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist The system is switched on again the next time
aged sensors or due to a fault, or if the functions cannot be distinguished from the background. the vehicle is started.
are restricted, the Ó warning lamp appears in % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as
the driver's display. symbol appears in the status bar of the multi-
such, e.g. due to special clothing or other
The system may be impaired or may not function, objects. function display.
particularly in the following situations: R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, Speed Limit Assist
R On bends with a tight radius.
in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light
conditions. Setting
Setting Activ
Activee Brak
Brakee Assist Function of Speed Limit Assist
R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or % Speed Limit Assist uses OpenStreetMap data,
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: which is made available under the conditions
covered. (/ page 232) R The vehicle is switched on. of the Open Database License (OBbL). Further
R If the sensors are impaired due to interference
Multimedia system: information can be found at: https://
from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.
re ections in multi-storey car parks. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
5 Avoid collision 5 Active Brake Assist Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with multi-
R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
function camera and displays them in the driver's
has been detected and displayed. # Select the desired setting.
display and optionally in the head-up display. The
R In complex tra c situations where objects camera also detects speed limits with a restric-
Deactivating Activ
Deactivating Activee Brak
Brakee Assist
cannot always be clearly identi ed. tion indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when
% It is recommended that you always leave wet).
Active Brake Assist activated.
 Driving and parking 265

Observe the notes on driving systems and your Displayy in the

Displa the driv
driver's
er's display
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 232).
War
arning
ning when the
the maximum permissible
permissible speed is
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a
exceeded
exceeded
country where Speed Limit Assist is not suppor-
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
ted. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all coun-
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
tries.
this, you can specify in the multimedia system by
how much the maximum permissible speed can System limits
System
be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can The system may be impaired or may not function
specify whether the warning is to be just a visual particularly in the following situations:
warning or an acoustic one as well (/ page 266). 1 Permissible speed R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illu-
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction mination of the road, highly variable shade
3 Additional sign with restriction conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or
heavy spray.
% Tra c signs which have an impact on the
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,
maximum permissible speed, e.g. signs indi-
cating the beginning or end of dual carriage- direct sunlight or re ections.
ways, can also be detected. R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunc-

If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the cur- tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted
rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to up, damaged or covered.
missing signs), the following display appears in R If tra c signs are di cult to detect, e.g. due
the driver's display: to dirt, snow, ice, insu cient lighting or driving
too close to the vehicle in front, or because
266 Driving and parking

they are covered, faded, damaged, badly posi- Setting Speed Limit Assist
Setting Tra c Sign Assist
tioned or twisted. Multimedia system:
Function of Tr
Traa c Sign Assist
R Digital LED tra c signs may not be detected 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
% This function is available on demand
correctly or at all due to technical factors, 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist
such as transmission frequency. (/ page 26).
Setting
Setting an additional audible indication Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the
R If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g.
tra c signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, # Activate or deactivate the function. multifunction camera and compares this with
in neighbouring lanes or parallel roads. information in the digital navigation map. It assists
Setting
Se tting the
the war
warning
ning thr
threshold
eshold you by displaying detected speed limits and over-
R If signs do not conform to the standard. This value determines the speed at which a warn- taking restrictions in the driver's display and in
R If signs or road layouts are speci c to the ing is issued when exceeded. the head-up display. The system can issue a warn-
country, for example, at or beyond construc- # Select Warning threshold. ing when you exceed the maximum permissible
tion sites. # Set the desired speed. speed.
R A er sharp turns and tight bends, when tra c % When one of the following systems is active, In some countries, the system can provide you
signs are outside the camera's eld of vision. the detected speed can be manually adopted with further functions and can warn you when you
R If you overtake vehicles with tra c signs as the speed limit: are approaching pedestrian crossings or when
which are a xed or attached to them. you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
unintentionally.
R If you are using transport equipment secured R Cruise control
with a trailer coupling, such as a bicycle rack, The camera also detects and analyses tra c
the system may react to restrictions for car/ R Variable limiter signs with a restriction indicated by an additional
trailer combinations. sign (e.g. when wet).
Further information (/ page 248).
Tra c Sign Assist portrays only selected signs in
the driver's display. Actual tra c signs and speed
limits have priority over tra c signs and speed
limits shown in the driver's display.
 Driving and parking 267

Also observe the following information: Displayss in the

Display the driv
driver's
er's display DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the
R select a speed adapted to the tra c, sur- head-up display.
roundings and weather conditions
R observe actual tra c signs
R observe applicable tra c rules and regula-
tions
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 232).

1 Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction Examples of tra c signs which can be displayed
3 Additional sign with restriction Tra c Sign Assist can detect and display following
tra c signs 1:
The system can show up to two tra c signs in the
driver's display simultaneously. The system always R speed limits
prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traf- R end of the speed limit
fic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be R overtaking restrictions
shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs
are shown in the driver's display, for example R play streets
when speed limits are detected, the value of le - R depending on the country: signs showing the
hand speed limit 1 is transmitted to the limiter, start or end of motorways and dual carriage-
cruise control or Active Distance Assist ways
268 Driving and parking

Tra c Sign Assist can detect following additional Assistance menu can also display a dynamic visu- ashes three times in the driver's display) or vis-
signs 3 and, if necessary, analyse the relevance alisation of the speed limits ahead. ual and acoustic, including a warning tone.
of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors: If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the cur- Additional functions of TrTraa c Sign Assist
Assist (coun-
R when wet rently applicable maximum permissible speed try-speci
try -speci c)
R slippery road surfaces (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display War
arning
ning for
for no-entry
no-entr y signs: Tra c Sign Assist can
appears in the driver's display: warn you if you drive the wrong way down a sec-
R in fog
tion of road, for example on motorway slip roads
R temporary restrictions
or one-way streets.
R exits
War
arning
ning at pedestr
pedestrian
ian crossings:
crossings: if you approach
R restrictions for car/trailer combinations pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians
Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. are in the danger zone or are moving towards it,
Tra c Sign Assist also uses data from the digital If the vehicle is in a country where Tra c Sign Tra c Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of
street map in the navigation system. When you Assist is not supported, this is displayed continu- approximately 70 km/h.
leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on ously.
a motorway exit or slip road for example, or a er War
arning
ning at stop
stop signs: Tra c Sign Assist can warn
you turn at a junction, the display in the driver's % Also observe the information on display mes- you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if
display can thus be updated without a tra c sign sages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 441). you are about to drive past a stop sign uninten-
having been detected. War
arning
ning when the
the maximum permissible
permissible speed is tionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be
exceeded
exceeded clear, for example if the system detects more than
Depending on vehicle equipment and country, the one stop sign, or a stop sign can be con rmed
system can also display speed restrictions up to The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do using the digital navigation map. No warning can
500 m ahead in the driver's display and in the be issued if several di erent signs are detected.
head-up display. The driver's display can also this, you can specify in the multimedia system by
show the distance to an upcoming lower limit how much the maximum permissible speed can War
arning
ning at red
red lights: Tra c Sign Assist can warn
speed. For this purpose, information from the digi- be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if
tal road map of the navigation system is used. The set the warning to visual only (the tra c sign
 Driving and parking 269

you are about to drive through a red light uninten- R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, R A er sharp turns and tight bends, when tra c
tionally. direct sunlight or re ections. signs are outside the camera's eld of vision.
The following conditions must be ful lled: R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunc- R If you overtake vehicles with tra c signs
R Several tra c lights have been detected. tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted which are a xed or attached to them.
up, damaged or covered. R If you are using transport equipment secured
R All tra c lights detected are red.
R If tra c signs are di cult to detect, e.g. to the vehicle with a trailer coupling, such as a
R At least one of the red tra c lights detected is
because they are dirty, covered, faded, cov- bicycle rack, restrictions for car/trailer combi-
on the front passenger side beside the vehi- ered with ice, damaged, badly positioned, nations may be considered valid if applicable.
cle's own lane. poorly lit or twisted.
R The tra c lights are in the following sequence Setting Tr
Setting Traa c Sign Assist
R Active tra c signs with LED displays may not Multimedia system:
(from top to bottom): red, yellow, green. be detected correctly or at all due to technical 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
% If the function is available, you can activate or factors, such as transmission frequency.
5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
deactivate the warnings at pedestrian cross- R If the information on the navigation system's
ings, stop signs and red lights in the Tra c digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating the
the speed war
warning
ning
Sign Assist menu under Further warnings date. # Activate or deactivate Speed limit warning.
(/ page 269). R If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g.
tra c signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating further
further functions of Traf-
Traf-
System limits
System fic Sign Assist
in neighbouring lanes or parallel roads.
The system may be impaired or may not function # Switch Further warnings or Additional warn-
particularly in the following situations: R If signs do not conform to the standard.
ing tone on or o .
R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illu- R If signs or road layouts are speci c to the
mination of the road, highly variable shade country and deviate from the route guidance Setting the
Setting the war
warning
ning thr
threshold
eshold
conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond This value determines the speed at which a warn-
heavy spray. construction sites. ing is issued when exceeded.
270 Driving and parking

# Set the desired speed under Warning thresh- If the vehicle is in rst position at a tra c light, Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist and Activ
Activee Blind Spot
Spot Assist
old. the camera image with tra c light view is shown
on the central display. Function of Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist and Activ
Activee Blind
Spott Assist
Spo Assist with
with exit
exit war
warning
ning
Tra c light view When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use
faded out. radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m
Infor
Information
mation about the
the tr
traa c light view # Activate D or deactivate E Traffic behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.
The tra c light view supports the driver when
waiting in front of a red light by displaying the light view. The system can detect vehicles travelling from
camera image on the central display. The camera Using other
other available
available functions speeds of approximately 12 km/h and issue a
image is displayed when the driver is the rst vehi- warning if they move into the monitoring range.
# Select Z.
cle in front of the red light and faded out when the Status display in the driver's display
vehicle drives o . # Select On request or Automatic.
¸ Grey Grey:: the system is activated but inopera-
If On request is set and a tra c light view is
Displaying
Displaying tr
traa c light view tive.
available, the Please tap here for traffic light
view. message is displayed. The camera image ¸ Gr Green:
een: the system is activated and opera-
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: tional.
R The Traffic light view option is switched on . is shown a er con rmation of the message.
R A tra c light view is available. When Automatic is set, the camera image is
automatically displayed when the tra c light
Multimedia system: view is available.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
5 Assistance 5 Traffic light view

% This function is not available in all countries.

 Driving and parking 271

waves 2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the Exit war

warning
ning
assistance graphic. The exit warning is an additional function of Blind
If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist and can
in the outside mirror ashes for all other detected warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a sta-
vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If tionary vehicle about approaching vehicles.
you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit
warning
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise The exit warning neither reacts to stationary
dangers (/ page 232). objects nor to persons or road users
Driver's display in the Assistance menu approaching you at a greatly di ering speed.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx- & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these
imately 12 km/h and this vehicle enters the moni- Spot Assist situations.
toring range immediately a erwards, the warning Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles # Always pay particular attention to the
lamp in the corresponding outside mirror lights up approaching and overtaking you at a greatly tra c situation when opening the doors
red. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside di erent speed. and make sure there is su cient clear-
mirror 1 also lights up red, and the lane in which Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this ance.
the vehicle is detected is hatched out. situation.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range,
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c
and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the the red warning lamp lights up in the correspond-
situation and maintain a safe distance at ing outside mirror.
corresponding direction, a double warning tone the side of the vehicle.
sounds once and the warning lamp ashes red in If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the
the corresponding outside mirror. Red radar side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice
and the ambient lighting in the respective door
272 Driving and parking

and the warning lamps in the corresponding out- System limits

System Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are
side mirror ash red. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may not operational if transport equipment, for exam-
Vehicles with
with MBUX Inter
Interior
ior Assistant
Assistant:: the visual be limited in the following situations, in particular: ple a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
warning begins as soon as the hand of a vehicle trailer hitch and the electrical connection has
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
occupant moves in to the area of the door. been correctly established.
are obscured
% Vehicles with
with ambient lighting: the Warning Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the
R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
assistance of the ambient lighting can be following situations:
snow
activated and deactivated (/ page 166). R when the sensors are covered by adjacent
R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
% The warning assistance can di er depending vehicles in narrow parking spaces
motorbikes
on the equipment and may vary according to R when people approach the vehicle
R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
the setting. R in the event of stationary or slowly moving
R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their
The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot objects
lane
Assist is activated and up to a maximum of three
Function of the
the brak
brakee application of Activ
Activee Blind
minutes a er the vehicle has been switched o . Warnings may be issued in error when driving Spott Assist
Spo
The exit warning is no longer available once the close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane
warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three borders. Always make sure that there is su cient % The brake application function is only availa-
times. distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles. ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance
Package.
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi- Warnings may be interrupted when driving along-
tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The side long vehicles, for example lorries, for a pro- If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
responsibility for opening and closing the doors longed time. impact in the monitoring range, a course-correct-
and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi- ing brake application is carried out. This is
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are designed to help you avoid a collision.
cle occupants. not operational when reverse gear is engaged.
 Driving and parking 273

The course-correcting brake application is availa- Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly
ble in the speed range between approximately or intervene in such situations. in the opposite direction or accelerate.
30 km/h and 200 km/h. # Always pay careful attention to the tra c System limits
System
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake situation and maintain a safe distance at Either a course-correcting brake application
application of Active Blind Spot Assist the side of the vehicle. appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all,
may occur especially in the following situations:
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your-

located on both sides of your vehicle.
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
warns you or makes a course-correcting R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
brake application. high cornering speeds.
# Always maintain a safe distance at the R You brake or accelerate signi cantly.
sides. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or Active Brake Assist.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active R ESP® is deactivated.
Blind Spot Assist If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react in the and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display detected.
following situations: 1 indicating the danger of a side collision R Transport equipment, for example a trailer or
R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. appears in the driver's display. bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
R If vehicles approach and overtake you at a In rare cases, the system may make an inappro- and the electrical connection has been cor-
greatly di erent speed. priate brake application. This brake application rectly established.
274 Driving and parking

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist or The system can intervene in the following situa-
Activ
ctivee Blind Spot
Spot Assist tions:
Multimedia system: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance marking.
5 Avoid contact
R One of your front wheels goes over a lane
# Select Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot marking.
Assist. If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering
# Select On or Off. intervention does not occur on the corresponding
side.
Activ
ctivee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist If you leave the lane without activating the turn Display 1 will appear in the driver's display and a
signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a warning tone will sound in the following situations:
Function of Activ
Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steer- R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in ing intervention does not occur.
front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction Assist lasts longer than approximately ten sec-
camera (/ page 232) and can warn you before Vehicles with
with Blind Spot
Spot Assist or Driving
Driving Assis- onds.
you leave your lane unintentionally. The system tance Pack
Packag
age:
e: if the system detects an obstacle, R The system carries out two or more steering
can guide you back into your lane through a such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a interventions within approximately three
course-correcting steering intervention and addi- steering intervention will occur regardless of the minutes without any steering intervention from
tionally warns you with vibration pulses in the turn signal indicator. the driver.
steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is
In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you
available in the speed range between 60 km/h
can set the sensitivity of the system and set the
and 200 km/h.
level of support. Additionally, you can set whether
the system should react to discontinuous lane
 Driving and parking 275

markings or only continuous lane markings ously shown in red in the status display, System limits
System
(/ page 276). Active Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an In the following situations, no lane-correcting
emergency stop (/ page 256). steering intervention occurs but rather a warning
Status displays
displays for
for Activ
Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
ï Whit White:e: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deac- in the steering wheel, depending on the situation:
Activ
ctivee Lane Change
Change Assist
Assist display
display in the
the "Assis-
tivated. R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
tance" menu
ï Yellow ellow:: there is a malfunction. Please also erate.
observe the display messages. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ð Grey Grey:: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activa- ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot
ted, but not operating. Assist.
ð Gr Green:
een: Active Lane Keeping Assist is acti- R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
vated and operating. If the system is high cornering speeds or high rates of acceler-
operational on only one side, the lane ation.
marking is shown in green on the corre- R When ESP® is deactivated.
sponding side. R If transport equipment, for example a trailer or
ð Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui- bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
ded you back into your lane with a course- If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a and the electrical connection has been cor-
correcting steering intervention. The sta- detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red rectly established.
tus display will ash if there is also a hap- in the Assistance menu in the driver's display. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
tic warning in the steering wheel. The lane % Vehicles with
with active
active ambient lighting: if Warn- has been detected and displayed.
marking is shown in red only on the side ing assistance is activated, the Active Lane
for which there is a warning. Keeping Assist warning is also accompanied
Vehicles without
without Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack-
Pack- by ambient lighting (/ page 166).
age:
ag e: if both lane markings are simultane-
276 Driving and parking

The system may be impaired or may not function R If the carriageway is very narrow and winding. Setting Activ
Setting Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
particularly in the following situations: Multimedia system:
Observe the notes on driving systems and your 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
illumination of the road, highly variable shade dangers (/ page 232). 5 Avoid collision
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Activ
Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping
Assist Setting
Setting the
the sensitivity
sun or re ections.
Multimedia system: # Select Z.
R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunc-
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted # Select Early, Med. or Late.
5 Avoid collision
up, damaged or covered.
5 Active Lane Keeping Assist The last selected setting will be adopted the next
R If there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the time the vehicle is started.
radar sensors, or if they are damaged or cov- # Switch the function on or o .
% The standard setting for this function is
ered. Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be dependent on the country.
R If there are no lane markings, or several activated and deactivated via quick-access.
unclear lane markings are present for one Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating assistance
assistance on discontin-
% A er starting the vehicle, the settings are uous lane markings
markings
lane, e.g. around roadworks. country-speci c.
R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov- # Select Advanced support.

ered. The last selected setting will be adopted the next

R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too time the vehicle is started.
short and thus the lane markings cannot be % The standard setting for this function is
detected. dependent on the country.
R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch o , cross one another or merge.
 Driving and parking 277

% This function must be activated in vehicles R a comfortable suspension setting in drive pro- The vehicle can dri outwards, for example,
without Driving Assistance Package, so that grams A and ; when steering or cornering.
Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. R a rmer, sporty suspension setting in drive # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to
Further information on Emergency Stop Assist program C
(/ page 256) the driving style and the road surface
R lowering the vehicle above 120 km/h in order conditions.
to reduce energy consumption
AIRMATIC
AIRMATIC & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi-
When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the
Function of AIRMATIC
AIRMATIC vehicle is raised again to the normal level. cle lowering
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia- R increased vehicle level for greater ground When lowering the vehicle, other people could
ble damping for improved driving comfort. The all- clearance, selected via the multimedia system become trapped if their limbs are between the
round level control system ensures the best possi- vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the
ble suspension and constant ground clearance, % Operation
Operation with
with a trailer
trailer or bicycle
bicycle rac
rack:
k: if
vehicle.
even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, transport equipment, such as a trailer or a
# Make sure no one is underneath the
the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. and the electrical connection has been cor- vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the
You also have the option of manually adjusting the rectly established, the vehicle remains at nor- wheel arches when the vehicle is being
vehicle level. mal level irrespective of speed or the drive lowered.
AIRMATIC includes the following components and program selected.
functions: & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
Setting
Setting the
the vehicle
vehicle level
level
to the vehicle lowering
R air suspension with automatic all-round level
control & WARNING Risk of accident because vehi- Vehicles with
with AIRMATIC
AIRMATIC or level
level control:
control: when
R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
cle level is too high you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the
constant damping force adjustment) Driving characteristics may be impaired. vehicle rst rises slightly and then returns to
the set level shortly a erwards.
278 Driving and parking

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/ GPS-based raising
raising
arches or the underbody could thus become bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster If the function is activated, it is possible to save
trapped. than 30 km/h. the vehicle position when the vehicle level is
raised.
The vehicle can also be lowered a er being Multimedia system:
# Con rm the prompt.
locked. 4 © 5 ß 5 y
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that
The position of the vehicle is stored. When the
Raising the
the vehicle
vehicle previously stored position is reached again, a
nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel prompt appears in the Zero Layer as to
arches or the underbody. # Select t.
whether the vehicle level should be raised
The indicator lamp lights up continuously. again.
* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering The vehicle is raised to high level +1. % Settings for GPS-based raising (/ page 279)
Parts of the body could be damaged when the Your selection is saved. High level +1 set remains Lowering
Lower ing the
the vehicle
vehicle
vehicle is lowered. stored even a er the vehicle has been switched
# Select t.
# Make sure that there are no obstacles o .
The indicator lamp goes out.
such as kerbs underneath or in the The vehicle is lowered again in the following situa-
immediate vicinity of the body when the tions: The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level.
vehicle is being lowered. R When driving faster than 50 km/h. % Use the normal level in trailer operation. High
R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/
level driving is not permitted in trailer opera-
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: tion on public roads.
R The vehicle has been started. bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than
30 km/h.
R The vehicle is not moving faster than
40 km/h.
 Driving and parking 279

Setting GPS-based raising

Setting raising of the
the vehicle
vehicle 6 Warning display of Parking Assist
Multimedia system: PARKTRONIC (/ page 286)
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 7 Guide lines at a distance of approximately
5 GPS-based raising 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
# Select Positions saved on request, Always area
save positions or Delete all saved positions. 8 Path marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
Rever
ersing
sing camera 9 Driven surface depending on the current
Function of the
the rever
reversing
sing camera steering wheel angle (dynamic)
The reversing camera monitors the area behind A Guide line at a distance of approximately
your vehicle. If you have activated the function 0.3 m from the rear area
(/ page 286), the image from the reversing cam-
era is automatically displayed in the central dis- % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes 8
play when reverse gear is engaged. are displayed in green (/ page 290).
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a Camera views menu (top view)
substitute for your attention to the surroundings. 1 Parking Assistance menu
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park- 2 Reversing camera with top view
ing remains with you. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeu- 3 Wide-angle view
vring area while manoeuvring and parking. 4 Trailer view
% The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a 5 Activates/deactivates Parking Assist
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. PARKTRONIC (/ page 289)
280 Driving and parking

System limits
System
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys-
tem inoperative message appears in the central
display.
The reversing camera will not function or will only
partially function in the following situations:
R You are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 16 km/h.
R The tailgate is open.
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if
light is shining into the camera.
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted
Wide-angle view Trailer view up. Observe the notes on cleaning the revers-
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid
ing camera (/ page 392).
R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam-
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch aged. In this case, have the camera and its
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
position and setting checked at a quali ed
specialist workshop.
R The detection range is limited by additional
vehicle attachments at the rear, such as a
licence plate bracket or bicycle rack.
 Driving and parking 281

Also observe the information on vehicle sensors the central display when reverse gear is selected Menu over
overvie
view
w Camera views
and cameras (/ page 232). (/ page 286).
% Do not use the reversing camera in these The 360° Camera includes the following cameras
types of situations. You could otherwise injure and evaluates their images:
others or collide with objects when parking R Reversing camera
the vehicle.
R Front camera
% The contrast of the display may be impaired
R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
by direct sunlight or by other light sources,
e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, The cameras are only an aid and may show a dis-
pay particular attention. torted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for not show them at all. They are not a substitute for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its your attention to the surroundings. The responsi-
use. bility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains
with you. Make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area
360° Camera while manoeuvring and parking.
Function of the
the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of 1 Menu Parking Assistance
four cameras which cover the immediate sur- 2 Top view with image from the front camera
roundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you 3 Top view with image from the reversing cam-
when you are parking, for example, or at exits with era
reduced visibility. 4 3D view, le -hand side of the vehicle
If you have activated the function, the image from 5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle
the reversing camera is automatically displayed in 6 3D auto view
282 Driving and parking

7 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist Function of the

the guide lines % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes
PARKTRONIC (/ page 289) and guide lines are displayed in green instead
8 To set the GPS activation point (/ page 286) of yellow (/ page 290).
9 To switch between standard and wide-angle Top view
view with
with image
image from
from the
the front
front or rever
reversing
sing
view camera
A To switch between standard and trailer view If you have activated the function, the image from
the reversing camera is automatically displayed in
% In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC the central display when reverse gear is selected
warning display is shown (/ page 286). (/ page 286).

1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately

0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
area
2 Path marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1 Warning display of Parking Assist
0.3 m from the rear area PARKTRONIC (/ page 286)
2 Your vehicle from above
3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take
at the current steering angle
 Driving and parking 283

3D view,
view, le /right-hand
/right-hand side of the
the vehicle
vehicle

* NOTE
NOTE Risk of accident due to objects
being severely distorted in the display or
not displayed at all
Due to the projection of the cameras, objects
in the 3D views may be severely distorted
when displayed or not displayed at all.
# Make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects etc. in the manoeu-
vring area while manoeuvring and park- 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
ing. (/ page 286) (/ page 286)
2 Guide lines
In the 3D view, le -/right-hand side of the vehi-
cle, the virtual camera moves to the respective In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to
side of the vehicle. When you change the trans- the standard perspective, facing forward from the
mission position, the view is automatically adap- rear above the roof. The view changes automati-
ted. cally when approaching obstacles.
3D auto
auto view If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to
% The area behind the vehicle is not
not displayed 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and
as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views. zoom the views by touch.
284 Driving and parking

Wide-angle view

Trailer view: locating aid Trailer view: side view of the mirror cameras
1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 To switch between standard and trailer view 1 To switch between standard and trailer view
(/ page 286) 2 Yellow locating aid System limits
System
2 To switch between standard and wide-angle 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys-
view 4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately tem inoperative message appears in the central
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch display.
Trailer view
When the electrical connection is established The 360° Camera will not function or will only
% In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at
between the vehicle and the trailer, the display partially function in the following situations:
the level of the trailer hitch.
changes to the side camera view. R You are driving forwards at a speed greater
If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled than approximately 16 km/h.
to the vehicle, the following display appears:
R The doors are open.
R An outside mirror is not completely folded out.
R The tailgate is open.
 Driving and parking 285

R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy % The contrast of the display may be impaired Calling up the
the 360° Camera
Camera views
views using the
the but-
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light ton
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In
light is shining into the camera. this case, pay particular attention.
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
up. example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
R If cameras or vehicle components in which the
cameras are tted are damaged. In this event, See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
have the cameras, their positions and their (/ page 392).
setting checked at a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
% Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir-
cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth-
ers or collide with objects when parking the
vehicle.
For technical reasons, the standard height of the
vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a
heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button
guide lines and in the display of the generated 1 may also be located at a di erent position
images. in the centre console.
The eld of vision and other functions of the cam- # Press button 1.
era system may be restricted due to additional # Select the Camera views menu.
attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate
bracket, bicycle rack).
286 Driving and parking

# In the multimedia system, select the desired % The settings for deactivating the reversing Opening the
the camera
camera cover
cover of the
the rever
reversing
sing cam-
view (/ page 281). camera are not available in every country. era
Multimedia system:
Selecting a view
view for
for the
the 360° Camera
Camera (rever
(reverse
se 360° Camera
Camera with
with GPS - managing activation
activation 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
gear) positions
5 Camera
Multimedia system:
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Select Open camera cover.
R The Activation in R setting is activated in the
5 Camera % The camera cover closes automatically a er
multimedia system (/ page 286).
some time or a er the vehicle is switched on
# Engage reverse gear. Renaming an activation
activation position or o .
# Select the desired view in the multimedia sys- % You can determine activation positions in the
tem (/ page 281). Camera views menu. (/ page 281)
Par
arking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTR
TRONIC
ONIC
# Select an activation position.
Setting the
Setting the rever
reversing
sing camera
camera or 360° Camera Function of Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTRTRONIC
ONIC
# Select ´.
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park-
substitute for your attention to the surroundings. # Enter a name and con rm. ing assistance system which monitors the area
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park- The activation position is saved under the new surrounding your vehicle and shows you the dis-
ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons, name. tance between the vehicle and a detected obsta-
animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring cle visually and audibly.
range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be Deleting an activation
Deleting activation position
ready to brake at all times. # Select Manage activation positions. The passive side impact protection also warns you
of obstacles to the side. These must be detected
Multimedia system: # Select an activation position.
beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Select E. bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the
5 Camera
# Con rm the prompt. direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk
# Activate or deactivate Activation in R. The activation position is deleted. of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The pas-
 Driving and parking 287

sive side impact protection can be activated and Displayss in the

Display the central
central display As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
deactivated via the multimedia system. tional, the respective areas of the display are
In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to shown in blue.
be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a dis- 1 Operational, front and rear
tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the 2 Operational, all around
vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles
on all sides can be shown. 3 Operational, all around and obstacle detected
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is The colour of the display changes depending on
not a substitute for your attention to the surround- the distance to the detected obstacle:
ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and R Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)
parking remains with you. Make sure that there R Yellow
ellow:: approx. 1 m - 0.7 m
are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeu-
Vehicles with 360° Camera R OrOrang
ange:
e: approx. 0.7 m - 0.4 m
vring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exit-
ing parking spaces. R Red: < 0.4 m

Vehicles with
with 360° Camera:
Camera: the boundary line
shi s dynamically depending on the position and
distance of the obstacles detected.
Depending on the distance to the obstacle detec-
ted, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You
can set the timing of the warnings in the multime-
dia system. In the Warn early setting, the system
warns you from a distance of 1 m, in the standard
setting only from 0.4 m.
Vehicles with reversing camera
288 Driving and parking

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately
1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m on sides 3 can also
be displayed in the head-up display.
Vehicles with
with active
active ambient lighting and Par
Parking
king
Vehicles with 360° Camera Vehicles with reversing camera Pack
ackag
agee with
with remot
remotee parking
parking functions
When Warning assistance is activated, the Park-
If you are not in the Camera & parking menu and ing Assist PARKTRONIC display is also accompa-
an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, pop- nied by ambient lighting. If an obstacle is detec-
up window 1 appears in the driver's display: ted, the ambient lighting lights up in the same col-
R Vehicles without
without Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist: when our as the display in the central display.
driving no faster than 12 km/h. The ambient lighting which accompanies the Park-
R Vehicles with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist: when driv- ing Assist PARKTRONIC display is only intended to
ing no faster than 18 km/h.
 Driving and parking 289

accentuate the display in the central display and Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol- display, the system may have been deactivated
does not replace it. lowing situations, for example: due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again
More information on ambient lighting: R You park the vehicle and switch it o . and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is work-
(/ page 166) ing at a di erent location.
R You open the doors.
% A display message for the ambient lighting If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to
does not occur in the area of the driver's dis- A er the engine is restarted, obstacles must be one of the following causes:
play or in the rear compartment. detected again by driving past them before a new R The sensors
sensors are
are dirty
dir ty:: clean the sensors and
warning can be issued. observe the notes on care of vehicle parts
% Depending on the selected setting, other
functions may supersede the ambient lighting Also observe the system limits of the following (/ page 392).
e ects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. In this systems: R Par arking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTRTRONIC
ONIC has been deacti-
case, the ambient lighting e ects of Parking R Reversing camera (/ page 279) vat
ated
ed due toto a malfunction: restart the vehi-
Assist PARKTRONIC do not occur. R 360° Camera (/ page 281) cle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed
specialist workshop.
System limits
System Observe the information on vehicle sensors and
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily cameras; the system otherwise cannot function Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Par
Parking
king Assist
take into account the following obstacles: properly (/ page 232). PARK
ARKTRTRONIC
ONIC
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. per- Vehicles with
with trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: Parking Assist * NOTE
NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at
sons, animals or objects. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone close range
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. when you establish an electrical connection
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading between your vehicle and a trailer. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
ramps of lorries. certain objects at close range.
Problems
Pr oblems with
with Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTR
TRONIC
ONIC
# When parking or manoeuvring the vehi-
R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi- If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights
cle from the side. up red for approximately three seconds then goes cle, pay particular attention to any
out, and the é symbol appears in the driver's objects which are above or below the
R Objects placed next to the vehicle.
290 Driving and parking

sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars. Setting the

Setting the war
warning
ning tones
tones of Par
Parking
king Assist Activ
ctivee Par
Parking
king Assist
The vehicle or other objects could other- PARK
ARKTRTRONIC
ONIC
Function of Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist
wise be damaged. Multimedia system:
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
assistance system, which uses ultrasound with
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: 5 Parking
the assistance of the reversing camera and 360°
R The camera menu is open. Camera. When you are driving forwards up to
Setting
Setting the
the volume
volume or pitch
pitch of the
the war
warning
ning tones
tones
R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically
# Set the desired level under Volume or Tone
R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. measures parking spaces on both sides of the
pitch. vehicle.
# Press = in the central display. Active Parking Assist o ers the following func-
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating audio fadeout
fadeout
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist # Select Audio fadeout. tions:
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not The volume of the currently playing media Vehicles with reversing camera
lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument source is reduced during a Parking Assist R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. PARKTRONIC warning tone.
R Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically or to the road
activated when the vehicle is started. # Activate or deactivate Audio fadeout in trans.

Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be position R. Vehicles with 360° Camera
activated or deactivated in the quick access The volume of the currently playing media R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
menu. source is reduced when reverse gear is R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the
engaged. road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
Setting
Setting the
the time of the
the war
warnings
nings R Parking in parking spaces that can only be
# Select Time of warning. detected as such due to markings (for exam-
ple at the roadside)
# Set the time for the warning.
 Driving and parking 291

R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the fol- circumstances, Active Parking Assist may there-
R Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the lowing situations: fore guide you into the parking space prematurely
road (optionally either le or right) R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. or brake too late.
R You press the c button again. Certain environmental conditions, such as snow-
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub- fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space
stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The R You begin steering.
being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking R You engage transmission position j. are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- not be identi ed as such or be measured incor-
R ESP® intervenes.
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring rectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level,
range. R You open the driver's door.
high-grip ground.
If Active Parking Assist is available, the Ç mes- System limits
System
sage appears in the driver's display. When the If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
system detects parking spaces, È appears. Parking Assist is not available. located above or below the detection
The arrows show on which side of the road free range of Active Parking Assist
parking spaces are located. These are then shown Also observe the system limits of the following
systems: If there are objects above or below the detec-
in the central display. tion range, the following situations may arise:
R Reversing camera (/ page 279)
When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
signal indicators are activated based on the calcu- R 360° Camera (/ page 281)
lated path of your vehicle. When you are entering R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
Objects located above or below the detection objects.
or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assis-
range of Active Parking Assist, such as overhang-
ted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear There is a danger of collision!
ing loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods
changes.
vehicles or the borders of parking spaces, are not # In these situations, do not use Active
To start the parking procedure, press the c detected during measurement of the parking Parking Assist.
button (/ page 292). space. These are also then not taken into account
when calculating the parking procedure. In some
292 Driving and parking

Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable Par

arking
king with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist
parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which
parking is not permitted or parking spaces on
unsuitable surfaces.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
situations:
R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
R When transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
R When snow chains are tted.
R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
R Directly a er a tyre change or when spare # Select Parking Assistance menu 2.
tyres are tted.
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are
R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high. 1 may also be located at a di erent position shown in the central display.
R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er in the centre console.
bottoming out on a kerb. # Press button 1.
R On steep inclines of more than approximately
15%.
 Driving and parking 293

# Vehicles with
with 360° Camera:
Camera: to change the # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
parking direction, tap the selected parking cancel the parking procedure with Active
space again. Parking Assist.
# To star
startt the
the parking
parking procedur
procedure:
e: press button
1 again. On completion of the parking procedure, the
The vehicle drives into the selected parking Active Parking Assist finished display message
space. appears.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When
The turn signal indicator is switched on automati- required by legal requirements or local condi-
cally when the parking procedure begins. You are tions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator
in accordance with the tra c conditions. If neces- % You can stop the vehicle and change the
sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. transmission position during the parking pro-
cedure. The system then calculates a new
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa-
swinging out while parking or pulling out ble, the transmission position can be changed
When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle of a parking space again, or the process can be cancelled.
path 4 into currently selected parking space 5
also appears. While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of
# If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-
the oncoming lane.
cle.
This could cause you to collide with objects or
# If necessary, select another parking space.
other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
294 Driving and parking

Immediatee parking
Immediat parking via the
the Camera views menu Exiting a parking
parking space with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist # Select Parking Assistance menu 2.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # If necessary, change direction of exit 3.
R The vehicle is equipped with a 360° Camera. # To star
startt exiting
exiting the
the parking
parking space: press but-
R The vehicle has been parked with Active Park- ton 1 again.
ing Assist. # If necessary, change the transmission posi-
# Start the vehicle. tion. Observe any messages displayed in the
driver's display and central display.
# Press button 1. The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is automatically switched
on when exiting a parking space begins and
# Select the Camera views menu. switched o when it is completed. You are
responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator
# When the vehicle is stationary and in transmis- in accordance with the tra c conditions. If neces-
sion position k, and symbol 6 appears in sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
the camera image: press button 1 again.
A er the parking space has been exited, a warn-
The parking procedure is initiated for the
ing tone and the Ø Active Parking Assist fin-
detected parking space.
ished, take control of vehicle message prompt
% The parking space and parking direction can- you to take control of the vehicle. You have to
not be changed in immediate parking. accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself
% This function can be deactivated in the Park- again.
ing menu. If you do not react to the prompt to take control
of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to
a standstill.
 Driving and parking 295

Pausing Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist Aut
utomatic
omatic braking
braking function of Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Please note that you can only use Remote
You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure Assist Parking Assist if you have a valid driving
of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring licence and are in a t state to drive.
following actions, for example: range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply Remote Parking Assist parks your vehicle or exits
# depressing the brake pedal and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. the parking space while you are outside of your
# opening the front passenger door, a rear door
The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you vehicle. You can monitor the manoeuvring and
depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exit- parking procedure on your mobile phone.
or the load compartment ing procedure is resumed.
# applying the electric parking brake or activat- With Remote Parking Assist, you can carry out all
Check the area around your vehicle again before the parking procedures of Active Parking Assist.
ing the HOLD function resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make
# To resume
You can also position the vehicle directly in front
resume the
the parking
parking or exiting
exiting procedur
procedure:
e: sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon- of a garage or a driveway entrance and then use
gently depress the accelerator pedal. ger in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the Remote Parking Assist to enter or exit a parking
% If the electric parking brake was applied system limitations of Active Parking Assist. space.
before Active Parking Assist was activated, Remote Parking Assist manages pulling away,
depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start Remot
emotee Par
Parking
king Assist braking and steering. While Remote Parking Assist
the parking or exiting procedure. is active, the vehicle is locked.
Check the area around your vehicle again before Function of Remot
Remotee Par
Parking
king Assist
% Remote Parking Assist is an additional func- Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
that persons, animals or objects are no longer in tion of Active Parking Assist. Comply with
local tra c laws and regulations when using The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park-
the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system ing remains with you. Interrupt or terminate the
limitations of Active Parking Assist. Remote Parking Assist on public roads.
If it is required to turn the wheels toward the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure that no
kerb, you cannot use Remote Parking Assist. persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range. Make sure to also pay atten-
tion to other vehicles.
296 Driving and parking

System limits
System During the parking procedure, you should not & WARNING Danger due to insu cient view
If the system detects a malfunction or a system stand more than approx. 3.0 m away from the of the vehicle surroundings
limit during the manoeuvring or parking proce- vehicle. At greater distances, the procedure will
dure, the procedure will be cancelled: be interrupted and a corresponding message will If you manoeuvre, park or exit a parking space
be displayed on the mobile phone. If you move with the vehicle using Remote Parking Assist,
R The vehicle is brought to a standstill. observe the following:
closer to the vehicle, you will be able to continue
R Transmission position j is selected and the the procedure. # Make sure that you have the best view
electric parking brake is applied automatically. possible of the vehicle and the vehicle's
Operating
Oper ating Remot
Remotee Par
Parking
king Assist
R The vehicle is switched o . surroundings.
R The vehicle remains locked. Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Make sure that no persons, animals or
For the Remote Parking Assist function, you objects are in the path of your vehicle.
If the parking manoeuvre is cancelled, a corre- require a mobile phone and the current Remote # Make sure that you maintain a suitable
sponding message is displayed on the mobile Parking Assist App for your vehicle type.
phone. distance to the vehicle and that neither
% A list of compatible mobile phones can be you nor other road users could be
Depending on the situation, you can then take found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- endangered.
control of the procedure, manoeuvre the vehicle mobile.com/ # Be aware of the vehicle's surroundings at
back to the starting position or manually take con- The following operating systems are supported:
trol of the vehicle. all times and identify possible dangers.
R Android™ # If necessary, cancel the parking proce-
The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply
(/ page 290). R Apple® iOS dure.
Certain environmental conditions, such as snow- No persons or pets are permitted to remain in the
fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space vehicle during the parking procedure. Observe the
being measured inaccurately or to connection system limits at all times. If necessary, cancel the
problems with the mobile phone. Only use
Remote Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.
 Driving and parking 297

parking procedure. Always make sure that others

can access their vehicles.
# Activate the "Remote Parking Assist" service
e.g. via the Mercedes me homepage.
# Authorise the mobile phone using the Remote
Parking Assist App in the vehicle
(/ page 299).
Selecting the
the parking
parking manoeuvre
manoeuvre in advance
advance while
inside the
the vehicle
vehicle
# Stop the vehicle and select transmission posi-
tion j.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button # Select Parking Assistance menu 2.

1 may also be located at a di erent position # For further information on Remote Parking
in the centre console. Assist: select 3.
# Press button 1.
# If necessary, select another parking space 4
or select 5 to drive straight ahead into a
garage, for example.
# If necessary, change parking direction 6.
298 Driving and parking

% Alternatively, you can begin parking with % On completion of the parking procedure, the & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle
Active Parking Assist (/ page 292) and con- vehicle is locked. swinging out while parking or pulling out
tinue with the Remote Parking Assist from any If you have started the parking procedure as of a parking space
vehicle position. To do this, stop the vehicle described above, the vehicle is ready to connect
during the parking procedure and select to your mobile phone for a limited time. While parking or pulling out of a parking
transmission position j. space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
# Start the Remote Parking Assist App on the
# Switch o the vehicle and exit it with the key.
onto areas of the oncoming lane.
mobile phone and connect to the vehicle.
This could cause you to collide with objects or
Star
arting
ting the
the parking
parking procedur
proceduree without
without selecting # Follow the instructions of the Remote Parking
other road users.
in advance
advance Assist App. # Pay attention to objects and other road
# Stop the vehicle and select transmission posi- users.
% The turn signal indicator is automatically
tion j. switched on when starting parking and # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
# Switch o the vehicle and exit it with the key. switched o when it is completed. cancel the parking procedure with
Star
arting
ting the
the parking
parking procedur
proceduree while outside the
the % If the connection between the vehicle and the Remote Parking Assist.
vehicle mobile phone is interrupted while a parking
manoeuvre is being performed, the manoeu- # A er ending the parking procedure, ensure
# Unlock the vehicle.
vre can be continued if the connection is re- that all vehicle doors, windows and the boot
Carrying
Carr ying out a parking
parking procedur
proceduree with
with Remote
Remote established within a short time. are closed. Secure the vehicle against rolling
Par
arking
king Assist away.
% Keep the vehicle key with you during the park- Cancelling the
the parking
parking procedure
procedure
ing procedure. You can cancel the parking You can cancel the parking procedure of Remote
procedure and bring the vehicle to a standstill Parking Assist at any time and bring the vehicle to
by pressing a button on the key. a standstill.
 Driving and parking 299

# Cancel the parking procedure in the Remote # Scan the QR code on the central display. A risk of collision may occur in the following situa-
Parking Assist App. The mobile phone is authorised. tions, for example:
or De-authorising
De-author ising mobile phones R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
# Press a button on the vehicle key. # Select Remote Parking Assist.
brake pedals.
R If the driver engages an incorrect gear.
or # Select Deauthorise devices.
R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal
# Pull a door handle. # To de-author
de-authorise
ise a mobile phone: select a with too much force.
Aut
uthor
horising/de-aut
ising/de-author
horising
ising a mobile phone for
for mobile phone.
Remot
emotee Par
Parking
king Assist The mobile phone is deleted from the device Drive Away Assist is active under the following
Multimedia system: list. conditions:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # To de-author
de-authorise
ise all mobile phones: select R If the vehicle was stationary and the transmis-
5 Parking Deauthorise all devices. sion position was changed to k or h.
All mobile phones are deleted from the device R If the vehicle has rolled less than approx-
Aut
uthor
horising
ising a new
new mobile phone list. imately 1.0 m since being at a standstill.
In order to be able to use the Remote Parking
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
Assist function, you must authorise your mobile
phone. You can authorise up to ten mobile Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing assistant
assistant 1.0 m away.
phones. Function of Driv
Drivee Away
Away Assist Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated
# Select Remote Parking Assist. Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an in the Manoeuvring assistance menu
# Select Authorise a new device.
impact when pulling away. If the system detects (/ page 302).
an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's
Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect. If a critical situation is detected, the following
speed is brie y reduced to approximately 2 km/h.
# Start the Remote Parking Assist App and addi- symbol appears in red in the selected view in the
tionally start the authorisation process. Camera & parking menu:
A connection prompt is displayed.
300 Driving and parking

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- R Warning for crossing traffic ahead: the vehi-
essary, provided the tra c situation per- cle is driving forwards at a speed slower than
mits and that it is safe to take evasive approx. 10 km/h and the camera image is
action. shown in the central display (/ page 285).
% If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same
The Warning for crossing traffic ahead can be
symbol appears in grey. If the Camera & park- System limits
System deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring
ing menu is not open in the central display, The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply assistance menu.
the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist (/ page 290).
PARKTRONIC both appear. Depending on the country, the Warning for cross-
On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive ing traffic behind can also be deactivated or acti-
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi- Away Assist is restricted.
tute for your attention to the surroundings. The vated (/ page 302).
If transport equipment is secured to the trailer
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking If a critical situation is detected, the following
hitch, such as a trailer or bicycle rack, Drive Away
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- symbol appears in red in the selected view in the
Assist is not available when you are reversing.
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring Camera & parking menu:
range. Function of cross
cross tr
traa c war
arning
ning
The cross tra c warning can warn you of crossing
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- tra c when you are exiting a parking space. The
ted detection performance of Drive Away radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area
Assist adjacent to the vehicle. Warning for crossing traffic behind: the vehicle
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- The cross tra c warning is active under the fol- can be automatically braked if cross tra c is
tify objects and tra c situations. lowing conditions: detected.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c R Warning for crossing traffic behind: the vehi-
situation; do not rely on Drive Away cle is driving in reverse at a speed slower than
Assist alone. approx. 10 km/h.
 Driving and parking 301

% If the cross tra c warning is not available, the System limits

System R The camera image is shown in the central dis-
L symbol appears in grey. If the Camera The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply play (/ page 285).
& parking menu is not opened in the central (/ page 290).
display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Depending on the country, you can activate and
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or deactivate the manoeuvring brake function in the
Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. other objects, detection is not possible. Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 302).
The cross tra c warning is only an aid and not a In the following situations, the cross tra c warn-
substitute for your attention to the surroundings. If the manoeuvring brake function is triggered, the
ing is not available: following symbol appears in red in the selected
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park- R on inclines
ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons, view in the Camera & parking menu:
animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring R Warning for crossing traffic behind: if trans-
range. port equipment, for example a trailer or bicy-
cle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- the electrical connection has been correctly
ted detection performance of the cross established % If the manoeuvring brake function is not avail-
tra c warning able, the same symbol appears in grey.
Manoeuvring brak
Manoeuvring brakee function
The cross tra c warning cannot always clearly The manoeuvring brake function can prevent colli- The manoeuvring brake function is only an aid. It
identify objects and tra c situations. sions with pedestrians when the vehicle is revers- is not a substitute for your attention to the sur-
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c ing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring
situation; do not rely on the cross tra c detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle and parking remains with you. Make sure that no
warning alone. can be braked to a standstill. persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
The manoeuvring brake function can intervene manoeuvring range.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec-
essary, provided the tra c situation per- under the following conditions:
mits and that it is safe to take evasive R The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than
action. 10 km/h.
302 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- R if transport equipment, for example a trailer or During parking or exiting, the system can travel a
ted detection by the manoeuvring brake bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch previously stored path of up to approximately
function and the electrical connection has been cor- 100 m to or out of the desired parking space, for
rectly established example, from the driveway entrance into the
The manoeuvring brake function cannot garage.
always clearly detect people. Other obstacles Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating manoeuvring
manoeuvring assistance
assistance
Multimedia system: Within a radius of approx. 150 m, only one park-
are not detected by the function. ing or exiting procedure can be recorded.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
In these cases, the function may brake unnec- Only use Memory Parking Assist on private prop-
5 Parking
essarily or not brake at all. erty. Use on public roads, e.g. in public parking
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c % This function is available on demand spaces, is not permitted.
situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring (/ page 26).
Memory Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
brake function alone. # Select Manoeuvring assistance.
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
# Be ready to brake. # Activate or deactivate the desired manoeu- The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park-
vring assistance. ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons,
System limits
System animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
Observe the system limits of the following func- range.
Memoryy Par
Memor Parking
king Assist
tions:
System limits
System
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 290) Function of Memory
Memor y Par
Parking
king Assist
Observe the system limitations of Active Parking
Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle
R 360° Camera (/ page 281) Assist (/ page 290).
using a previously stored parking space. You can
R Reversing camera (/ page 279) store parking procedures with a total distance of
up to 500 m (100 m per parking or exiting proce-
The manoeuvring brake function is not available in dure).
the following situations:
R on inclines
 Driving and parking 303

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects Do not use Memory Parking Assist in the following
located above or below the detection situations, for example:
range of Memory Parking Assist R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise: R When transporting a load that protrudes

R Memory Parking Assist may steer too

beyond the vehicle.
early. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or

R The vehicle may not stop in front of these

uphill gradient.
objects. R When snow chains are tted.

This result in a collision. Recor

ecording
ding a parking
parking procedur
proceduree using Memory
Par
arking
king Assist
# In these situations, do not use Memory
Parking Assist. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The entire route is, for example, within your
Objects located above or below the detection own property and not on public roads.
range of Memory Parking Assist may not be % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button
R The system needs reference points in the sur-
detected during the parking procedure. 1 may also be located at a di erent position
roundings to orient itself, such as fences, in the centre console.
Drawbars of parked trailers, among other objects, walls or trees. Therefore, a er starting the
# Press button 1.
that protrude into the parking space may not be vehicle, a certain distance must rst be
detected. driven. If not enough reference points are The Camera & parking view opens in the cen-
detected in the surrounding area, no new tral display.
route can be recorded.
304 Driving and parking

# Park the vehicle in the desired parking space.

Do not exceed 8 km/h.
# To end recor
recording:
ding: stop the vehicle and press
3 again.
The recording is stored.
% In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can
delete and rename stored parking proce-
dures.
Par
arking
king with
with Memory
Memor y Par
Parking
king Assist
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R A parking procedure has been recorded.

# Press button 1.
The Camera & parking view opens in the cen-
tral display.
# Select Memory Parking Assist menu 2. # Select the Memory Parking Assist menu 2.
# Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired # Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting
starting point of the assisted parking proce- point of the stored parking procedure.
dure, e.g. a driveway entrance. # To star
startt the
the parking
parking procedur
procedure:
e: press 6.
# To star
startt recor
recording:
ding: press 3. # Select the stored parking procedure from the
% If not all conditions for a recording are met, list.
symbol 3 is greyed out.
 Driving and parking 305

# Follow the instructions on the central display. Star

arting
ting the
the exiting
exiting procedure
procedure Deleting a recor
Deleting recording
ding
The vehicle drives into the selected parking # Press 6. # Select Manage lanes.
space.
# Con rm the saved exiting procedure. # Select E next to the desired recording.
% The turn signal indicator is not switched on # Follow the instructions on the central display. # Con rm the message prompt with Yes.
automatically. You are responsible for select- The vehicle drives the recorded route.
ing the turn signal indicator in accordance Deleting all recor
Deleting recordings
dings
with the tra c conditions. % The turn signal indicator is not switched on # Select Manage lanes.
# A er completion of the parking procedure, automatically. You are responsible for select-
# Select Delete all lanes.
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. ing the turn signal indicator in accordance
with the tra c conditions. % Alternatively, you can delete all data in Mem-
Exiting a parking
parking space with
with Memory
Memor y Par
Parking
king # Take control of the vehicle a er the exiting ory Parking Assist by resetting the multimedia
Assist procedure has been completed. system (/ page 347).
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Setting
Setting Memory
Memor y Par
Parking
king Assist
R The exiting procedure was recorded together Trailer hitch
Multimedia system:
with the respective parking procedure and 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
stored separately within one driving cycle. Notes on trailer
trailer operation
operation
5 Camera & parking 5 Parking Assistance
R The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:
5 Memory Parking Assist
Assist. R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
# Press button 1. Renaming a recor
recording
ding falls below the permissible tongue weight
The Camera & parking view opens in the cen- # Select Manage lanes. R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to
tral display. # Select ´ next to the desired recording. the maximum tongue weight
# Select Memory Parking Assist menu 2. # Enter a name and con rm with OK. Do not exceed the following values:
R Permissible towing capacity
306 Driving and parking

R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi- Folding the

the ball neck
neck out and in * NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
cle erty due to folded-out ball neck
R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball
neck not being engaged # When the trailer is not coupled or the
R Permissible gross weight of the trailer bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may neck or, in the case of a fully electric
come loose. trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
Ensure the following before starting a journey: # Always engage the ball neck as descri-
R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow- bed. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
ing vehicle is set for a maximum load rect use of the trailer hitch
R The lighting of the connected trailer is opera- & WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck
tional swinging outwards When a trailer hitch is used to recover a vehi-
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc-
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/ The ball neck may swing outwards when ess.
trailer combination must not exceed a maximum unlocking or when it has not been properly # Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a
speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the engaged.
trailer or attaching approved carrier sys-
operating permit. This also applies in countries in There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's tems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
which the permissible maximum speed for car/ range of movement!
trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. # Unlock the ball neck only when its range Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
of movement is unobstructed. R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
# Always be sure the ball neck is engaged R The swivel range is clear.
when folding inwards. R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been
removed.
 Driving and parking 307

Folding the
the ball neck
neck out Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean.
Check that it is either greased or dry (grease-
free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
Folding the
the ball neck
neck in
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold up under the rear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
# Push the ball neck in the direction of the
arrow until it engages audibly behind the
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message
on the driver display will disappear.
Observe the information about the displays on the
# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow driver display:
until it engages audibly in a vertical position. R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 506)
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks. Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release
The ball neck will fold out from under the rear R Display messages (/ page 441)
switch will go out.
bumper.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place,
Indicator lamp 1 will ash. the message Check trailer hitch lock will
appear on the driver display.
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and
store it in a safe place.
308 Driving and parking

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer

trailer Use the normal level in trailer operation. High R Manoeuvring brake function
level driving is not permitted in trailer opera- R Reversing camera
& WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle tion on public roads.
level being changed
R 360° Camera
Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the R AIRMATIC
The vehicle level may be changed unintention- vehicle with the following adapters:
ally, e.g. by other people. You may become R Adapter plug Coupling up a trailer
trailer
trapped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer
R Adapter cable * NOTE
NOTE Damage to the starter battery due
while this is happening. In addition, other peo-
ple could become trapped if their limbs are The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi- to full discharge
between the vehicle body and the tyres or cle only if the following conditions are met: Charging the trailer battery using the power
underneath the vehicle.
R The trailer is connected correctly. supply of the trailer can damage the starter
Observe the following when coupling up or battery.
R The trailer lighting system is in working order.
uncoupling a trailer: # Do not use the vehicle's power supply to
# Do not open or close the doors or tail- The functions of the following systems will be charge the trailer battery.
gate. a ected by a correctly connected trailer:
# Do not lock or unlock the vehicle. R ESP® trailer stabilisation # Remove the cover cap from the ball head and
R Active Lane Keeping Assist store it in a safe place.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Position the trailer on a level surface behind
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.
securely locked position. R Active Parking Assist
R Vehicles with
with AIRMATIC:
AIRMATIC: ensure the vehicle is R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
at the normal level (/ page 277). R Drive Away Assist
R Cross tra c warning
 Driving and parking 309

Under the following conditions, a message may * NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state
appear on the driver's display even if the trailer of overrun
has been connected correctly:
R LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage
system. the vehicle.
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
R The current has fallen below the trailer lighting
system's minimum current (50 mA). overrun brake.

% Accessories can be connected to the perma- & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
nent power supply up to 180 W and to the disconnecting the trailer cable
# Open the socket cap. power supply that is switched on via the igni-
tion lock. The vehicle may lower when the trailer cable is
# Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on disconnected.
the socket. Uncoupling a trailer
trailer
This could result in you or other people
# Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as becoming trapped if parts of your or their
it will go. & WARNING Risk of being crushed and
becoming trapped when uncoupling a body are between the vehicle body and the
# Let the cap engage. trailer tyres or underneath the vehicle.
# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties # Make sure nobody is underneath the
(only if you are using an adapter cable). When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the
inertia-activated brake, your hand may wheel arches when you disconnect the
# Make sure that the cable is always slack for become trapped between the vehicle and the
ease of movement during cornering. trailer cable.
trailer drawbar.
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged # Secure the trailer against rolling away.
overrun brake.
310 Driving and parking

# Disconnect the electrical connection between Observe the following for your own safety and * NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer
the vehicle and the trailer. that of other road users: hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or
# Uncouple the trailer. bicycle racks being used incorrectly
R always adhere to the permissible load
# Place the cover cap on the ball head. capacity of the trailer hitch. # use only bicycle racks approved by
% Trailer
ailerss with
with LED lighting: a er uncoupling the R always observe the permissible rear axle Mercedes-Benz.
trailer, switch the vehicle on and then o load of the towing vehicle.
again. R use the bicycle rack only to transport bicy- * NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
cles. erty due to folded-out ball neck
Bicycle
Bicycle rac
rackk function R always mount the bicycle rack properly by # When the trailer is not coupled or the
attaching to the ball head and the ball bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicy- neck guide pin, if possible. neck or, in the case of a fully electric
cle rack is used incorrectly R when transporting four bicycles, always trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
The bicycle rack may become detached from use bicycle racks which have additional
the vehicle in the following cases: support on the ball neck guide pin.
R the permissible load capacity of the trailer R use only bicycle racks approved by
hitch is exceeded. Mercedes-Benz.
R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R always observe the bicycle rack operating
instructions.
R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck
beneath the ball head.
 Driving and parking 311

R When mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detach-
2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You able parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats,
can transport up to four bicycles. rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto
the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerody-
The maximum load capacity is calculated from the namic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicy-
weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack cle rack.
load.
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, moving around and check them at regular inter-
trailer or fully laden vehicle (/ page 195). vals to ensure that they are secure.
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving
for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In
Further information on the tyre pressure can be addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on
found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 415). the trailer hitch will increase.
Notes on loading
The larger the distance between the load's centre
Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin) of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load
on the trailer hitch.
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, di erent
numbers of bicycles can be transported. Observe the following notes:
R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle
The following bicycle rack designs are possible:
as possible
R When mounted by attaching to ball head 1,
R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack
the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can
transport up to three bicycles. as evenly as possible across the vehicle's lon-
gitudinal axis
312 Driving and parking

Loading the
the bicycle
bicycle rack
rack anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle.
3 bicycles
bicycles 4 bicycles
bicycles The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from
side to side.
Total weight of Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg Observe the following information:
bicycle rack and R Permitted towing methods (/ page 405)
load
R The notes on towing the vehicle with both
Max. distance 420 mm 420 mm axles on the ground (/ page 405)
1
Max. distance 300 mm 400 mm
Load distribution on the bicycle rack 2
1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity
and ball head When transporting four bicycles or a total weight
2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle
racks with additional support on the trailer hitch
and ball head
guide pin.
3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre
axis
Observe the following information when loading Vehicle towing
towing instr
instructions
uctions
the bicycle rack: The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for at towing or dinghy
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
systems can result in damage to the vehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys-
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar-
 Driver display 313

Notes on the
the driv
driver's
er's display The driver's display shows the following basic Notes on the
the range
range
information:
The range in general
& WARNING Risk of accident if the driver R Speed and power meter level
R All ranges shown are assumptions based on
display fails R Range according to average consumption, per-
various calculation bases. The actual range
If the driver display has failed or is malfunc- sonal driving style or high-consumption driving achieved may di er from the range displayed.
tioning, function restrictions in systems rele- style
R Outside temperatures, climate control set-
vant to safety cannot be detected. R State of charge of the high-voltage battery
tings, vehicle interior temperatures, road con-
The operating safety of your vehicle may be R Indicator and warning lamps ditions, driving style etc. directly in uence the
impaired. achievable range.
# Drive on carefully.
Additional functions available to you include the
R Pay attention to the charging prompts at all
following:
# Have the vehicle checked immediately at times.
R Di erent menus, e.g. for assistance and navi-
a quali ed specialist workshop. gation Range according to personal driving style
R Status displays for the driving systems R Your previous individual consumption will be
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles taken into account when the range is being
R Display messages
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. calculated.
You could otherwise fail to recognise The menu contents and settings can be individu- R While the navigation system or commuter
dangers. ally adapted and set. route is active, additional information about
the route ahead can be included in the range
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, calculation.
park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a R When the trip computer From reset is reset,
quali ed specialist workshop.
the data on the previous driving style will also
be deleted and calculated afresh from this
point on.
314 Driver display

Range with low consumption Operating

Oper ating the
the driv
driver's
er's display Scrolling
Scr olling on the
the menu bar
R The maximum range shows the range potential
when consumption is low, e.g. as a result of & WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor-
economical driving or having the air condition- mation systems and communications
ing system turned o . equipment
Range with high consumption If you operate information systems and com-
R The minimum range shows the range when
munications equipment integrated in the vehi-
consumption is high, e.g. as a result of a cle when driving, you could be distracted from
sporty driving style or having the air condition- the tra c situation. This could also cause you
ing system turned on. to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the
R This range is determined based on past and
current consumption gures. tra c situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
R When the trip computer From reset is reset,
vehicle in accordance with the tra c
the data on the previous driving style will also
conditions and operate the equipment
be deleted and calculated afresh from this
with the vehicle stationary.
point on.
1 Back button
Electrical consumption Observe the legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving when operating 2 Main menu button
R The consumption gures From start and
the driver's display. 3 Touch Control
From reset take into account all active con-
sumer equipment when it comes to the drive The content on the driver's display is controlled
system's operational readiness õ. using the control elements on the le side of the
steering wheel. Touch Control 3 is used to navi-
gate in a vertical and horizontal direction by swip-
 Driver display 315

ing with one nger. Con rm the selection by # Only operate this equipment when the In most of the menus, you can use Options to
pressing the Touch Control. tra c situation permits. con gure further settings for the menu-speci c
% To operate Touch Control 3 in the most display content.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos- vehicle in accordance with the tra c % You can nd further information about the
sible. You can also set the sensitivity of the conditions and operate the equipment possible settings and selections in the menus
Touch Control on the central display . with the vehicle stationary. in the Digital Owner's Manual.
# Brie y press main menu button 2.

# Select a menu by swiping to the le or right Observe the legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving when operating Head-up display
on Touch Control 3. Function of the
the head-up display
the driver's display.
# Press Touch Control 3 to con rm.
The following menus can be called up via the The head-up display projects various content into
menu bar on the driver's display: the driver's eld of vision, for example.
Driv
Dr iver
er display
display menus R Understated You can use the head-up display menu bar to
Notes on menus on thethe driv
driver's
er's display R Sport select di erent contexts, e.g.:
R Classic R Minimal
& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- R Sport
R Navigation
mation systems and communications
R Assistance R Standard
equipment
R Service R Augmented reality
If you operate information systems and com-
munications equipment integrated in the vehi- R ECO display
In some of these menus, you can choose between
cle when driving, you could be distracted from di erent display content on the centre display R Settings
the tra c situation. This could also cause you area. R Head-up display on/o
to lose control of the vehicle.
316 Driver display

% Depending on the equipment, the functions 4 Current speed 3 Navigation status displays, such as remaining
may di er from the description and images in 5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise distance to the destination, expected time of
this Owner's Manual. For example, route guid- control) arrival
ance with augmented reality is not available in 6 Detected tra c signs (Tra c Sign Assist) 4 Active Lane Keeping Assist status
all equipment variants. 5 Steer Assist status
The following image shows an example of the When you receive a call, the 6 Call waiting
6 Current speed
head-up display. You can choose what content is message will appear on the head-up display and
the driver's display. 7 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active
displayed (/ page 318).
Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
Head-up display
display content
content with
with navig
navigation
ation (9x3°) Head-up display
display with
with navig
navigation
ation and augmented
augmented 8 Detected tra c signs (Tra c Sign Assist)
reality (10x5°) 9 ECO Assist
When you receive a call, the 6 Call waiting
message will appear on the head-up display and
the driver's display.
System limits
System
Visibility is particularly in uenced by the following
conditions:
R Seat position
R Image position setting
1 Navigation instructions
1 Navigation instructions R Light conditions
2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next
2 Augmented reality navigation instructions R Wet road surfaces
route event)
3 Steer Assist status R Objects on the display cover
 Driver display 317

R Polarisation in sunglasses System limits

System
The marker of the detected vehicle in front may
be inaccurate or may not be applied to the cor-
Function of the
the head-up display
display with
with augmented
augmented
rect vehicle in some situations. Always pay atten-
reality
tion to the actual driving situation.
% Augmented reality is only available in connec- Route guidance with augmented reality is not
tion with the 10x5° head-up display. available in some situations, e.g. in the event of
The head-up display with augmented reality proj- poor satellite reception or roads that have not
ects content into the driver's eld of vision, such been digitised.
as: Visibility is in uenced by conditions including the
R Information from and visualisation of the navi- Head-up display with augmented reality following:
gation system (example) R Driver camera and multifunction camera
R Information from and visualisation of the driver 1 Marker of the detected vehicle in front (Active recording
assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Distance Assist DISTRONIC) R The extent to which the windscreen in the
Assist DISTRONIC 2 Change-of-direction arrows for the route (nav- area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if
R Information from the menus of the driver's dis- igation) the camera is misted up, damaged or
play 3 Status line for driver assistance systems obscured
The marker of the detected vehicle in front and Further system limits of the head-up display
the change-of-direction arrows for the route are (/ page 315).
dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with
the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist
regulates your speed based on this. The change-
of-direction arrows point the way calculated by
the navigation system.
318 Driver display

Operating
Oper ating the
the head-up display # Press the a button to con rm the desired tion reduced. This may slightly a ect the area
content. on which the augmented reality content is dis-
Selecting display
display content
content of the
the head-up display played.
via the
the menu bar of the
the driv
driver's
er's display Switching back
Switching back to
to the
the driv
driver's
er's display
# Press the main menu button ò on the le . # Press the G or ò button.
Selecting the
the head-up display
display with
with augmented
augmented
# To select thethe menu bar of the
the head-up dis- Setting
Setting the
the position and brightness
brightness reality
play:: swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch
play # On the menu bar of the head-up display,
Control. # Press the main menu button ò on the le .
select Settings by swiping to the le or right. # To select the
the menu bar of the
the head-up dis-
# Press the le -hand Touch Control. play:: swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch
play
The current position and brightness settings Control.
will be displayed graphically on the head-up # To select the
the head-up display
display with
with augmented
augmented
display as well as on the driver's display. reality
eality:: swipe to the le or right on the le -
# To adjust
adjust the
the position: swipe upwards or hand Touch Control to activate the desired
downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. content.
# To adjust
adjust the
the brightness:
brightness: swipe to the right or
le on the le -hand Touch Control. Switching
Switching the
the head-up display
display on/o
The settings con gured for position and
brightness will be saved automatically. Driver display:
Switching betw
Switching between
een display
display contents
contents on the
the head- 4 ©
up display # Press the G or a button to exit the set-

# Swipe right or le on the le -hand Touch Con- tings. Switching on

Switching
trol. % Vehicles with
with augmented
augmented reality
reality function: # Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Con-
The head-up display shows a preview of the when the position is adjusted, the status bar trol.
selected display contents a er each swipe. will be moved upwards and the display sec-
 Driver display 319

# Press a on the le -hand Touch Control. È Active Parking Assist has detected a park-
ing space (/ page 292)
Switching o
Switching
é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
# Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Con- (/ page 289)
trol.
h Cruise control (/ page 242)
# Select Head-up display by swiping on the le -
hand Touch Control. È Limiter (/ page 243)
# Press a on the le -hand Touch Control. ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 246)
Ò Speci ed distance for Active Distance
Overvie
Over view
w of status
status displays
displays on the
the driv
driver's
er's dis- Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 246)
play
æ Active Brake Assist switched o
The status displays for the driving and driving (/ page 264)
safety systems can be found in display sections
1 to 4. Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not func-
tioning (/ page 264)
% The number, position and presentation of the
Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 253)
status indicators on the driver's display
depend on which systems are activated or ± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 257)
deactivated. ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 274)
Y Pedestrian detection (only on assistant dis- Z Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant
play) display) (/ page 272)
Ç Active Parking Assist available ° Haptic accelerator pedal
(/ page 292) (/ page 200, 202)
320 Driver display

ë HOLD function (/ page 237)

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 162)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
(/ page 163)
ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for
certain countries only)
¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 253)
Ò Slippery road surface warning
Vehicles with
with Speed Limit Assist: detected
instructions and tra c signs (/ page 264)
Vehicles with
with Tr
Traa c Sign Assist: detected instruc-
tions and tra c signs (/ page 266)
ò Acoustic presence indicator inoperative
(/ page 452)
 MBUX multimedia system 321

Overvie
Over view
w and operation
operation images in this Owner's Manual. For example, Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the MBUX multimedia syst
system
em
route guidance with augmented reality is not avail-
Notes on the
the MBUX multimedia system
system able in all equipment variants.
& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- * NOTE Increased surface temperature due
mation systems and communications to direct sunlight on the central display
equipment
The surface of the central display is very dark.
If you operate information systems and com-
munications equipment integrated in the vehi- If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the
cle when driving, you could be distracted from surface can become very hot.
the tra c situation. This could also cause you # If the central display has been exposed
to lose control of the vehicle. to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down
# Only operate this equipment when the before touching it for a long time. Vehicles with central display
tra c situation permits. 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the multimedia system
vehicle in accordance with the tra c MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experi-
conditions and operate the equipment ence.
with the vehicle stationary. • Operating Touch Control
2 Central display with touch functionality
You must observe the legal requirements for the • Home screen overview
country in which you are currently driving when
• Operating the touchscreen
operating the multimedia system.
Depending on the equipment, the scope of func- 3 Control panel with:
tion and product designation of your MBUX multi- ú Fingerprint sensor
media system may di er from the description and
322 MBUX multimedia system

Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system 3 Front passenger display with touch functional- % You can nd further information about opera-
on or o ity tion as well as about applications and serv-
a Switches sound on or o • Home screen overview ices in the Digital Owner's Manual.
ø Adjusts the volume • Operates the touchscreen Anti-the prot
Anti-the protection
ection
4 Control panel with: This device is equipped with technical provisions
ú Fingerprint sensor to protect it against the . More detailed informa-
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system tion about anti-the protection can be obtained at
on or o a quali ed specialist workshop.
a Switches sound on or o
ø Adjusts the volume Zeroo Layer
Zer Layer

Further operating options: Function of the

the Zero
Zero Layer
Layer
The Zero Layer provides you with dynamic content
R Conducting a dialogue with the MBUX Voice from the MBUX multimedia system and is used to
Assistant. quickly access and control the applications you
Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen R Operating functions contact-free with the use. When you select © on the central display,
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX MBUX Interior Assistant. the digital map with the applications appears in
multimedia system The interaction then follows intelligently, reac- the lower display area. Compared to the home
• Operates Touch Control tively or with hand or head movements. screen with a classic menu, the steps required to
2 Central display with touch functionality for the
call up the applications are reduced. You can
R If the vehicle is equipped with a driver camera,
switch between the Zero Layer and the home
driver functions can be triggered via "Look & screen with a classic menu.
• Home screen overview Answer".
The applications can be hidden from the display
• Operates the touchscreen area and shown again.
 MBUX multimedia system 323

The Zero Layer provides the following modules In the lower display area, context-dependent Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the Zero
Zero Layer
Layer
and applications: services that can be executed via voice are
available for direct access. Digital map and user
Digital user-speci
-speci c applications (exam-
(exam-
R EQ module and navigation module
ple)
The EQ module is always shown on the digital The applications are rst displayed in a reduced
map. In the expanded view, charging settings view. By tapping on them, you can operate them
and navigation functions are o ered. or open the associated menu (expanded view).
R Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone A long press on a suggestion opens a context
When the lower display area is shown, the menu in which further functions are available.
entertainment sources are always displayed. The suggestion function can be switched on and
A mobile phone must be connected to the o completely or for individual options
MBUX multimedia system for the phone to be
displayed.
R Active applications
The lower display area shows an active mas- 1 EQ module (reduced view)
sage programme, for example. 2 Enters a destination
R Suggestions 3 Calls up the Control Centre
4 Calls up user pro le settings
Suggestions are displayed on the lower display
area based on context and your user behav- 5 Content sharing menu
iour. These are, for example, dialled phone 6 Status line
numbers, active massage programmes or vehi- 7 Suggestions
cle functions. Requirement: suggestions are activated
R Online voice applications (/ page 340).
8 Active application, e.g. massage programme
324 MBUX multimedia system

9 © Information
Infor mation about entert
entertainment
ainment sources
sources Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & mes-
Press brie y: displays all applications and the You can operate the applications in the reduced sages and In-Car Office options are activated in
global search (/ page 325) view or in the menu (expanded view) the suggestions.
(/ page 325). Examples:
Press and hold: calls up the home screen with
classic menu Examples: R Answer a call and calling a missed call
A Entertainment sources (media, radio) and R Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next
The missed calls are displayed for the mobile
telephone track, set a station phone currently connected to the MBUX multi-
Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is R Select tracks from the current playlist or sta- media system.
connected to the MBUX multimedia system. tions from the station list R Display contacts and call list and calling a
The Zero Layer shows the digital map and the R Select a media source contact
user-speci c applications. The media source must be connected to the R Use voice functions
The following user-speci c applications are dis- MBUX multimedia system. R Suggest contacts
played in the lower display area: If Entertainment is activated in the sugges- The contacts are suggested for the mobile
R Suggestions 7 tions, suggestions are o ered for the currently phone connected to the MBUX multimedia
R Active applications 8
played media source. Suggestions are also system. No contacts are suggested for a
made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify or mobile phone that is linked to another user
R Entertainment sources and telephone A TuneIn Radio, as well as for categories, e.g. pro le.
R Online voice applications genre, artist and mood.
R Write messages to contacts (suggestion)
The selections depend on the suggested appli-
The lower display area can be hidden and shown R Connect a device via the device manager (sug-
cation.
(/ page 325). gestion)
Information
Infor mation about the
the telephone
telephone R In-Car O ce Call to-do list (suggestion)
To use the functions, your mobile phone must be
connected with the MBUX multimedia system.
 MBUX multimedia system 325

In-Car O ce can also remind you of birthdays, R Opening and closing the convenience doors Calling up and operating
operating the
the Zero
Zero Layer
Layer
for example. Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with Calling up the
the Zero
Zero Layer
Layer
Information
Infor mation about active
active applications convenience doors. When the vehicle has been switched on, the Zero
The following functions are available: R Setting the vehicle level Layer is displayed with the digital map. Navigation
R Activating/deactivating Parking Assist is active.
R Operating relaxation programmes
PARKTRONIC # From another
another application: press the © but-
R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT pro-
R Selecting previous destinations and destina- ton on the right side of the steering wheel.
gramme
tions from favourites or
R Making heating settings
# Tap on ©.
R Raising or lowering the vehicle level Information
Infor mation on online voice
voice applications
Requirement: the Online voice services option is Operating applications in the
Operating the reduced
reduced view
view (exam-
(exam-
Suggestions
Sugges tions for
for convenience
convenience and vehicle
vehicle func- activated in the suggestions. ples)
tions as well
well as navig
navigation
ation The suggested voice applications are made availa- # Media: to play the previous or next track, tap
Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Naviga- ble online and are based on your previous voice
tion options are activated in the suggestions. û or ü.
inputs.
R Operating massage programmes # To answer
answer a call or call a missed call: tap on
Examples: the contact.
For example, the multimedia system suggests R What will the weather be like tomorrow? A er the connection has been established,
a programme at a certain time.
R Play the messages. the call functions are available.
R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT pro-
R Start Geoquiz. # To end a call: tap on the contact again.
gramme
R Open the garage door. # To answer
answer a message:
message: tap on a message and
R Opening and closing the tailgate
write the message or dictate via voice recogni-
Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with tion.
boot lid convenience closing.
326 MBUX multimedia system

# To star
startt a massage
massage progr
program:
am: tap on the appli- EQ module (expanded
(expanded view)
view) 5 Sets the departure time
cation and start the massage programme. 6 Opens the socket ap
# To select a previous
previous destination:
destination: tap on the 7 Activates or deactivates ECO charging
application and select one of the previous
destinations. # Tap on the EQ module (/ page 323).
The charging settings are displayed.
# To select a destination
destination from
from the
the favour
favourit
ites:
es: tap
on the application and select the destination. Additional EQ and navigation functions are
available in the lower menu bar:
Hiding and showing
showing the
the display
display area
area with
with applica- R Symbol ª
tions
# To hide: pull the applications down.
Enters a destination
# To show:
show: pull the bar above © upwards. R Route

or Shows charging stops and the destination

# Select ©. R Range

or Switches range maximisation on or o

# Press the © button on the steering wheel
(/ page 203).
on the right. 1 Sets the charging program (/ page 224) R Symbol Z
2 Current charge level of the high-voltage bat- Makes settings for View, Messages &
tery tones and Route
3 Maximum charge level (depending on the set- # To close the
the menu: select G.
ting)
4 Sets the next charging break (to use a less
expensive tari )
 MBUX multimedia system 327

Navig
vigation
ation module (expanded
(expanded view)
view) 2 Charging stop shows the charging time rec- Operating
Oper ating a menu in the
the lower
lower display
display area
area (exam-
(exam-
ommended by the navigation with Electric ple: active
active massage
massage progr
programme)
amme)
Intelligence as well as charge levels on arrival
and onward journey for an optimal travel time
3 Distance from current vehicle position and
remaining driving time
4 Searches for an additional charging station
# Tap on the EQ module (/ page 323).
# Select Route in the lower menu bar.

1 Selects a massage programme

2 Starts/stops a massage programme for the
driver
3 Starts/stops a massage programme for the
Example: navigation module with active route front passenger
guidance 4 Sets the massage programme intensity for the
1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging driver or front passenger
station # Tap on the application.
The expanded view of the application is dis-
played.
# To close the
the menu: select G.
328 MBUX multimedia system

Opening and closing the

the context
context menu for
for a sug- Switching
Switc hing betw
between
een Zero
Zero Layer
Layer and home screen
screen Home screen
screen over
overview
view
ges
estion
tion with classic menu
with
# Press and hold on a suggestion. # Long press on ©.
The context menu opens and shows the Do The home screen with classic menu is shown.
not suggest option, for example. # To retur
returnn to
to the
the Zero
Zero Layer
Layer:: press and hold on
# To close: swipe downwards. ©.
Remo
emoving
ving a sugges
suggestion
tion from
from the
the display
display area
area
# Swipe the suggestion upwards.

Showing
Showing all applications

1 Status line
2 Calls up user pro le settings and switches
user
3 Uses the global search
# Press © brie y. 4 Calls up the Control Centre (pull down)
Available applications 1 are displayed. The 5 Calls up favourites
global search is available. 6 Displays in the status line
 MBUX multimedia system 329

7 Calls up applications Content

Content sharing
sharing menu in the
the Control
Control Center
Center 4 Displays animation for content sharing
8 Quick-access to application 5 Ä Bluetooth® headphones connected to
9 Global menu the front passenger display on the right
G Calls up previous menu To share content, drag a display and drop it over
© Press and hold: switches between home another display.
screen and Zero Layer To control media playback, tap a display.
û Previous track or previous radio station
% If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high-
ü Next track or next radio station end Rear Seat Entertainment System and
% During a telephone call, the call duration is MBUX rear tablet, the following is displayed
displayed in global menu 9. under 2 and 3:
The following functions are called up in the Con- R The rear display
trol Center: R The MBUX rear tablet
R Noti cations Centre
R Content sharing menu
R Favourites
Example: Content sharing menu
R Vehicle quick-access
1 Calls up a menu
2 Central display with active content (cover dis-
play)
3 Front passenger display
330 MBUX multimedia system

Operating
Oper ating the
the MBUX multimedia system
system 8 Switches o the sound: press Using the
the touc
touchscr
hscreen
een
Using Touc
Touchh Control
Control 7 ß Calls up favourites (press brie y) or
adds favourites (press and hold)
8 £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
You can navigate through menus and lists via the
touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 using
a single- nger
nger swipe
swipe, for example:
# To enter
enter a char
charact
acter
er:: select a character using
the keyboard and press on Touch Control 2.
# To select a menu option:
option: scroll in a list and
press Touch Control 2.
# To move
move the
the digital
digital map: swipe in any direc-
1 © Shows the home screen
tion.
2 Touch Control
=9Ì: swipe in the direction of
the arrow (navigate)
Example: control elements for vehicles with a
a Press (con rm) central display
3 G Returns to the previous display 1 Fingerprint sensor
4 6 Makes or accepts a call 2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or
5 ~ Rejects or ends a call o
6 Increase volume: swipe upwards 3 Switches the mute function on/o
Reduce volume: swipe down
 MBUX multimedia system 331

4 Adjusts the volume 3 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or # To move

move the
the digital
digital map: touch the
Press ± or q or swipe over the button o touchscreen and move your nger in any
4 Switches the mute function on/o direction.
# To save
save the
the destination
destination in the
the digital
digital map:
# To select a menu item
item or entry:
entry: tap on a sym- touch the touchscreen and hold until a mes-
bol or an entry. sage is shown.
# To increase
increase the
the map scale: tap twice quickly # To call up the
the home screen:
screen: swipe up with
with one nger. three ngers in an application.
# To reduce
reduce the
the map scale: tap with two ngers. # To set
set the
the volume
volume on a scale: touch the
# To enter
enter char
charact
acter
erss with
with the
the keypad:
keypad: tap on a touchscreen and move the nger to the le or
button. right.
# To navig
navigat
atee in menus: swipe up, down, le or # To call up a global menu in the
the applications:
right. touch the touchscreen and hold until the
# To use handwriting
handwriting to to enter
enter char
charact
acter
ers:
s: write Options menu appears.
the character with one nger on the
touchscreen. Function of the
the MBUX Voice
Voice Assistant
Assistant
# To zoom in and out of the the map: move two n-
Example: control elements for vehicles with gers together or apart. & WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor-
an MBUX Hyperscreen # To enlarge
enlarge or reduce
reduce the
the size of a section of a mation systems and communications
1 Adjusts the volume websit
ebsite:
e: move two ngers together or apart. equipment
Press ±, or q. # To turn
turn the
the digital
digital map: turn anti-clockwise or If you operate information systems and com-
2 Fingerprint sensor clockwise using two ngers. munications equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you could be distracted from
332 MBUX multimedia system

the tra c situation. This could also cause you Voice Assistant is operational approximately half a Conducting a dialogue
to lose control of the vehicle. minute a er switching on the ignition and can be
operated from all seats. Further information and Star
arting
ting a dialogue
# Only operate this equipment when the # Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX
examples of voice commands can be found in the
tra c situation permits. Digital Owner's Manual. Voice Assistant. Voice activation must be
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the switched on in the multimedia system.
You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to operate
vehicle in accordance with the tra c the following functions depending on the vehicle or
conditions and operate the equipment equipment: # Press the £ button on the multifunction
with the vehicle stationary. steering wheel.
R Telephone
A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia
For your own safety, always observe the following R Text message and e-mail
system. The dialogue can be started.
points when operating mobile communications R Navigation For the dialogue with the MBUX Voice Assistant,
equipment and especially your voice control sys-
R Radio, media, TV you can use complete sentences of colloquial lan-
tem:
R Vehicle functions guage as voice commands. Voice activation can
R Observe the legal requirements for the coun- also be directly combined with a voice command,
try in which you are driving. R Online functions e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?".
R If you use the voice control system in an emer- Full functionality of the voice control system is Calling up help
gency your voice can change and your tele- only available for you with activation of online # For infor
information
mation about the
the MBUX Voice
Voice Assis-
phone call, e.g. an emergency call, can voice control.
thereby be unnecessarily delayed. tant
ant:: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?"
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control sys- # Digit
Digital
al Owner's Manual: "Show me the Own-
tem functions before starting the journey. er's Manual". The full extent of the Digital
Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle func- Owner's Manual is available when the vehicle
tions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia is stationary.
system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX
 MBUX multimedia system 333

Operating functions (exam

Operating (examples)
ples) Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the MBUX Inter
Interior
ior Assistant
Assistant % The MBUX Interior Assistant is automatically
# To operat
operatee the
the navig
navigation:
ation: "Search for an activated whenever the engine is started. You
Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South & WARNING Risk of injury from the cam- can set the functions individually or switch the
London." era's laser radiation Interior Assistant on or o .
The most recently active settings are stored in
# To operat
operatee the
the phone: "Call my father." This product uses a classi cation 1 laser sys-
your user pro le. If you switch o the Interior
# To chang
changee the
the system
system language
language to
to English tem. If the housing is opened or damaged,
Assistant, for example, this setting will be
(shortt command): "Change language to Eng-
(shor laser radiation may damage your retina.
adopted in your user pro le. However you do
lish". # Do not open the housing.
not change any other active user pro le in
# To operat
operatee the
the radio:
radio: "Show me the list of # Always have maintenance work and which the Interior Assistant is switched on.
radio stations." repairs carried out by a quali ed special- The MBUX Interior Assistant detects the presence
# To operat
ist workshop. of the front vehicle occupants using a 3D laser
operatee media: "Switch on random play-
back." camera. The Assistant interprets natural hand,
This device is a class 1 laser product in accord- head and body movements contextually or upon
# To operat
operatee vehicle
vehicle functions: "Switch the ance with IEC 60825-1:2014 and DIN EN the explicit request of the vehicle occupants. The
seat heating to level 2." 60825-1:2014. Assistant can thus automatically trigger vehicle
# To operat
operatee online functions: "What's the time % The camera records image data for the appli- interior functions and assist appropriately to the
in Sydney?" cations, for example body, head and hand situation.
# To ask a ques
question
tion about the
the vehicle:
vehicle: "Do I detection. The Assistant recognises driver and front
have Blind Spot Assist?" The camera converts the image data directly passenger interactions.
into meta data. No image data is saved in the
process. The data is only processed in the
vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehi-
cle.
334 MBUX multimedia system

The vehicle occupant actively requests a func- The system may be impaired or may not function
tion using a hand movement or pose. in the following situations:
R The camera in the overhead control panel may
The Assistant o ers functions for the following:
heat up due to operating conditions. As a
R SAFETY result the camera may switch o temporarily,
The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with particularly during longer periods of operation
the use of restraint systems. and at high outside temperatures.
R COMFORT Do not touch or cover the camera. Wait until
The Assistant enhances comfort by automat- the camera has cooled down and is available
ing functions inside the vehicle and supporting again.
Cameras 1 are located in the overhead control natural interaction with the vehicle. The Interior assistant unavailable. Notifica-
panel.
R INFOTAINMENT tion to follow. message appears.
The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment
functions at three interaction levels: Operating options or information are highligh- You receive a message when the camera is
ted and/or shown on the central display as available again.
R INTELLIGENT
your hand approaches. The vehicle occupants R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or
The Assistant recognises vehicle occupants can carry out a favourite function with a hand scratched.
automatically and activates functions. pose. Wait until the camera has cooled down before
R REACTIVE cleaning the camera cover.
System
Syst em limits, display
display messages
messages and notes
notes for
for
The Assistant recognises the natural body lan- recti cation The Currently unavailable, see Owner's Man-
guage of a vehicle occupant and carries out The error messages are shown on the central dis- ual. message appears.
functions automatically, appropriate to the sit- play.
uation. Clean the outside of the camera cover with a
dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro -
R CONTACTLESS
 MBUX multimedia system 335

bre cloths. Do not

not remove the cover when Anticipator
Anticipatoryy exit
exit war
warning
ning (SAFET
(SAFETY/r
Y/reactiv
eactive)
e) R When the door is opened, a warning tone
cleaning. sounds.
Requirements:
R A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing R The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind Spot % The visual warning is thus already given
being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, colour of cloth- before
before the door is opened.
ing) or objects carried on a person, for exam- Assist with exit warning.
ple a watch with a large face, are a ecting the R Active Blind Spot Assist is activated % Further information on Active Blind Spot
camera view. Or the detection range of the (/ page 274). Assist with exit warning (/ page 270) and on
camera is restricted. R The vehicle is equipped with active ambient
ambient lighting (/ page 166).
The Interior assist. only available to driver to lighting or ambient lighting.
limited extent, see Owner's Manual message Switching
Switching the
the reading
reading light and search
search light and
% Observe the information on the system limits on or o
appears. of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Keep the camera's eld of vision clear. (/ page 270). Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Objects in the detection range of the camera The function can warn vehicle occupants about a R For the
the reading
reading light:
light: the driver's and front
can restrict the camera view. Please make possible collision with an approaching vehicle or passenger's hand movement takes place
sure, that no objects hang on the inside rear- bicycle when they exit the vehicle. under the inside rearview mirror.
view mirror, for example. As soon as the driver or front passenger moves R For the
the search
search light:
light: the function is available in
R The MBUX Interior Assistant is faulty. their hand towards the door handle, depending on the vehicle when it is dark.
The Interior assistant is unavailable. Please the vehicle equipment, the following warnings are R The front passenger seat is not occupied or a
contact a Mercedes-Benz workshop. mes- issued: child is sitting in a child restraint system.
sage appears. R The active ambient lighting or ambient lighting R The hand movement is made by the driver in
Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. ashes red. the interaction area above the front passenger
R The warning lamp in the outside mirror also seat.
ashes red for one of the front doors.
336 MBUX multimedia system

Switching
Switching the
the reading
reading light on and o Switching
Switching the
the search
search light on and o Aut
utomatic
omatic preselection
preselection of the
the outside mirr
mirror
or
(COMFOR
(COMFORT/r
T/reactiv
eactive)
e)
Until now, to set the outside mirror the desired
mirror had to be selected using a preselection
button in the driver's door.
With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be
set is preselected automatically by the natural
movement of your head to the le or right. When
the hand touches the button for adjusting the out-
side mirror, the LED under the button of the pre-
selected mirror side lights up.
Carrying out operation of the reading light for the Interaction area for activating the search light Use the button to set the position of the active
driver and front passenger outside mirror.
# To switch
switch on: reach across the front
# Move your hand up and down vertically under passenger seat with a hand. % Preselection of the outside mirror using but-
the inside review mirror. The search light is switched on automatically tons is still possible. Further information on
The reading light is switched on or o . for the driver. adjusting the outside mirrors (/ page 171).
# To switch
switch o : take a hand back away from the % The driver camera is also used for this appli-
front passenger seat. cation.
The search light is switched o again.
 MBUX multimedia system 337

Calling up favour
favourit
ites
es with
with the
the V pose (INFOTAIN-
(INFOTAIN- % If a favourite has not yet been saved and con- facing upwards. In doing so, your index and
MENT/contactless)
MENT/cont actless) nected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the middle nger are spread to form a V. With your
multimedia system will assist you. other ngers bent inwards.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R At least one favourite has been saved in the
# Brie y hold the V pose.
favourites list. The favourite is called up.
R The favourite has been connected with the
MBUX Interior Assistant. Function of the
the driv
driver
er camera
R The area for detecting the favourites pose (V The driver camera is located in the driver display.
pose) is above the centre console in front of The driver camera detects the following character-
the central display. istics:
R The V pose is held for a brief time. R Head position
The V pose makes it easier to call up favourites. R Viewing direction
The front vehicle occupants can associate their R Eyelid closure characteristics
own favourite with the V-pose. Some examples R Driver's face
include a navigation destination, a radio station or
a massage programme for a seat. % The driver camera records image data for
If the vehicle is equipped with a front passenger applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and
display, the front passenger can link the V-pose Implementation of the V-pose above the stowage facial recognition, for example.
directly to a favourite on the front passenger dis- compartment of the centre console at the height of The camera converts the image data directly
play. If the front passenger performs the V-pose the central display into meta data. No image data is saved in the
as described, the favourite will open on the front process. The data is only processed in the
# Position your hand above the stowage com- vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehi-
passenger display. partment of the centre console at the height cle.
of the central display. The back of your hand is
338 MBUX multimedia system

The driver camera is automatically activated R The driver camera cannot capture the position R The microsleep detection of ATTENTION
each time the vehicle is opened with the key. of your head. ASSIST (/ page 240)
The driver camera must be set up for face detec- The Change steering wheel/ seat position R The facial recognition
tion before use. Teaching-in biometric data until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of This function serves as sensor input for
(/ page 340). the screen message appears. authentication and unlocking of the user pro-
System limits
System R The view of the driver camera is reduced or le and protected applications (/ page 340).
restricted. R Multimodality
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations: The Driver camera view currently restricted This function activates the MBUX Voice Assis-
R The camera is covered or dirty, misted up or
See Owner's Manual message appears. tant with eye control, e.g. for the con rmation
scratched. Notes on care of a display message by voice.
R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. Please comply with the notes on caring for the R The mirror preselection (/ page 171)
R The driver is wearing glasses that block infra-
interior (/ page 393). This function allows the natural movement of
red. the head to the le or right to automatically
Switching
Switching the
the driv
driver
er camera
camera on or o preselect the outside mirror to be adjusted.
Display messages
Display messages
In the following situations display messages may Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System
Infor
Information
mation on users,
users, sugges
suggestions
tions and favour
favourit
ites
es
be shown:
5 Intelligent assistants
R The driver camera is inoperative. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
# Select On or Off. ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er
The camera is faulty.
When the driver camera is switched o , the fol- calling up a driver pro le
The Driver camera inoperative See Owner's
Manual message appears. lowing functions are not available or limited: Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust-
R The MBUX augmented reality Head-up Display ment of the driver's seat to the position saved
(/ page 315)
 MBUX multimedia system 339

under the user pro le. You or other vehicle User pr

proo les and user
user-speci
-speci c cont
content
ent simultaneously. A user pro le can only be activa-
occupants could be injured in the process. Prerequisites for the vehicle owner: ted simultaneously on one display.
# Make sure that when the position of the R You have a Mercedes me user account. % Some settings apply to the entire vehicle and
driver's seat is being adjusted via the are displayed in all user pro les, e.g. ambient
R You have a Mercedes me PIN.
multimedia system, no people or body lighting and the current navigation settings.
R You have agreed to the terms of use. These initially belong to the driver, but can
parts are in the seat's range of move-
ment. R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user also be changed by the other vehicle occu-
account. pants in their user pro le.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- You can individualise a user pro le in the vehicle
ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- % If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or
using the set-up assistant or using the settings in
ately: if no user pro le has been selected, the data
your user pro le. Some settings, e.g. the
# a) Tap the warning message on the cen- described in the following section will be
Mercedes me PIN and a pro le photo are made in
tral display. saved in the vehicle as the standard setting.
the Mercedes me app or in the Mercedes me Por-
Standard settings can be changed by all vehi-
or tal.
cle users.
# b) Press a memory function position but- User-speci c content and applications with per-
User pro les save personal settings. If the vehicle
ton or a seat adjustment switch on the sonal data are protected by di erent levels of
is used by several people, a person can change
driver's door. security. To access protected content, the
their pro le settings without changing the settings
The adjustment process will be stopped. Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle
of other users.
equipment, biometric sensors can be used.
The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre- If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high end % The security level is set by the multimedia sys-
venter. Rear Seat Entertainment System, the occupants
tem and calculated from the combination of
in the rear compartment can log in as Mercedes
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot
me users from their seats. The Multiseat Pro le
not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le. be turned o .
Management allows three pro les to be used
340 MBUX multimedia system

% When a user pro le is activated, the following Sugges

Sugg estions
tions # Scan the displayed QR code with the
personalised comfort systems, for example, The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It Mercedes me app or any QR code scanner on
can be adjusted or their settings loaded: then makes suggestions regarding navigation des- a mobile device. If the Mercedes me app is
R Seat tinations, phone numbers and music preferences. not yet installed on your mobile device, you
The requirements for that are the selection of a will be directed to the store of your mobile
R Ambient light
user, your consent to the recording of data and device.
R Outside mirrors su cient collected data. # Follow the directions in the app.
R Blinds The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes
Favourit
Favour ites
es
R Climate control settings Favourites o er you quick access to frequently me user account. This automatically creates
used applications. 100 favourites are available in your user pro le in the vehicle.
If the user pro le is activated when driving
total. If only your user pro le is available, it will be
then the driver's seat position will not be
loaded automatically.
adjusted.
Con guring
guring user
users,
s, sugges
suggestions
tions and favour
favourit
ites
es If more than one user pro le is available, you
Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as
will be directed to the user selection.
a user, save the following settings, for example: Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set-
When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up
R To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is sta-
assistant starts automatically a er user selec-
tings tionary. tion.
R Climate control
Multimedia system: Selecting user options
options
R Ambient lighting 4 © 5 f 5 Change user # Select Settings.
R Radio (including station list)
Adding a user # Select Suggestions.
R Suggestions and favourites
# Select f Add user . # Select Allow all suggestions.
A QR code is loaded. or
 MBUX multimedia system 341

# Switch the options on or o individually. R Biometric sensors Teac

eaching
hing in, editing and deleting
deleting biometr
biometric
ic data
If an option is switched on and su cient data The teaching-in of biometric sensors is protec- The biometric data models are saved in the sen-
has been gathered, suggestions based on your ted. sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught-
user behaviour will be o ered to you. in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for
# For intellig
intelligent
ent multimodality:
multimodality: select Multimo-
R Suggestions authentication on the multimedia system.
dality. The data and determination of the most prob- # Select Protect content.
If the option is active, the MBUX Voice Assis- able navigation destinations, media sources,
# Select Facial recognition, Fingerprint recogni-
tant can be activated in certain situations. radio stations, contacts and messages are
protected. tion or Voice recognition.
# To switch
switch the
the learning
learning function o for 24 h:
switch on Deactiv. intelligent learning for R ENERGIZING COACH % If necessary, authenticate yourself on the mul-
24h. timedia system.
The recorded health data and their evaluation
# To delete
delete cumulated
cumulated sugges
suggestions:
tions: select are protected. Aut
uthenticating
henticating using face
face recognition
recognition
Reset suggestion history and con rm Ja (Yes). R Mercedes me connect store # Close the driver's door or fasten the driver's
Protecting user
Protecting user-speci
-speci c cont
content
ent and applications The purchase of services is protected. seat belt.
If you add a new user, access protection is # Look at the driver display for about ve sec-
# Switch Protect content on or o .
already activated for the user pro le. The onds.
Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle # Switch Access protection on or o . Your face is scanned. A message in the driver
equipment, biometric sensors are available for % When access protection is switched o , your display shows whether facial recognition was
access. Biometric sensors must be taught in in user pro le can be accessed and changed successful or not. You can unlock your user
the vehicle. The authentication process then takes from every vehicle seat. pro le and protected applications with the
all taught-in and available sensors into account. % Access protection is switched on or o on a facial scan.
The following user-speci c content and applica- vehicle-speci c basis.
tions are protected, for example:
R User selection and user pro le settings
342 MBUX multimedia system

Aut
uthenticating
henticating using ngnger
erpr
prints
ints Teac
eaching
hing in the
the vehicle
vehicle key
key for
for pr
proo le selection # Select a user.
# Place and li your nger several times on the # Select Protect content. # When requested to do so, authenticate with
ngerprint sensor under the touchscreen # Select Key recognition. the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric
(/ page 321). characteristic.
# Have the key ready and follow the set-up
The nger is scanned. If the scanning proce- The user pro le is loaded and activated.
dure is successful, a message appears on the assistant's prompts.
The user pro le is linked to the selected key. If % If you select Continue without selecting user,
central display. You can unlock your user pro- no speci c settings for the user pro le are
le and protected applications with your nger you open the vehicle with the key, the light,
mirror and seat settings for your user pro le loaded.
print.
are pre-activated. The key you are currently Adding favour
favourit
ites
es from
from categor
categories
ies
Aut
uthenticating
henticating using voice
voice recognition
recognition using for unlocking is used. # Select ©.
# Speak the sentence shown on the central dis- The key is only stored for the driver and for
# Select ß.
play and follow the Voice Assistant's instruc- one user pro le.
tions. # Select r.
If the voice recognition was successful, a mes- Selecting a user
# Select W Create new favourite.
sage appears on the central display. You can % When you call up your driver pro le, the driv-
# Select the category.
unlock your user pro le. er's seat and the steering wheel can be set.
# Select a favourite.
% Avoid background or disturbing noises during You can cancel the setting process with the
voice recognition. following actions: Linking favour
favourit
ites
es with
with the
the MBUX Inter
Interior
ior Assis-
R Press Tap here to cancel. message on the tant V pose
Deleting biometr
Deleting biometric
ic data
central display. # Select ©.
# Tap on E , for example, behind Facial rec-
R Press one of the seat operating buttons in # Select ß.
ognition.
the driver's door.
# Select Yes. # Select r.
# Select Change user.
 MBUX multimedia system 343

# Select Driver or Passenger. R Tone Install these updates, or else the security of your
# Select the category. - Entertainment multimedia system cannot be ensured.
# Select a favourite. - Navigation and tra c announcements The multimedia system displays a corresponding
message when a so ware update is available.
- Telephone
If the Automatic online update option is active,
System
Syst em settings
settings - Voice ampli cation so ware updates are downloaded automatically. If
Overvie
Over view
w of the
the syst
system
em settings
settings menu R Data protection the option is deactivated, you will be informed of
R Connectivity: new so ware updates once. The so ware updates
In the system settings menu, you can make set- are available for downloading for a limited period
tings in the following menus and control ele- - Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC of time.
ments: R MBUX rear tablet child-proof lock Carrying out a so ware update:
R Display: R Time & date R You can start so ware updates via the com-
- Display brightness R Language munication module.
- Screensaver for the front passenger dis- R Units for distance R You can start so ware updates via a Wi-Fi hot-
play (vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen) R System PIN spot.
R Control elements: R So ware update R You can start map updates from an external

System reset medium.

- Keyboard language and handwriting recog- R
nition % Online so ware updates cannot be performed
- Sensitivity of the Touch Controls Over
Overvie
view
w of so ware
ware updat
updates
es via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted
using TKIP.
- Haptic operation for the touchscreen Important so ware updates may be necessary for
R MBUX Voice Assistant the security of your multimedia system's data.
R MBUX Interior Assistant
344 MBUX multimedia system

% To complete so ware updates via the commu- They can only be carried out in a safely
nication module, the vehicle must be connec- parked vehicle with the vehicle switched o .
ted with the Internet and a Mercedes me user For so ware
ware updat
updates
es req
requir
uiring
ing a safe
safe vehicle
vehicle sta-
sta-
account. tus: when the last installation step is reached, a
% To complete so ware updates via Wi-Fi, the message appears on the central display a er the
vehicle must be connected to an external Wi- vehicle is switched o . Follow the step-by-step
Fi hotspot. instructions on the central display to complete the
A so ware update consists of three steps: installation.
R Downloading or copying of the data required There are so ware updates that can only be
for installation installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there
are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle % The display message does not appear every
R Installation of the downloaded so ware time a so ware update is installed.
is locked.
update In rare cases, an error can occur during the instal-
R Activation of the downloaded so ware update. Availability of the
Availability the driv
driver
er and central
central display lation. The multimedia system automatically
During the installation of so ware updates, it is attempts to restore the previous version.
% It may be necessary to restart the MBUX mul- not possible to use the vehicle, central display
timedia system a er completion of a so ware and driver display. You may receive the following If it is not possible to restore the previous version,
update. display message when an installation is running: the display message shown above appears every
% While some so ware updates are being down- time the vehicle is started.
loaded, the multimedia system cannot be Failur
ailuree of the
the driv
driver
er display
operated and the vehicle functions may be If the driver display fails or there is a malfunction,
restricted. you may not recognise limitations in the functions
% Some so ware updates require a safe vehicle of systems relevant to safety or the speed display,
status for the installation to be completed. for example. The operating safety of the vehicle
may be impaired. Drive on carefully and have the
 MBUX multimedia system 345

vehicle checked at a quali ed specialist workshop Setting

Setting up a Wi-F
Wi-Fii hotspot
hotspot Multimedia system:
immediately (/ page 461). 4 © 5 Settings 5 System
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Further information about so ware updates can R The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multime-
5 Internet and Bluetooth
be found at https://me.secure.mercedes- dia system and the communication device to % The availability of the functions is dependent
benz.com. be connected. on the country.
Failur
ailuree of the
the central
central display R The communication device to be connected # Select Wi-Fi.
If the central display fails or the display message supports at least one of the types of connec- The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched
shown above is shown continuously, several sys- tion described. on.
tems such as the reversing camera, PARKTRONIC The connection types shown depend on the
or climate control are no longer available. Drive When the Wi-Fi function is switched on, you can
device to be connected. The function must be connect the multimedia system with external hot-
on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as supported by the multimedia system and by
soon as possible. spots or make it available as a hotspot for external
the device to be connected. The type of con- devices.
Front
Fr ont passenger
passenger display
display failur
failuree (only
(only vehicles
vehicles with nection established must be selected on the
multimedia system and on the device to be When the Wi-Fi function is switched o , it is not
MBUX Hyperscr
Hyperscreen)
een) possible to establish a hotspot connection.
If the front passenger display has failed or a dis- connected.
play message appears permanently, functions and When the Wi-Fi function is switched o , no con-
% Some functions may rst need to be activated nection can be established with the MBUX rear
systems are no longer available via the front on the communication device being connec-
passenger display. Visit a quali ed specialist work- tablet.
ted. More detailed information can be found
shop. in the manufacturer's operating instructions. % The data volume can be purchased directl directlyy
from
fr om a mobile phone netw
networorkk provider
provider via the
% The use of the vehicle data tari by external Mercedes me Portal.
devices is not available in all countries.
% The use of the vehicle data tari by external
devices is not available in all countries.
346 MBUX multimedia system

Using the
the multimedia system
system as a Wi-F
Wi-Fii hotspot
hotspot Connecting using a security
security key Using a mobile communication device
device as a Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
# Select MBUX hotspot. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con- hotspo
ho tspott (tet
(tether
hering)
ing)
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the
# Select one of the following connection
MBUX XXXXX network name. Internet connection of the multimedia system.
options. The data tari of the mobile communication
# Enter the security key which is shown in the
Connecting using a QR code device via Acquired package is used for the data
central display on the device to be connected. connection.
Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is
# Con rm the entry.
installed on the device being connected. % This function is country-dependent.
Alternatively: the device being connected has an Generating a new
Generating new security
security key % With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are
integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's # Select the hotspot name MBUX XXXXX in the encrypted via TKIP, online so ware updates
operating instructions). MBUX hotspot menu. cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi
# Scan the QR code shown.
# Con rm the prompt with Yes.
hotspot.
The Wi-Fi connection is established. A new security key is generated. # Select the Connect to the Internet option in

Connecting using NFC the Internet and Bluetooth menu.

A connection will be established with the newly
# Activate NFC on the device to be connected. created security key. Setting up an Inter
Setting Interne
nett connection via Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
# When the NFC icon is displayed in the MBUX % When a new security key is generated, all % The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and
hotspot menu, hold the device to be connec- existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon- Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated
ted to the NFC interface. nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re- (see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
# Follow the instructions on the device. established, the new security key must be tions).
The Wi-Fi connection is established. entered. # Select Search for access.
# Select the network.

# Log in to the Wi-Fi network.

or
 MBUX multimedia system 347

# Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi Rese

esetting
tting the
the multimedia system
system (rese
(resett function) R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connec-
symbol. tion
& WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure
% The data used and saved in the multimedia
of the central display functions
System
System language system by the driver assistance systems is
While the multimedia system is being reset, its deleted.
Notes on the
the system
system language functions such as the reversing camera are
This function allows you to determine the lan- % Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset
not available. must be in the cradle while the system is
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
# Only reset the multimedia system when reset.
announcements. The selected language a ects
the characters available for entry. The navigation the vehicle is stationary. # Select Reset.
announcements are not available in all languages. A query appears asking if the system should
If a language is not available, the navigation Req
equir
uirements:
ements: really be reset.
R The vehicle is switched on.
announcements will be in English. # Select Yes.
R Some settings can only be reset when the
Setting the
Setting the language The multimedia system is reset to the factory
vehicle is stationary. settings. The multimedia system is restarted
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System Multimedia system: a er the system reset.
5 Language 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset % Due to data protection, as well as the function
When resetting the system, personal data and set- of individual driving systems and driving safety
Setting the
Setting the system
system language systems, it is a requirement to carry out a
A list of the available system languages is shown. tings are deleted, for example:
complete system reset before selling the vehi-
# Select a language.
R Connected devices cle or transferring it to a third party, or a er
The system language is switched to the selec- R Individual user pro les use as a hire car.
ted language. R Biometric data
348 MBUX multimedia system

Drivee system
Driv system settings
settings & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due Navig
vigation
ation over
overview
view
Calling up the
the energy
energy ow display to imprecise positioning of additional Digital
Digit al map and user
user-speci
-speci c applications
information
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Info
The additional information from the augmen-
ted reality display may be inaccurate and is
# Select Energy flow. not a substitute for observing and assessing
The energy ow in the vehicle is displayed. the actual driving situation.
# Always keep an eye on the actual tra c

Navig
vigation
ation and tr
traa c situation when carrying out all driving
manoeuvres.
Notes on navig
navigation
ation
Rout
outee guidance with
with augmented
augmented reality
reality Switching
Switching navig
navigation
ation on
1 Navigation module (reduced view) or EQ mod-
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a Multimedia system: ule (reduced view)
result of distraction, incorrect depiction or 4 ©
Route guidance active:
wrong interpretation of the display # Alternatively, press the © button on the Navigation module shows in the reduced view
The camera image of the augmented reality steering wheel on the right (/ page 330). the information relevant to the route, e.g. the
display is not suitable as a guide for driving. The Zero Layer with the digital map is dis- next charging stop, the destination and a traf-
# Always keep an eye on the actual tra c played. fic delay
situation. £ ends the current route guidance
# Avoid extended observation of the cam- Tapping opens the navigation module in the
era image. expanded view with the Route
Route guidance not active:
 MBUX multimedia system 349

EQ module is shown in the reduced view R 2D and direction of travel Navig

vigation
ation module (expanded
(expanded view)
view)
Tapping opens the EQ module in the expan- R 3D and direction of travel
ded view with the charging functions R Map with complete route
2 Enters a destination
3 % If the map is moved, the map switches
Calls up the Control Center in the status line
between 3D direction of travel and 2D north
4 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or orientation.
arrow)
5 Display area with entertainment sources, The following map types 6 are available:
phone, active applications and suggestions R Daytime display
6 Searches for POIs, e.g. charging stations R Night-time display
w and parking facilities j, as well as sets R Satellite map
map orientation and map type
7 Navigation window shows the next manoeuvre
(zoomed out view) or the route monitor
(zoomed in view)
For example, with active route guidance, route
sections of the route list, displays for upcom- 1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging
ing driving manoeuvres, lane recommenda- station
tions 2 Charging stop shows the charging time rec-
. Switches o navigation announcements ommended by the navigation with Electric
Ì Switches on navigation announcements Intelligence as well as charge levels on arrival
and onward journey for an optimal travel time
The following map orientations 6 are available:
R 2D and to the north
350 MBUX multimedia system

3 Distance from current vehicle position and 3 Maximum charge level (depending on the set- Multimedia system:
remaining driving time ting) 4 © 5 ª Where to?
4 Searches for an additional charging station 4 Sets the next charging break (to use a less
expensive tari )
EQ module (expanded
(expanded view)
view)
5 Sets the departure time
6 Opens the socket ap
7 Activates or deactivates ECO charging

Enter
Entering
ing a destination
destination
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R For online search:
search: an Internet connection is
established.
R Mercedes me connect is available.
R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal.
R The vehicle is connected with the user
account and you have accepted the terms of Example: entering a POI or address
use. 1 Input line with current entry
Further information can be found at: https:// 2 Search result
1 Sets the charging program (/ page 224)
www.mercedes.me 3 Selects destination input, displays further
2 Current charge level of the high-voltage bat-
R The service is available and has been activa- destination inputs with double arrow
tery
ted. 4 Deletes an entry
 MBUX multimedia system 351

5 Adopts the search result in the input line and # Select the destination in the list. - The Schedule charging stops route option
continues the search The route is calculated. is switched on.
6 Deletes the last character entered % Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia
7 Hides the keypad system (/ page 321).
8 Switches to handwriting recognition
9 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant Calculating a rout
routee with
with Electric
Electric Intellig
Intelligence
ence and
A Sets the written language using settings
settings for
for rout
routee guidance
B Switches to digits and special characters Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters R The destination has been entered.
# Enter the destination in 1. The entries can R The destination address is shown.
be made in any order. R For navig
navigation
ation with
with Electric
Electric Intellig
Intelligence:
ence:
The search results are displayed in a list. - Mercedes me connect is available.
% Online search results for POIs may contain - You have a Mercedes me connect user
additional information, for example opening account and the vehicle is connected with
times and prices. The information is provided the account.
by an online map service. - The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence"
This online function is not available in all Example: detailed display
service is available and activated in the
countries. 1 Calls up alternative routes (Schedule charg-
Mercedes me Portal.
% You can enter a destination as a 3 word ing stops is switched o )
The services "Navigation with Electric Intel-
address from what3words. Saves as favourite (Schedule charging stops
ligence", "Display of charging points" and
This option is not available in all countries. is switched on)
"Mercedes me Charge" are required for
# Hide the keyboard with a. optimal function.
352 MBUX multimedia system

2 Calculates the route and starts route guid- Calling up the

the rout
routee over
overview
view # To save
save a destination
destination as a favour
favouritite:
e: select
ance % When Schedule charging stops is switched ß Favourite and then an option.
3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the o , this option is available instead of the # To call up an Inter
Interne
nett address:
address: if a web
destination favourites function. address is available, select www.
4 Destination information, online content (e.g. # Select Routes. # To call the
the destination:
destination: if a telephone number
pictures, opening hours), 3-word address # Select an alternative route. is available, select Call.
from what3words
Star
arting
ting rout
routee guidance Searching for
Searching for POIs in the
the vicinity of the
the destina-
destina-
A er selecting a destination, Electric Intelligence tion shown
shown
automatically and intelligently calculates the route # Select ¥ Let's go!.
# Select In the vicinity.
to the destination. This is updated during route Calling up the
the detailed
detailed display
display with
with destination
destination
guidance. The route with Electric Intelligence con- # Search using categories, enter a search entry
address
addr ess or search for a personal POI .
tains the required charging stations as intermedi-
# Pull the bar above the ¥ Let's go! symbol
ate destinations. The charging stations are deter- Switching on the
Switching the Electric
Electric Intellig
Intelligence
ence rout
routee option
option
mined taking account of the driving distance and upwards.
Depending on the destination selection and # Select Z in the navigation module
the estimated charging times.
availability, online content, for example rat- (/ page 348).
% When the Schedule charging stops route
ings, prices and weather information, is # Select Route.
option is switched o , a route without charg- shown.
ing stations is calculated. # Activate Schedule charging stops.
# Select one of the options.
If the destination is in a di erent time zone, a If the route has been calculated and the state
message is displayed. of charge of the high-voltage battery is not
Saving
Saving a destination
destination as a favour
favourite
ite # To share
share a destination:
destination: select Ç Share. su cient to reach the destination, charging
# Select ß Favourite. This option allows you to scan the displayed stations are set automatically as intermediate
# Select an option.
QR code. destinations.
 MBUX multimedia system 353

Setting
Setting the
the charg
chargee level
level of the
the high volt
voltag
agee battery
battery R Navigation with Electric Intelligence Switching
Switc hing the
the rang
rangee monitor
monitor on or o
when the
the char
charging
ging station
station and destination
destination are selects a closer charging station for the The activated range monitoring assists with mes-
reac
eached
hed route. sages on the driver and central display to ensure
# Select Z in the navigation module % If a charging facility is available at the destina- safe arrival at the destination.
(/ page 348). tion, the charge level can be lowered below # Select Z in the navigation module

# Select Route. 10%. The Min. message appears on the cen- (/ page 348).
tral display. Make sure that the range monitor # Select Route.
# Select Charge level at destination or Charge
is switched on.
level at charging stations. # Activate or deactivate Range monitoring.
# To select a char
charging
ging station
station provider
provider:: switch
# Move the control knob to the le or right and To reach the destination with the charge level
Mercedes me Charge on or o . set by the driver, the range is permanently
set the preferred charge level in percent (%). If the option is activated, only charging sta-
The destination or charging station along the monitored when the option is switched on.
tions payable with Mercedes me Charge are
route is reached with the set charge level. taken into account when selecting the charg- % This function is not available in all countries.
To reach a charging station, the system uses the ing station.
battery capacity, e.g. up to 10% residual energy or
content (charge level). You can increase this # Activate All.
charge level on arrival at the charging station and All charging stations known to the navigation
destination, e.g. to 25% at the charging station system are taken into account when calculat-
and 50% at the destination. ing routes with Electric Intelligence, regardless
% In the event of increased energy consumption of the type of payment.
while driving, e.g. with headwind, the following It may be necessary to register with the pro-
options are available on the system side: vider.
R The charging station is safely reached
even at charge levels of less than 10%.
354 MBUX multimedia system

Displaying
Displaying a rout
routee over
overvie
view
w with
with char
charging
ging station
station 3 Distance from current vehicle position and % A er selecting Details, the detailed informa-
remaining driving time tion about the charging station is displayed.
4 Searches for an additional charging station Adding a char
charging
ging station
station
You can in uence the route calculated by the nav- If you want to drive to a charging station earlier on
igation with Electric Intelligence using options 1 the route, for example, you can search for an
and 4. additional charging station. If the charging station
is suitable for the route, it will be accepted by the
# Select one of the options.
navigation with Electric Intelligence.
Ignoring
Ignor ing a char
charging
ging station
station # Select 4.
If you do not want to drive to the selected charg- # Select a charging station.
ing station, it can be removed for the current
route guidance. The navigation with Electric Intelli- % You can also search for a charging station
gence tries to plan the best possible alternative using the w symbol on the digital map or
charging station for the route. next to ª Where to? .
# Select 1. Selecting a rout
routee type
The expected charging power, the dynamic # Select Z in the navigation module
charge level display as well as the current (/ page 348).
1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging
charge level and the predicted charging target
station are displayed, for example. # Select Route.
2 Charging stop shows the charging time rec- The route is calculated as a fast route with a
# Select Ignore.
ommended by the navigation with Electric short journey time. Trailer mode is available if
Intelligence as well as charge levels on arrival # Select Ignore during this journey. a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If
and onward journey for an optimal travel time The charging station is removed from the cur- available, you can select online routes. Tra c
rent route. announcements for the route are taken into
account via Dynamic route guidance r.
 MBUX multimedia system 355

% Trailer mode and online routes are not availa- # Select Avoid options. # Activate Street names and House numbers.
ble in all countries and for all vehicles. # Activate or deactivate the avoid option. During route guidance, the activated options
are shown as additional information in the
Activ
ctivating
ating a commuter
commuter route
route Activ
ctivating
ating rout
routee guidance with
with augmented
augmented reality
reality camera image.
% A user pro le has been created and Allow # Select Z in the navigation module.
destination suggestions has been activated in
the user options (/ page 340). Route guid-
# Select View. Using map functions
ance is not active. # Select Augmented reality video. Multimedia system:
# Select Z in the navigation module. # Activate or deactivate Augmented reality 4 ©

# Select Route. video.

The AR camera's video image is shown on the Increasing map scale
Increasing
# Activate Activate commuter route.
central display before a turning manoeuvre.
# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with
The navigation system automatically detects The video image includes additional informa- one nger on the central display.
that the vehicle is on a commuter route. tion. or
For the daily commuter route, tra c events on # Move two ngers apart on the central display.
the route are also reported when driving with- Showing proper
Showing property
ty infor
information
mation for
for rout
routee guidance
out active route guidance. withh augmented
wit augmented reality
reality Decreasing map scale
Decreasing
Road guidance with augmented reality is activa- # Tap with two ngers on the central display.
# To select or delete
delete a commuter
commuter rout
route:
e: ted.
selectStart or ¨. or
# Select Z in the navigation module.
# Move two ngers together on the central dis-
Avoiding or using rout
Avoiding routee sections, e.g. motorways
motorways # Select View.
play.
or ferr
ferries
ies
# Select Augmented reality video.
# Select Z in the navigation module. Moving
Moving the
the map
# Select Route. # When the map is displayed, swipe in any direc-
tion with one nger on the central display.
356 MBUX multimedia system

# To rese
resett the
the map to
to the
the current
current vehicle
vehicle posi- R The vehicle is connected to a user account Displaying hazard
Displaying hazard war
warnings
nings
tion: select \ Centre . and you have accepted the conditions of use If hazard warnings are available these can be
for the service. shown as symbols on the map. The display
Selecting map orient
orientation
ation depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents
Further information can be found at: https://
# Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol www.mercedes.me option.
on the map. # Set the option using Z.
R The service is available and has been activa-
The map orientations changes in this order: ted. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are
R The 3D map view is aligned to the direc- shown.
tion of travel. Multimedia system:
If the option is deactivated, the symbols are
4 ©
R The 2D map view is aligned to the direc- only shown when there is a hazard warning.
tion of travel. Showing tr
Showing traa c inf
infor
ormation
mation The following hazards may be shown on the map:
R The 2D map view is displayed so that north # Select Z in the navigation module R Accidents and breakdowns
is always at the top. (/ page 348). R Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
R The map shows the complete route. # Select View. R Hazards reported manually
# Select Map symbols. R Vehicle with active hazard warning light
Using services
ser vices # Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing R Roadworks
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: traffic. R Additional hazards (if available)
R There is an Internet connection. Tra c incidents, for example roadworks, local
area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, Displaying online map contents
Displaying contents
R Mercedes me connect is available.
are shown on the route. # Select Z in the navigation module.
R You have set up a user account in the
The tra c delay is displayed for the current # Select View.
Mercedes me Portal. route. The smallest value for the display for
# Select Map symbols.
tra c delays is a minute.
 MBUX multimedia system 357

# Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. * NOTE Before selecting the parking option For example, opening times, parking
Current weather information is displayed on charges, current occupancy, maximum
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud The data is based on information provided by parking time, maximum access height.
height
cover. the respective service provider. The maximum access height shown by the
The service information is not shown in all Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the parking service does not replace the need
map scales, e.g. weather symbols. accuracy of the information provided relating for observation of the actual circumstan-
to the multi-storey car park/parking area. ces.
Par
arking
king service
ser vice # Always observe the local Information and R Available payment options (Mercedes pay,
* NOTE
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not conditions. coins, bank notes, cards)
observing the maximum permitted head- R Details on parking tari s
room clearance % This service is not available in all countries.
R Number of available parking spaces
# Select Z in the navigation module and
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- activate Parking. R Payment method (e.g. at the parking
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof meter)
# Tap on j in the map.
and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- R Services/facilities at the parking option
aged. # Select a parking option.
R Telephone number
# Observe the signposted headroom clear- The map shows the parking options in the
ance. vicinity. # Calculate the route (/ page 351).
# If the vehicle height is greater than the The following information is displayed (if avail-
permitted headroom clearance, do not able):
enter. R Destination address, distance from current
# Observe the changed vehicle height with vehicle position and arrival time
add-on roof equipment. R Information on the multi-storey car
park/car park
358 MBUX multimedia system

Notes on the
the dashcam ted USB ash drives do not allow les larger Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
than 4 GB, for example. USB devices with one partition.
* NOTE Before using the dashcam When the le size is reached, the recording
stops and you receive a noti cation.
You are legally responsible for operation and Star
arting
ting or stopping
stopping video recor
recording
ding with
with the
the
use of the dashcam functions. The legal % The following functions are available in the dashcam
requirements relating to operation and use of Gallery app:
the dashcam can vary depending on the coun- R Switching write protection on or o Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R For recording and saving a video le: a USB
try in which the dashcam is operated. There- R Deleting video les
fore, observe the legal requirements, in partic- device is connected with the multimedia sys-
ular the data protection regulations, in your tem.
country. Selecting a USB device
device for
for a video recor
recording
ding with R The vehicle is switched on.
the dashcam
For this reason, before using the dashcam Multimedia system:
inform yourself about the regulation details for Req
equir
uirements:
ements: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
the respective country. R At least one USB device is connected with the
# If several USB devices are connected with the
This function is not permitted in all countries. multimedia system .
multimedia system, select a USB device
# Observe the country-speci c regula- Multimedia system: (/ page 358).
tions. 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam If no USB device is selected, a selection is
# Select the USB symbol.
made automatically when recording starts.
% To ensure secure operation, only use FAT32 # To select a recor
or exFAT formatted USB storage devices. # Select the USB device.
recording
ding mode: select Loop
recording or Individual recording.
% The le size and therefore the duration of sin- % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, Loop recording records several short video
gle recording is limited by the limitations of recorded video les are not always displayed les. When the memory is full, recording is
the USB ash drive format. So FAT32 format- in the recording list. continued automatically. In doing so, other
 MBUX multimedia system 359

les will be overwritten starting with the oldest R The camera is not functional, the Camera could also cause you to lose control of the
le. unavailable message appears. vehicle.
Individual recording stops recording when the Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz # Only operate this equipment when the
memory limit is reached. An individual record- service centre. tra c situation permits.
ing is automatically protected against being R If the country border indication has been # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
overwritten. switched on. vehicle whilst paying attention to road
# To start
start:: select Start recording. R If an outdoor recording is started with the and tra c conditions and operate the
The length of the recording is shown. The camera app during a dashcam recording, the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Please do not remove the storage medium. dashcam recording pauses and resumes auto-
message appears. The video le is stored on matically a er the camera recording is n- & WARNING Risk of accident from operating
the USB device. ished. A noti cation to this e ect is displayed. mobile communication equipment while
# To end: select End recording.
the vehicle is in motion
% In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude
Telephone Mobile communication devices distract the
and latitude) are shown in the video image. driver from the tra c situation. This can also
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates Telephony
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
may show greater inaccuracies. Notes on telephony
telephony # As a driver, only operate mobile commu-
A report may appear in the following cases: nication devices when the vehicle is sta-
R Individual recording: the memory is full or & WARNING Risk of distraction from operat-
tionary.
there are only a few minutes recording time ing integrated communication equipment
# As a vehicle occupant, use mobile com-
available. The video recording stops or will be while the vehicle is in motion
munication devices only in the designa-
stopped imminently. If you operate communication equipment inte- ted area, e.g. in the rear passenger com-
Change the USB device or delete a video le. grated in the vehicle when driving, you could partment.
be distracted from the tra c situation. This
360 MBUX multimedia system

You must observe the legal requirements for the # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, - Wireless telephony is available on the mul-
country in which you are currently driving when pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky timedia system.
operating mobile communication equipment in objects in the boot/load compartment. R SAP (SIM Access Pro le)
the vehicle.
- The car telephone has access to the SIM
Observe the additional information on stowing card data and dials into the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects mobile communications devices correctly:
being stowed incorrectly network via the exterior aerial.
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 130)
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed ooth® connection:
Bluetooth
Bluet Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around can by used with any mobile radio unit.
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup The menu view and the available functions in the
telephone menu are in part dependent on the For information on the range of functions of the
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manu-
phone receptacles cannot always retain all Bluetooth® pro le of the connected mobile
facturer's operating instructions.
objects within. phone. If the mobile phone supports all the fol-
lowing Bluetooth® pro les, the full range of fea- Netw
twor
orkk connection:
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the tures is available: The following cases can lead to the call being dis-
event of sudden braking or a sudden change connected while the vehicle is in motion:
in direction. R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are R You switch into a transmission/reception sta-
# Always stow objects so that they cannot
shown automatically on the multimedia tion, in which no communication channel is
be thrown around in such situations. free.
# Always make sure that objects do not
system.
R MAP (Message Access Pro le) R The SIM card used is not compatible with the
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage network available
nets or stowage nets. - The mobile phone message functions can
be used on the multimedia system. R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
# Close the lockable stowage spaces
the network with the second SIM card at the
before starting a journey. R HFP (hands-free pro le)
same time
 MBUX multimedia system 361

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Telephone menu over

overview
view 5 Options
Voice® for improved speech quality. A require- 6 Messages
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the 7 Calls up my devices
mobile phone network provider of the person you
8 Numerical pad
are calling support HD Voice®.
9 Starts contact search
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may uctuate. Telephon
elephonyy operating
operating modes over
overview
view
Further information can be obtained from a Depending on your equipment, the following tel-
Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https:// ephony operating modes are available:
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect R A mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth®.
R Two mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone
mode).
- You can use all the functions of the multi-
media system with both mobile phones.
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con-
Connecting a mobile phone
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(two phone mode) (see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network tions).
4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
362 MBUX multimedia system

R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys- - i Conference

tem. - Accepting or rejecting a waiting call
Multimedia system: R Managing contacts, e.g.:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices - Downloading mobile phone contacts
5 My devices - Managing the format of a contact's name
Searching for
Searching for a mobile phone - Deleting favourites
# Select Connect new device. R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:
- Using the read-aloud function
Connecting a mobile phone
# Select a mobile phone.
- Dictating a new message
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone. Mercedes
Mer cedes me app
# If both codes match, con rm the code on the
Mercedes me calls
Mercedes
mobile phone.
Making a call via the
the over
overhead
head control
control panel 1 me button for service or information calls
Functions in the
the telephon
telephonyy menu
% Mercedes me calls are not possible in every 2 SOS button cover
In the telephony menu you have the following country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service 3 SOS button (emergency call system)
functions, for example: centre if these functions are available in your
R Making calls, e.g.: country. Making a Mercedes
Mercedes me call
- R Accept a call # Press me button 1.
- k End call
- Answering a call with a message
 MBUX multimedia system 363

Making an emergency
emergency call R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre Then, you can select a service and be connected
# To open the cover of SOS button 2, press it R Other products and services from Mercedes- to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer
brie y. Benz Centre.
# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one
Data is transferred during the connection to the Calling the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Customer Centre
Centre a er
second. Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 365). automatic accident or breakdo
automatic breakdown
wn detection
detection
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call Calling the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Customer Centre Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
can still be triggered. This has priority over all R The vehicle has detected an accident or break-
using the
the multimedia system
system
other active calls. down situation.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R The vehicle is stationary.
Information
Infor mation about the
the Mercedes
Mercedes me call using the
the R Access to a GSM network is available.
me button
button R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
R The contract partner's GSM network coverage
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has % This function is not available in all countries.
is available in the respective region.
been initiated via the me button in the overhead
control panel or the multimedia system R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehi- The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown sit-
(/ page 362). cle data can be transferred automatically. uations under certain circumstances.
Using the voice dialogue system you access the Multimedia system: In the event an accident or breakdown is detec-
desired service: 4 © 5 Phone 5 ©
ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in
R Accident and Breakdown Management
the multimedia system display.
# Call Mercedes me connect.
R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general
A er quitting the emergency guide display on the
A er con rmation, the multimedia system multimedia system, a prompt appears asking
information about the vehicle sends the required vehicle data. The data whether you would like to get support from the
You can nd information on the following topics: transfer is shown on the central display. Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
R Activation of Mercedes me connect
R Operating the vehicle
364 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Call. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me This will contact you to con rm the appoint-
R A er your agreement, or if the Mercedes connect service "Telediagnostics", can either ment and if necessary consult about the
me connect service "Accident and Break- be con rmed or declined. A er being details.
down Management" is active, the vehicle declined, this will not be shown again. % If you select Call later a er the service mes-
data is transferred automatically sage appears, the message is hidden and
(/ page 367). Arranging a service
Arranging ser vice appointment via a Mercedes
Mercedes
me call reappears at a later time.
R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre If you have activated the maintenance manage-
takes your call and organises the break- Giving consent to
to data
data transf
transfer
er during
during a Mercedes
Mercedes
ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred me call
down and accident assistance. automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
You may be charged for these services. Centre. You will then receive individual recom- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
mendations regarding the maintenance of your R There is an active Mercedes me call via the
% Depending on the severity of the accident, an vehicle. multimedia system or the me button in the
automatic emergency call can be initiated. overhead control panel (/ page 362).
This has priority over all other active calls. Regardless of whether you have consented to the
maintenance management service, the multime- % The prompt to con rm data transfer does not
% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect dia system reminds you a er a certain amount of
service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar appear in all countries.
time that a service is due. A prompt appears ask-
prompt can appear a er a delay in the event ing if you would like to make an appointment. If the Accident and Breakdown Management serv-
of a breakdown. If you are already in contact ices are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do
# To arrang
arrangee a service
ser vice appointment:
appointment: select Call.
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or you want to transfer your vehicle data and the
have already received support, this prompt A er your agreement, the vehicle data is vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
can be ignored or declined. transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer tomer Centre to improve the processing of your
centre takes your preferred appointment date. request? message is shown.
% If you answer the prompt for support from the The information is then sent to your desired
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Call # Select Yes.
service outlet.
later, the message will be hidden and appear Relevant identi cation data is transmitted
again later. automatically.
 MBUX multimedia system 365

More information on Mercedes me: https:// % A prompt for consent to the data transmission If a call is made a er automatic accident or break-
www.mercedes.me only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes down detection using the multimedia system, the
me connect service is not activated. following data is also transmitted:
Transf
ansferr
erred
ed data
data during
during a Mercedes
Mercedes me call
R Current mileage and maintenance data
If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, Dataa transf
Dat transfer
er if Mercedes
Mercedes me connect services
ser vices
data is transferred to enable targeted advice and are not
are not activat
activated
ed R Current vehicle location
an e cient service. If no Mercedes me connect services are activated If Accident and Breakdown Management is called
The following requirements must be ful lled for and the data protection prompt has been con- via the voice control system and no service has
the transfer of the data: rmed the following data is transmitted: been activated, but the data protection query has
R The vehicle is switched on. R Vehicle identi cation number been con rmed, the following data can also be
R The required data transfer technology is sup- R Time of the call called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz
ported by the mobile phone network provider. Customer Centre:
R Reason for the initiation of the call
R The quality of the mobile connection is su - R Current vehicle location
R Con rmation of the data protection prompt
cient. If the data protection prompt has been rejected,
R Country indicator of the vehicle
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following fac- the following data is transmitted to enable targe-
R Set language for the multimedia system
tors: ted advice and an e cient service:
R Telephone number of the communication plat-
R Reason for the initiation of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call
form installed in the vehicle
R The available mobile phone transmission tech- R Rejection of the data protection prompt
nology. If a call is made for a service appointment via the R Country indicator of the vehicle
service reminder, the following data is also trans-
R The activated Mercedes me connect services. R Set language for the multimedia system
mitted:
R The service selected in the voice control sys- R Current mileage and maintenance data R Telephone number of the communication plat-
tem. form installed in the vehicle
366 MBUX multimedia system

Data transf
Data transfer
er if Mercedes
Mercedes me connect services
ser vices % The recorded message is not available in gency call centre are available to you around the
aree activat
ar activated
ed every country. clock.
Only if the respective service is activated will The me button and the SOS button can be found
additional incident-speci c data be transmitted in on the vehicle's overhead control panel
Mercedes
Mer cedes me connect
the second stage to enable an optimal service. (/ page 362).
An overview of the data transferred is contained Information
Infor mation on Mercedes
Mercedes me connect
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
in the data protection information for the % Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes Centre using the multimedia system
Mercedes me connect services. You can nd me connect services are not available in every (/ page 363).
these in your Mercedes me user account. country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre if these functions are available in your Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Data processing
Data processing country. Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call
The data transmitted within the scope of the call the national emergency services using the stand-
is deleted from the processing system a er the Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv- ard national emergency service telephone num-
call is nished, in so far as this data is not being ices. bers. In emergencies, you can also use the
used for other activated Mercedes me connect You can use the following services via the multi- Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
services. media system and the overhead control panel, for (/ page 373).
The incident-speci c data is processed and stored example: Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of
in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if R Accident and Breakdown Management (me use and the data protection information for
required to process the incident, forwarded to the button or situation-dependent display in the Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your
service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz multimedia system) Mercedes me user account.
Customer Centre. Please take note of the data R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto- Further information about Mercedes me connect,
protection information on the Mercedes me Inter- matic emergency call and SOS button) the provided service scope and operation:
net page https://www.mercedes.me or in the https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/
recorded message immediately a er calling the The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break- baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emer- Startseite.html
 MBUX multimedia system 367

Infor
Information
mation on Mercedes
Mercedes me connect Accident
Accident Centre and the authorised service partner or More information about Mercedes me connect
and Breakdo
Breakdownwn Management
Management breakdown assistance. services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por-
The Accident and Breakdown Management can R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
include the following functions: Telediagnostics Dataa transf
Dat transferr
erred
ed during
during Mercedes
Mercedes me connect
R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency With the Telediagnostics function, speci c call services
ser vices
call system (/ page 373) wear and failure reports are recorded by the The data transferred during a Mercedes me con-
If necessary, the contact person at the service provider, in so far as these can be nect call depends on:
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for- clearly interpreted and are available through
R The reason for initiation of the call
wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- the monitoring of components that are subject
to diagnostics. R The service that is selected in the voice con-
dent and Breakdown Management. Forward-
ing the call is however not possible in all coun- If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat trol system
tries. of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the R The activated Mercedes me connect services
R Breakdown assistance by a technician on multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-
You can nd out which data is transferred when
location and/or the towing away of the vehicle Benz Customer Centre for further help. This
using the services in the currently valid Mercedes
to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre prompt in the multimedia system only appears
me connect terms of use and the data protection
when the vehicle is stationary.
You may be charged for these services. information for Mercedes me connect. You can
R Addition to the emergency guide a er auto- % These services are subject to technical nd these in your Mercedes me user account.
matic accident or breakdown detection restrictions such as the mobile phone cover-
(/ page 363) age, mobile network quality and the ability of Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the Mercedes
Mercedes me & Apps menu
the processing systems to interpret the trans-
In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur- ferred data. In some circumstances, this can When you log in with a user account to the
ther vehicle data is sent which enables optimal result in delays or the failure of the informa- Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers
support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer tion to appear in the multimedia system. from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.
368 MBUX multimedia system

For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz Showing appointments and triggering actions, Over
Overvie
view
w of In-Car O ce
service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: e.g. reading aloud, placing a call, navigating
https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Using In-Car O ce, you can connect your online
R E-mail services with the multimedia system.
% Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Reading, reading aloud, creating, answering
apps updated. Requirements for In-Car O ce:
and forwarding e-mails R The In-Car O ce service is activated in your
You can call up the menu using Apps in the multi- R Tasks and calls Mercedes me user account.
media system.
Managing tasks and pre-booked calls R You have a Mercedes me user account.
In the Apps menu, the following options can be
available:
R Voice input R You have set a Mercedes me PIN.

R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me

Creating appointments/reminders and tasks R You have synchronised your Mercedes me
user account % Alternatively, you can record text contents via user account in the vehicle and via Mercedes
R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes the MBUX Voice Assistant or via the dictation me.
me user account and the vehicle function. R You have a user account with an online
Further information on the MBUX Voice Assis- service, e.g. with O ce 365 or Gmail, and
R Calling up the Mercedes me services
tant . have connected the user account with In-Car
R Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the O ce.
% The Zero Layer displays noti cations or
web browser depending on availability Alternatively you can link this user account
reminders from In-Car O ce, such as birth-
days or calls due (/ page 322). from the multimedia system to your Mercedes
In-Car O ce functions % Please note that certain functions are only me user account. You will be o ered a QR
available when the vehicle is stationary. code that will take you to the website from
Using In-Car O ce, you can connect your online which you can make the link.
services with the multimedia system.
The following functions are available: In-Car O ce functions
R Calendar R Display pending appointments in the calendar
 MBUX multimedia system 369

- Reading out calendar entries % Alternatively, you can record text contents for Web browser
browser over
overview
view
- Calling (requirement being that a tele- your e-mail via the MBUX Voice Assistant or
phone is connected and a telephone num- via the dictation function.
ber is saved) Further information on the MBUX Voice Assis-
tant (/ page 331).
- Navigating to appointments (requirement
being that the appointment contains a nav- % The Zero Layer displays noti cations or
igable destination) reminders from In-Car O ce, such as birth-
days or calls due (/ page 322).
- Deleting a calendar entry
% You can start the In-Car O ce function using
R Display and selection of tasks and calls to the Apps menu. Please note that certain func-
complete
tions are only available when the vehicle is
- Reading aloud stationary.
- Calling (requirement being that a tele-
phone is connected and a telephone num-
ber is saved)
- Deleting
R Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed 1 Search
O
2 To refresh/stop
R Managing e-mails 3 Previous website
- Showing or reading e-mails 4 Options
- Writing, answering and forwarding e-mails 5 Settings
370 MBUX multimedia system

% Under Ä you have the following options: loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Overvie
Over view
w of transf
transferr
erred
ed vehicle
vehicle data
R Bookmarks Integration. The mobile phone must be switched When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehi-
on and connected to the multimedia system via cle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This
R Browsing history
the USB port using a suitable cable. enables you to get the best out of selected mobile
R Request mobile website phone services. Vehicle data is not directly acces-
Apps for Smartphone Integration:
R Entered URLs sible.
R Apple CarPlay® (wireless connection via Blue-
R Tabs tooth® also possible) The following system information is transmitted:
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is R So ware release of the multimedia system
R Android Auto (wireless connection via Blue-
in motion. tooth® also possible) R System ID (anonymised)

% For safety reasons, the rst activation of The transfer of this data is used to optimise com-
Over
Overvie
view
w of smartphone
smar tphone integr
integration
ation munication between the vehicle and the mobile
Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto on the multi-
With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain media system must be carried out when the phone.
functions on your mobile phone via the multime- vehicle is stationary with the parking brake. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
dia system display. You can start Smartphone Integration using the mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly gen-
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- My devices menu. erated.
ted via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia You can end Smartphone Integration via the My This has no connection to the vehicle identi ca-
system. Also for use with two phone mode with devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi-
smartphone integration, only one additional between the mobile phone and multimedia sys- media system is reset (/ page 347).
mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® tem. The following driving status data is transmitted:
with the multimedia system. R Transmission position engaged
% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte- the connection via the device manager or the R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
gration is only possible with an Internet connec- connecting cable only when the vehicle is sta- and driving
tion. The appropriate application must be down- tionary.
 MBUX multimedia system 371

R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster Mercedes-Benz emergency

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
system tems. This will be explained in the "Data trans-
R Drive type fer" section (/ page 374).
Infor
Information
mation on available
available emergency
emergency call systems
systems
R Both emergency call systems are included as
The transfer of this data is used to alter how con- Two types of emergency call system are available standard equipment in your vehicle and are
tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit- to you in the vehicle: activated at the factory.
uation. R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R The use of both emergency call systems is
The following position data is transmitted: R 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) exempt from charges.
R Coordinates
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not
R Both emergency call systems only function in
R Speed areas in which the mobile phone network pro-
available in all countries. You can nd more infor-
R Compass direction mation on the regional availability of eCall at: viders o er mobile phone coverage.
R Acceleration direction https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ For both systems, insu cient network cover-
ecall/ age from the mobile phone network providers
The mobile phone uses this data to improve the can result in an emergency call not being
accuracy of navigation, for example, when driving The following applies for both emergency call sys-
tems: transmitted.
through a tunnel.
R The transfer of speci c data is required for the
intended function of both emergency call sys-
372 MBUX multimedia system

Di erences
erences be
betw
tween
een the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz emergency
emergency call system
system and the
the 112 emergency
emergency call system
system (EU eCall)

Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emergency
emergency call system
system 112 emergency
emergency call system
system (EU eCall)
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to R If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the
the mobile phone network. system only logs in to the mobile phone network a er the triggering of a
R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted manual or automatic emergency call.
to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emer- manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.
gency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network cov-
erage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in dix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the
your vehicle meets the delegated regulation provided their batteries are certi ed accord- Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the fol-
EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of ing to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. lowing reasons:
the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes- R In emergency situations when abroad, you can
depends on circumstances beyond the in u- Benz emergency call system and using only the also get support in a language you speak.
ence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact R Several transmission technologies are used to
mobile network coverage and the technical address for carrying out deactivation of the
infrastructure of the public reception centres accelerate the transfer of the accident data
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the and improve reliability of the transmission.
in the respective countries. local dealers.
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
% Please observe that in the event of a repair
genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be permanently logged in to the mobile phone
used which have been certi ed pursuant to network, which ensures faster placement of
the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appen-
 MBUX multimedia system 373

the emergency call and faster transfer of the Both emergency call systems can initiate an emer- R G: The icon appears in the display during
accident data. gency call automatically (/ page 373) or man- an active emergency call.
Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away ually (/ page 374).
% If there is a malfunction of the emergency call
can then be initiated in quickly. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag
R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.
accident data is only transferred to the public the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
You can recognise a fault in the emergency
coordination centre with the approval of the Indicatorss in the
Indicator the displays call system by the following displays:
customer.
The following messages appear on the central dis- R A corresponding message will also appear
In the event of an automatically triggered play for both emergency call systems: in the driver's display.
emergency call in which there is no voice con-
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched R The SOS button lights up red continuously.
tact, the accident data is transmitted immedi-
ately to the public emergency call centre. on or the emergency call system is malfunc-
tioning. This does not necessarily indicate Trigg
igger
ering
ing an automatic
automatic emergency
emergency call
R If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is complete failure of the emergency call system.
not available, the 112 emergency call is car- Emergency calls call still be transmitted. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
ried out automatically. R The vehicle is switched on.
The display only refers to the vehicle and does
not take account of the availability of mobile R The starter battery is su ciently charged.
Over
Overvie
view
w of emergency
emergency call systems
systems phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call centre. Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU The functional readiness of the emergency call eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call:
eCall) can help to reduce the time between an system on the vehicle can be seen when the
SOS NOT READY display disappears once the R A er activation of the restraint systems such
accident and the arrival of emergency services at
the site of the accident. They help locate an acci- vehicle is switched on. as airbags or seat belt tensioners a er an
dent site in places that are di cult to access. accident
374 MBUX multimedia system

R A er an automatically initiated emergency rescue teams and/or the police to the acci- rescue teams and the police to the accident
stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist dent site. site.
The emergency call has been made: R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance R A message with accident data is transmitted
is sent to the vehicle immediately. to the emergency call centre.
R A voice connection is established with the
emergency call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emer-
R A message with accident data is transmitted Trigg
igger
ering
ing a manual emergency
emergency call gency services, a corresponding message
to the emergency call centre. # To use the
the SOS button
button in the
the over
overhead
head con- appears in the display.
trol panel: press the SOS button at least one
trol # Dial the emergency number 112 or the appro-
The SOS button in the overhead control panel priate local emergency call number on your
ashes until the emergency call is nished. second long (/ page 362).
or mobile phone.
If no connection can be made to the public emer-
gency services, a corresponding message # To use voice
voice control:
control: use the voice commands
appears in the display. of the MBUX Voice Assistant. Emergency
Emergency call system
system data
data transmission
transmission
# Dial the emergency number 112 or an appro- The emergency call has been made: For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
priate local emergency call number on your R A voice connection is established with an tem as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
mobile phone. emergency call centre. eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz
If an emergency call has been initiated: emergency call centre or the public emergency
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c
services call centre.
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c conditions permit you to do so until a voice
conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency Depending on the emergency call system
connection is established with the emergency call centre. (/ page 371) activated di erent data is transmit-
call centre. ted to the appropriate emergency call centre.
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call
centre decides whether it is necessary to call
 MBUX multimedia system 375

Transmitt
ansmitted
ed data
data according
according to
to activat
activated
ed emergency
emergency call system:
system:

Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emergency
emergency call 112 emergency
emergency call
R Position data of the vehicle R Position data of the vehicle
R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
R Direction of travel R Direction of travel
R Vehicle identi cation number R Vehicle identi cation number
R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydro- R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydro-
gen) gen)
R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle
R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
R Time of the accident R Time of the accident
R Language setting on the multimedia system
R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not
This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.

% If only the 112 emergency call system (EU

eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident
data is transmitted directly to the public
emergency call centre.
376 MBUX multimedia system

For accident clari cation purposes, the following switched OFF, this means the emergency call sys- # To star
startt the
the tes
testt mode: press and hold the
measures can be taken up to an hour a er the tem passed diagnostics successfully. ~ button on the multifunction steering
emergency call has been initiated: wheel for at least ve seconds.
R The current vehicle position can be deter- Star
arting/ending
ting/ending ERA-GL
ERA -GLON
ONASS
ASS tes
testt mode The test mode is started and automatically
mined. ends a er the language test has been per-
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: formed.
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
R The starter battery is su ciently charged. # To stop
stop manual tes testt mode: switch o the vehi-
can be established.
R The vehicle is switched on. cle.
R Emergency call data can be called up.
R The vehicle has been stationary for at least The test mode is ended.
% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving one minute.
tra c information, cannot be performed for Infor
Information
mation on data
data processing
processing
up to two hours a er sending an emergency % The test mode is currently available in the fol-
call. lowing countries, for example: Processing of per
Processing personal
sonal data
data via the
the Mercedes-
Mercedes-
R Russia Benz emergency
emergency call system
system
R Belarus
All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-
Self diagnosis function of the
the emerg
emergency
ency call sys-
sys-
Benz emergency call system corresponds with the
tem R Kazakhstan speci cations in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on
Your car veri es the operability of the emergency R Armenia the protection of individuals with regard to the
call system each time the vehicle is ON. In case of R Kyrgyzstan processing of personal data (GDPR)".
system failure, you will be informed with text mes- The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz
sage on the instrument cluster and with red indi- emergency call system for rescue and recovery in
cator SOS NOT READY on the display. the event of an accident.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds a er The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a
switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition
READY in the upper right corner of display is to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has
 MBUX multimedia system 377

the right to use the 112 emergency call system speci ed to rst receive and handle emergency emergency call, and under no circumstances
instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys- calls to the standard European emergency call for more than 13 hours a er the time that an
tem. number 112 by the respective country authorities emergency call is initiated.
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of in whose territory you are located.
Rights of persons
persons a ected
ected by the
the data
data processing
processing
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are Arrangements
Arrang ements for
for data
data processing
processing The person a ected by the data processing (the
the local dealers. vehicle owner) has the right to access the data
Both emergency call systems are designed so that
Processing of personal
Processing personal data
data via the
the 112 emer- the following requirements are ful lled: and if applicable can demand the correction, dele-
gency call system
system (EU eCall) tion or barring of data that a ects him or her and
R The data contained in the system memory is
All processing of personal data via the 112 emer- that the processing of which does not correspond
not accessible outside the system prior to the with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, dele-
gency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the initiation of an emergency call.
speci cations in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on tion or barring carried out according to this regu-
R Both emergency call systems cannot be lation must be shared with the third party to
the protection of individuals with regard to the
processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is based traced and there is no continuous tracking in which the data has been transmitted, provided
particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital normal operation. this does not prove to be infeasible and does not
interests of the a ected person in accordance R The data in the system's internal memory is incur disproportionate expenditure.
with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR. automatically and continuously deleted. The person a ected by the data processing has
The processing of this type of data is strictly limi- R The location data of the vehicle is continu- the right to complain to the appropriate data pro-
ted to the purpose of operating the emergency ously overwritten in the system's internal tection authority should they be of the opinion
calls to the standard European emergency call memory, so that no more than the last three that their rights have been infringed by the pro-
number 112. current locations required for the normal func- cessing of their personal data.
tion of the system are available. Responsible contact point for the processing of
Data recipient
Data recipient access rights: Konzernbeau ragter für den Daten-
R The record of the activity data of both emer-
The recipients of data that is processed using the schutz, Daimler AG, HPC G353, D-70546 Stutt-
112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the rel- gency call systems is only kept for as long as
is required to ful l the purpose of handling the gart, Germany
evant emergency call inquiry terminals that are
378 MBUX multimedia system

Radio, media & TV

Overvie
Over view
w of the
the symbols and functions in the
the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

Function
6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.
R Select once: the active playlist is repeated.
R Select twice: the current track is repeated.
R Select three times: the function is deactivated.

9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.

û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.

Ä Additional options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums,
artists, etc.).
ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for
example.
 MBUX multimedia system 379

Symbol Designation Function

Function
Z Settings Select to make settings.

© Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available R Playing back audio or video les
in the media menu: R Streaming online music
R Connecting external data storage media with R Looking at TV programmes in the TV menu
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or
Bluetooth®)
380 MBUX multimedia system

Additional functions in the

the TV
T V menu

Symbol Designation Function

Function
Z Settings Select to make settings in the TV menu. The following functions can be switched
on/o or con gured:
R Channel x
R Country-speci c character set
R Audio language
R Subtitles
R Teletext
R Picture format

Õ EPG Select to show current programme information for the channel.

4 Channel list Select to show a list of available channels with the current programme.
 MBUX multimedia system 381

Receiving TV
T V channels
channels in HD quality
quality The CI+ module is connected in the CI+ box in the
glove compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the CI+ module and # To insert
inser t the
the smart
smar t card
card in the
the CI+ module: if
Smart Card required (country-dependent), insert the
The CI+ module is designed for use in the smart card into the CI+ module slot.
home. The CI+ module can overheat and be % The CI+ box is designed for operation at tem-
damaged by continuous exposure to high out- peratures between 0 °C and 65 °C. At oper-
side temperatures. ating temperatures that are higher or too low
# Make sure that the CI+ module is not a message appears in the multimedia system
subject to high temperatures for exten- and the CI+ module is switched o automati-
ded periods of time. cally. If the CI+ module is switched o , no
If the CI+ module is damaged, no encrypted channels can be received.
encrypted channels can be received.

% The CI+ module is not available in all coun-

tries.
A CI+ module (Common Interface Module), which
is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to
decrypt HD programmes according to the CI+
standard.
In some countries, an additional smart card is
required, which is inserted into the CI+ module
(see the manufacturer's operating manual).
382 MBUX multimedia system

Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the symbols and functions in the
the radio
radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

Function
© Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

Z Settings Select to have further options shown.

The setting options are country-dependent.
Ä Additional options Select to show additional options.

. Tra c information service Select to switch on the tra c information service.

When the tra c information service is switched on, . is blue.
4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.

ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for
example.
 MBUX multimedia system 383

Additional functions of TuneIn

TuneIn Radio
Radio
% A relatively large volume of data can be trans-
mitted when using TuneIn Radio.

Symbol Designation Function

Function
Z Settings The following additional settings are available in
the TuneIn Radio menu:
R Selecting stream
R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account

ß Favourites Select during playback to save the station cur-

rently set as a favourite.
6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.

4 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio sta-

tion.

Depending on the frequency band selected, di er- Calling up TuneIn

TuneIn Radio
Radio R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user
ent functions are available to you. account.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Select the desired frequency band in the radio R There is a user account at https://
R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the
menu head runner. www.mercedes.me. Mercedes me portal.
R The data volume is available.
384 MBUX multimedia system

Depending on the country, data volume may out which sound system is tted in your vehicle in - Automatic adjustment
need to be purchased. the Digital Owner's Manual.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmis- Standar
andardd sound system
system
sion free of interference.
The following functions are available:
% Data volume can be purchased directl
directlyy from
from R Equaliser:
a mobile phone netw
networ
orkk provider
provider via the
Mercedes me Portal. - Treble, mid-range and bass
R Balance and fader
% The functions and services are country-
dependent. For more information, consult a R Volume:
Mercedes-Benz service centre. - Automatic adjustment
Multimedia system:
Burmester
Burmest er® surr
surround
ound sound system
system and
4 © 5 Radio
Burmest
Bur er® high-end 3D surround
mester surround sound system
system
# Select TuneIn Radio.
The following functions are available:
The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set
R Equaliser:
starts playing.
% The connection quality depends on the local - Treble, mid-range and bass
mobile phone reception. R Balance and fader
R Sound focus

Sound settings
settings R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround
sound system only)
Overvie
Over view
w of functions in the
the sound menu
R Sound pro les
The setting options and functions available
R Volume:
depend on the sound system tted. You can nd
 Maintenance and care 385

ASSYST PLUS
ASSYST PLUS service
ser vice interv
interval
al display # To exit
exit the
the display: press the back button * NOTE Irreparable damage to the high-volt-
G on the le -hand side of the steering age battery due to maintenance work not
Function of the
the ASSYS
ASSYSTT PLUS
PLUS service
ser vice interv
interval
al dis- wheel.
play being carried out
Bear in mind the following related topic:
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the The high-voltage battery is subject to wear.
R Operating the driver display (/ page 314). Maintenance work which is not carried out in
driver's display informs you of the next regular
service due date. time can lead to irreparable damage to the
Infor
Information
mation on regular
regular maintenance
maintenance work
work high-voltage battery.
Depending on the operating conditions of the
# Always observe the warning messages
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the
next service due date will be displayed. * NOTE Premature wear through failure to about the high-voltage battery and
observe service due dates immediately consult a quali ed specialist
You can hide this service display using the back
workshop.
button G on the le -hand side of the steering Maintenance work which is not carried out at
# Have the necessary maintenance work
wheel. the right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle. on the high-voltage battery carried out at
You can obtain information concerning the servic- a quali ed specialist workshop.
ing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist # Adhere to the prescribed service inter-
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre. vals.
# Always have the prescribed maintenance Notes on special service
ser vice req
requir
uirements
ements
Displaying
Displaying the
the service
ser vice due date work carried out at a quali ed specialist
workshop. The prescribed service interval is based on nor-
Driver display: mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work
4 Service will need to be performed more o en than speci-
ed if the vehicle is operated under arduous con-
The next service due date is displayed. ditions or increased loads. This is the case for fre-
quent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor
road surfaces, for example.
386 Maintenance and care

In these or similar operating conditions, have the Engine compar

compartment
tment Notes on the
the bonnet
interior air lter changed more frequently. The
tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehi- Activ
ctivee bonnet
bonnet (pedestr
(pedestrian
ian prot
protection)
ection) Only the specialist personnel of a quali ed spe-
cle is operated under increased loads. Further cialist workshop should open the bonnet. Access
Operation
Oper ation of the
the active
active bonnet
bonnet (pedestr
(pedestrian
ian prot
protec-
ec- by the customer is not permitted.
information can be obtained at a quali ed special- tion)
ist workshop. In certain accident situations, the actuation of the To open the bonnet, consult a quali ed specialist
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedes- workshop.
an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibil- trians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by
approximately 80 mm. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving
ity as regards to whether maintenance work
with the bonnet unlocked
needs to be performed more o en than speci ed A er being triggered, the active bonnet remains in
based on the actual operating conditions and/or the raised position. Limited visibility due to the The bonnet may open and block your view.
loads. raised bonnet cannot be ruled out. # Never release the bonnet when driving.

A er the active bonnet has been actuated, pedes- # Before every trip, ensure that the engine
Batter
Batteryy disconnection periods
periods trian protection may be limited. bonnet is locked.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can cal- Have the full functionality of the active bonnet
culate the service due date only when the battery restored immediately in a quali ed specialist & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
is connected. workshop. when opening and closing the bonnet
# Display and note down the service due date If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end
on the driver display before disconnecting the carefully to a quali ed specialist workshop. If a position.
battery (/ page 385). safe continued journey is not possible, contact a
quali ed specialist workshop. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine bonnet's range of movement.
 Maintenance and care 387

# Do not open or close the bonnet if there & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
is a person in the bonnet's range of parts and the vehicle rst if you need to open
movement. the bonnet.
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
& WARNING Risk of injury due to overheated when the drive system is switched o . Notes on the
the coolant level
level
vehicle Observe the following if you must open the
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over- bonnet: Checking or topping up coolant should be carried
heated vehicle or re in the engine compart- out only by the trained personnel of a quali ed
# Switch o the vehicle.
ment, the following situations may occur: specialist workshop. Access by the customer is
# Never touch the danger zones surround- not permitted.
R You may come into contact with hot gases.
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation To check or top up coolant, use a quali ed spe-
R You may come into contact with other area of the fan. cialist workshop.
escaping hot operating uids. # Remove jewellery and watches.

# In the event of overheating or re in the # Keep items of clothing and hair away & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool-
engine compartment, keep the bonnet from moving parts. ant
closed and call the re service. If you open the cap when the drive system is
# Allow the overheated vehicle to cool & WARNING Risk of injury from using the at normal operating temperature, you could be
down rst if you need to open the bon- windscreen wipers when the bonnet is scalded.
net. open # Let the vehicle cool down before opening

If the windscreen wipers start moving when the cap.

the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by # When opening the cap, wear protective
the wiper linkage. gloves and safety glasses.
# Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
388 Maintenance and care

Keeping the
the air-w
air-wat
ater
er duct free
free Cleaning and care
# Keep the area between the bonnet and the Information
Infor mation on washing
washing the
the vehicle
vehicle in a car wash
wash
windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow
and leaves. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
reduced braking power a er washing the
vehicle
Topping up the
the windscreen
windscreen washer
washer system
system
Braking e ciency is reduced a er washing the
& WARNING Risk of re and injury from vehicle.
windscreen washer concentrate # A er the vehicle has been washed, brake

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am- carefully while paying attention to the
mable. tra c conditions until braking power has
been fully restored.
# Avoid re, naked ames, smoking and
the creation of sparks when using wind-
screen washer concentrate. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking
# Press on the back area of washer uid ap If one of the following functions is switched
Requir
equirements:
ements: 1. on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain
R The vehicle is unlocked. Washer uid ap 1 will open. situations:
# Top up the washer uid. R Active Brake Assist
# Washer uid ap 1 will close. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
% Further information about the windscreen R HOLD function
washer uid (/ page 435) R Active Parking Assist
 Maintenance and care 389

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is % If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax
these systems in the following or similar situa- switched o . from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this
tions: R The vehicle is locked and the door handles will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
# during towing retracted.
# in a car wash R The side windows and sliding sunroof are com- Infor
Information
mation on using a high-pressur
high-pressuree cleaner
pletely closed.
R The blower for the ventilation and heating is & WARNING Risk of an accident when using
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash high-pressure cleaners with round-spray
switched o .
# Before driving into a car wash make sure nozzles
R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
that the car wash is suitable for the vehi- The water jet can cause externally invisible
cle dimensions. R The key is at a minimum distance of 6 m away
damage.
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate or a
# Ensure there is su cient ground clear- door could open unintentionally. Components damaged in this way may unex-
ance between the underbody and the pectedly fail.
guide rails of the car wash. R For car washes with a conveyor system:
# Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with
# Ensure that the clearance width of the - Neutral i is engaged.
round-spray nozzles.
car wash, in particular the width of the - The vehicle is locked from inside. # Have damaged tyres or chassis parts
guide rails, is su cient. R Do not make any hand movements in the area replaced immediately.
of the overhead control panel or deactivate
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car (/ page 343) the Sliding sunroof and roller To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol-
wash, ensure the following beforehand: sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva- interior assistant. R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
ted.
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate or a
R The HOLD function is switched o . door could open unintentionally.
390 Maintenance and care

R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a R Tar stains: use tar remover.
vehicle. so car sponge. When doing so, do not R Wax: use silicone remover.
R Vehicles with
with decorativ
decorativee foil:
foil: Parts of your expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. # Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and
als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at
Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between dry using a chamois. a quali ed specialist workshop.
the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the % Observe the notes on the care of car parts
nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
(/ page 392).
high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst Matt nish
cleaning. The water temperature of the high- R Only use care products approved for
pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C. Notes on paintwor
paintwork/matt
k/matt nish paintw
paintwor
orkk care Mercedes-Benz.
R Observe the information on the correct dis- To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper- with the driving assistance systems, please als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at
ating instructions. observe the following notes: a quali ed specialist workshop.
R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure Paint R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy
cleaner directly at sensitive parts, such as R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and wheels.
tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Only use car washes that correspond to the
light sources and ventilation slits.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o latest engineering standards.
a erwards. R Do not use car wash programmes with a nal
Washing the
the vehicle
vehicle by
by hand R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by hot wax treatment.
observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro- R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing
of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in leum ether or lighter uid. products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
specially designated wash bays. R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp
# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. cloth and clean water.
 Maintenance and care 391

In the event of paintwork damage: R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative R Do not treat matt or structured decorative
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a foil is dull: Use the Paint Cleaner recommen- foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
quali ed specialist workshop. ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by
R Make sure the radar sensors function R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care
(/ page 232). rinse o the treated areas a erwards. cannot always be completely repaired. In such
R Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse o cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop.
a erwards. You can obtain more information on care and
Notes on cleaning decorativ
decorativee foils
foils
R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped cleaning products from the manufacturer.
Observe the notes on matt nish care in the chap- vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every
ter "Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di er-
car wash. ences may occur between the surfaces that were
care" (/ page 390). They also apply to matt dec-
orative foils. Avoiding damage
damage to
to the
the decorativ
decorativee foil
foil not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a
R The service life and colouring of decorative decorative foil.
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to
foils are impaired by: % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car-
avoid vehicle damage.
- Sunlight ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop,
Cleaning e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
- Temperature, e.g. hot air blower
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive - Weather conditions
substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for - Stone chippings and dirt
Mercedes-Benz. - Chemical cleaning agents
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
- Oily products
whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is oth-
erwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Pol-
irreparably. ishing will have the e ect of shining the foil-
wrapped surface.
392 Maintenance and care

Notes on care
care of car parts
par ts a er cleaning before parking it. The brake R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the
disks and brakepads warm up and dry out. wiper blades with a damp cloth.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-
Windows % Make sure that the wiper blades are coated.
screen wipers are switched on while the
windscreen is being cleaned
R Clean the windows inside and outside with a The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom- not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion mended for Mercedes-Benz. them too o en.
while you are cleaning the windscreen or R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper Exter
Exterior
ior lighting
based cleaning agents to clean the inside of R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
arm. windows. cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
# Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the drive system before cleaning the % A er changing the wiper blades or treating R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
windscreen or wiper blades. the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen that are suitable for plastic lenses.
thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the Vehicle socket
socket (high-volt
(high-voltag
agee batter
battery)
y)
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the
on cleaning and care of the following vehicle application instructions may result in damage,
smear marks or dazzling spots. vehicle socket.
parts:
R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind-
Wheels and rims
rims screen in front of the multifunction camera. agents, such as soap.
R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety Sensors
R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to systems may be impaired or not available R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bump-
remove brake dust. This could damage wheel (/ page 232). ers with a so cloth and car shampoo
bolts and brake components. (/ page 232).
Wiper blades
R To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain
R Move the wiper arms into the replacement
brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes position (/ page 169). a minimum distance of 30 cm.
 Maintenance and care 393

Rever
ersing
sing camera
camera and 360° Camera Notes on care
care of the
the inter
interior
ior Seat belts
R Open the camera cover with the multimedia R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
system (/ page 286). & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the breaking o a er the use of solvent-based R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or
camera lens. care products
exposing them to direct sunlight.
R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner. Care and cleaning products containing sol-
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to Display
Trailer
Tr ailer hitch become porous. When the airbags are R Switch o the display and let it cool down.
R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch deployed, plastic parts may break away. R Clean the surface carefully with a micro bre
manufacturer's operator manual. # Do not use any care or cleaning products cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-
R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pres- containing solvents to clean the cockpit. LCD).
sure cleaner or solvent. R Do not use any other agents.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball, for example, & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
with a wire brush. Head-up display
from bleached seat belts R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth.
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely R Do not use cleaning agents.
R A er cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball weaken them.
head. Plastic trim
Plastic trim
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth.
% Before using trailers with anti-torsional cou- or fail in an accident.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
pling, observe the manufacturer's operator # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
manual. ded for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol-
lowing notes on cleaning and care: als.
394 Maintenance and care

R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or cleaner; neither should you use polishes R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that
sun cream to come in contact with the plastic or waxes. Otherwise you may damage has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
trim. the nish. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
Real wood
wood and trim
trim elements R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
R Clean with a micro bre cloth. R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water
solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. % Regular cleaning and care of the leather
R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen- reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing dam-
cloth and soapy water. age and thus signi cantly extends its life
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen- span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g.
ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that jeans, can leave discolouration on the leather.
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, pol-
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. DINAMICA
DINAMIC A seat covers
covers
ishes or waxes. R Clean with a damp cloth.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
Roof lining R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural
surface properties, such as di erences in Imitation leather
Imitation leather seat covers
covers
Carpet
Car pet structure, marks caused by growth and injury R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water.
R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom- R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
or subtle colour di erences. These surface
mended for Mercedes-Benz. properties are characteristics of leather and
Steering
Steer ing wheel made of genuine
genuine leather
leather or DINA- not material faults. What's more, leather is
MICA subject to a natural ageing process during
which the surface properties change.
* NO
NOTE
TE Damage caused by wrong cleaners Genuine leather
leather seat covers
covers
# Do not use solvent-based cleaning R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
agents such as tar remover or wheel dry cloth.
 Breakdown assistance 395

Emergency
Emergency Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
Remo
emoving
ving the
the safety
safety vest
vest R the re ective strips are damaged or dirt on the
re ective strips can no longer be removed
The safety vests are located in stowage spaces in R the maximum number of washes is exceeded
the front door.
R the uorescence has faded

War
arning
ning triangle
triangle
Remo
emoving
ving the
the war
warning
ning triangle
triangle
1 Maximum number of washes
2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
# Take the safety vest bag out of stowage space 6 Do not dry clean
1. 7 This is a class 2 vest
# Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest. The requirements de ned by the legal standard
are only ful lled in the following cases:
% Safety vests can also be stored in the rear # Open the load compartment oor.
R the safety vest is the correct size
door stowage spaces. # Remove warning triangle 1.
R the safety vest is fully closed whilst being
worn
396 Breakdown assistance

Setting
Setting up the
the war
warning
ning triangle
triangle Firs
irst-aid
t-aid kit (so sided) This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
The re extinguisher can be ung around and
injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
# Always store and secure the re extin-
guisher in the bracket.
# Do not remove the re extinguisher while
driving.

# Fold side re ectors 1 upwards to form a tri- First-aid kit (so sided) 1 is located on the le -
angle and attach at the top using upper press- hand side of the boot in the as-delivered condi-
stud 2. tion.
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side.
Remo
emoving
ving the
the re extinguisher

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an

incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the
driver's footwell # Le -hand dr
driv
ivee vehicle:
vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.
A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or # Right-hand driv
drivee vehicle:
vehicle: pull tab 1 down-
block a depressed pedal. wards.
# Remove re extinguisher 2.
 Breakdown assistance 397

Flat tyre In the event of a at tyre, the following options are # Do not exceed the permissible maximum
available depending on your vehicle's equipment: speed of the MOExtended tyres.
Notes on at tyr
tyres
es
R Vehicles with
with MOExtended
MOExtended tyres:
tyres: it is possible # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a at to continue the journey for a short period of manoeuvres as well as driving over
tyre time. Make sure you observe the notes on obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, o -road).
MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres) This applies, in particular, to a loaded
A at tyre severely a ects the driving charac- (/ page 397). vehicle.
teristics as well as the steering and braking of R Vehicles with
with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the # Stop driving in the emergency mode if
the vehicle.
tyre so that it is possible to continue the jour- you notice:
Tyr
yres
es without
without run- at char
haract
acter
eristics:
istics: ney for a short period of time. To do this, use
# Do not drive with a at tyre. the TIREFIT kit (/ page 399).
R banging noise
# Change the at tyre immediately with an R Vehicles with
with Mercedes
Mercedes me connect: you can
R vehicle vibration
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. make a call for breakdown assistance via the R smoke which smells like rubber
Alternatively, consult a quali ed special- overhead control panel in the case of a break- R continuous ESP® intervention
ist workshop. down (/ page 362). R cracks in the tyre sidewalls
R All vehicles:
vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 422).
Tyr
yres
es with
with run- at char
haract
acter
eris
istics:
tics: # A er driving in emergency mode, have
# Observe the information and warning the rims checked by a quali ed specialist
notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at Notes on MOExtended
MOExtended tyres
tyres (r
(run-
un- at tyr
tyres)
es) workshop with regard to their further
tyres). use.
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in
limp-home mode
# The defective tyre must be replaced in
every case.
Driving in emergency mode impairs the han-
dling characteristics of the vehicle.
398 Breakdown assistance

With MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres), you can Driving distance

Driving distance possible in emergency
emergency mode
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a a er the pressur
pressuree loss war
warning:
ning:
total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How- Load condition Driving
Dr iving distance
distance possi-
ever, the tyre a ected must not show any clearly ble in emergency
emergency mode
visible damage.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the Partially laden 80 km
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
Fully laden 30 km
wall of the tyre.
Vehicles with
with tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing syst
system:
em: The driving distance possible in emergency mode
MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunc- may vary depending on the driving style. Observe
tion with an activated tyre pressure monitoring the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h. 1 Tyre sealant bottle
system. If a tyre has gone at and cannot be replaced with 2 Tyre in ation compressor
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also
driver's display, proceed as follows: as a temporary measure. be located in other places under the load com-
R Check the tyre for damage. partment oor.
R If driving on, observe the following notes. TIREFIT kit stor
storag
agee location % You can nd information on the power cate-
The TIREFIT kit is located under the load compart- gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back
ment oor. of the tyre in ation compressor:
R LK3 – 12 V/20 A, 240 W, 1 kg
 Breakdown assistance 399

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre & WARNING Risk of accident when using Observe the following if you come into contact
in ation compressor and approximately 1.6 m tyre sealant with the tyre sealant:
above the ground, the following sound pres- # Rinse o the tyre sealant from your skin
sure levels apply: The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the
tyre properly, especially in the following cases: using water immediately.
R Emission sound pressure level LPA
R there are large cuts or punctures in the # If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor-
84 dB(A) oughly rinse them using clean water
tyre (larger than damage previously men-
R Sound power level LWA 92 dB(A) immediately.
tioned)
R the wheel rims have been damaged # If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thor-
The tyre in ation compressor is maintenance-
free. If there is a malfunction, please contact R a er journeys with very low tyre pressure
oughly rinse out your mouth immediately
a quali ed specialist workshop. and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
or with at tyres vomiting and seek medical attention
# Do not continue driving. immediately.
Using the
the TIREFIT kit # Change out of clothing which has come
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: into contact with tyre sealant immedi-
R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre in ation compres- & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning ately.
sor (/ page 398) from tyre sealant # If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
R TIREFIT sticker cal attention immediately.
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes
R Gloves irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact
with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not * NOTE Overheating due to the tyre in ation
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora- compressor running too long
tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep
the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in the tyre sealant away from children. # Do not run the tyre in ation compressor
outside temperatures down to -20 °C. for longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption.
400 Breakdown assistance

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on

the sticker on the tyre in ation compressor.
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed
specialist workshop every ve years.
# Do not remove any foreign objects which have
entered the tyre.

# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the

faulty tyre.
# Screw lling hose 8 onto valve 7.
# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehi-
cle.
# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out # Switch on the vehicle.
of the tyre in ation compressor housing.
# A x part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the # Switch on the tyre in ation compressor using
# Push the plug of hose 5 into ange 6 of On/O switch 3.
instrument cluster within the driver's eld of
vision. tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. The tyre is in ated. First, tyre sealant is pum-
# A x part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards ped into the tyre. The pressure may brie y rise
into recess 2 of the tyre in ation compres- to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).
valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
sor.
Do not
not switch
switch o the tyre
tyre in ation com
compr
pressor
essor
during
dur ing this
this phase!
 Breakdown assistance 401

# Let the tyre in ation compressor run for a # Pump up the tyre again. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving
maximum of ten minutes. A er a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pres- with sealed tyres
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pres- sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
sure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). 29 psi). A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs the handling characteristics and is not
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the & WARNING Risk of accident due to the suitable for higher speeds.
a ected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera- speci ed tyre pressure not being attained # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
ble to use clean water.
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not attained drive carefully.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- a er the speci ed time, the tyre is too badly # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit

lene. damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the with a tyre that has been repaired using
tyre in this instance. tyre sealant.
If, a er ten minutes,
minutes, a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree of 200 kPa The braking and driving characteristics may be
(2.0 bar/29 psi) has not
not been attained:
attained: greatly impaired. # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a
# Switch o the tyre in ation compressor. tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.
# Do not continue driving.
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
defective tyre. * NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
If, a er ten minutes,
minutes, a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree of 200 kPa A er use, excess tyre sealant may leak out
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:
attained: from the lling hose.
unscrewing the lling hose. # Therefore, place the lling hose in the
# Switch o the tyre in ation compressor.
# Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
approximately 10 m. kit.
defective tyre.
402 Breakdown assistance

+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental The braking and driving characteristics may be # To reduce
reduce the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressure:
e: press pressure
pollution caused by environmentally irre- greatly impaired. release button 1 next to manometer 2.
sponsible disposal # Do not continue driving. # When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
the lling hose from the valve of the sealed
Tyre sealant contains pollutants. tyre.
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of
Countries
Countr ies that
that have
have Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Service24h:
Ser vice24h: # Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz sealed tyre.
Service Centre. you will nd a sticker with the telephone number,
e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. # Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre in a-
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre in a- # Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least tion compressor.
tion compressor. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres- The lling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot-
sure table on the socket ap for values. tle.
# Pull away immediately.
# To increase
increase the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressure:
e: switch on the # Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist work-
# Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and
and check the tyre pressure using the tyre tyre in ation compressor.
lling hose replaced there.
in ation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). Batter
Batteryy (vehicle)
(vehicle)
Notes on the
the 12 V battery
battery
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
speci ed tyre pressure not being attained & WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec-
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not reached, trostatic charge
the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre seal- Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly
ant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. explosive gas mixture in the battery.
 Breakdown assistance 403

# To discharge any electrostatic charge + ENVIRONMENTAL

ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental Risk of explosion.
that may have built up, touch the metal damage due to improper disposal of bat-
vehicle body before handling the battery. teries

The highly ammable gas mixture is created while Fire, naked ames and smoking are
the battery is charging and during starting assis- prohibited when handling the battery.
tance. Avoid creating sparks.
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from illegal to dispose of them with the household
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
rubbish.
the battery acid Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
#
Battery acid is caustic. clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an apron
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
and a face mask. Immediately rinse
clothing. Dispose of batteries in an electrolyte or acid splashes o with
# Do not lean over the battery. environmentally responsible manner. clean water. Consult a doctor if neces-
Take discharged batteries to a quali ed sary.
# Do not inhale battery gases.
specialist workshop or to a collection
# Keep children away from the battery. point for used batteries. Wear safety glasses.
# Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water and If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con-
seek medical attention immediately. tact a quali ed specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective Keep children away.
measures when handling batteries.
404 Breakdown assistance

Observe this Owner's Manual. Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage Keep children away.
battery (/ page 207).
Risk of explosion.

If you do not want to use the vehicle for a long Observe this Owner's Manual.
period of time, consult a quali ed specialist work-
shop. Fire, naked ames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
Notes on the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee battery
battery Avoid creating sparks.
Star
arting
ting assistance
assistance and char
charging
ging the
the 12 V battery
battery
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of explosion from excessive Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or # Only have starting assistance provided by a
internal pressure of the high-voltage bat- quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a
tery clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an apron Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the and a face mask. Immediately rinse # Only have the battery charged at a quali ed
event of a vehicle re. electrolyte or acid splashes o with specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
# Stop the charging process immediately clean water. Consult a doctor if neces- Service Centre.
in case of unusual odours, smoke or sary.
burn marks. Wear safety glasses. Replacing the
the 12 V battery
battery
# Leave the danger zone immediately.
Secure the danger zone at a su cient
# Only have the battery replaced at a quali ed
distance. specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
# Call the re brigade.
 Breakdown assistance 405

Tow -st
-star
arting
ting or towing
towing away If you notice that the vehicle has lost coolant, do 4MATIC
4MATIC vehicles
vehicles
not have it towed away. Have the vehicle transpor- Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the permitt
permitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods ted instead.
Both axles on Yes, maximum 50 km at
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- the ground 50 km/h, only forwards with
If one of the following functions is switched ing away incorrectly the driver in the cockpit.
on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain # Observe the instructions and notes on
situations: Front axle No
towing away. raised
R Active Brake Assist
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel drive
drive Rear axle No
Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods raised
R HOLD function
R Active Parking Assist Both axles on Yes, maximum 50 km at
the ground 50 km/h, only forwards with Towing the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with both
both axles on the
the ground
ground
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar situa- the driver in the cockpit. # Observe the notes on the permitted towing
tions: methods (/ page 405).
Front axle No
# during towing raised # Make sure that the 12 V battery is connected
# in a car wash
and charged.
Rear axle Yes, maximum 50 km at
raised 50 km/h Observe the following points when the 12 V bat-
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your tery is disconnected or discharged:
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than R the drive system cannot be started
towing it away.
R the electric parking brake cannot be released
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both or applied
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.
406 Breakdown assistance

R the transmission cannot be shi ed to position * NOTE Damage due to towing away at towed away exceeds the permissible
i or j excessively high speeds or over long dis- gross mass.
In the following situations, only transporting the tances
vehicle is permitted: If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing permissible gross mass must not exceed the per-
R if the transmission cannot be shi ed to i at excessively high speeds or over long distan- missible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
R if the 12 V battery is disconnected or dis- ces.
# Information on the permissible gross mass of
charged # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identi-
R if the display in the instrument cluster is not exceeded. cation plate (/ page 432).
working # A towing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded. Towing away
away the
the vehicle
vehicle
R if the á Towing not permitted See Own-
er's Manual message is displayed
# Fit the towing eye (/ page 410).
R if the + Top up coolant See Owner’s & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a # Fasten the towing device.

Manual message is displayed vehicle which is too heavy

R if the d Stop Switch engine off message If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec-
is heavier than the permissible gross mass of tion of the tow bar
is displayed
your vehicle, the following situations can # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
# In such cases, transport the vehicle occur: the towing eyes.
(/ page 407). R the towing eye may become detached.
R the vehicle/trailer combination may # Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
swerve or overturn. (/ page 90).
# Do not activate the HOLD function.
# Before tow-starting or towing away,
check if the vehicle to be tow-started or
 Breakdown assistance 407

# Deactivate tow-away protection R the energy supply or the on-board electri- # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
(/ page 111). cal system is malfunctioning.
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 264). # In such cases, do not tow the vehicle. Loading the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for transport
transport
# Shi the transmission to position i.
# Release the electric parking brake. # Transport the vehicle (/ page 407). Requirements:
# Remain in the cockpit during towing and R The vehicle is stationary.
observe the display messages. * NOTE Damage to the drive system due to R The vehicle is switched o .
incorrect towing
# Do not switch o the vehicle while it is being R The driver's display is in the initial state with
towed. The vehicle may not be towed in the following no menus open (/ page 314). Transport is
# Do not open the driver's door or front situations: also possible with a warning message visible.
passenger door; the transmission will other- R the vehicle is switched o . R The 12 V battery is charged.
wise automatically shi to j. R the brake system or power steering system
# If necessary, set the system language
is malfunctioning.
(/ page 347).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limited R the energy supply or the on-board electri-
safety-related functions during the towing cal system is malfunctioning.
# Observe the notes on towing away
process (/ page 405).
# In such cases, do not tow the vehicle. # Connect the towing device to the towing eye
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon-
ger available in the following situations: in order to load the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
R the vehicle is switched o . % Vehicles with
with trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: you can also attach
power
R the brake system or power steering system
the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
is malfunctioning. If you pull away sharply, the tractive power # Switch on the power supply (/ page 192).
may be too high and the vehicles could be
# Shi the transmission to position i.
damaged.
408 Breakdown assistance

% The transmission may be locked in position # Ensure that no persons or obstacles are
j in the event of damage to the electrics. To located in the area surrounding the vehi-
shi to i, provide the on-board electrical cle.
system with power (/ page 404).
Raising the
the vehicle
vehicle to
to transpor
transportt level
level
* NOTE Possible damage to the vehicle # Press the G button for at least ve sec-
when loading or unloading
onds.
When loading or unloading, the vehicle must # Immediately press and hold the a button
be raised to transport level. for at least one second.
If the transport settings are not shown or the The For transport level, switch vehicle on
Vehicle not ready for loading message is dis- & WARNING Risk of accident due to activa- message is displayed.
played, the vehicle may not be loaded or ted transport level # Switch on the vehicle (/ page 194).
unloaded. If the vehicle is raised to transport level, driv- The transport settings are displayed.
# If required, raise the vehicle to transport ing and driving safety systems have only limi- # Swipe downward to select Transport level and
level again. ted availability and the view from the vehicle is press a.
# A vehicle that cannot be raised to trans- restricted. The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle rising…
port level may not be loaded or unloaded Driving safety is severely restricted and there Do not drive on ramp message is displayed
using a ramp. Consult a quali ed special- is a risk of an accident! for 5 seconds. The raising process can last up
ist workshop. # Do not use transport level in normal road to 60 seconds and can be cancelled with the
operation. G button.
# Only activate and use transport level to # When raising, do not switch o the vehicle.
load the vehicle and when not on public
roads. While the vehicle is being raised, you can
manoeuvre at a maximum speed of 40 km/h.
 Breakdown assistance 409

4MATIC
4MATIC vehicles
vehicles

# Before loading the vehicle, wait until transport The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last
level has been reached and the Transport active level.
level status is shown.
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come
Transpor
ansporting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
% If the vehicle is raised to transport level, the # Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
transport settings will continue to be shown * NOTE Damage to the drive train due to
even a er a restart. Operation of the driver's # Shi the transmission to position j.
incorrect positioning of the vehicle
display is meanwhile restricted. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
# Do not position the vehicle above the
When the vehicle is at transport level, it is lowered connection point of the transport vehi-
again in the following situations: # Switch o the vehicle and the power supply.
cle.
R When driven faster than 40 km/h. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
R The 12 V battery is discharged. Unloading the
the vehicle
vehicle
# Make sure that the vehicle is raised to trans-
port level before unloading (/ page 277).
410 Breakdown assistance

Lowering
Lower ing the
the vehicle
vehicle a er unloading Towing eye 1 is located under the boot oor.
# Switch on the power supply.

# Switch on the vehicle. Fitting and remo

removing
ving the
the towing
towing eye
# Swipe upward in the transport settings to
select Standard level and press a.
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last
active level and the Lowering vehicle message
is displayed.
# A er the vehicle has been lowered, press the
G button for at least two seconds. # Press cover 1 at top 2 inwards and
The transport settings are closed. remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
Towing eye
eye stor
storag
agee location will go and tighten.

Vehicles with
with a trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: vehicles with a trailer
hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing
eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
# Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye.
 Breakdown assistance 411

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor- Electrical fuses

Electrical our and the label. The fuse ratings and further
rect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch information to be observed can be found in the
Notes on electrical
electrical fuses fuse assignment diagram.
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to Fuse assignment diagram:
diagram: on the fuse box in the
recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to overloaded lines rear passenger compartment (/ page 412).
in the process.
# Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if * NOTE
NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by
tow away or tow start the vehicle. you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- moisture
# Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch age, the electric line could be overloaded.
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
to tow the vehicle during recovery. This could result in a re. system or cause it to malfunction.
# Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
# When the fuse box is open, make sure
ed new fuses containing the correct that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
Tow -st
-star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle amperage.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure
# If the drive system does not start, have the
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor-
vehicle transported to a quali ed specialist * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses rectly on the fuse box.
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. Electrical components or systems may be
damaged by incorrect fuses, or their function- If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
# The drive system cannot be started by tow- ality may be signi cantly impaired. cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist
starting the vehicle. Do not perform any workshop.
# Only use fuses that have been approved
attempts to tow-start the vehicle.
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
correct fuse rating. R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
R All electrical consumers are switched o .
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognise by the col- R the vehicle is switched o .
412 Breakdown assistance

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse Right-hand driv

drivee vehicles:
vehicles: the fuse box is on the Opening and closing the
the fuse box
box in the
the rear
rear
boxes: le side.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 412) (/ page 411).
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 412) The fuse box is under the seat on the right side of
the vehicle.
R Fuse box in the rear passenger compartment
# Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
(/ page 412)
further information.
Opening and closing the
the fuse box
box in the
the cockpit
cockpit
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 411).
The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of
the cockpit under a cover.
# To open and close it, consult a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
# To open the
the fuse box:
box: remove cover 1.
Opening and closing the
the fuse box
box in the
the front
front
# To close the
the fuse box:
box: reinsert cover 1.
passenger foo
passenger footw
twell
ell
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 411).
 Wheels and tyres 413

Notes on noise or unusual handling char

charact
acter
eris-
is- & WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
tics insu cient tyre tread R Check the valve caps.
Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or Insu cient tyre tread will result in reduced R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the
unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle tyre grip. tyre contact surface across the entire width.
is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is
tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet
roads, especially when the speed of the vehi- 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
also be causing the unusual handling characteris-
tics. cle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Thus, you should regularly check the
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your Notes on snow
snow chains
chains
speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels tread depth and the condition of the
checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. tread across the entire width of all tyres. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
Minimum tread depth for: rectly tted snow chains
R Summer tyres: 3 mm If you have tted snow chains to the front
Notes on regularl
regularlyy inspecting wheels and tyres
tyres wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
& WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged body or chassis components.
tyres
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres # Never t snow chains to the front
before the legally-prescribed limit for the wheels.
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. minimum tread depth is reached. # Only t snow chains on the rear wheels
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of
in pairs.
damage and replace any damaged tyres Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu-
immediately. larly, at least once a month or as required, for
example, prior to a long journey or driving o -
road:
R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 414).
414 Wheels and tyres

* NOTE Damage to components of the vehi- R Vehicles with

with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist:
Assist: do not use maximum steering movement of the rear wheels
cle body or chassis due to tted snow Active Parking Assist when snow chains are is limited.
chains tted. Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety
R Vehicles with
with level
level control:
control: if snow chains are systems are not available when snow chain mode
If you t snow chains to the front wheels of tted, only drive at raised vehicle level is active.
4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo- (/ page 277).
nents of the vehicle body or chassis.
# Only t snow chains to the rear wheels
R Vehicles with
with rear
rear axle steer
steering:
ing: if snow chains Tyr
yree pressure
pressure
are tted, only drive with snow chain mode
of 4MATIC vehicles. active (/ page 414). Notes on tyre
tyre pressure
pressure
Observe the following notes when using snow % You can permanently limit the maximum & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu -
chains: speed for driving with winter tyres cient or excessive tyre pressure
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain (/ page 245).
Underin ated or overin ated tyres pose in par-
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away ticular the following risks:
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz (/ page 237). This allows the wheels to spin, R The tyres can burst.
Service Centre. achieving an increased driving force.
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that R The tyres can wear excessively and/or
have been speci cally approved for your vehi- unevenly.
cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating snow
snow chain
chain mode R The driving characteristics as well as the
the same quality standard. Multimedia system: steering and braking characteristics may
R Comply with the installation instructions of the 4 © 5 ß 5 y be greatly impaired.
snow chain manufacturer. # Activate or deactivate Snow chain mode. # Comply with the recommended tyre
R If snow chains are tted, the maximum per- pressure and check the tyre pressure of
missible speed is 50 km/h. When the function is active, the vehicle behaves
as if snow chains were mounted. For example, the
 Wheels and tyres 415

all tyres, including the spare wheel, regu- # Check whether the tyre has a puncture Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system:
system:
larly: or the valve has a leak. you can also see the tyre pressure in the driver's
display.
R monthly # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
R when the load changes contact a quali ed specialist workshop. Notes on trailer
Notes trailer operation
operation
Always in ate the rear axle tyres to the recom-
R before embarking on a longer journey Information on the recommended tyre pressure mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table
R if operating conditions change, e.g. o - for the vehicle's factory- tted tyres can be found for increased load.
road driving on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the
socket ap (/ page 415).
# Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary. Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree table
table
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can: pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the
permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pres- socket ap.
R Shorten the service life of the tyres.
sure.
R Cause increased tyre damage.
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are
R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning. R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out
& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea- of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
ted pressure drop in the tyres R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged. The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the
Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres temperature of the tyres increases, so too does
bursting. the tyre pressure.
# Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
416 Wheels and tyres

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by display messages (/ page 503) or the h
the + symbol, the tyre pressure information warning lamp in the driver's display
following shows alternative tyre pressures. These (/ page 520).
tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's ride The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an
comfort. Energy consumption may then increase aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
slightly. pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully suitable for the operating situation.
laden" are de ned in the table for di erent num- In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The tem will automatically update the new reference
actual number of seats may di er from this. values a er you have changed the tyre pressure.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela- You can, however, also update the reference val-
ted subjects: ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 414) system manually (/ page 417).
System limits
System
Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system The system may be impaired or may not function
The tyre pressure table shows the recommended
Function of the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system particularly in the following situations:
tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi-
cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre R incorrect reference values were taught in
cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. temperature of the tyres tted to the vehicle by R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
loading and/or speed of the vehicle. means of a tyre pressure sensor. object penetrating the tyre, for example
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature R there is a malfunction caused by another radio
the tyre pressure information following is only appear in the driver's display. signal source
valid for those tyre sizes. If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre
temperature is excessive, you will be warned with
 Wheels and tyres 417

Checking the
Checking the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree with
with the
the tyre
tyre pressure
pressure ture values of each tyre are displayed as soon Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the
monitor
monitoring
ing system
system as they are known to the system. following situations:
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in R The tyre pressure has changed.
R The vehicle is switched on. process of the system is not yet complete. The R The wheels or tyres have been changed or
tyre pressures are already being monitored. newly tted.
Driver's display:
4 © 5 Service
# Compare the current tyre pressure with the Driver's display:
recommended tyre pressure for the current 4 © 5 Service
# Press a to con rm. operating condition (/ page 415). Addition-
ally, observe the notes on cold tyres # Select Tyre pressure and con rm with a.
One of the following displays appears: # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
(/ page 414).
R Current tyre pressure of each wheel: steering wheel.
% The values displayed in the driver's display
may deviate from those of the tyre pressure The Use current tyre pressures as new refer-
gauge as they refer to sea level. At high eleva- ence values? message is shown in the driver's
tions, the tyre pressure values indicated by a display.
tyre pressure gauge are higher than those # Select Yes and con rm the restart with a.
shown in the driver's display. The Tyre pressure monitor restarted message
Bear in mind the following related topic: is shown in the driver's display.
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 414) Current warning messages are deleted and
the yellow h warning lamp goes out.
Rest
estar
arting
ting the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system A er you have been driving for a few minutes,
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: the system checks whether the current tyre
R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly pressures are within the speci ed range. The
minutes of driving: current values are not yet set for the respective operating status on each current tyre pressures are then accepted as
known to the system. The pressure/tempera- of the four wheels (/ page 414). reference values and monitored.
418 Wheels and tyres

If the tyre pressure levels are not within the # Always replace wheels and tyres with # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
speci ed range, the Please correct tyre pres- those that ful l the speci cations of the rating and speed rating required for your
sure message appears. original part. vehicle.
Bear in mind the following related topic: For wheels, pay attention to the following:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 414) R Designation * NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through
R Type
tyre types and sizes that have not been
approved
Wheel change
change For tyres, pay attention to the following: For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and
Notes on selecting, tting and replacing
replacing tyres
tyres R Designation accessories which have been specially
R Manufacturer approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
R Type These tyres are specially adapted to the active
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and
You could otherwise fail to recognise 4MATIC, and marked as follows:
dangers. & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed-
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
ing the speci ed tyre load-bearing capa-
city or the permissible speed rating R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
(run- at tyres only for certain wheels)
rect wheel and tyre dimensions Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are tted, tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause
the tyres to explode. tain AMG tyres)
the service brakes or components in the brake
system and in the wheel suspension may be # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes Otherwise, certain properties, such as han-
damaged. approved for your vehicle model. dling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions,
consumption, etc. could be adversely a ec-
ted. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result
 Wheels and tyres 419

in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle wheels and tyres being damaged when driving The tools could damage the electronic compo-
components when loaded. This could result in over obstacles increases. nent parts.
damage to the tyre or the vehicle. # Avoid obstacles or drive especially care- # Have the tyres changed at a quali ed
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that fully. specialist workshop only.
have been checked and recommended by # Reduce your speed when driving over
Mercedes-Benz. kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers * NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low
and potholes. ambient temperatures
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- # Avoid particularly high kerbs.
ded tyres At low ambient temperatures, tears could form
when driving with summer tyres, causing per-
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recom- * NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage manent damage to the tyre.
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous when parking on kerbs or in potholes # At temperatures below 7 °C use i
damage cannot always be detected on retrea- M+S tyres.
ded tyres. Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage
the wheels and tyres.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar- # If possible, park only on at surfaces.
Accessory parts which are not approved for your
anteed. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used
# Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking. correctly, can impair the operating safety.
# Do not use used tyres if you have no
information about their previous usage. Before purchasing and using non-approved acces-
* NOTE Damage to electronic component sories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage parts from the use of tyre- tting tools enquire about:
when driving over obstacles Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys- R Suitability

Large wheels have a smaller section width. As tem: electronic component parts are located R Legal stipulations
the section width decreases, the risk of in the wheel. Tyre- tting tools should not be R Factory recommendations
applied in the area of the valve.
420 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident with high per- R Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in
formance tyres certain regions and areas of operation can be wintry road conditions.
highly bene cial. R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same
The special tyre tread in combination with the Only use tyres and wheels of the same type
R tread.
optimised tyre compound means that the risk (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended
of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is R Observe the maximum permissible speed for
tyres) and the same make. the M+S tyres tted.
increased.
R Only t wheels of the same size on one axle If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at (le and right).
a low outside temperature and tyre running the vehicle, this must be indicated by an
temperature. It is only permissible to t a di erent wheel appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision.
# Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driv-
size in the event of a at tyre in order to drive R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
to the specialist workshop. rst 100 km.
ing style accordingly.
R Do not make any modi cations to the brake R Replace the tyres a er six years at the latest,
# Use i M+S tyres at outside tempera-
system, the wheels or the tyres. regardless of wear.
tures of less than 10 °C.
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not R When replacing
replacing with
with tyres
tyres that
that do not
not featur
featuree
# Only use the tyres for their intended pur-
permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's run- at char
haract
acter
eris
istics:
tics: vehicles with
pose. general operating permit. MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a
Observe the following when selecting, tting and R Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys- TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle
replacing tyres: tem: all tted wheels must be equipped with with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tyres
functioning sensors for the tyre pressure mon- that do not feature run- at characteristics,
R Country-speci c requirements for tyre
itoring system. e.g. winter tyres.
approval that de ne a speci c tyre type for
your vehicle. R At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres % You can permanently limit the maximum
or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all speed for driving with winter tyres
wheels. (/ page 245).
 Wheels and tyres 421

For more information on wheels and tyres, con- Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the Notes on stor
storing
ing wheels
tact a quali ed specialist workshop. wheels or tyres have di erent dimensions can
render the general operating permit invalid. When storing wheels, observe the following notes:
Be sure to also observe the following further rela- R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool,
ted subjects: The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
di er: dry and preferably dark place.
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 414)
R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 415) R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
or fuel.
R Notes on the emergency spare wheel R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the
(/ page 427) tyre
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the tyre-c
tyre-chang
hangee tool
tool kit
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread
Notes on interc
interchanging
hanging wheels depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
roads (aquaplaning).
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
& WARNING Risk of injury through di erent On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel You could otherwise fail to recognise
wheel sizes size, you can interchange the wheels every dangers.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear.
severely impair the driving characteristics. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehi-
the wheels. cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo-
nents may also be damaged. Observe the instructions and safety notes on For more information on which tyre-changing
"Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 422). tools are required and approved for performing a
# Only interchange the front and rear
wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed
wheels if the wheels and tyres have the specialist workshop.
same dimensions.
You require the following tools, for example, to
change a wheel:
R Jack
422 Wheels and tyres

R Chock R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level

R Wheel wrench ground.
R Centring pin R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-
The maximum load capacity of the jack can change tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist
be found on the sticker a xed to the jack. workshop to nd out about suitable tools.
The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a # Apply the electric parking brake manually.
malfunction, please contact a quali ed spe- # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
cialist workshop. position.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 The tool bag contains: # Shi the transmission to position j.
in the boot. R Jack
# Vehicles with
with AIRMATIC:
AIRMATIC: set the raised vehicle
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool R Gloves level for greater ground clearance
bag may be located at other positions in the R Wheel wrench (/ page 277).
boot. # Switch o the vehicle.
R Centring pin
R Folding chock # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.

R Ratchet for jack # Place chocks or other suitable items under the
front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally
opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Prepar
Pr eparing
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for a wheel change
change
# Unload the vehicle.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle is not on a slope.
 Wheels and tyres 423

Raising the
the vehicle
vehicle when changing
changing a wheel R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the
electric parking brake.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
R Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate.
R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 422).
Important notes on using the jack:
R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been
approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehi-
cle.
R The jack is only designed for raising and hold-
ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed and not for maintenance
work under the vehicle.
# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel
R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at, about one full turn. Do not unscrew the
load-bearing, non-slip underlay. screws completely.
R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti-
cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
R Never place your hands or feet under the vehi-
cle.
R Never lie under the vehicle.
424 Wheels and tyres

the jack must be positioned vertically # Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit
under the jacking point of the vehicle. and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so
that the letters "AUF" are visible.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to using
an unsuitable jack
You can damage the vehicle and, in particular
the high-voltage battery, if you use a jack that
is not speci cally designed for the jack sup-
port points of the vehicle.
Position of jack support points # Only use jacks that are speci cally
designed for the jack support points, or
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles use an appropriate adapter.
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise * NOTE Risk of damage to the vehicle due
dangers. to incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack at the designa-
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect ted jack support points, you could damage
positioning of the jack your vehicle and, in particular, the high-voltage
battery.
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup-
If you do not position the jack correctly at the port point 1.
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the # Only position the jack at the designated
jack could tip with the vehicle raised. jack support points. # Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2
sits completely on jack support point 1 and
# Only position the jack at the appropriate
the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of
 Wheels and tyres 425

# Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maxi- # Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- Fitting a new
new wheel
mum of 3 cm from the ground. pletely.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 425). * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
Remo
emoving
ving a wheel You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle is raised.
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
* NO
NOTE
TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. wheel bolts to come loose, as too can dam-
You could otherwise fail to recognise aged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.
dangers. # Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead # Never oil or grease the threads.
of the wheel bolt.
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force # In the event of damage to the threads,
to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com- contact a quali ed specialist workshop
comfort when braking. pletely. immediately.
# Remove the wheel. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam-
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on aged hub threads replaced.
wheel bolts # Do not continue driving.
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. # Observe the information on the choice of tyres
(/ page 418).
426 Wheels and tyres

For tyres with a speci ed direction of rotation, an # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is nger-
arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the tight.
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc- # Lower the vehicle (/ page 426).
tion of rotation when tting.
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen-
Lower
Lowering
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle a er a wheel change
change
tring pin and push it on.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening R The new wheel has been tted (/ page 425).
wheel bolts and nuts
* NOTE
NOTE Risk of vehicle jack becoming trap-
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts ped by the AIRMATIC system # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts If the AIRMATIC system has released air when an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
when the vehicle is on the ground. raising the vehicle, the jack can become trap-
ped when the vehicle is lowered. # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety # Start the drive system. This adapts the
the speci ed tightening torque of 150 Nm.
notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 418). vehicle level.
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which # Remove the jack from under the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and rect tightening torque
for the wheel in question. # To lower
lower the
the vehicle:
vehicle: place the ratchet onto
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters The wheels could come loose if the wheel
pattern in the order indicated until they are "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise. bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
nger-tight. prescribed torque.
# Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
 Wheels and tyres 427

# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel Emergency

Emerg ency spare
spare wheel shop. The new wheel must have the cor-
nuts are tightened to the prescribed Notes on the
the emergency
emergency spare
spare wheel rect dimensions.
tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehi- & WARNING Risk of accident caused by Observe the following notes on tting an emer-
cle. Contact a quali ed specialist work- incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions gency spare wheel:
shop and have the tightening torque R The maximum permissible speed with an
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel tted is 80 km/h.
checked immediately.
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and
the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emer- R Do not t the emergency spare wheel with
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly tted snow chains.
wheel and adjust it if necessary. gency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi -
cantly impair driving characteristics of the R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six
% The following does not apply if the new wheel vehicle. years at the latest, regardless of wear.
is an emergency spare wheel. To prevent hazardous situations: R Use the wheel bolts that are included with the
# Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys- # Drive carefully. emergency spare wheel.
tem: restart the tyre pressure monitoring sys- # Never t more than one emergency Speci ed tight
tightening
ening torq
torque:
ue: 130 Nm
tem (/ page 417).
spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency
in size. spare wheel tted. Correct the pressure as
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or necessary.
spare wheel brie y. % The speci ed tyre pressure is stated on the
# Do not deactivate ESP®. label of the emergency spare wheel.
# Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a di erent size replaced
at the nearest quali ed specialist work-
428 Wheels and tyres

% Vehicles with with a tyre

tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys-
tem: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the
tyre pressure monitoring system cannot func-
tion reliably. For a few minutes a er an emer-
gency spare wheel is tted, the system may
still display the tyre pressure of the removed
wheel. Only restart the system again when the
emergency spare wheel has been replaced
with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 414)
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 415)
R Notes on tting tyres (/ page 418)
R Fitting an emergency spare wheel
(/ page 422)
 Technical data 429

Notes on tec
technical
hnical data On-boardd electronics
On-boar electronics # You should have all work on electrical
Notes on tam
tamper
pering
ing with
with the
the engine electronics
electronics and electronic components carried out
* NO
NOTE
TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. * NOTE Premature wear through improper
You could otherwise fail to recognise maintenance & WARNING Risk of accident due to
dangers. improper operation of two-way radios
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle
components to wear more quickly and the If you use two-way radios in the vehicle
The technical data was determined in accordance vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. improperly, their electromagnetic radiation
with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is
# Always have work on the engine elec-
vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain the case in the following situations, in particu-
further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service tronics and related components carried
out at a quali ed specialist workshop. lar:
Centre.
R The two-way radio is not connected to an
Onlyy for
Onl for certain
certain countries:
countries: you can nd vehicle- exterior aerial.
speci c vehicle data in the COC documents (CER- Two-wa
o-wayy radios
radios R The exterior aerial is tted incorrectly or is
TIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents
are delivered with your vehicle. Notes on tting tw
two-wa
o-wayy radios
radios not a low-re ection aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
the vehicle.
improper work on two-way radios
# Have the low-re ection exterior aerial t-
If two-way radios are manipulated or retro t- ted at a quali ed specialist workshop.
ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation # When operating two-way radios in the
from the two-way radios can interfere with the
vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operat- vehicle, always connect them to the low-
ing safety of the vehicle. re ection exterior aerial.
430 Technical data

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit If your vehicle has ttings for two-way radio equip-
due to failure to comply with the instruc- ment, use the power supply and aerial connectors
tions for installation and use provided in the pre-installation. Observe the man-
ufacturer's supplements when tting.
The operating permit may be invalidated if the
instructions for installation and use of two-way Two-wa
o-wayy radio
radio transmission
transmission output
radios are not observed. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the aerial must not exceed the values in
# Only use approved frequency bands.
the following table.
# Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands. Frequency
Frequency band and maximum transmission
transmission out-
put
# Only use approved aerial positions.
Freq
equency
uency band Maximum transmis-
transmis-
sion output
2 m frequency band 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
1 Rear roof area
Terrestrial Trunked 10 W
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, t-
Radio (TETRA)
ting an aerial is not permitted.
380 - 460 MHz
Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road
Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of a ermarket 70 cm frequency band 35 W
radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
430 - 470 MHz
retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal
requirements for detachable parts.
 Technical data 431

Freq
equency
uency band Maximum transmis-
transmis- Regulat
egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation and notes
notes Furt
urther
her com
component-speci
ponent-speci c inf
infor
ormation
mation
sion output Regulat
egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation of small compo-
compo- Further component-speci c information can be
nents found using the key phrase "further component-
Two-way radio 2W speci c information" in the Digital Owner's Man-
2G Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi- ual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
cle components can be found using the key
Two-way radio 0.5 W phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Dig-
3G/4G/5G ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the inter-
net and in the app.
The following devices can be used in the vehicle
without restrictions: Regulat
egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation – Indonesia
R two-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi-
cle components can be found using the key
R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation – Indone-
the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a sia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehi-
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W cle, on the internet and in the app.
(TETRA)
% These are not small components. Information
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G) about small components can be found using
There are no restrictions when positioning the the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation
aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow- of small components".
ing frequency bands:
R TETRA
R 2G/3G/4G/5G
432 Technical data

Vehicle identi cation plat

plate,
e, VIN and engine num-
ber over
overview
view
Vehicle identi cation plate

Vehicle identi cation plate (example: Kuwait) Vehicle identi cation plate (example: all other
1 Vehicle manufacturer countries)
2 Place of manufacture 1 Vehicle manufacturer
3 Manufacturing date 2 EU general operating permit number (only for
4 Vehicle model certain countries)
5 VIN 3 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
(kg)
 Technical data 433

5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle VIN below

below the
the front
front right-hand
right-hand seat VIN at the
the lower
lower edge
edge of the
the windscreen
windscreen
combination (kg) (only for speci c countries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
8 Paint code
% The data shown in the illustration is example
data.

1 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as label

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind-
screen is only available in some countries.
Motor number
Motor
1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identi cation number) Further information on motor numbers can be
obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
2 Floor covering
434 Technical data

Operating uids
Operating # Dispose of operating uids in an environ- Further information on approved operating uids
mentally responsible manner. is available at the following locations:
Notes on operating
operating uids
R in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper-
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating Operating uids include the following: ating Fluids by entering the designation
uids harmful to your health R lubricants - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
Operating uids may be poisonous and harm- R coolant - in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App
ful to your health. R brake uid R at a quali ed specialist workshop
# Observe the text on the original contain- R windscreen washer uid
ers when using, storing or disposing of R climate control system refrigerant Notes on brak
brakee uid
operating uids.
# Always store operating uids sealed in Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Note the instructions about operating uids
Damage caused by the use of products that have (/ page 434).
their original containers.
not been approved is not covered by the
# Always keep children away from operat- & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
ing uids. vapour pockets forming in the brake sys-
You can identify operating uids approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on tem
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Pollution of the the container: The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture
environment due to irresponsible disposal from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
of operating uids the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low,
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Incorrect disposal of operating uids can vapour pockets may form in the brake system
cause considerable damage to the environ- when the brakes are applied hard.
ment. This impairs the braking e ect.
 Technical data 435

# Have the brake uid renewed at the # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from # Only use coolant approved by Mercedes-
speci ed intervals. component parts before starting the Benz.
vehicle. # Observe the instructions in the
Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a quali- Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper-
ed specialist workshop. * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- ating Fluids 320.1.
Only use a brake uid approved by Mercedes- ant
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed
331.0. # Only use coolant that has been premixed specialist workshop.
with the required antifreeze protection.
Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine
Coolant Information on coolant is available at the fol- cooling system:
lowing locations:
Notes on coolant R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down
R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for
Observe the notes on operating uids to about -37°C)
Operating Fluids 320.1
(/ page 434). R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
- At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com down to -45°C)
& WARNING Risk of re‑ and injury from - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App
antifreeze R At a quali ed specialist workshop
Notes on windscreen
windscreen washer
washer uid
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it Observe the notes on operating uids
may ignite. * NOTE Overheating at high outside temper- (/ page 434).
atures
# Allow the drive system to cool down
before you top up the antifreeze. If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine
# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
cooling system is not su ciently protected
against overheating and corrosion at high out-
next to the ller opening.
side temperatures.
436 Technical data

& WARNING Risk of re and injury from * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by Vehicle data
windscreen washer concentrate mixing windscreen washer uids Vehicle dimensions
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am- # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- The heights speci ed may vary as a result of the
mable. If it comes into contact with hot com- terFit with other windscreen washer u- following factors:
ponents, it may ignite. ids. R tyres
# Make sure that windscreen washer con-
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other- R load
centrate is not spilled near to the ller
opening. wise, the ll level sensor may be triggered errone- R condition of the suspension
ously. R optional equipment
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due Recommended windscreen washer uid:
Vehicle dimensions
to unsuitable windscreen washer uid R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit All models
Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may
damage the plastic surface of the exterior For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- Vehicle length 5216 mm
lighting. tion on the antifreeze container.
# Only use windscreen washer uids which
Vehicle width including outside 2125 mm
Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all mirrors
are also suitable for use on plastic surfa- year round.
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Vehicle width excluding out- 1926 mm
side mirrors
Vehicle height 1512 mm
Wheelbase 3210 mm
 Technical data 437

Weights and loads For further information on charging the high-volt- Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
age battery, refer to the "Charging the high-volt- plug
Vehicle-speci c weight information can be found age battery" section (/ page 207).
on the vehicle identi cation plate. Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V
Observee the
Observ the vehicle
vehicle data
data speci ed below
below:: optional 3 Supply type: DC
equipment increases the unladen weight and Standard: EN 62196-3
reduces the payload. Style: FF
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
High-volt
High-voltag
agee battery
battery plug
Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
Notes on the
the power
power supply
supply for
for vehicles
vehicles with
with a
high-volt
high-voltag
agee battery
battery Missing values were not available at the time of
In accordance with European standard EN going to press.
17186:2019, vehicle identi ers are located on the Dataa on char
Dat charging
ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee battery
battery
vehicle in the following places: 1 Supply type: AC
R On the inside of the socket ap
EQS 350
Standard: EN 62196-2
R On the charging cable connector Style: type 2 Type Lithium-ion
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
In addition, charging stations in European coun- Usable energy content 90.6 kWh
plug
tries are equipped with energy supply identi ers.
You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations Voltage range: 480 V RMS Range
where the charging station identi er corresponds 2 Supply type: DC
to the vehicle identi er. Standard: EN 62196-3
Style: FF
438 Technical data

EQS 350 EQS 580 4MATIC

4MATIC The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be
found on the information label in the socket cover
Charge time – mode 4 30 min Type Lithium-ion (/ page 207).
with approx. 170 kW peak Usable energy content 107.8 kWh
charging capacity Trailer hitch
Range
Charge time – mode 3 Approx. 8 h General notes
General notes on the
the trailer
trailer hitch
with 11 kW charging capacity Charge time – mode 4 31 min Modi cations to the engine cooling system may
with approx. 200 kW peak be necessary, depending on the vehicle model.
EQS 450+ charging capacity The retro tting of a trailer hitch is only permissi-
Type Lithium-ion ble if a towing capacity is speci ed in your vehicle
Charge time – mode 3 Approx. 10 h documents.
Usable energy content 107.8 kWh with 11 kW charging capacity Further information can be obtained at a quali ed
Range Charge time – mode 3 applies to AC charging specialist workshop.
from 10% to 100% of the usable energy content.
Charge time – mode 4 31 min
Charge time – mode 4 applies to direct current
with approx. 200 kW peak charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy
charging capacity content.
Charge time – mode 3 Approx. 10 h The time taken to charge the battery depends on
with 11 kW charging capacity the charge status of the battery, the ambient tem-
perature and the charging capacity of the battery.
The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the
supply voltage, the current intensity and the type
of power supply.
 Technical data 439

Mounting dimensions of the

the trailer
trailer hitch The overhang dimension and fastening points are Maximum tongue
tongue weight
weight and load capacity
valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.
* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer com-
Over
Overhang
hang dimension length ing loose
Model 2 Ov
Over
erhang
hang
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer
dimension
may come loose.
All models 1193 mm # The tongue weight must not be below
50 kg.
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as
Towing capacity
possible to the maximum permissible
The tongue weight is not included in the towing tongue weight.
capacity.
Towing capacity,
capacity, brak
braked
ed (at a minimum st
star
art-o
t-o * NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack
gradeability
gr adeability of 12%) coming loose
Model Towing
Towing capacity, When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal
brak
br aked
ed tongue weight and the maximal load capacity
should be observed.
All models 750 kg # Do not exceed the permissible load

Towing capacity,
capacity, unbrak
unbraked
ed capacity.

1 Fastening points Model Towing

Towing capacity, Observe the additional notes on load capacity
unbrak
unbr aked
ed (/ page 310).
2 Overhang dimension
3 Rear axle centre line All models 750 kg
440 Technical data

Tongue weight
weight Per
ermissible
missible axle load, rear
rear axle
Model Maximum tongue
tongue Trailer operation
operation axle load
weight
Model Axle load
All models 75 kg
EQS 350 1710 kg
Load capacity
All other models 1795 kg
All models Maximum load
When attaching the 75 kg
bicycle rack to the ball
head
When attaching the 100 kg
bicycle rack to the ball
head and additionally
to the guide pin
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441

Display messages
Display messages You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the back button G or the le -hand
Introduction
Intr oduction Touch Control. The display messages will then be
Infor
Information
mation about display
display messages
messages stored in the message memory.
Display messages appear on the driver display. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly
Display messages with graphical symbols are sim- as possible.
pli ed in the Owner's Manual and may di er from High-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
the symbols on the driver display. The driver dis- The driver display will show these display mes-
play shows high-priority display messages in red. sages continuously until the cause of the display
Certain display messages are accompanied by a message has been recti ed.
warning tone.
Calling up saved
saved display
display messages
messages
Please act in accordance with the display mes-
Driver's display:
sages and follow the additional notes in the Own-
4 Service
er's Manual.
For some display messages, symbols will also be The Message memory: XX message appears in
shown: the driver's display.
R Õ Further information # Scroll through the display messages by swip-

R ¨ Hide display message

ing upwards or downwards on the le -hand
Touch Control.
With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select # To exit
exit the
the display:
display: press back button G.
the respective symbol by swiping to the le or
right. Pressing Õ displays further information on
the central display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide
the display message.
442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety
safety
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 45).

& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Restraint system malfunc- Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
tion Consult workshop the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 45).

& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Front left malfunction Con- Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
sult workshop (example) the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 45).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
Left windowbag malfunc- The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
tion Consult work- # Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
shop (example)
Front passenger airbag dis- * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger
abled See Owner's Manual seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 55).
# If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front passenger airbag ena- * The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:
bled See Owner's Manual R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front
passenger seat
R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 55).
# If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PRE-SAFE inoperative See * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE impulse side * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered.
inoperative See Owner's # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Manual

Key
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Á
* Have the key replaced.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Replace key

Á
* The key battery is discharged.
# Replace the battery (/ page 85).

Change key batteries

446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Á
* The key is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 194).
Key not detected (white dis-
play message)

Á
* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle:
R You can no longer start the vehicle.
Key not detected (red dis- R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
play message)
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 194).

Á
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.
# Wait until processing is complete.

Key being initialised Please

wait
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Place the key in the * Key detection is malfunctioning.
marked space See Owner's # Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
Manual
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 194).

Lights
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The corresponding light source is defective.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Left dipped beam (example) % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the light are faulty.

:
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with
with a trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: a fuse may have blown.
Malfunction See Owner's # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
Manual
# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 411).
448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Automatic driving lights

inoperative

:
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Light System inoper-

ative

:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

Switch on headlamps

:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to the à position.

Switch off lights

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of
limited the DIGITAL LIGHT system.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Check dipped-beam set- * The type of tra c has been selected manually.
ting (left/right-side traffic) # Check the setting and change it manually if necessary (/ page 165).

Dipped-beam setting (left/ * The automatic headlamp conversion for le -hand/right-hand tra c has malfunctioned.
right-side traffic) Manual # Change the headlamps over manually (/ page 165).
adjustment only
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The system limits have been reached (/ page 162).
Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist available again display message will appear.
# Drive on

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
Plus currently unavailable The system limits have been reached (/ page 163).
See Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus available again display message will appear.
# Drive on

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.

Plus inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Until then, operate the high beam manually.

Hazard warning lamp sys- * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
tem Malfunction # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451

Climatee control
Climat control
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
# Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum charge.

inoperative High-voltage
battery charging incom-
plete

&
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
# Charge the high-voltage battery.

Inoperative Charge high-

voltage battery

&
* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than three times with the engine switched o .
# Start the vehicle for ten seconds.
Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
Pre-entry climate control
via key available again
after starting vehicle
452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.

Pre-entry climate control

via key inoperative High-
voltage battery low

Driv
Dr ivee system
system
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
Output and range are severely restricted.
# Switch the vehicle o and lock it.
Performance severely limi- # A er waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.
ted
If the display message appears again:
# Drive on carefully.
# Fully charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 207).

If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive on carefully.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

u
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (/ page 405).

Towing not permitted See

Owner's Manual

ò
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No driving noises are being produced. The
vehicle may not be heard by other road users.
# Drive with particular care.

Acoustic presence indica- # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

tor inoperative
To switch off the vehicle, * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
press the Start/Stop but- # To switch o the drive system while the vehicle is in motion (/ page 194).
ton for at least 3 seconds
or 3 times
454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+
* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Damage to the drive system due to insu cient coolant

Top up coolant See Own- # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant.
er’s Manual
# Have the cooling system of the drive system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

ÿ
* The coolant is too hot.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system.

Coolant Stop Switch off & WARNING Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle
the vehicle
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated vehicle or re in the engine compartment, the following situa-
tions may occur:
R You may come into contact with hot gases.
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.

# In the event of overheating or re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re
service.
# Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down rst if you need to open the bonnet.
# Wait until the drive system has cooled down.
# Make sure that the air supply to the vehicle radiator is not obstructed.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

ÿ
* The cooling system has detected a component fault.
# Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

è
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.
# Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

Charger cable connected

Not possible to unlock * The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket.
charging cable See Own- # Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.
er's Manual
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed a er that:
# Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button attached to the
charging station or the emergency call numbers.
Vehicle not currently being * A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
charged Charging station # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.
fault
or
# Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Charging fault Please * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
change charging method # Wait until the malfunction has passed.
See Owner's Manual
or
# Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.

AC charging inoperative * The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.

Consult workshop # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

DC charging inoperative * The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.

Consult workshop # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Reduced drive system per- * The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temper-
formance See Owner's atures.
Manual Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow reduced power output warning lamp _ is lit.
Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal (e.g. a er a short trip), the full output will be
available again. The display message and the yellow reduced power output warning lamp _ will go out.
# Drive on carefully.

* The high-voltage battery is not charged su ciently.

Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow reduced power output warning lamp _ is lit.
# Drive on carefully.

# Charge the high-voltage battery immediately.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Û
* The charge level of the high-voltage battery is so low that it is no longer possible to drive the vehicle. The drive system
can no longer be restarted.
When the drive system is restarted, the message Battery capacity too low Stop Charge immediately will appear
Battery capacity too low again.
Stop Charge immediately # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 207).

Please wait in READY sta- * Operational readiness is established õ and the transmission position j is engaged.
tus Warming battery See The high-voltage battery is warmed up to the operating temperature. This process can take a few minutes and may be
Owner's Manual prolonged if defrosting of the windscreen ¬ is activated.
The heating process ends when transmission position h is engaged. However, when driving, the output is signi cantly
limited until the high-voltage battery has reached its operating temperature.
458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Û
* The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of re.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if % Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. the air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
possible # Do not continue driving.

# If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.

Û
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction

Û
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction Visit workshop

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Û
* A function restriction has occurred in the drive system.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Have high-voltage system

checked See Owner's Man-
ual
Preparing drive system… * The insulation of the drive system is being tested. This process can last for up to ten seconds.
Consult workshop without * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.
starting the vehicle again # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

ô
* The charge level of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range.
# Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 207).

Reserve level Charge high-

voltage battery

d
* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction
460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not con-
tinue driving.
Stop Switch off the vehicle # Do not tow the vehicle, stop towing if necessary.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

d
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction Visit workshop

High-voltage battery mal- * A fault has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
function. No start in It is no longer possible to start the electric drive system a er the distance displayed has been covered.
approx. XXX km Consult
# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
workshop (yellow display
message)
High-voltage battery mal- * A fault has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
function. No start in It is no longer possible to start the electric drive system a er the distance displayed has been covered.
approx. XXX km Consult
# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a quali ed specialist
workshop(red display mes-
sage) workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
High-voltage battery mal- * A fault has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
function. Consult work- It is no longer possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched o .
shop without starting the
# Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.
vehicle again

Vehicle
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The driver display is inoperative due to a failed so ware update.
The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of the driver display
In the event that the driver display fails or malfunctions, you will not recognise function restrictions a ecting sys-
tems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety.
# Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a quali ed specialist workshop.

If the driver display fails, you may not recognise function restrictions a ecting systems relevant to safety or the speed
display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 343).
# Have the vehicle checked by a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d
* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.
# Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V bat-
Vehicle is operational tery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Switch off vehicle before
exiting

ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
Check trailer hitch The trailer may become detached.
lock (white display message) # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 306).

# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# If the
the ball neck
neck has been folded
folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 306).
# Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.

# If the
the ball neck
neck has been folded
folded out:
out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 306).
# Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Head-up display currently * The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes:
unavailable See Owner's R malfunctions in the power supply
Manual
R signal interference

# Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again.
# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error.
464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Head-up display Brightness * The brightness of the head-up display is reduced. Possible causes:
currently reduced See Own- R Dirt on the windscreen in the camera's eld of vision
er's Manual
R Faulty exterior brightness signals

# Switch on the windscreen wipers.

# Clean the windscreen if necessary.
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Ù
* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Steering malfunction Drive
carefully Visit workshop
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
Steering malfunction If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
Increased physical effort # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
See Owner's Manual # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Ù
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
Steering malfunction Stop If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
immediately See Owner's # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do
Manual not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Ù
* The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.

Rear axle steering cur- If the display message does not disappear:
rently malfunctioning # Drive on carefully.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.
The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line.
Rear axle steering Malfunc- # Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.
tion Visit workshop
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Ù
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.
The steering wheel may be tilted considerably when you drive in a straight line.
Rear axle steering Malfunc- Depending on the steering wheel's tilted position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone
tion Stop immediately will sound.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Snow chain mode Maxi- * The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded.
mum speed exceeded # Drive more slowly.

Active bonnet malfunction * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered.
See Owner's Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

C
* At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.

?
* The bonnet is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
# Never release the bonnet when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Do not continue driving.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A
* The tailgate is open.
# Close the tailgate.

Anti-theft alarm system * The anti-the alarm system is malfunctioning.

Malfunction # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Ambient light warning sup- * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support.
port inoperative # Lock the vehicle and unlock it again a er a few minutes.

# If the display message appears regularly, contact a quali ed specialist workshop.

_
* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
# Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Rear left seat backrest not

locked (Example)

¥
* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
# Top up the washer uid (/ page 388).

Top up washer fluid

Wiper Malfunction * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Restart the vehicle.

If the display message still appears:

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Transmission
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only select P when vehicle * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.
is stationary # Depress the brake pedal to stop.

# Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.

Apply brake to deselect P * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
position # Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.

Apply brake and start vehi- * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission posi-
cle to shift out of P or N tion.
# Depress the brake pedal.

# Start the vehicle.

# Change the transmission position.

470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Apply brake to engage D or * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.
R # Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h or k.

Apply parking brake to * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.
park Visit workshop # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Risk of vehicle rolling away * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
Driver's door open Trans- The vehicle may roll away.
mission not in P
# Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.

Risk of vehicle rolling away * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
Apply parking brake to park # Park the vehicle safely.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.

Risk of vehicle rolling away * While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the drive system or the
N activated manually No vehicle switched on.
automatic switch to P
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* NO
NOTE
TE Damage to the vehicle due to rolling away
When the vehicle is switched o or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deac-
tivated.
The vehicle may roll away.
# Be ready to brake.

# Do not leave the vehicle unattended.

# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.

# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.
N automatically activated * Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.
Please engage transmis- % When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically.
sion position again
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.

# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.

# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

N is selected Please select * The accelerator pedal was depressed while the vehicle was rolling or moving in neutral i.
desired transmission posi- # To accelerate the vehicle, select transmission position h or k.
tion
472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Reversing not poss. Con- * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k.
sult workshop # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically.
Stop # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Engage park position j.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Consult workshop without * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
changing the transmission # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission
position position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Auxiliary battery malfunc- * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.

tion (white display message) # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473

Brak
Br akes
es
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
apply:
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
Parking brake See Owner's # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 230).
Manual
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
release:
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 230).

or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 229).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunc-
tioning.
474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

To apply:
apply:
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 230).

To release:
release:
# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to ash:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the
electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is mal-
functioning.
If the
the stat
statee of charg
chargee is too
too low:
low:
# Charge the 12 V battery.

To apply:
apply:
# Apply the electric parking brake manually.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:
release:
# If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 230).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

!
* The red ! indicator lamp is ashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 229).
Release parking brake R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 230).

# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
# Release the electric parking brake manually.
476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o .
# Switch on the vehicle.
Parking brake Switch on
vehicle to release

J
* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.
A horn may also sound at regular intervals.
You cannot start the vehicle system.
Brake immediately # Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly until the display message disappears.
You cannot start the vehicle system again.

J
* The brake force boosting function is impaired.
The hill start assist may be impaired.

Malfunction See Owner's & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
Manual If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

J
* The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be a ected.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
Malfunction Stop vehicle If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

J
* There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
Check brake fluid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake uid.

Check brake pads See * The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
Owner's Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving
Dr iving systems
systems
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ë
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled.
# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 237).

Off

é
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-

ative

é
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 240).
# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

break!
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

P
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (/ page 240).
A warning tone will also sound.
# It is recommended that you take a break immediately.
ATTENTION ASSIST Micro- # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
sleep Take a break!

h
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 244).

- - - km/h
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Cruise control and Limiter * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
inoperative # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.

If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 242).
480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

È
* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be
available again.

- - - km/h

È
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive
mode (/ page 243).

passive
Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled.
# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 248).

- - - km/h

ç
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to
passive mode (/ page 246).

suspended
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
has deactivated automatically (/ page 248).

Off
Active Distance Assist cur- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
rently unavailable See Own- The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 246).
er's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist inop- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
erative Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
# Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Distance Assist * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
available again # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 248).

Speed Limit Assist cur- * Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.

rently unavailable See Own- # Drive on
er's Manual Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed limit (winter tyres) * You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
XXX km/h
Speed Limit Assist inopera- * Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

ð
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).
# Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Steering Assist cur- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
rently unavailable See Own- The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 253).
er's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

# Check the tyre pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist inop- * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
erative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Ø
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 253).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions.

Active Steering Assist cur- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
rently unavailable due to # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions.
multiple emergency stops
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
Active Steering Assist is available once more.
484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ø
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 253).
# Put your hands on the steering wheel.

Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 256).

Beginning emergency stop
Active Emergency Stop * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Assist currently unavailable The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 256).
See Owner's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
* Vehicles without
without the
the Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multi-
ple emergency stops.
# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

Active Emergency Stop Assist is available once more.
Active Emergency Stop * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.
Assist inoperative # Drive on

or
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Active Lane Change Assist * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 257).
Owner's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Lane Change Assist * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.
inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are
currently unavailable see still available.
Owner's Manual The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 246).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Stop-and-Go Assist * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still
Manual available.
# Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist currently * Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.

unavailable See Owner's Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Manual
# Drive on

Traffic Sign Assist inopera- * Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

tive # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist currently * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.

unavailable See Owner's The system limits have been reached (/ page 270).
Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive on
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist inopera- * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The system limits have been reached (/ page 270).
Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
# Drive on

or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
inoperative # Drive on

or
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 274).
Owner's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¸
* Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:
R The sensors are dirty
R Heavy rain or snow

ð R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-

ç ing and drive system will continue to function normally.

# Drive on

Ä
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o .
If the display message does not disappear:
temporarily unavailable # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
Sensors dirty # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 232).

# Restart the vehicle.

490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

á
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:
R Dirt on the windscreen in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera
R Heavy rain, snow or fog

ð R Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen
during cold times of year in particular.

Ä
% This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restric-
tion is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-

¬ ing and drive system will continue to function normally.

# Drive on

Ô Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o .
If the display message does not disappear:
temporarily unavailable # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
Camera view restricted # Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 232).

# Restart the vehicle.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ð
* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent.
# Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.

¸
Ø
Restricted during trailer
operation
Driver camera view cur- * The view of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes:
rently restricted See Own- R Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera’s eld of vision.
er's Manual
R The driver camera is dirty.

# Keep the driver camera's eld of vision free.

# Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display
(/ page 393).
492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Change steering wheel/ * The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight.
seat position until 6 dots # Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen.
are visible on the upper The display message will appear again if the driver camera is again unable to detect your line of sight a er
edge of the screen 30 minutes.
The display message will no longer appear at all if you con rm the display message and the driver camera cannot
detect your line of sight during the entire journey.
Driver camera inoperative * The driver camera is malfunctioning.
See Owner's Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

ä
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected.

* NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
Fault Drive at max. 80 # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
km/h # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a
higher vehicle level if possible.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¢
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected.
# The current level is too high. Do not drive at speeds greater than 20 km/h.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Max. speed 20km/h

É
* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
STOP Vehicle level too low # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning:
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h and consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a
higher vehicle level if possible.
# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 277).
Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Vehicle rising Please wait

É
* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor rst needs to cool down in order to set the
selected vehicle level.
When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level.
Compressor is cooling # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is su cient ground clearance.

Limited availability of * Active Parking Assist’s manoeuvring assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Active Parking Assist # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 392).
manoeuvring assistant See
# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Owner's Manual
PARKTRONIC and manoeu- * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, the rear Parking Assist PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring
vring assistant not availa- assistant will be unavailable.
ble at rear when towing a # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
trailer
PARKTRONIC inoperative * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.
See Owner's Manual Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist and * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
PARKTRONIC inoperative Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
See Owner's Manual
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.

# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving
Dr iving safety
safety systems
systems
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

÷ & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o .
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

÷ & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

÷
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

currently unavailable See & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®

Owner's Manual
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o .
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.

÷
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

!
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

÷
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

inoperative See Owner's # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Manual
Active Brake Assist Func- * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti-
tions currently limited See ally available:
Owner's Manual R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function
R Evasive Steering Assist
R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS

Vehicles with
with Blind Spot Assist: PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable.
Spot Assist:
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 260).
Vehicles without
without the
the Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive on
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Brake Assist Func- * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti-
tions limited See Owner's ally available:
Manual R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function
R Evasive Steering Assist
R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS

Vehicles without
without the
the Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially availa-
ble.
# Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501

Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emerg
emergency
ency call system
system
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

G
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction-
ing.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Inoperative

Battery
Battery
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Cannot start vehicle See * It is not possible to start the vehicle.
Owner's Manual A malfunction has occurred in the drive system.
# Switch the vehicle o and lock it.

# A er waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.

# If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

#
* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

12 V on-board electrical
system Visit workshop
502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Stop vehicle See Owner's # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

#
* The vehicle is o and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
# Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.
# Drive for 30–60 minutes.

Start the vehicle to charge or

the 12 V battery # Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 207).
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The 12 V battery charge level is too low.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Leave the vehicle running

Stop vehicle Leave vehicle # If the display message disappears: drive on.
on to charge the 12 V bat-
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
tery

Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre press. monitor cur- * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are
rently unavailable being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed.
# Drive on.

Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
ative
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The wheels tted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
ative No wheel sensors # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

h
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected
tyre.
# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Wheel sensor(s) missing

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signi cantly.
The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds.

Check tyre(s) & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 414) and the tyres.

h
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the di erence in tyre pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

Rectify tyre pressure # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 417).

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tyre
Warning tyre defect R The tyres can overheat and be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Do not drive with a at tyre.

# Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible
speed with a at MOExtended tyre.
# Observe the notes on at tyres.

Notes in the event of a at tyre (/ page 397).

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Check the tyres.
Tyre(s) overheated * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Reduce speed * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

War
arning
ning and indicator
indicator lamps
lamps iour is non-critical. These indicator and warning
lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up
Over
Overvie
view
w of indicator
indicator and war
warning
ning lamps
lamps or ash a er the vehicle has been started or dur-
Some systems will perform a self-test when the ing a journey.
vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn-
ing lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behav-
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507

Driv
Dr iver's
er's display Indicator
Indicator and war
warning
ning lamps:
lamps: Ó Active Brake Assist (/ page 515)
6 Restraint system (/ page 508) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 515)
ü Seat belt (/ page 508) Æ Active Brake Assist (/ page 515)
_ Reduced power (/ page 509) ä AIRMATIC (/ page 515)
Ú System error (/ page 509) ! ABS (/ page 517)
# Electrical fault (/ page 509) ÷ ESP® (/ page 517)
ï Trailer hitch (/ page 510) å ESP® OFF (/ page 517)
Ù Power steering (yellow) (/ page 510) H Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
Ù Power steering (red) (/ page 510) tem (/ page 519)
Driv
Dr iver's
er's display
display with
with driv
driver
er camera Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) h Tyre pressure monitoring system
(/ page 510) (/ page 520)
Ù Rear axle steering (red) T Standing lights (/ page 154)
(/ page 510) L Low beam (/ page 154)
! Electric parking brake (red) K High beam (/ page 156)
(/ page 513)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 156)
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 513) R Rear fog light (/ page 154)
J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 513)
J Brakes (red) (/ page 513)
L Distance warning (/ page 515)
508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety
safety
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 45).

& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Restraint system warning
lamp Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

# Drive on carefully.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

ü
* The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 49).

Seat belt warning lamp There are objects on the front passenger seat.
ashes # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.
In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.
The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 49).
lights up
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Driv
Dr ivee system
system
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_
* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Reduced warning lamp

power

Ú
*The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ.
There is a malfunction in the drive system.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

System error warning lamp

510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault with the electrics.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Electrical fault warning lamp

Vehicle
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ï
* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
Trailer tow hitch warning
lamp The trailer may become detached.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

Power steering warning

lamp (yellow)

Ù
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
Power steering warning
lamp (red) If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Ù
* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

Rear axle steering warning

lamp (yellow)
512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
Rear axle steering warning
lamp (red) If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513

Brak
Br akes
es
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp P
Possible
ossible causes/consequences
causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit.
The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

Electric parking brake indi-

cator lamp (red)

!
The electric parking brake
(yellow) indicator lamp

J
* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
Brake system warning lamp If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
(yellow) # Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

The hill start assist may be malfunctioning.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the driver display shows a display message, observe it.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

J
* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
Possible causes:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected.
Brake system warning lamp R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
(red)
# Note the messages on the driver display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level

If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Do not top up the brake uid.

Driving
Dr iving systems
systems
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

L
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Warning lamp for distance # Be prepared to brake immediately.
warning function # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 260).

Ó
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Active Brake Assist warning

lamp
516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ê
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.
This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated.
Active Brake Assist warning # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 260).
lamp

Æ
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
A er you drive o , the system's range of functions is restricted due to the teach-in process.
Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes.
Active Brake Assist warning # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 260).
lamp

ä
* The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit.
A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Suspension warning lamp

(yellow)

ä
* The red AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit.
A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC.

* NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed signi cantly.
Suspension warning lamp
(red) # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Note the messages on the driver display.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Driving
Dr iving safety
safety systems
systems
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.
ABS warning lamp Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion.
One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 235).
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

ESP® warning lamp ashes

÷
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
ESP® warning lamp lights up # Note the messages on the driver's display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

å
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
ESP® OFF warning lamp
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Drive on carefully.
# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 235).

Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emergency
emergency call system
system
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

H
*The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system warning lamp
520 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and
then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
Tyre pressure monitoring & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
system warning lamp ashes
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

h
* The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights R The tyres can burst.
up R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 521

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
522 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- Setting................................................... 264

media system)....................................... 179 Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONICONIC
4MATIC
4MA TIC
All-wheel distribution.............................. 207 ABS (Anti-lock
(Anti-lock Braking
Braking System)
System).................... 234 Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 256
Function................................................ 207 Acceler
cceleratator
or pedal Active Lane Change Assist..................... 257
see Haptic accelerator pedal Calling up a speed................................. 248
12 V battery
battery Function................................................ 246
see On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Accident and Breakdo
Breakdown wn Management
Management Increasing/decreasing speed................. 248
360° Camera Mercedes me connect........................... 367 Route-based speed adaptation............... 251
Activating using GPS (reversing cam- Acous
coustic
tic locking
locking ver
erii cation signal Selecting............................................... 248
era)........................................................ 286 Activating/deactivating............................ 84 Storing a speed...................................... 248
Button................................................... 285 Acous
coustic
tic presence
presence indicator
indicator (sound gener- gener- Switching o /deactivating..................... 248
Care...................................................... 392 ator)
ator) Switching on/activating......................... 248
Function................................................ 281 Notes..................................................... 190 System limitations.................................. 246
Managing activation points (reversing Activ
ctivee Emergency
Emergency StopStop Assist......................
Assist 256
camera)................................................. 286 Activ
ctivating
ating a commuter
commuter route route........................ 351
Opening the camera cover (reversing Activ
ctivee Blind Spot
Spot Assist Activ
ctivee headlamps
headlamps......................................... 158
camera)................................................. 286 Activating/deactivating.......................... 274 Activ
ctivee Lane Change
Change Assist
Selecting a view..................................... 286 Brake application................................... 272 Activating/deactivating.......................... 259
Setting (reversing camera)..................... 286 Function................................................ 270 Function................................................ 257
Switching automatic operation on/o System limitations.................................. 270 Activ
ctivee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
(reversing camera)................................. 286 Trailer operation..................................... 272 Activating/deactivating.......................... 276
Activ
ctivee bonnet
bonnet (pedestr
(pedestrian ian protection)
protection) Activating/deactivating the warning....... 276
A Operation.............................................. 386 Function................................................ 274
A/C function Activ
ctivee Brak
Brakee Assist Setting the sensitivity............................. 276
Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 178 Function/notes...................................... 260 System limits......................................... 274
 Index 523

Trailer operation..................................... 274 Adap

daptiv
tivee brak
brakee lights....................................
lights 239 Air freshener
freshener system
system
Activ
ctivee Par
Parking
king Assist Adap
daptiv
tivee cruise
cruise control
control see Fragrance system
Automatic braking function.................... 295 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Air inlet
Cross tra c warning.............................. 300 Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist see Air-water duct
Drive Away Assist................................... 299 Activating/deactivating.......................... 163 Air pressure
pressure
Exiting a parking space.......................... 294 Function................................................ 162 see Tyre pressure
Function................................................ 290
Manoeuvring brake function................... 301 Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus Air suspension
Parking.................................................. 292 Function................................................ 163 see AIRMATIC
Pausing.................................................. 295 Switching on/o .................................... 165 Air vents
vents
System limitations.................................. 290 Additional door lock.......................................
lock 87 Adjusting (front)..................................... 187
Activ
ctivee Service
Ser vice Syst
Systemem PLUS
PLUS ADS PLUS
PLUS damping
damping system
system Adjusting (rear)...................................... 188
see ASSYST PLUS see AIRMATIC Air vents
vents
Activ
ctivee Speed Limit Assist A er-sales
er-sales ser
service
vice see Air vents
Display................................................... 250 see ASSYST PLUS Air-conditioning
Air-conditioning system
system
Function................................................ 250 Air conditioning menu see Climate control
Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist Calling up.............................................. 178 Air-r
Air-recir
ecirculation
culation mode (with(with ne
Activating/deactivating.......................... 255 Selecting climate modes........................ 179 particle
par ticle pr
pree lter)
lter).......................................... 181
Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 256 Air conditioning system
system Air-w
Air-watater
er duct
Active Lane Change Assist..................... 257 see Climate control Keeping free.......................................... 388
Function................................................ 253
Air distr
distribution
ibution Airbag
System limits......................................... 253
Setting................................................... 175 Activation................................................ 45
Activ
ctivee Tr
Traa c Jam Assist Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 180 Automatic co-driver airbag shuto ............ 54
Function................................................ 253 Setting (THERMOTRONIC)...................... 176 Belt airbag............................................... 48
524 Index

Centre airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 51 Android Auto

Android Auto ASSYST PLUS
ASSYST PLUS
Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 51 see Smartphone integration Battery disconnection periods................ 386
Installation locations................................ 51 Animals Displaying the service due date.............. 385
Knee airbag............................................. 51 Pets in the vehicle.................................... 82 Function/notes...................................... 385
Overview.................................................. 51 Regular maintenance work..................... 385
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 55 Anti-lockk braking
Anti-loc braking system
system Special service requirements................. 385
Protection................................................ 52 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
ATA
ATA (anti-t
(anti-the
he alaralarmm system)
system)
Reduced protection.................................. 53 Anti-skid chains
chains Deactivating the alarm........................... 110
Side airbag.............................................. 51 see Snow chains Function................................................ 110
Window airbag......................................... 51 Anti-the
Anti-t he prot
protection
ection Interior protection function..................... 111
Air ow Additional door lock................................. 87 Priming/deactivating interior protec-
Setting................................................... 175 Immobiliser............................................ 110 tion........................................................ 112
Setting (THERMOTRONIC)...................... 176 Anti-the
Anti-t he prot
protection
ection Priming/deactivating tow-away pro-
AIRMATIC
AIRMA TIC see ATA (anti-the alarm system) tection................................................... 111
Setting................................................... 277 Tow-away protection function................. 111
Anticipator
Anticipat oryy occupant protection
protection
Suspension............................................ 277 see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- ATTENTION ASSIST
Alarm
Alar m system
system pant protection) Setting................................................... 242
see ATA (anti-the alarm system) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory ATTENTION ASSIST
ASSIST with with microsleep
microsleep detection
detection
All-wheel drive
drive occupant protection plus) Function................................................ 240
see 4MATIC Apple CarPlay® System limits......................................... 240
Alter
Alternativ
nativee route
route see Smartphone integration Att
ttention
ention assistant
assistant
see Route Assistance
Assist ance systems
systems see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro-
see Driving safety system sleep detection
Ambient lighting
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 166
 Index 525

Augment
ugmented ed reality
reality Bag hook.....................................................
hook 143 Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Function on the head-up display............. 317 Ball neck Activating/deactivating.......................... 274
Aut
uthor
horised
ised work
workshop
shop Folding out/in........................................ 306 Function................................................ 270
see Quali ed specialist workshop System limitations.................................. 270
BAS (Brak
(Brakee Assist
Assist System)
System)........................... 234
Aut
utomatic
omatic co-driv
co-driverer airbag shutshutoo Blower
Blow er
Battery
Batt ery see Climate control
Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 54 see High-voltage battery
Aut
utomatic
omatic distance
distance control
control Bonnet
Batter
Batt eryy (high-volt
(high-voltag
agee on-board
on-board electrical
electrical Function (active bonnet)......................... 386
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC system)
syst em) Opening/closing.................................... 386
Aut
utomatic
omatic driving
driving lights................................
lights 155 see High-voltage battery
Boott lid
Boo
Aut
utomatic
omatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag shut shutoo Batter
Batt eryy (key)
(key) see Tailgate
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 55 Replacing................................................. 85
Brak
Br akee Assist
Assist System
System
Aut
utomatic
omatic measures
measures a er an accident............
accident 59 Batter
Batt eryy (vehicle)
(vehicle) see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Aut
utomatic
omatic mirror
mirror folding
folding function Notes..................................................... 402
Brak
Br akee uid
Activating/deactivating.......................... 173 Beginner driv
driver
er mode Notes..................................................... 434
Aut
utomatic
omatic seat adjustment
adjustment Activating/deactivating.......................... 240
Brak
Br akee for
force
ce dis
distrtribution
ibution
Setting................................................... 122 Belt EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu-
Axle load see Seat belt tion)....................................................... 237
Permissible............................................ 432 Belt airbag Brak
Br akes
es
Trailer operation..................................... 440 Activation................................................ 45 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 234
Function/notes........................................ 48 Active Brake Assist................................. 260
B Bicycle
Bicy cle rack
rack Adaptive brake lights.............................. 239
Bad weat
weather
her light.........................................
light 159 Load capacity........................................ 439 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 234
Trailer operation..................................... 310 Driving tips............................................ 195
526 Index

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- C Display................................................... 393

tion)....................................................... 237 Exterior lighting...................................... 392
HOLD function....................................... 237 Calls Head-up display..................................... 393
Limited braking e ect (salt-treated Mercedes me......................................... 362 High-pressure cleaner............................ 389
roads).................................................... 195 Camera Paint...................................................... 390
New/replaced brake linings/brake Information............................................ 232 Plastic trim............................................ 393
discs...................................................... 195 Camera Real wood/trim elements...................... 393
Post-collision brake.................................. 59 see 360° Camera Reversing camera.................................. 392
Running-in notes.................................... 195 see Dashcam Roof lining............................................. 393
Brak
Br akes
es see Driver camera Seat belt................................................ 393
see Recuperation see Reversing camera Seat cover............................................. 393
Sensors................................................. 392
Braking
Br aking assistance
assistance Car key
Steering wheel....................................... 393
see BAS (Brake Assist System) see Key
Trailer hitch............................................ 392
Breakdo
Br eakdownwn Car wash
wash Vehicle socket for the high-voltage
Assistance overview................................. 20 see Care battery................................................... 392
Tow-starting........................................... 411 Car wash
wash (care)
(care)............................................ 388 Washing by hand.................................... 390
Towing away.......................................... 405 Wheels/rims.......................................... 392
Car-t
Car-to-X
o-X-Communication
-Communication
Transporting the vehicle......................... 407 Windows................................................ 392
Displaying hazard warnings.................... 356
Wheel change........................................ 422 Wiper blades.......................................... 392
Care
Breakdo
Br eakdownwn Carpe
Car pett (Care)
(Care)............................................... 393
360° camera......................................... 392
see Flat tyre Centree airbag (driv
Centr (driver
er,, front
front passenger)
passenger)............ 51
Air-water duct........................................ 388
Automatic car wash............................... 388 Charging
Char ging
Carpet................................................... 393 At time of departure............................... 224
Decorative foil........................................ 391 Charge level display............................... 223
 Index 527

Charging cable control panel.................. 213 Charging cable

Charging Top Tether................................................ 71
Con guring weekly pro le...................... 224 Control panel......................................... 213 Children
Childr en
Ending the charging process (alternat- Stowing................................................. 207 Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 61
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 218 Child safety
safety lock Basic instructions.................................... 60
Ending the charging process (direct Rear door................................................. 80
current, mode 4).................................... 222 Chock
Rear side windows................................... 81 Storage location..................................... 421
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 214
Maximum charging current (mains Child seat Chock
socket).................................................. 213 Approval categories................................. 65 see Chock
Notes - charging station (mode 3).......... 211 Attaching (notes)...................................... 65
Basic instructions.................................... 60 City lighting..................................................
lighting 159
Notes - fast charging station (mode 4).... 212
Front passenger seat (notes).................... 78 Cleaning
Notes - mains socket (Mode 2)............... 210
Front passenger seat (without auto- see Care
Notes - wallbox (mode 3)........................ 211
Notes on charging the high-voltage matic airbag shuto )................................ 77 Cleaning uid
battery................................................... 207 ISOFIX/i-Size ( tting)............................... 69 see windscreen washer uid
Notes on the high-voltage battery........... 404 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 61
Climatee control
Climat control
Notes on wireless charging.................... 149 Recommendations for child restraint
Activating/deactivating.......................... 178
On-board electrical system battery systems................................................... 63
Activating/deactivating (rear operat-
(12 V).................................................... 404 Seats suitable for belt-secured child
ing unit)................................................. 178
Starting the charging process (alter- restraint systems..................................... 73
Activating/deactivating the A/C func-
nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 215 Seats suitable for i‑Size child restraint
tion (control panel)................................. 178
Starting the charging process (direct systems................................................... 68
Activating/deactivating the A/C func-
current, mode 4).................................... 219 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child
tion (MBUX multimedia system).............. 179
Stowing the charging cable.................... 207 restraint systems..................................... 67
Activating/deactivating the fragrance
USB port................................................ 149 Securing on the co-driver seat.................. 79
system................................................... 182
Securing on the rear seat......................... 76
528 Index

Activating/deactivating the synchro- Setting the air distribution...................... 175 Co ee cup symbol
nisation function (MBUX multimedia Setting the air distribution see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro-
system).................................................. 181 (THERMOTRONIC).................................. 176 sleep detection
Air-recirculation mode (with ne parti- Setting the air ow.................................. 175 Collision detection
detection (parked
(parked vehicle)
vehicle)
cle pre lter)........................................... 181 Setting the air ow (THERMOTRONIC)..... 176 Setting........................................... 230, 231
Automatic control.................................. 179 Setting the fragrance system.................. 182
Calling up the air conditioning menu....... 178 Setting the temperature......................... 175 Combination switch.....................................
switch 156
Defrost.................................................. 179 Setting the temperature Component-speci
Com ponent-speci c inf infor
ormation
mation................... 431
Demisting the windscreen...................... 175 (THERMOTRONIC).................................. 176 Content
Cont ent sharing
sharing menu
Demisting the windscreen Switching the rear window heater Overview................................................ 328
(THERMOTRONIC).................................. 176 on/o ................................................... 175
Control
Contr ol elements
Demisting windows................................ 181 Switching the rear window heater
Touch-sensitive........................................ 25
Front air vents........................................ 187 on/o (THERMOTRONIC)....................... 176
Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 187 THERMATIC control panel...................... 175 Convenience
Conv enience closing....................................
closing 105
Information on the windscreen heater.... 183 THERMOTRONIC control panel............... 176 Convenience
Conv enience doors
Inserting/removing the acon (fra- Ventilating the vehicle (convenience Setting (MBUX multimedia system)........... 95
grance system)...................................... 182 opening)................................................ 104 Convenience
Conv enience doors
Ionisation............................................... 182 Clothes
Clothes hooks see Door
Note...................................................... 175 Using..................................................... 144
Pre-entry climate control at departure Convenience
Conv enience opening...................................
opening 104
time....................................................... 185 Co-driv
Co-dr iver
er airbag shut
shutoo Coolant (engine)
Pre-entry climate control when the see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto Level check............................................ 387
vehicle is unlocked................................. 184 Cockpit
Coc kpit Notes..................................................... 435
Rear air vents......................................... 188 Overview (central display).......................... 6 Cooling
Rear operating unit.......................... 18, 177 Overview (MBUX Hyperscreen)................... 8 see Climate control
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 178
 Index 529

Copyright
Copyr ight....................................................... 43 Dataa acquisition
Dat acquisition Detecting
Detecting inattentiv
inattentiveness
eness
Corner
Cor nering
ing light.............................................
light 158 Vehicle..................................................... 39 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Crosswind
Cr osswind Assist Dataa protection
Dat protection rights
rights Diagnostics
Diagnos tics connection..................................
connection 36
Function/notes...................................... 236 Data storage............................................ 43 DIGITAL
DIGIT AL LIGHT
Cruise
Cr uise control
control Dataa stor
Dat storage
age Active headlamps................................... 158
Activating............................................... 244 Data protection rights.............................. 43 Assistance functions.............................. 159
Buttons.................................................. 244 Electronic control units............................ 39 Bad weather light................................... 159
Calling up a speed................................. 244 Online services........................................ 42 City lighting............................................ 159
Deactivating........................................... 244 Vehicle..................................................... 39 Cornering light....................................... 158
Function................................................ 242 Deactivating
Deactiv ating the
the alarm
alarm (ATA)
(ATA)......................... 110 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 159
Requirements:....................................... 244 Motorway mode..................................... 158
Dealership
Dealer ship Overview................................................ 157
Selecting............................................... 244 see Quali ed specialist workshop
Setting a speed...................................... 244 Switching the Intelligent Light System
Storing a speed...................................... 244 Declaration
Declar ation of confor
conformity
mity on/o ................................................... 162
System limitations.................................. 242 Electromagnetic compatibility.................. 28 Topographical compensation.................. 159
Importer addresses.................................. 34 Digital
Digit al Owner's Manual..................................
Manual 22
Cup holder Jack......................................................... 35
Fitting/removing (centre console).......... 145 Speci c absorption rate........................... 28 Dinghyy towing
Dingh towing
Using..................................................... 147 TIREFIT kit................................................ 36 see Tow-bar system
Wireless vehicle components................... 28 DIRECT SELECT leverlever
D Engaging drive position.......................... 207
Decorativ
Decor ativee foil
foil (cleaning instr
instructions)
uctions)........... 391
Dashcam Engaging neutral.................................... 206
Notes..................................................... 358 Defros
Defr ostt function...........................................
function 179 Engaging park position........................... 206
Selecting a USB device.......................... 358 Destination
Des tination entry Engaging park position automatically...... 206
Starting/stopping a video recording....... 358 Entering a POI or address....................... 350 Engaging reverse gear............................ 206
530 Index

Function................................................ 205 # 12 V on-board electrical system J Check brake uid level.................. 477
Disconnect device
device Visit workshop....................................... 501 ï Check trailer hitch lock (white
High-voltage on-board electrical sys- ò Acoustic presence indicator display message).................................... 462
tem........................................................ 191
inoperative............................................. 453 h Check tyre(s)................................ 504
Displayy (care)
Displa (care)............................................... 393
: Active Light System inoperative..... 448 É Compressor is cooling.................. 494
Displayy (driv
Displa (driver's
er's display)
display)
Overview of displays............................... 319 é ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative..... 478 ÿ Coolant Stop Switch o the
Displayy (MBUX multimedia system)
Displa system) P ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep vehicle................................................... 454
Calling up the Zero Layer........................ 325 Take a break!......................................... 479 ! currently unavailable See Own-
Home screen......................................... 328 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a er's Manual............................................ 496
Operating.............................................. 330
break!.................................................... 478 ÷ currently unavailable See Own-
Operating the Zero Layer........................ 325
Zero Layer (function).............................. 322 : Automatic driving lights inoper- er's Manual............................................ 497
Zero Layer (overview)............................. 323 ative...................................................... 448 ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h......... 492
Displayy message
Displa Û Battery capacity too low Stop 6 Front le malfunction Consult
Calling up (driver display)....................... 441 Charge immediately............................... 457 workshop (example)............................... 442
Notes..................................................... 441
Û Battery overheated Stop, every- Û Have high-voltage system
Displayy messages
Displa messages
body out! Outdoors if possible................ 458 checked See Owner's Manual................ 459
ç - - - km/h..................................... 480
Ø Beginning emergency stop............ 484 & Inoperative Charge high-voltage
È - - - km/h..................................... 480
J Brake immediately........................ 476 battery................................................... 451
h - - - km/h..................................... 479
Á Change key batteries.................... 445 & inoperative High-voltage battery
è Charger cable connected.............. 455 charging incomplete............................... 451
 Index 531

! inoperative See Owner's Manual... 497 Û Malfunction.................................. 458 Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction
÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual... 498 ¢ Max. speed 20km/h..................... 493 Visit workshop....................................... 466
T inoperative See Owner's Manual... 499 ð Maximum speed exceeded............ 482 _ Rear le seat backrest not
G Inoperative................................... 501 ç O ................................................ 481 locked (Example).................................... 468
Á Key being initialised Please wait.... 446 ë O ................................................ 478 h Rectify tyre pressure..................... 505
Á Key not detected (red display ! Parking brake See Owner's ! Release parking brake................... 475
message)............................................... 446 Manual.................................................. 473 Á Replace key.................................. 445
Á Key not detected (white display ! Parking brake Switch on vehicle ô Reserve level Charge high-volt-
message)............................................... 446 to release.............................................. 476 age battery............................................ 459
: Le dipped beam (example).......... 447 È passive......................................... 480 6 Restraint system malfunction
6 Le windowbag malfunction d Performance severely limited........ 452 Consult workshop.................................. 442
Consult workshop (example).................. 443 & Pre-entry climate control via key ð Restricted during trailer opera-
: Malfunction See Owner's Man- available again a er starting vehicle....... 451 tion........................................................ 491
ual......................................................... 447 & Pre-entry climate control via key # Start the vehicle to charge the
J Malfunction See Owner's Man- inoperative High-voltage battery low....... 452 12 V battery........................................... 502
ual......................................................... 476 Ù Rear axle steering currently Ù Steering malfunction Drive
J Malfunction Stop vehicle............... 477 malfunctioning....................................... 465 carefully Visit workshop......................... 464
d Malfunction Visit workshop........... 460 Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction Ù Steering malfunction Increased
Û Malfunction Visit workshop........... 458 Stop immediately................................... 466 physical e ort See Owner's Manual....... 465
d Malfunction.................................. 459
532 Index

Ù Steering malfunction Stop d Vehicle is operational Switch o Active Emergency Stop Assist cur-
immediately See Owner's Manual........... 465 vehicle before exiting............................. 462 rently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 484
d Stop Switch o the vehicle............ 460 É Vehicle rising Please wait.............. 494 Active Emergency Stop Assist inoper-
# Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to h Warning tyre defect....................... 505 ative...................................................... 484
charge the 12 V battery......................... 503 h Wheel sensor(s) missing................ 504 Active Lane Change Assist currently
É STOP Vehicle level too low............ 493 AC charging inoperative Consult work- unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 485
# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man- shop...................................................... 456 Active Lane Change Assist inoperative... 485
ual......................................................... 502 Active Blind Spot Assist currently Active Lane Keeping Assist currently
ç suspended.................................... 480 unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 487 unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 488
: Switch o lights............................ 448 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative........ 487 Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 488
: Switch on headlamps.................... 448 Active bonnet malfunction See Own- Active Parking Assist and
á temporarily unavailable Camera er's Manual............................................ 467 PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own-
view restricted....................................... 490 Active Brake Assist Functions cur- er's Manual............................................ 495
¸ temporarily unavailable Sensors rently limited See Owner's Manual......... 499 Active Steering Assist currently
dirty....................................................... 489 Active Brake Assist Functions limited unavailable due to multiple emer-
+ Top up coolant See Owner’s See Owner's Manual.............................. 500 gency stops........................................... 483
Manual.................................................. 454 Active Distance Assist available again..... 482 Active Steering Assist currently
¥ Top up washer uid....................... 468 Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 483
u Towing not permitted See Own- unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 481 Active Steering Assist inoperative........... 483
er's Manual............................................ 453 Active Distance Assist inoperative.......... 481
 Index 533

Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently Auxiliary battery malfunction (white Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 479
unavailable see Owner's Manual............. 485 display message).................................... 472 Cruise control inoperative...................... 479
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable Cruise control o ................................... 479
See Owner's Manual.............................. 486 See Owner's Manual.............................. 486 DC charging inoperative Consult
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 487 workshop............................................... 456
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 449 Cannot start vehicle See Owner's DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited............ 449
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... 449 Manual.................................................. 501 Dipped-beam setting (le /right-side
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur- Change steering wheel/ seat position tra c) Manual adjustment only.............. 449
rently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 450 until 6 dots are visible on the upper Driver camera inoperative See Own-
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop- edge of the screen................................. 492 er's Manual............................................ 492
erative................................................... 450 Charging fault Please change charging Driver camera view currently restric-
Ambient light warning support inoper- method See Owner's Manual................. 456 ted See Owner's Manual........................ 491
ative...................................................... 468 Check brake pads See Owner's Man- Front passenger airbag disabled See
Anti-the alarm system Malfunction....... 468 ual......................................................... 477 Owner's Manual..................................... 443
Apply brake and start vehicle to shi Check dipped-beam setting (le / Front passenger airbag enabled See
out of P or N.......................................... 469 right-side tra c).................................... 449 Owner's Manual..................................... 444
Apply brake to deselect P position.......... 469 Consult workshop without changing Hazard warning lamp system Malfunc-
Apply brake to engage D or R................. 470 the transmission position....................... 472 tion........................................................ 450
Apply parking brake to park Visit Consult workshop without starting the Head-up display Brightness currently
workshop............................................... 470 vehicle again.......................................... 459 reduced See Owner's Manual................. 464
534 Index

Head-up display currently unavailable Not possible to unlock charging cable Reduced drive system performance
See Owner's Manual.............................. 463 See Owner's Manual.............................. 455 See Owner's Manual.............................. 456
Head-up display inoperative................... 463 Only select P when vehicle is station- Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 472
High-voltage battery malfunction. ary......................................................... 469 Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply
Consult workshop without starting the PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assis- parking brake to park............................. 470
vehicle again.......................................... 461 tant not available at rear when towing Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's
High-voltage battery malfunction. No a trailer.................................................. 494 door open Transmission not in P............. 470
start in approx. XXX km Consult work- PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own- Risk of vehicle rolling away N activa-
shop (red display message).................... 460 er's Manual............................................ 494 ted manually No automatic switch to P... 470
High-voltage battery malfunction. No Place the key in the marked space Snow chain mode Maximum speed
start in approx. XXX km Consult work- See Owner's Manual.............................. 447 exceeded............................................... 467
shop (yellow display message)............... 460 Please wait in READY status Warming Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h....... 482
Limited availability of Active Parking battery See Owner's Manual.................. 457 Speed Limit Assist currently unavaila-
Assist manoeuvring assistant See PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative ble See Owner's Manual........................ 482
Owner's Manual..................................... 494 See Owner's Manual.............................. 445 Speed Limit Assist inoperative................ 482
Limiter inoperative................................. 480 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's To switch o the vehicle, press the
N automatically activated Please Manual.................................................. 445 Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec-
engage transmission position again........ 471 Preparing drive system…........................ 459 onds or 3 times...................................... 453
N is selected Please select desired Reduce speed........................................ 506 Tra c Sign Assist currently unavaila-
transmission position............................. 471 ble See Owner's Manual........................ 486
 Index 535

Tra c Sign Assist inoperative................. 486 Power closing function............................. 96 Function/notes...................................... 313
Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 472 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 87 Notes on menus..................................... 315
Door control
control panel.........................................
panel 16 Operating.............................................. 314
Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila-
Door control
control panel (rear)
(rear)................................ 18 Driv
Dr iver
er display
display with
with driv
driver
er camera....................
camera 12
ble......................................................... 503
Drawbar
Dra wbar Driv
Dr iver's
er's display
Tyre press. monitor inoperative.............. 503 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 506
see Tow-bar system
Tyre press. monitor inoperative No Driv
Dr iver's
er's seat
Drink
Dr inkss holder
wheel sensors........................................ 504 see Seat
see Cup holder
Tyre(s) overheated.................................. 506 Driving
Dr iving abroad
abroad
Driv
Dr ivee Away
Away Assist.........................................
Assist 299
Vehicle not currently being charged Light adjustment (low beam).................. 154
Driv
Dr ivee position
Charging station fault............................. 455 Engaging................................................ 207 Driving
Dr iving safety
safety system
system
Wiper Malfunction.................................. 468 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 234
Driv
Dr ivee progr
program
am display..................................
display 204 Active Brake Assist................................. 260
Distance
Dist ance control
control Driv
Dr ivee progr
programs
ams Adaptive brake lights.............................. 239
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see DYNAMIC SELECT BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 234
DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC Driv
Dr ivee system
system Cameras................................................ 232
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Manual switch-o ................................... 191 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu-
Door Starting (emergency operation mode).... 194 tion)....................................................... 237
Additional door lock................................. 87 Driv
Dr iver
er camera ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... 236
Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 80 Activating/deactivating.......................... 338 ESP® trailer stabilisation........................ 236
Closing the convenience doors................. 90 Overview................................................ 337 Overview................................................ 233
Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 96 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 232
Driv
Dr iver
er display Responsibility......................................... 232
Opening (from inside)............................... 87
Displaying the service due date.............. 385
Opening the convenience doors............... 90
536 Index

Driving
Dr iving system
system Driving
Dr iving tips Operating.............................................. 204
see 360° Camera Acoustic presence indicator (sound Selects the drive program...................... 204
see Active Blind Spot Assist generator).............................................. 190
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Driving abroad (low beam light adjust- E
see Active Emergency Stop Assist ment)..................................................... 154 Easy entry
entr y feature
feature
see Active Lane Change Assist Electric mode......................................... 190 Function/notes...................................... 127
see Active Lane Keeping Assist General driving tips................................ 195 Setting................................................... 129
see Active Parking Assist Range maximisation............................... 202
see Active Speed Limit Assist Running-in notes.................................... 195 Easy exit
exit feature
feature
see Active Steering Assist Function/notes...................................... 127
Driving
Dr iving tips Setting................................................... 129
see AIRMATIC see Recuperation
see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro- EBD (Electronic
(Electronic Brak
Brakee for
force
ce Distr
Distribution)
ibution)
sleep detection Drowsiness
Drow siness detection
detection Function/notes...................................... 237
see Blind Spot Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro-
sleep detection ECO
EC O Assist
see Cruise control Activating/deactivating.......................... 202
see Driving safety system Dynamic handling controlcontrol system
system Function................................................ 200
see HOLD function see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
see Limiter ECO
EC O display
DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC SELECT Function................................................ 198
see Memory Parking Assist Calling up the fuel consumption indi-
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC cator...................................................... 205 Electric
Electr ic mode
see Remote Parking Assist Con guring drive program I.................... 204 Notes..................................................... 190
see Reversing camera Displaying vehicle data........................... 205 Electric
Electr ic parking
parking brake
brake
see Speed Limit Assist Drive program display............................ 204 Applying automatically........................... 229
see Tra c Sign Assist Drive programs...................................... 203 Applying/releasing manually.................. 230
Function................................................ 203 Emergency braking................................ 230
 Index 537

Releasing automatically.......................... 229 Emergency operation

Emergency operation mode ESP®
Electrical
Electr ical fuses Starting the vehicle................................ 194 Crosswind Assist.................................... 236
see Fuses Emergency
Emerg ency shut
shutoo Trailer stabilisation................................. 236
Electromagne
Electr omagnetictic compatibility
compatibility see High-voltage on-board electrical system ®
ESP (Electr
(Electronic
onic Stability
Stability Progr
Program)am)
Declaration of conformity......................... 28 Emergency
Emerg ency spare
spare wheel Activating/deactivating.......................... 237
Electronic
Electr onic Stability
Stability Progr
Programam Notes..................................................... 427 Function/notes...................................... 235
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency
Emerg ency star
startt (driv
(drivee syst
system)
em).................... 411 EU type approval
approval number.............................
number 432
Emergency
Emerg ency Energy
Ener gy ow display Exiting procedure
procedure
Assistance overview................................. 20 Displaying.............................................. 348 Playing back.......................................... 305
Fire extinguisher.................................... 396 Engine Exter
Exterior
ior lighting
First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 396 Engine number....................................... 432 Care...................................................... 392
Removing the warning triangle............... 395 Exter
Exterior
ior lighting
Engine electronics
electronics
Safety vest............................................. 395 see Lights
Notes..................................................... 429
Setting up the warning triangle............... 396
Engine number.............................................
number 432
Emergency
Emerg ency braking
braking...................................... 230 F
ERA-GL
ERA -GLON
ONASS
ASS testestt mode
Emergency
Emerg ency braking
braking Fatigue detection
detection
Starting/ending..................................... 376
see BAS (Brake Assist System) see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro-
ERM (Extended
(Extended Rang
Rangee Mode) sleep detection
Emergency
Emerg ency call
see Range maximisation
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Favour
Fav ourit
ites
es
Error
Err or message Adding................................................... 340
Emergency
Emerg ency key
see Display message
Inserting/removing.................................. 85 Fine particle
par ticle status
status display...........................
display 178
Locking/unlocking the doors................... 96 ESC (Electronic
(Electronic Stability
Stability Control)
Control)
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Fir
iree extinguisher
extinguisher.......................................... 396
Unlocking the tailgate............................ 102
538 Index

Firs
irst-aid
t-aid kit (so sided)
sided)................................. 396 Freq
equencies
uencies G
Flacon Mobile phone......................................... 430
Two-way radio........................................ 430 Garagee door opener
Garag
Inserting/removing................................ 182 Clearing the memory.............................. 228
Flat towing
towing Front
Fr ont airbag (driv
(driverer,, front
front passenger)
passenger).............. 51
Garag
Gar agee door openers
see Tow-bar system Front
Fr ont passenger
passenger seat Opening/closing the door...................... 228
Flat tyre Adjusting from the driver's seat.............. 116 Programming buttons............................. 226
MOExtended tyres................................. 397 Adjusting from the rear.......................... 116 Resolving problems................................ 228
Notes..................................................... 397 Front
Fr ont passenger
passenger seat Synchronising the rolling code................ 227
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 399 see Seat Genuine parts
par ts................................................ 23
Wheel change........................................ 422 Fuel consumption
consumption indicator
indicator Glovee compar
Glov compartment
tment
Floor mats
mats................................................... 152 Calling up.............................................. 205 Opening/closing.................................... 134
Fog light (enhanced).....................................
(enhanced) 159 Function seat GPS-based vehicle
vehicle level
level
Foil cover
covering
ing see Door control panel Setting................................................... 279
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 232 Function seat (rear)
(rear) Gross
Gr oss mass..................................................
mass 432
Fragr
Fr agrance
ance see Seat (rear)
see Fragrance system Fuses H
Fragr
Fr agrance
ance system
system Before replacing a fuse.......................... 411 Handbrake
Handbrake
Activating/deactivating.......................... 182 Fuse assignment diagram....................... 411 see Electric parking brake
Adjusting the fragrance intensity............ 182 Fuse box in the front passenger foot-
well........................................................ 412 Handling char
charact
acter
eris
istics
tics (unusual)................
(unusual) 413
Inserting/removing the acon................ 182
Setting................................................... 182 Fuse box in the rear passenger com- HANDS-FREE ACCESS
ACCESS................................. 100
partment............................................... 412 Haptic
Haptic accelerat
accelerator
or pedal..............................
pedal 202
Free
Fr ee so ware
ware................................................. 43 Fuse box on the dashboard.................... 412
Notes..................................................... 411 Hazardd war
Hazar warning
ning lights...................................
lights 157
 Index 539

Head res
restr
traint
aint High beam Notes on charging (charging station,
Activating/deactivating neck heating..... 120 Activating/deactivating.......................... 156 mode 3)................................................. 211
Attaching/removing the additional High beam Notes on charging (fast charging sta-
cushion (rear)........................................ 120 see Adaptive Highbeam Assist tion, mode 2)......................................... 212
Front (adjusting mechanically) (4-way).... 118 see Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Notes on charging (mains socket,
Front (luxury head restraint)................... 119 mode 2)................................................. 210
Rear (folding into position/folding High-pressur
High-pr essuree cleaner (care)
(care)........................ 389 Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... 211
back mechanically)................................ 121 High-volt
High-voltag
agee battery
battery Range.................................................... 437
Rear (setting) (standard)......................... 119 Charge level display............................... 223 Range maximisation............................... 202
Head-up display Charging at time of departure................ 224 Starting the charging process (alter-
Augmented reality.................................. 317 Charging cable control panel.................. 213 nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 215
Care...................................................... 393 Charging duration.................................. 437 Starting the charging process (direct
Function................................................ 315 Con guring weekly pro le...................... 224 current, mode 4).................................... 219
Operating.............................................. 318 Connection types................................... 437 Stowing the charging cable.................... 207
Operating the memory function.............. 130 Disconnect device................................. 191 Type....................................................... 437
Selecting (with augmented reality).......... 318 Ending the charging process (alternat- Voltage types......................................... 437
Switching on/o .................................... 318 ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 218 High-volt
High-v oltag
agee on-board
on-board electrical
electrical system
system
Ending the charging process (direct Charging cable control panel.................. 213
Headlampp ashing
Headlam ashing........................................ 156 current, mode 4).................................... 222 Disconnect device................................. 191
Headlamps
Headlam ps Energy ow display................................. 348 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 214
see Automatic driving lights Function/notes...................................... 404 Manual disconnection............................ 191
Heating General notes on charging..................... 207
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 214 Hill Star
Startt Assist............................................
Assist 238
see Climate control
Maximum charging current (mains HOLD function
Help call socket).................................................. 213 Function/notes...................................... 237
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Switching on/o .................................... 238
540 Index

Home screen
screen (central
(central display)
display) Individual driv
drivee progr
program
am Switch-o delay time.............................. 168
Overview................................................ 328 Con guring............................................ 204 Inter
Interior
ior prot
protection
ection
Selecting............................................... 204 Function................................................ 111
I Inspection Priming/deactivating............................. 112
i-Size child
child seat securing
securing system
system see ASSYST PLUS Inter
Interne
nett radio
radio
Fitting...................................................... 69 Instr
Ins trument
ument cluster
cluster see TuneIn
Seats suitable for attaching...................... 68 see Driver display Ionisation
Identi cation plate Intellig
Intelligent
ent Light System
System Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi-
Engine................................................... 432 Activating/deactivating.......................... 162 media system)....................................... 182
Vehicle.................................................. 432 Active headlamps................................... 158 iPhone®
Ignition key Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 162 see Smartphone integration
see Key Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 163
Assistance functions.............................. 159 ISOFIX child
child seat anchor
anchor
Immediatee pre-entr
Immediat pre-entryy climate
climate control
control............. 187 Seats suitable for attaching...................... 67
Bad weather light................................... 159
Immobiliser.................................................. 110
Immobiliser City lighting............................................ 159 ISOFIX child
child seat securing
securing system
system
Implied
Im plied warr
warranty
anty Cornering light....................................... 158 Fitting...................................................... 69
Vehicle..................................................... 39 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 159
Import
Im porter
er addresses
addresses Motorway mode..................................... 158 J
Wireless components............................... 34 Overview................................................ 157 Jack
Topographical compensation.................. 159 Declaration of conformity......................... 35
In-Car O ce
Features................................................ 368 Inter
Interior
ior lighting Storage location..................................... 421
Adjusting............................................... 166 Jump-st
Jum p-star
artt connection..................................
connection 404
Indicator
Indicat or lamp Ambient lighting..................................... 166
see Warning/indicator lamp Reading lamp......................................... 166
 Index 541

K Lane detection
detection (automatic)
(automatic) Cornering light....................................... 158
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Driving abroad (low beam light adjust-
Key ment)..................................................... 154
Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 84 Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Fog light (enhanced).............................. 159
Battery..................................................... 85 Hazard warning lights............................. 157
Deactivating a function............................ 84 Language Headlamp ashing................................. 156
Emergency key......................................... 85 Notes..................................................... 347 High beam............................................. 156
Energy consumption................................ 84 Setting................................................... 347 Intelligent Light System.......................... 157
Function overview.................................... 83 Level
Level control
control system
system Light switch........................................... 154
Key ring attachment................................. 85 see AIRMATIC Low beam.............................................. 154
Problem................................................... 86 Motorway mode..................................... 158
Unlocking setting..................................... 84 Light adjustment
adjustment
Low beam (driving abroad)..................... 154 Parking lights......................................... 154
KEYLESS-GO Rear fog light......................................... 154
Deactivating a function............................ 84 Light switch
Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 154
Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 88 Overview................................................ 154
Setting low beam................................... 165
Problem................................................... 90 Lighting Setting the exterior lighting switch-o
Unlocking setting..................................... 84 see Interior lighting delay time.............................................. 165
Knee airbag....................................................
airbag 51 see Lights Standing lights....................................... 154
Lights Switching the Intelligent Light System
L Active headlamps................................... 158 on/o ................................................... 162
Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 162 Switching the locator lighting on/o ...... 165
Lamp Turn signal indicator............................... 156
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 163
see Interior lighting
Automatic driving lights.......................... 155 Limiter
Limiter
Lampp (driv
Lam (driver
er display)
display) Bad weather light................................... 159 Activating............................................... 244
see Warning/indicator lamp City lighting............................................ 159 Buttons.................................................. 244
Combination switch............................... 156
542 Index

Calling up a speed................................. 244 Notes..................................................... 130 Lumbar support

Deactivating........................................... 244 Roof luggage rack.................................. 144 see Lumbar support (4-way)
Function................................................ 243 Tie-down eyes........................................ 143 Lumbar support
suppor t (4-way)
(4-way)............................... 117
Passive mode......................................... 243 Loading guidelines.......................................
guidelines 130
Permanent setting.................................. 245 M
Requirements........................................ 244 Loads
Selecting............................................... 244 Fixing..................................................... 130 Maintenance
Maintenance
Setting a speed...................................... 244 Locator
Locat or lighting see ASSYST PLUS
Storing a speed.............................. 244, 248 Activating/deactivating.......................... 165 Malfunction
Switching o /deactivating..................... 248 Locking/unloc
Locking/unlockingking Restraint system...................................... 45
Switching on/activating......................... 248 Additional door lock................................. 87 Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing assistance
assistance
System limits......................................... 243 Emergency key......................................... 96 Cross tra c warning.............................. 300
Limiting speed KEYLESS-GO............................................ 88 Drive Away Assist................................... 299
see Limiter Opening the tailgate................................. 97 Manoeuvring brake function................... 301
Limiting the
the opening angle (tailg (tailgatate)
e)............. 102 Switching the automatic locking fea- Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing assistant
assistant
ture on/o .............................................. 90 Activating/deactivating.......................... 302
Livee Tr
Liv Traa c Inf
Infor
ormation
mation Unlocking/opening the doors from
Switching the tra c information dis- the inside................................................. 87 Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing brak
brakee function.........................
function 301
play on................................................... 356 Map
Low
Low beam
Load compar
compartment
tment cover
cover Activating/deactivating.......................... 154 Displaying online map contents.............. 356
Extending/retracting.............................. 140 Light adjustment (driving abroad)........... 154 Displaying weather information.............. 356
Notes..................................................... 139 Setting................................................... 165 Moving................................................... 355
Removing/ tting.................................... 140 Selecting the map orientation................ 355
Lugg
uggage
age Setting the map scale............................ 355
Loading Securing................................................ 130
Bag hook............................................... 143
 Index 543

Massage progr
Massage programmes
ammes Calling up the Zero Layer........................ 325 Voice prompting..................................... 332
Overview................................................ 123 Con guring drive program I.................... 204 Media
Resetting the settings............................ 124 Coupling the steering wheel heater to Overview of the functions and symbols... 378
Selecting the front seats........................ 124 the seat heating..................................... 127
Driver camera........................................ 337 Medical aids...................................................
aids 38
Maximum design speed
see Limiter Home screen......................................... 328 Memoryy function
Memor
Notes..................................................... 321 Function................................................ 129
Maximum permissible
permissible gross gross vehicle
vehicle weight
weight... 432 Operating the touchscreen..................... 330 Head-up display..................................... 130
MBUX Inter
Interior
ior Assistant
Assistant Operating the Zero Layer........................ 325 Operating.............................................. 130
Anticipatory exit warning........................ 335 Overview................................................ 321 Outside mirrors...................................... 130
Automatic preselection of the outside Restoring (factory settings).................... 347 Seat....................................................... 130
mirror.................................................... 336 Setting collision detection (parked Steering wheel....................................... 130
Calling up favourites with the V pose...... 337 vehicle).......................................... 230, 231 Memoryy Par
Memor Parking
king Assist
Operating the function with the Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 253 Exiting a parking space.......................... 305
favourites pose...................................... 337 Setting the air distribution...................... 180 Function................................................ 302
Overview................................................ 333 Setting the fragrance system.................. 182 Parking.................................................. 304
Switching the reading light on/o Setting the rear climate control.............. 180 Recording.............................................. 303
(contactless).......................................... 335 Switching ionisation on/o .................... 182 Setting................................................... 305
Switching the search light on/o Zero Layer (function).............................. 322 System limits......................................... 302
(contactless).......................................... 335 Zero Layer (overview)............................. 323
Menus (driv
(driver
er display)
display)
MBUX multimedia systemsystem MBUX multimedia system
system Notes..................................................... 315
Activating/deactivating snow chain see Display (MBUX multimedia system)
mode..................................................... 414 Mercedes
Mer cedes me app
see MBUX Interior Assistant
Activating/deactivating the fragrance Information............................................ 367
MBUX Voice
Voice Assistant
Assistant Notes....................................................... 26
system................................................... 182 Function................................................ 331 on-demand feature................................... 26
544 Index

Mercedes
Mer cedes me calls Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test Multimedia system
system
Arranging a service appointment............ 364 mode..................................................... 376 Setting Memory Parking Assist............... 305
Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz serservice
vice centre
centre.................................................... 363 see Quali ed specialist workshop N
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Navig
vigation
ation
Centre a er automatic accident or Messagee (driv
Messag (driver
er display)
display)
see Display message Notes..................................................... 348
breakdown detection............................. 363 Overview................................................ 348
Consenting to data transfer.................... 364 Messagee memory.........................................
Messag memory 441 Switching on.......................................... 348
Information............................................ 363 Mirrors
Mirr ors
Making a call via the overhead control Navig
Na vigation
ation
see Outside mirrors see Destination entry
panel..................................................... 362
Mobile phone see Map
Transferred data..................................... 365
Authorising (Remote Parking Assist)....... 299 Navig
Na vigation
ation with
with Electric
Electric Intellig
Intelligence
ence
Mercedes
Mer cedes me connect Frequencies........................................... 430
Accident and Breakdown Management... 367 see Route
Notes on wireless charging.................... 149
Information............................................ 366 Transmission output (maximum)............. 430 Neutr
eutral
al
Transferred data..................................... 367 Wireless charging (front)........................ 150 Engaging................................................ 206
Mercedes-
Mer cedes-AMG
AMG vehicles
vehicles Wireless charging (rear)......................... 151 Nodding o
Notes..................................................... 190 Mobile phone see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro-
Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emerg
emergency ency call system
system see Smartphone integration sleep detection
Automatic emergency call...................... 373 see Telephone Noise
Information............................................ 371 Model type Wheels and tyres................................... 413
Information about data transfer...... 374, 376 see Vehicle identi cation plate Wheels/tyres......................................... 413
Manual emergency call.......................... 374
MOExtended
MOExt ended tyres
tyres........................................ 397
Overview................................................ 373
Self-diagnosis........................................ 376 Motorwa
Mot orwayy mode...........................................
mode 158
 Index 545

O Two-way radios...................................... 429 Outside mirrors

mirrors
on-demand feature
feature Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 172
Occupant safety
safety Automatic mirror folding function........... 173
see Airbag Activating................................................. 26
Notes....................................................... 26 Automatic preselection (MBUX Inte-
see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto rior Assistant)........................................ 336
see Automatic measures a er an accident Online services
ser vices Folding in/out........................................ 171
see Child seat Data storage............................................ 42 Operating the memory function.............. 130
see Pets in the vehicle Online services
ser vices Parking position..................................... 172
see Post-collision brake see In-Car O ce Setting................................................... 171
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
Open-source
Open-sour ce so ware
ware.................................... 43 Over
Overhead
head control
control panel
pant protection)
Opening the
the tailg
tailgat
atee using youryour foot
foot Overview.................................................. 14
see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory HANDS-FREE ACCESS........................... 100 Owner's Manual
occupant protection plus) Operating
Oper ating uids Vehicle equipment................................... 25
see Restraint system Brake uid............................................. 434 Owner's Manual (digital)
(digital)................................. 22
see Seat belt Coolant (engine).................................... 435
On-boardd diagnostics
On-boar diagnostics interf
interfaceace Notes..................................................... 434 P
see Diagnostics connection windscreen washer uid......................... 435 Paint (cleaning instr
instructions)
uctions)......................... 390
On-boardd electrical
On-boar electrical system
system batter
batteryy (12 V) Operating
Oper ating safety
safety Paint code...................................................
code 432
Charging................................................ 404 Declaration of conformity (electro-
magnetic compatibility)............................ 28 Panor
anorama
ama sliding sunroof
sunroof
Replacing............................................... 404 see Sliding sunroof
Starting assistance................................ 404 Declaration of conformity (jack)............... 35
Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit)...... 36 Par
arkk position
On-boardd electronics
On-boar electronics Declaration of conformity (wireless Engaging................................................ 206
Engine electronics................................. 429 vehicle components)................................ 28 Selecting automatically.......................... 206
Notes..................................................... 429 Information.............................................. 26
546 Index

Par
arking
king Par
artitioning
titioning net Pre-entryy climate
Pre-entr climate control
control at departure
depar ture
see Electric parking brake Attaching/removing............................... 141 time
Par
arking
king aid PASSEN
ASSENGER GER AIR BAGBAG status
status display Function................................................ 185
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto Setting................................................... 186
Par
arking
king Assist
Assist PPARK
ARKTR TRONIC
ONIC Pedes
edestr trian
ian protection
protection Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control for for departure
depar ture
Activating............................................... 289 see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) time
Adjusting warning tones......................... 290 Activating/deactivating.......................... 186
Per
erfume
fume
Deactivating........................................... 289 see Fragrance system Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control when the the vehicle
vehicle
Function................................................ 286 is unlocked
unlocked
System limitations.................................. 286 Per
erfume
fume vial Activating/deactivating.......................... 184
see Fragrance system Function................................................ 184
Par
arking
king assistance
assistance systems
systems
see Active Parking Assist Per
ermissible
missible axle load....................................
load 432 Setting................................................... 184
see Memory Parking Assist Per
ermissible
missible towing
towing methods
methods......................... 405 AFE® (anticipat
PRE-SAFE
PRE-S (anticipator oryy occupant protection)
protection)
Par
arking
king brake
brake Pets
Pe ts in the
the vehicle
vehicle.......................................... 82 Function.................................................. 58
see Electric parking brake Plastic
Plas tic trim
trim (Care)
(Care)........................................ 393 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 58
Par
arking
king lights...............................................
lights 154 Reversing measures................................. 58
Pos
ost-collision
t-collision br
brake
ake........................................ 59
Par
arking
king position PRE-S AFE® Im
PRE-SAFE Impulse
pulse Side
Power
Pow er closing function Activation................................................ 45
Outside mirrors...................................... 172 Door........................................................ 96
Storing the position of the passenger Function.................................................. 59
Power
Pow er supply
outside mirror using reverse gear........... 173 PRE-S AFE® PL
PRE-SAFE PLUS
US (anticipator
(anticipatoryy occupant
Switching on (start/stop button)............ 192
Par
arking
king procedure
procedure protection
prot ection plus)
Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control (immediate)
(immediate)........... 187 Function.................................................. 59
Playing back.......................................... 304
Reversing measures................................. 58
 Index 547

Preventativ
Prevent ativee occupant protection
protection system
system R Rear climate
climate control
control
see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 180
pant protection) Radar and ultrasonic
ultrasonic sensors
Damage................................................. 232 Rear door (child
(child safety
safety lock)
lock)........................... 80
see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Rear fog
fog light
occupant protection plus) Radio
Overview of the functions and symbols... 382 Switching on/o .................................... 155
Proo le
Pr Rear seat
Notes..................................................... 338 Rain closing function
Side windows......................................... 104 Seat....................................................... 117
Progr
Pr ogramme
amme Rear seat
see DYNAMIC SELECT Rain-closing feature
feature
Sliding sunroof....................................... 108 see Seat
Protection
Prot ection agains
againstt collision Rear seat belt
see Drive Away Assist Range
Notes..................................................... 313 Status display.......................................... 50
see Manoeuvring brake function
Rang
angee maximisation Rear seat belt status
status display...........................
display 50
Protection
Prot ection of the
the envir
environment
onment
Notes....................................................... 23 Activating/deactivating.......................... 203 Rear window
window heater
heater...................................... 175
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles............... 23 Function................................................ 202 Rear window
window heater
heater (THERMOTR
(THERMOTRONIC) ONIC)......... 176
REACH
REAC H regulation
regulation........................................... 38 Rear
ear-vie
-view
w mirror
mirror
Q Reading lamp Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 172
QR code see Interior lighting Rear
ear-vie
-view
w mirror
mirror
Rescue card............................................. 39 Reading light see Outside mirrors
Quali ed specialis
specialistt work
workshop
shop......................... 37 Switching on/o (contactless)............... 335 Recuper
ecuperation
ation
Real wood
wood (Care)
(Care).......................................... 393 Function................................................ 198
Rear axle steer
steering
ing........................................ 197 Setting................................................... 199
548 Index

Recy
ecycling
cling Warning lamp........................................... 45 Securing................................................ 144
see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Rever
erse
se gear
gear Route
Regis
egistr
tration
ation Engaging................................................ 206 Activating a commuter route.................. 351
Vehicle..................................................... 37 Rever
Rev ersing
sing camera Selecting a type..................................... 351
Regulat
egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation Activating using GPS (360° Camera)...... 286 Selecting an alternative route................. 351
Indonesia............................................... 431 Care...................................................... 392 Switching on Electric Intelligence........... 351
Small components................................. 431 Function................................................ 279 Rout
outee guidance with
with augmented
augmented reality reality
Remot
emotee Par
Parking
king Assist Managing activation points (360° Activating............................................... 351
Authorising a mobile phone.................... 299 Camera)................................................ 286 Activating/deactivating the tra c
Function................................................ 295 Opening the camera cover (360° light view............................................... 270
Operating.............................................. 296 Camera)................................................ 286 Displaying street names and house
System limitations.................................. 295 Setting the 360° Camera....................... 286 numbers................................................ 351
Switching automatic operation on/o Rout
oute-based
e-based speed adaptation
adaptation
Rescue card...................................................
card 39 (360-degree Camera)............................. 286 Function................................................ 251
Rese
esett function (MBUX multimedia system) system).... 347 Rims (care)
(care).................................................. 392 Setting................................................... 253
Rest
estor
oring
ing (fact
(factor
oryy settings)
settings) Roll away
away protection
protection Run- at char
haract
acter
eristics
istics
see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system) see HOLD function MOExtended tyres................................. 397
Res
estr
traint
aint system
system Roller sunblind Running-in notes
notes.......................................... 195
Basic instructions for children.................. 60 Sliding sunroof....................................... 106
Function in an accident............................ 45 S
Functionality............................................ 45 Roof lining (care)
(care).......................................... 393
Limited protection.................................... 44 Roof load.....................................................
load 437 Safety systems
Safety systems
Malfunction............................................. 45 see Driving safety system
Roof luggag
luggagee rack
rack
Protection................................................ 44 Loading.................................................. 144 Safety
Safety vest
vest................................................... 395
Self-test................................................... 45
 Index 549

Search light
Search Belt airbag............................................... 48 Self-test
Self-test
Switching on/o (contactless)............... 335 Care...................................................... 393 Automatic front passenger airbag shut
Seat Fastening................................................. 49 o ............................................................ 55
4-way lumbar support............................ 117 Protection................................................ 46 Sensorss (care)
Sensor (care)............................................. 392
adjusting (electrically)............................ 113 Rear seat belt status display..................... 50
Reduced protection.................................. 47 Service
Ser vice
Adjusting the front passenger seat see ASSYST PLUS
from the rear......................................... 116 Releasing................................................. 50
Automatic adjustment............................ 122 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 50 Service
Ser vice centre
Con guring settings............................... 122 Warning lamp........................................... 50 see Quali ed specialist workshop
Correct driver's seat position................. 113 Seat belt adjustment
adjustment Service
Ser vice interv
intervalal display
Folding back the backrest (rear)............. 138 Activating/deactivating............................ 50 see ASSYST PLUS
Folding the backrest forwards (rear)....... 135 Function.................................................. 50 Setting
Se tting a speed
Locking the backrest (rear).................... 139 Seat belt tensioners
tensioners see Cruise control
Massage programme overview............... 123 Activation................................................ 45 Setting
Se tting the
the map scale
Operating the memory function.............. 130
Seat belt war
warning
ning see Map
Rear (adjusting electrically).................... 117
Resetting the settings............................ 124 see Seat belt Side airbag.....................................................
airbag 51
Setting options......................................... 16 Seat cover
cover (Care)
(Care)......................................... 393 Side windows
Workout programme overview................ 123 Seat heating Automatic function................................. 104
Seat (rear)
(rear) Activating/deactivating.................... 18, 124 Child safety lock in the rear...................... 81
Setting options......................................... 18 Seat ventilation
ventilation Closing using the key............................. 105
Activating/deactivating............................ 18 Convenience closing.............................. 105
Seat belt
Switching on/o .................................... 125 Convenience opening............................. 104
Activating/deactivating seat belt
Opening with the key.............................. 104
adjustment.............................................. 50 Selector
Selector lever
lever Opening/closing.................................... 102
Adjusting the height................................. 49 see DIRECT SELECT lever
550 Index

Problem................................................. 105 Sound Star

arting
ting
Rain closing function.............................. 104 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 58 see Vehicle
Sliding sunroof
sunroof Sound gener
generatator
or Star
St arting
ting assistance
assistance
Automatic functions............................... 108 Acoustic presence indicator................... 190 see Jump-start connection
Closing.................................................. 106 Sound menu Star
St arting-o
ting-o aid
Closing using the key............................. 105 Functions overview................................ 384 see Hill Start Assist
Opening................................................. 106
Opening with the key.............................. 104 Sparee wheel
Spar Steer
Steering
ing
Problem................................................. 109 see Emergency spare wheel Rear axle steering.................................. 197
Rain-closing feature............................... 108 Specialistt work
Specialis workshop
shop Steer
Steering
ing wheel
Smartphone
Smar tphone see Quali ed specialist workshop Adjusting (electrically)............................ 126
see Smartphone integration Speci c absorp
absorption
tion rate
rate................................. 28 Care...................................................... 393
see Telephone Operating the memory function.............. 130
Speed Limit Assist
Smartphone
Smar tphone integr
integration
ation Function/notes...................................... 264 Steer
Steering
ing wheel heater
heater
Overview................................................ 370 Setting................................................... 266 Coupling to seat heating........................ 127
Snow
Sno w chain
chain mode System limitations.................................. 264 Stowag
Stow agee areas
areas
Activating/deactivating.......................... 414 Speed limit for
for winter
winter tyres
tyres see Loading
Setting................................................... 245 see Stowage space
Snow
Sno w chains
chains................................................ 413
Standing
St anding lights.............................................
lights 154 Stowag
Stow agee compar
compartments
tments
Sockett (12 V)
Socke see Loading
Front passenger footwell........................ 148 Star
St art/st
t/stop
op button
button see Stowage space
So ware
ware update Parking the vehicle................................. 225
Starting the vehicle................................ 194 Stowag
Stow agee space
System updates..................................... 343 Armrest................................................. 133
Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. 192
Centre console...................................... 133
 Index 551

Door...................................................... 133 Reset function (MBUX multimedia sys- Regulatory radio identi cation (Indo-
Front centre console.............................. 133 tem)....................................................... 347 nesia).................................................... 431
Glove compartment............................... 133 System
System settings
settings Regulatory radio identi cation of
Str
tree
eett names and house numbers see Language small components.................................. 431
Displaying.............................................. 351 Tongue weight........................................ 439
T Towing capacity (trailer operation).......... 439
Surround
Surr ound View
View
see 360° Camera Tailg
ailgate
ate Telephone
Closing.................................................... 98 Authorising a mobile phone (Remote
Suspension Parking Assist)....................................... 299
Setting the suspension level (AIR- HANDS-FREE ACCESS........................... 100
Limiting the opening angle..................... 102 Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... 361
MATIC)................................................... 277 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure
Opening................................................... 97
Suspension Opening dimensions.............................. 436 Simple Pairing)....................................... 361
see AIRMATIC Unlocking (emergency key).................... 102 Functions in the telephone menu............ 362
Suspension levellevel (AIRMATIC)
(AIRMATIC) Notes..................................................... 359
Tak
ake-bac
e-backk of end-of-life
end-of-life vehicles
vehicles Notes on wireless charging (mobile
Setting................................................... 277 Protection of the environment.................. 23 phone)................................................... 149
SVHC (substances
(substances of ver veryy high concern)
concern)........ 38 Tec
echnical
hnical data Operating modes................................... 361
Switch-o
Switc h-o dela
delayy time Axle load (trailer operation).................... 440 Telephone menu overview...................... 361
Exterior.................................................. 165 Component-speci c information............ 431 Wireless charging (mobile phone in
Interior................................................... 168 Fastening points (trailer hitch)................ 439 the rear)........................................... 18, 151
Synchr
Sync hronisation
onisation function Information............................................ 429 Wireless charging (mobile phone,
Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch)........ 439 front)..................................................... 150
media system)....................................... 181 Notes (trailer hitch)................................ 438 Telephon
elephonyy operating
operating modes
System
Syst em settings
settings Overhang dimension (trailer hitch).......... 439 Bluetooth® Telephony............................. 361
Overview of the system settings menu.... 343 Tem
emper
perature
ature................................................ 175
552 Index

Tem
emper
peratur
aturee (THERMOTR
(THERMOTRONIC) ONIC).................... 176 Tow -awa
-awayy protection
protection Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 308
Through-loading
Thr ough-loading feature
feature Function................................................ 111 Fastening points.................................... 439
see Seat Priming/deactivating............................. 111 Folding the ball neck out/in................... 306
Tow-bar
Tow -bar system
system............................................ 312 General notes........................................ 438
Tie-do
ie-down
wn eyes
eyes.............................................. 143 Mounting dimensions............................. 439
TIREFIT kit Tow-st
Tow -star
arting
ting................................................. 411 Notes..................................................... 305
Declaration of conformity......................... 36 Towing
To wing away.................................................
away 405 Overhang dimension.............................. 439
Storage location..................................... 398 Towing
To wing eye Socket................................................... 308
Using..................................................... 399 Fitting.................................................... 410 Tongue weight........................................ 439
To switch
switch on thethe ignition Storage location..................................... 410 Towing capacity..................................... 439
see Vehicle Towing
To wing methods
methods........................................... 405 Trailer operation
operation
Toll system
system Active Blind Spot Assist.......................... 272
Traa c inf
Tr infor
ormation
mation
Windscreen............................................ 174 Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 274
Switching on the display......................... 356
Bicycle rack........................................... 310
Tongue weight
weight.............................................. 439 Traa c light view
Tr Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 308
Tool Activating/deactivating.......................... 270 Folding the ball neck out/in................... 306
see Vehicle tool kit Information............................................ 270 Notes..................................................... 305
Top Tether
Tether...................................................... 71 Traa c Sign Assist
Tr Socket................................................... 308
Touc
ouchh Control
Control Function/notes...................................... 266 Trailer
Tr ailer stabilisation
stabilisation
Driver display......................................... 314 Setting................................................... 269 Function/notes...................................... 236
Operating.............................................. 330 System limits......................................... 266
Transmission
Tr ansmission
Touc
ouch-sensitiv
h-sensitivee controls
controls................................. 25 Trailer
Tr ailer hitch DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 205
Axle load................................................ 440 Drive programs...................................... 203
Touc
ouchscr
hscreen
een Bicycle rack........................................... 310
Operating.............................................. 330 DYNAMIC SELECT button....................... 203
Care...................................................... 392 Engaging drive position.......................... 207
 Index 553

Engaging neutral.................................... 206 Tyr

yree pressure
pressure Tyr
yres
es
Engaging park position........................... 206 Checking (tyre pressure monitoring Checking............................................... 413
Engaging reverse gear............................ 206 system).................................................. 417 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pres-
Transmission position display................. 205 Notes..................................................... 414 sure monitoring system)......................... 417
Transmission positions........................... 205 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor- Fitting.................................................... 425
Transmission position display.......................
display 205 ing system............................................. 417 Flat tyre................................................. 397
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 399 Interchanging......................................... 421
Transpor
Tr ansporting
ting Tyre pressure monitoring system MOExtended tyres................................. 397
Vehicle.................................................. 407 (function)............................................... 416 Noise..................................................... 413
Trim
Tr im element (Care)
(Care)...................................... 393 Tyre pressure table................................. 415 Notes on tting...................................... 418
TuneIn Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring ing system
system Removing............................................... 425
Calling up.............................................. 383 Checking the tyre pressures................... 417 Replacing....................................... 418, 422
Checking the tyre temperature............... 417 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor-
Tur
urnn signal indicator
indicator
Function................................................ 416 ing system............................................. 417
Activating/deactivating.......................... 156
Restarting.............................................. 417 Selection............................................... 418
TV Snow chains.......................................... 413
Information............................................ 381 Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree table
table....................................... 415 Storing................................................... 421
Two-wa
Tw o-wayy radios
radios Tyr
yree tem
temper
perature
ature TIREFIT kit.............................................. 399
Frequencies........................................... 430 Checking (tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 414
Notes on installation.............................. 429 system).................................................. 417 Tyre pressure monitoring system
Transmission output (maximum)............. 430 Tyre pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 416
(function)............................................... 416 Tyre pressure table................................. 415
Type approv
approvalal number (EU)...........................
(EU) 432
Tyr
yree tread
tread.................................................... 413 Unusual handling characteristics............ 413
Tyr
yree in ation com
compr pressor
essor
see TIREFIT kit Tyr
yre-c
e-chang
hangee tool
tool kit
Overview................................................ 421
554 Index

U Diagnostics connection............................ 36 Vehicle data

Equipment............................................... 25 Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 205
Unloc
nlocking
king Implied warranty...................................... 39 Roof load............................................... 437
see Locking/unlocking Locking (automatically)............................ 90 Vehicle height........................................ 436
Updat
pdates
es Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 96 Vehicle length........................................ 436
Important system updates...................... 343 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 88 Vehicle width......................................... 436
USB port Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 88 Wheelbase............................................. 436
Front stowage compartment.................. 133 Lowering................................................ 426 Vehicle dimensions......................................
dimensions 436
Rear....................................................... 149 Medical aids............................................ 38
QR code rescue card............................... 39 Vehicle identi cation number
User pr
proo les see VIN
Quali ed specialist workshop................... 37
Adding a user......................................... 340 Vehicle identi cation plate
Raising................................................... 423
Selecting user options............................ 340 EU type approval number....................... 432
REACH regulation.................................... 38
Registration............................................. 37 Maximum gross vehicle weight............... 432
V Starting (emergency operation mode).... 194 Paint code............................................. 432
Vale
alett service
ser vice mode Starting (start/stop button)................... 194 Permissible axle load.............................. 432
Activating/deactivating.......................... 239 SVHC (substances of very high concern).. 38 VIN........................................................ 432
Function................................................ 239 Switching o (start/stop button)............ 225 Vehicle key
Vehicle Switching on (start/stop button)............ 192 see Key
Additional door lock................................. 87 Towing................................................... 312
Vehicle maintenance
maintenance
Collision detection (parked vehicle) Ventilating (convenience opening).......... 104
see ASSYST PLUS
...................................................... 230, 231 Vehicle battery
battery
Correct use.............................................. 38 Vehicle sensors
see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)
Data acquisition....................................... 39 Information............................................ 232
Vehicle camera
Data storage............................................ 39 Vehicle socket
Information............................................ 232
Care...................................................... 392
 Index 555

Indicator lamps...................................... 214 War

arning
ning triangle
triangle Ù Power steering warning lamp
Vehicle tool
tool kit Removing............................................... 395 (yellow).................................................. 511
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 398 Setting up.............................................. 396
Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp
Towing eye............................................. 410 War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator or lamp
! ABS warning lamp......................... 517 (red)...................................................... 512
Ventilating
Convenience opening............................. 104 Ó Active Brake Assist warning Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp
Ventilation lamp.............................................. 515, 516 (yellow).................................................. 511
see Climate control J Brake system warning lamp (red)... 514 _ Reduced warning lamp power....... 509
Vents J Brake system warning lamp (yel- 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... 508
see Air vents ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... 508
low)....................................................... 513
VIN ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... 509
Identi cation plate................................. 432 ! Electric parking brake indicator
Seat....................................................... 432 lamp (red).............................................. 513 ä Suspension warning lamp (red)..... 516
Windscreen............................................ 432 # Electrical fault warning lamp......... 510 ä Suspension warning lamp (yel-
Vision å ESP® OFF warning lamp................ 518 low)....................................................... 516
Demisting windows................................ 181 Ú System error warning lamp........... 509
Windscreen heater................................. 183 ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes........... 518
! The electric parking brake (yel-
÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up......... 518
W low) indicator lamp................................. 513
H Mercedes-Benz emergency call
War
arning
ning lamp ï Trailer tow hitch warning lamp....... 510
system warning lamp............................. 519
see Warning/indicator lamp h Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
Ù Power steering warning lamp
War
arning
ning system
system tem warning lamp ashes....................... 520
see ATA (anti-the alarm system) (red)...................................................... 511
556 Index

h Tyre pressure monitoring sys- Wheels Wi-Fi

tem warning lamp lights up.................... 520 Care...................................................... 392 Con guring............................................ 345
Checking............................................... 413 Windo
indoww airbag...............................................
airbag 51
L Warning lamp for distance Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pres-
warning function.................................... 515 sure monitoring system)......................... 417 Windo
indoww li er
Fitting.................................................... 425 see Side windows
Overview................................................ 506
Flat tyre................................................. 397 Windows
PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 55 Care...................................................... 392
Interchanging......................................... 421
Warr
arranty
anty........................................................ 39 MOExtended tyres................................. 397 Windows
Washing byby hand (care)
(care)................................ 390 Noise..................................................... 413 see Side windows
Notes on tting...................................... 418
Wat
ater
er tank
tank Windscr
indscreen
een
Removing............................................... 425
see Air-water duct Demisting.............................................. 175
Replacing....................................... 418, 422
Weat
eather
her infor
information
mation..................................... 356 Demisting (THERMOTRONIC).................. 176
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor-
Infrared re ective................................... 174
Web browsers
browsers ing system............................................. 417
Radio waves........................................... 174
Overview................................................ 369 Selection............................................... 418
Replacing the wiper blades..................... 169
Wheel change
change Snow chains.......................................... 413
Storing................................................... 421 Windscr
indscreen
een
Fitting a new wheel................................ 425 see Windscreen
Lowering the vehicle.............................. 426 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 399
Preparation............................................ 422 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 414 Windscr
indscreen
een heater
heater....................................... 183
Raising the vehicle................................. 423 Tyre pressure monitoring system Windscr
indscreen
een heater
heater
Removing a wheel.................................. 425 (function)............................................... 416 see Windscreen heater
Tyre pressure table................................. 415
Wheel change
change Unusual handling characteristics............ 413 windscreen
windscr een washer
washer uid
see Emergency spare wheel Notes..................................................... 435
Wheel rotation
rotation............................................. 421
 Index 557

Windscr
indscreeneen washer
washer system
system Work
orkout
out progr
program
am
Topping up............................................. 388 Overview................................................ 123
Windscr
indscreeneen wipers Work
orkshop
shop
Activating/deactivating.......................... 168 see Quali ed specialist workshop
Replacing the wiper blades..................... 169
Wint
interer operation
operation Z
Activating/deactivating snow chain Zero Layer
Zero Layer (central
(central display)
display)
mode..................................................... 414 Calling up.............................................. 325
Snow chains.......................................... 413 Function................................................ 322
Wint
interer tyres
tyres Operating.............................................. 325
Setting the permanent speed limit.......... 245 Overview................................................ 323
Wiper blades
Care...................................................... 392
Replacing (windscreen).......................... 169
Wir
ireless
eless char
charging
ging
Function/notes...................................... 149
Mobile phone (rear)................................ 151
Mobile phone, front................................ 150
Wir
ireless
eless components
components
Importer addresses.................................. 34
Wir
ireless
eless vehicle
vehicle components
components
Declaration of conformity......................... 28
Speci c absorption rate........................... 28